3860 Tennyson DD Project Manual

Design Development
Project Manual
3860 Tennyson
Apartments
Craine Architecture
Architect ure
OCTOBER 02, 2015
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3860 Tennyson Apartments

CA 15-001
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 3132
INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO CONTRACTORS

GEOTECHNICAL DATA
DIVISION 01
01 2500
01 2600
01 2900
01 3100
01 3200
01 3300
01 4000
01 5000
01 6000
01 7300
01 7419
01 7700
01 7823
01 7839
01 7900
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
EXECUTION
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
DIVISION 02
EXISTING CONDITIONS (NOT USED)
DIVISION 03
03 3000
03 5413
CONCRETE
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
DIVISION 04
04 2000
MASONRY
UNIT MASONRY
DIVISION 05
05 1200
05 5000
05 5100
METALS
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
METAL FABRICATIONS
METAL STAIRS
DIVISION 06
06 1000
06 1600
06 1753
06 4023
WOOD AND PLASTICS

ROUGH CARPENTRY
SHEATHING
SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
TABLE OF CONTENTS - 1

CA 15-001
DIVISION 07
07 1326
07 1800
07 2100
07 2500
07 4213
07 5423
07 6200
07 8100
07 8413
07 8446
07 9200
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
TRAFFIC COATINGS
THERMAL INSULATION
WEATHER BARRIERS
METAL WALL PANELS
TPO ROOFING SYSTEM
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08
08 1113
08 1400
08 3113
08 3213
08 3323
08 4113
08 5113
08 5413
08 7100
08 8000
08 8300
DOORS AND WINDOWS

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
SLIDING ALUMINUM-FRAMED GLASS DOORS
OVERHEAD RAPID COILING DOORS
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
FIBERGLASS WINDOWS AND DOORS
DOOR HARDWARE
GLAZING
MIRRORS
DIVISION 09
09 2116
09 2216
09 2900
09 3000
09 5113
09 6513
09 6519
09 6813
09 6816
09 7733
09 9113
09 9123
FINISHES
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
GYPSUM BOARD
TILING
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
TILE CARPETING
SHEET CARPETING
FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED POLYESTER PANELS
EXTERIOR PAINTING
INTERIOR PAINTING
DIVISION 10
10 1400
10 1453
10 2213
10 2613
10 2800
10 3100
10 4410
10 5523
SPECIALTIES
SIGNAGE
TRAFFIC SIGNAGE
WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
CORNER GUARDS
WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
MAIL BOXES
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
DIVISION 11
11 3100
EQUIPMENT
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
DIVISION 12
12 2113
12 2116
12 2413
12 4813
FURNISHINGS
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
DIVISION 13
SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)
DIVISION 14
14 2126
14 9182
CONVEYING SYSTEMS
MACHINE ROOMLESS ELEVATORS
TRASH CHUTES
DIVISION 21
21 0000
FIRE SUPPRESSION
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
DIVISION 22
22 0500
22 0513
22 0519
22 0523
22 0529
22 0553
22 0700
22 1116
22 1119
22 1316
22 1319
22 1423
22 3400
22 4000
22 4700
PLUMBING
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PLUMBING INSULATION
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
FUEL FIRED WATER HEATERS
PLUMBING FIXTURES
DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLER
DIVISION 23
23 0130
23 0513
23 0529
23 0548
23 0553
23 0593
23 0700
23 1123
23 2300
23 3113
23 3300
23 3423
23 3713
23 8126
23 8219
23 8239
HVAC
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
HVAC INSULATION
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
REFRIGERANT PIPING
METAL DUCTS
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
FAN COIL UNITS
UNIT HEATERS

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
DIVISION 26
26 0500
26 0519
26 0526
26 0529
26 0533
26 0553
26 2300
26 2416
26 2726
26 2813
26 2816
26 5100
26 5600
ELECTRICAL
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
PANELBOARDS
WIRING DEVICES
FUSES
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
INTERIOR LIGHTING
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
DIVISION 27
COMMUNICATIONS (NOT USED)
DIVISION 28
ELECTRONIC SECURITY AND SAFETY (NOT USED)
DIVISION 31
EARTHWORK (NOT USED)
DIVISION 32
EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS (NOT USED)
DIVISION 33
UTILITIES (NOT USED)
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 00 3132 - GEOTECHNICAL DATA
1.1
ENGINEER'S REPORT
A.
The Project Geotechnical Report, entitled "Report of Geotechnical Engineering Evaluation,

Proposed Tennyson Apartments, 3860 and 3868 Tennyson Street, Denver, Colorado," and
dated April 20, 2015, follows this page.
END OF SECTION 00 3132
GEOTECHNICAL DATA
00 3132 - 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................... 1
2.0 PROJECT INFORMATION ......................................................................................... 1
3.0 SUBSURFACE INFORMATION ................................................................................. 1
3.1 SITE GEOLOGY AND GEOLOGIC HAZARDS ................................................................... 2
3. 2 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS ........................................................................................ 2
3.2.1 Subsurface Profile ............................................................................................. 2
3.2.2 Groundwater Conditions .................................................................................... 3
3.2.3 Swell Potential ................................................................................................... 3
3.2.4 Laboratory Testing............................................................................................. 4
4.0 GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION ............................................................................... 4
5.0 SITE GRADING RECOMMENDATIONS .................................................................... 5
5.1 ENGINEERED FILL ...................................................................................................... 6
Imported Structural Fill ............................................................................................... 6
5.2 GENERAL FILL PLACEMENT AND TESTING ................................................................... 6
6.0 GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS ................................................................. 7
6.1 SHALLOW FOOTING FOUNDATIONS ............................................................................. 7
6.2 SUBTERRANEAN RETAINING WALLS ............................................................................ 8
6.4 SEISMIC PARAMETERS ............................................................................................... 9
6.5 SLABS-ON-GRADE ................................................................................................... 10
7.0 LIMITATIONS ........................................................................................................... 11
ATTACHMENTS
Site Vicinity Maps (Figures 1a and 1b)
Boring Location Maps (Figures 2a and 2b)
Boring Logs (Figures 3 to 7)
Key to Symbols
Profile
Appendix A Laboratory Test Results
Proposed Tennyson Apartments

3860 and 3868 Tennyson Street
Denver, Colorado
April 20, 2015

PSI Project No. 0532964
Page 1 of 11
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Professional Service Industries, Inc. (PSI) has conducted a geotechnical engineering
evaluation for the proposed Tennyson Apartments in Denver, Colorado. The purpose of
our study was to evaluate the subsurface conditions at the subject site and to provide
geotechnical recommendations for site preparation and input to foundation design for the
proposed apartment complex. Our services on this project were performed in general
accordance with PSI Proposal Number 147245, dated March 17, 2015 and authorized
by Mr. James Davis with RPDG Tennyson Street, LLC on March 27, 2015.
The report, which follows, presents a brief review of PSIs understanding of the project, a
discussion of the site and subsurface conditions, and geotechnical conclusions and
recommendations.
2.0 PROJECT INFORMATION

PSIs project understanding is based on the Concept Package dated February 20, 2015
by Craine Architecture. Based on this information, PSI understands that RPDG is
planning the construction of a new, 50,614 gross square feet apartment complex at 3860
and 3868 Tennyson Street in Denver, Colorado. The complex will consist of a new 5story complex, with one-story below grade. Parking is planned for the ground and first
levels. It is anticipated that the building will consist of wood framing systems above the
2nd Level and have a masonry shear wall. Basement, ground, and 1st levels will be
concrete.
The site is located at 39 46 13.40 North Latitude and 105 2 37.40 West Longitude,
at an approximate elevation between EL 5420 and EL 5423 feet above the mean sea
level (AMSL). The site is currently occupied by 2 structures and covered with asphalt.
The existing structures will be removed before construction.
Detailed structural loading information was not provided at the time of this report;
therefore, PSI has based our evaluations on a maximum column loads of 500 kips, a
wall load not to exceed 4 kips per linear foot, and slab loads bearing on grade not to
exceed 150 pounds per square foot.
Descriptions of the site are based upon observations made during our field exploration
program. The geotechnical recommendations presented in this report are based upon
the available project information and the subsurface materials described in this report. If
any of the noted information is incorrect, please inform us so that we may amend the
recommendations presented in this report, if needed.
The scope of services did not include an environmental assessment for determining the
presence or absence of wetlands, or hazardous or toxic materials in the soil, bedrock,
surface water, groundwater, or air, on, or below, or around this site. Any statement in
this report or in the boring logs regarding odors, colors, and unusual or suspicious items
or conditions are strictly for informational purposes. Prior to further development of this
site, an environmental assessment is advisable.
3.0 SUBSURFACE INFORMATION

The following sections provide information relating to subsurface conditions encountered
at the boring locations and published geologic information in the general vicinity of the

Denver, Colorado
April 20, 2015

Page 2 of 11
project site. The geology section is based upon the Geological Map of the Greater
Denver Area, Front Range Urban Corridor, Colorado by Donald E. Trimble and Michael
N. Machette (1979) and information relating to subsurface conditions within the property
gathered from our current field study.
3.1 Site Geology and Geologic Hazards

Based on the referenced map by Trimble and Machette (1979), the majority of the site is
mapped as being underlain by Loess (Upper Pleistocene, Ql) which is described as Silt
with lesser amounts of clay and sand deposited by wind, generally downwind of areas of
windblown sand.
Based upon historical aerial photographs this site has been occupied by the existing
structures as far back as June 1993.
3. 2 Subsurface Conditions
As part of PSIs evaluation of this site, 5 exploratory borings were drilled.
Borings were drilled within the footprint of the proposed buildings, around the existing
structures, to depths of approximately 30 feet each below the existing ground surface.
Boring Location Maps are provided as Figures 2a and 2b.
The borings were advanced using a CME-55 truck-mounted drill rig equipped with 4-inch
outside-diameter, solid-stem, continuous-flight augers. Soil samples were recovered at
selected depths during drilling with the truck-mounted drill rig using a Modified California
Barrel Sampler (with an inside diameter of 2 inches and an outside diameter of 2.4
inches) driven by a 140-pound hammer free-falling 30 inches. The blow counts required
to drive the sampler for three consecutive 6-inch increments were recorded. The total
number of blows required to drive the sampler for the last 12 inches of penetration is
designated as the penetration resistance (N-value, blows per foot) which provides an
indication of the consistency of cohesive soils and the relative density of granular
materials. While the procedure is similar to that employed in the Standard Penetration
Test (ASTM D1586), the penetration resistance obtained using the California barrel
sampler is generally higher than that obtained using the standard split-spoon sampler.
All blow counts illustrated in this report are field values.
An engineer from our office observed the drilling of our borings and logs were prepared
of the encountered conditions. Individual logs of the borings are presented on Figures 3
through 7. It should be noted that the subsurface conditions presented on the boring
logs are representative of the conditions at the specific locations drilled. Variations may
occur and should be expected across the site. The stratification represents the
approximate boundary between subsurface materials and the transitions may be gradual
and indistinct. Water level information obtained during our field operations is also shown
on the boring logs.
3.2.1 Subsurface Profile
Subsurface soils encountered at the boring locations generally consists of approximately
2 inches of asphalt overlying 6 to 9 feet of dark brown, moist, loose to medium dense,
clayey sand (SC).
Sandstone bedrock was encountered underlying the native
overburdened soils at depths ranging from 6 to 9 feet below surface grade. The

Denver, Colorado
April 20, 2015

Page 3 of 11
sandstone bedrock is gray to brown, moist to saturated and dense to very dense. A
summary of depths to bedrock at the boring locations is presented in Table 1.
Table 1 Summary of Depths to Bedrock
Boring No.
Approximate
Depth to Bedrock
(feet)
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
3.2.2 Groundwater Conditions

Groundwater was encountered during drilling operations at depths ranging from
approximately 10 to 23 feet. Groundwater was measured approximately 24 hours later
is boring B4 at a depth of 9 feet below surface grade. It should be noted that it is
possible for the groundwater table to fluctuate during the year depending upon climatic
and rainfall conditions and changes to surface topography and drainage patterns.
Discontinuous zones of perched water may also exist, or develop, within the overburden
materials. The groundwater levels presented in this report are the levels that were
measured at the time of our field activities.
3.2.3 Swell Potential
PSI has reviewed the Potentially Swelling Soil and Rock in the Front Range Urban
Corridor, Colorado by Stephen S. Hart (1972). Based on this published map, the subject
site lies with an area generally described as having Windblown Sand and Silt.
Windblown Sand or Silt designation is described as Although this material generally has
low swell potential, the upper 6 inches to 12 inches may locally have moderate swell
potential. Windblown material may be subject to severe settlement or hydro-compaction
when water is allowed to saturate the deposits. The thickness of windblown material
may be very variable, therefore, bedrock with higher swell potential may locally be less
than 10 feet below the surface.
PSI performed Denver Swell Testing (Figures A-1 to A-8) on selected samples of on-site
material. The laboratory swell test results are included in Appendix A and on the
individual boring logs (Figures 3 through 7). Table 2 summarizes the swell test results.

Denver, Colorado
April 20, 2015

Page 4 of 11
Table 2 Swell Test Results
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
Depth below
ground
surface
(feet)
Surcharge
(psf)
Swell Potential
(%)
Moisture
Content
(%)
5
10
500
1000
0.5%
0.0%
20.9%
22.8%
15
1500
0.0%
25.8%
20
2000
0.9%
26.0%
500
0.0%
16.1%
25
2500
0.0%
23.8%
10
1000
0.1%
28.8%
20
2000
0.0%
27.7%
The test results indicated swell percentages ranging from 0.0 to 0.9 percent, when
tested under 500, 1000, 1500, 2000 and 2500 pounds per square foot (psf) of surcharge
pressures. PSI classifies the onsite soils as having a low swell potential. Swell
mitigation is not required for this site, however, if excessive drying and rewetting of these
soils is allowed to occur, the risk of swell will increase. Therefore, proper drainage and
good maintenance should be followed.
3.2.4 Laboratory Testing
The soil samples obtained during the field exploration were transported to the laboratory
and selected soil samples were tested in the laboratory to determine material properties
for our evaluation. Laboratory testing was accomplished in general accordance with
ASTM and other applicable procedures. Laboratory testing was performed on selected
samples to evaluate the classification and other engineering characteristics of the
subsurface materials. Laboratory test data along with detailed descriptions of the soils
can be found on the logs of borings and in Appendix A. The samples that were not
altered by laboratory testing will be retained for 30 days from the date of this report and
then will be discarded without further notice.
4.0 GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION

Based on the subsurface conditions encountered, it is PSIs opinion that the proposed
structure should be constructed on shallow footing foundations bearing on competent,
undisturbed bedrock. A slab-on-grade interior floor slab system may be utilized for the
proposed structure provided that the slab bears on a free draining granular mat on top of
competent bedrock.
The following geotechnical design recommendations have been developed on the basis
of the described project characteristics and subsurface conditions encountered. Should
changes in the project criteria occur, or if additional information becomes available, a
review must be made by PSI to determine if modifications to our recommendations will
be required.

Denver, Colorado
April 20, 2015

Page 5 of 11
5.0 SITE GRADING RECOMMENDATIONS

After demolition of existing structures, PSI should be notified to inspect subgrade. If
conditions differ from those encountered during our investigation, additional borings and
investigation may be necessary.
Prior to site grading or excavation for foundation construction, the site should be stripped
of topsoil, loose un-compacted fill, and debris. Trash and debris should be disposed of
in accordance with local and state regulations.
Sloping and Shoring
Based on the data obtained from the borings and our understanding of required
excavation depths, the in-situ soils may be excavated with moderate effort at this site.
Conventional excavation equipment (track hoes) may be suitable for excavation
purposes in the overburden soils and bedrock material encountered.
Bedrock rippability is not within the scope of this investigation; but can be verified using
geophysical methods before construction. The contractor is responsible for selecting the
appropriate excavation equipment (as part of the means and methods) to facilitate
excavations in bedrock.
Excavations should be adequately shored or sloped to prevent side wall collapse. PSI
has classified the on-site fill material as a Type B soil. Type B soils can generally be
laid back at an inclination no steeper than a 1:1 (h:v) slope; to be verified during
construction.
All excavations should be sloped or shored in the interest of safety, following local and
federal regulations. In Federal Register Volume 54, No. 209 (October 1989), the United
States Department of Labor, Occupation Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
amended its Construction Standards for Excavations, 29CFR, Part 1926, Subpart P.
OSHA initiated this rulemaking action to establish clearly the requirements for protection of
employees in excavations. The intended effect of this regulation is to increase safety for
these workers. It is mandated by this federal regulation that all excavations, whether they
be utility trenches, basement excavations, or footing excavations, be constructed in
accordance with the revised OSHA guidelines. It is our understanding that these
regulations are enforced and if they are not followed the owner and the contractor could be
liable for substantial penalties.
The contractor is solely responsible for designing and constructing stable, temporary
excavations and should shore, slope, or bench the sides of the excavations as required to
maintain stability of both the excavation sides and bottom. The contractor's "responsible
person", as defined in 29 CFR Part 1926, should evaluate the soil exposed in the
excavations as part of the contractor's safety procedures. In no case should slope height,
slope inclination, or excavation depth, including utility trench excavation depth, exceed
those specified in local, state, and federal safety regulations. The contractor's "responsible
person", as defined in 29 CFR Part 1926, should evaluate the soil exposed in the
excavations as part of the contractor's safety procedures.
PSI does not assume responsibility for construction site safety or the contractor's or other
parties compliance with local, state, and federal safety or other regulations. Based on the
results of our investigation and the anticipated bearing elevation for the proposed

Denver, Colorado
April 20, 2015

Page 6 of 11
underground storage tanks, dewatering may be necessary during excavation operations.

It should be noted that it is possible for the groundwater table to fluctuate during the year
depending upon climatic and rainfall conditions, changes to surface topography, and
drainage patterns which may require dewatering at the time of construction operations.
5.1 Engineered Fill

Based on PSIs field and laboratory data it is our opinion that the on-site soils are generally
suitable for re-use as backfill soils and for use as structural fill provided it is properly
moisture-conditioned, and all organic and deleterious materials, if encountered, are
removed. Bedrock should not be reused as backfill.
Imported Structural Fill
Imported structural fill, if required, should be free of organic or other deleterious
materials, have a liquid limit less than 30, a plasticity index less than 10, and meet the
following gradation outlined below. This structural fill criteria is intended as a general
guideline. Imported structural fill materials should have a swell potential of less than 1
percent when compacted to 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight (MDUW) and at 2
percent below the optimum moisture content (OMC) and tested under a swell test
surcharge of 500 psf. The MDUW and OMC should be determined by ASTM D698
(Standard Proctor).
Screen Size
Percent Passing
2-inch
100
#4
50 100
#200
10 - 30
Imported fill material proposed for use on this site that does not meet these criteria
should be submitted to the project geotechnical engineer for evaluation and approval.
The geotechnical engineer should evaluate the proposed import fill prior to purchase and
delivery. Fine-grained soils used for fill require close moisture content control and
careful placement by the contractor to achieve the recommended degree of compaction
and to control swell potential and settlement.
5.2 General Fill Placement and Testing

Unless otherwise specified, fill material should be compacted to at least 95 percent of
the maximum dry unit weight as determined by the Standard Proctor Test (ASTM D
698). Each lift of compacted fill should be tested for density by a representative of the
geotechnical engineer prior to placement of subsequent lifts. Sand fill soils should be
moisture-conditioned to between two percent below and two percent above the optimum
moisture content and clay fill soils should be moisture-conditioned to a range from the
optimum moisture content to four percent above the optimum moisture content. Fill
material should be placed in maximum eight-inch loose lifts.
A sample(s) of the proposed backfill soil(s) should be obtained for moisture density
relationship (proctor test) three to four days prior to backfilling operations to expedite
compaction and moisture content testing by the materials testing service provider.

Denver, Colorado
April 20, 2015

Page 7 of 11
Weather conditions in the site area are typically dry in the summer and early fall. While
grading can be inhibited for short periods during and following times of precipitation,
grading can generally be conducted year round. The major factor that must be
considered during the winter months is ground freezing. During extended periods of
sub-freezing weather, it can be difficult to properly moisture condition and compact soils.
Grading must be conducted during the warmer parts of the day in freezing weather.
6.0 GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS

Per the provided Concept Pan, the building will have 1 level at approximately 10 feet
below the existing grade. Therefore, PSI recommends the structure bear on a shallow
foundation bearing in competent, undisturbed bedrock. A slab on grade may also be
used.
6.1 Shallow Footing Foundations

The proposed structure can be supported on continuous and individual footings and
should be designed for an allowable soil bearing pressure as shown in the following
tables:
Allowable Bearing Capacity of
Continuous Footing
(18 Inches Wide Minimum)
Bearing Depth of
Foundation Below
Existing Grade
Allowable Bearing
Capacity
Estimated Settlement
1 feet
4,000 psf
< 1 inch
3 feet
5,000 psf
< 1 inch
Allowable Bearing Capacity of

Individual Column Pad Footing
for Loads up to 500 kips
Bearing Depth of
Foundation Below
Existing Grade
Allowable Bearing
Capacity
Estimated Settlement
1 feet
7,000 psf
< 1 inch
3 feet
10,050 psf
< 1 inch
The allowable bearing capacities provided in the table above are based on loading of 4
kips per linear foot for continuous footings, and column loads not to exceed 500 kips, a
safety factor of 3, and that the existing grade is at or near the proposed final subgrade
elevation. The estimated settlements displayed in the above tables were based upon the
corresponding allowable soil bearing capacities.
Individual and continuous footings supporting bearing walls should incorporate a
minimum lateral dimension of 18 inches. Exterior footings should bear at a minimum of
36 inches below final grade for frost protection. Interior footings should bear at a
minimum of 18 inches below grade.

Denver, Colorado
April 20, 2015

Page 8 of 11
The uplift capacity of shallow foundations should be limited to the weight of the
foundation concrete plus the weight of the soil immediately above the footing. A
concrete unit weight of 145 pounds per cubic foot (pcf) and a soil unit weight of 125 pcf
should be used for design purposes.
Lateral loads applied to the foundations will be resisted by a combination of passive
pressure against the sides and friction along the base. For design purposes, PSI
recommends a passive pressure of 330 pcf to a depth of 15 feet along with a coefficient
of friction of 0.39 is recommended.
The foundation excavations should be observed by a representative of PSI prior to
reinforcing steel or concrete placement to assess that the foundation bearing materials
are capable of supporting the design loads and are consistent with the materials
discussed in this report. Based on the data obtained from the borings and our
understanding of required excavation depths, the in-situ soils may be excavated with
moderate effort at this site.
Soft or loose zones, if encountered at the bottom of the footing, should be removed and
replaced with properly compacted fill as directed by the geotechnical engineer.
After the foundation bearing materials have been approved, steel reinforcement and
concrete should be placed as quickly as possible to avoid exposure of the footing
bottoms to wetting and drying. Surface run-off water should be drained away from the
excavations and not be allowed to pond. If possible, the foundation concrete should be
placed during the same day the excavation is made. If it is required that the excavation
be left open for more than one day, they should be protected to reduce evaporation or
entry of moisture.
6.2 Subterranean Retaining Walls

If retaining walls are planned, PSI recommends that the retaining walls be designed for
an equivalent fluid pressure of 29 pcf and 46 pcf, for active and at-rest conditions,
respectively, based on a level backfill condition and that the wall be backfilled with
properly compacted engineered fill. Wall backfill should be compacted to at least 95
percent of the soils maximum dry density as determined by the Standard Proctor.
Bracing of the wall may be required during backfilling and compaction operations. The
values presented above were calculated based on positive foundation drainage is provided
to prevent the buildup of hydrostatic pressure. If surface loads are placed near the walls,
such as traffic and building loads, they should be designed to resist an additional uniform
lateral load of one-half of the vertical surface loads. In specific design cases where water
is allowed to build up on the below-grade wall structure, the hydrostatic load correlating
to the maximum height of the water build up should be added to the lateral loads acting
on the wall.
6.3 Foundation Drains

Free-flowing groundwater was observed to collect in the borings (B1 through B5) at
depths ranging from approximately 9 to 23 feet below the existing surface grade. It
should be noted that it is possible for the groundwater table to fluctuate during the year
depending upon climatic and rainfall conditions and changes to surface topography and
drainage patterns.

Denver, Colorado
April 20, 2015

Page 9 of 11
Based on the building foundation elevations and anticipated lower level for the elevator
pit, the foundation may encounter groundwater. It is PSIs opinion that a foundation or
underdrain system be installed. PSI also recommend that the surface infiltration be
minimized to reduce the potential for surface water to saturate the soils below the
foundations.
The ground surface, landscaping and flatwork, should be sloped to drain away from the
building. Roof down spouts and drains should discharge well beyond the limits of the
building or into the sewer collection system.
For the elevator pit, PSI recommends that a drainage system be provided at this
location. A drain system may be used, or the elevator pit can be waterproofed and sump
pit installed.
6.4 Seismic Parameters

The project site is located within a municipality that employs the International Building
Code, 2012 edition. As part of this code, the design of structures must consider dynamic
forces resulting from seismic events. These forces are dependent upon the magnitude of
the earthquake event as well as the properties of the soils that underlie the site. As part of
the procedure to evaluate seismic forces, the code requires the evaluation of the Seismic
Site Class, which categorizes the site based upon the characteristics of the subsurface
profile within the upper 100 feet of the ground surface. To define the Site Class for this
project, we have interpreted the expected results of soil test borings drilled with the project
site and estimated appropriate soil properties below grade to a depth of 100 feet, as
permitted by Section 1615.1.1 of the code. The estimated soil properties were based upon
data available in published geologic reports and our experience with subsurface conditions
in the general site area.
Based upon our evaluation, it is our opinion that the subsurface conditions within the site
are consistent with the characteristics of Site Class C as defined in Table 1615.1.1 of the
building code.
The USGS-NEHRP interpolated probabilistic ground motion values near latitude
39.77013 North and longitude 105.04378 West obtained from the USGS geohazards
web page are as follows:
(seconds)
2% Probability
of Event in 50
years
(% g)
0.2 (Ss)
1.0 (S1)
18.6
5.9
Period
Site
Coefficient
Site
Coefficient
Fa
Fv
1.2
NA
NA
1.7
The Site Coefficients, Fa and Fv presented in the above table were interpolated from IBC
Tables 1615.1.2(1) and 1615.1.2(2) as a function of the site classification and mapped
spectral response acceleration at the short (Ss) and 1 second (S1) periods.

Denver, Colorado
April 20, 2015

Page 10 of 11
6.5 Slabs-on-Grade
A slab-on-grade interior floor slab system may be utilized for the proposed structure
provided that the slab bears on a free draining granular mat on top of competent
bedrock.
If the slab is placed on competent imported soils, PSI recommends a subgrade support
modulus (k-value) of 150 pci (based on a 1 foot square plate load test) be used for slab
design. The value should be adjusted for larger areas using the following expression for
cohesive and cohesionless soil:
Modulus of Subgrade Reaction,
where:
k
) for cohesive soil; and,
B
B 1 2
ks = k (
) for cohesionless soil.
2B
ks = (
ks = coefficient of vertical subgrade reaction for loaded area;

k = coefficient of vertical subgrade reaction for 1x1 square foot area; and,
B = width of area loaded, in feet.
Where concrete slabs will be covered with tile or other moisture-sensitive covering, we
recommend the use of a vapor retarder beneath the slabs-on-grade to reduce vapor
transmission through the slab. PSI recommends that a minimum four-inch-thick freedraining granular mat be placed beneath the floor slab to enhance drainage. The soil
surface shall be graded to drain away from the building without low spots that can trap
water prior to placing the granular drainage layer. Polyethylene sheeting should be placed
to act as a vapor retarder where the floor will be in contact with moisture sensitive
equipment or product such as tile, wood, carpet, etc., as directed by the design engineer.
The floor slabs should have an adequate number of joints to reduce cracking resulting from
differential movement and shrinkage.
The precautions listed below are considered good construction practice. Due to the
presence of moderately expansive soils encountered on-site, these recommendations
should be followed to prevent differential movements due to moisture content variation
and to improve slab performance.
Cracking of slabs-on-grade can occur as a result of heaving or compression of

the supporting soil, but also as a result of concrete curing stresses. The
occurrence of concrete shrinkage cracks, and problems associated with concrete
curing may be reduced and/or controlled by limiting the slump of the concrete,
proper concrete placement, finishing, and curing, and by the placement of crack
control joints at frequent intervals, particularly, where re-entrant slab corners
occur. The American Concrete Institute (ACI) recommends a maximum panel
size (in feet) equal to approximately three times the thickness of the slab (in
inches) in both directions. For example, joints are recommended at a maximum
spacing of 12 feet assuming a four-inch thick slab. We also recommend that
control joints be scored three feet in from and parallel to all foundation walls.
Using fiber reinforcement in the concrete can also control shrinkage cracking.
Slabs should be separated from exterior walls, column posts, interior bearing
members and utility lines to allow independent vertical movement of the slab. If
project structural and architectural details require the slab on grade to be
structurally tied to the exterior wall/foundation system, then control joints should

Denver, Colorado
April 20, 2015

Page 11 of 11
be placed in the slab within approximately 3 feet of the wall. The owner must
understand and accept the risk of cracking at or near the control joints if the slab
on grade is tied to the foundation system.
Some increase in moisture content is inevitable as a result of development and

associated landscaping. However, extreme moisture content increases can be
largely controlled by proper and responsible site drainage, building maintenance
and irrigation practices. Proper slope away from building (5 to 10 percent) and in
parking areas (3 to 5 percent) should be maintained.
All utility backfill in areas supporting slabs should be moisture-conditioned or

dried by scarification, and compacted. Backfill in all interior and exterior water
and sewer line trenches should be uniformly compacted.
Exterior slabs should be isolated from the building. These slabs should be reinforced to
function as independent units. Movement of these slabs should not be transmitted to the
building foundation or superstructure.
7.0 LIMITATIONS
The recommendations submitted are based on the available subsurface information
obtained by PSI and design details furnished by RPDG. If there are revisions to the plans
for this project or if deviations from the subsurface conditions noted in this report are
encountered during construction, PSI should be notified immediately to determine if
changes in the foundation recommendations are required. If PSI is not retained to perform
these functions, PSI will not be responsible for the impact of those conditions on the
project.
The geotechnical engineer warrants that the findings, recommendations, specifications, or
professional advice contained herein have been made in accordance with generally
accepted professional geotechnical engineering practices in the local area. No other
warranties are implied or expressed.
After the plans and specifications are more complete, the geotechnical engineer should be
retained and provided the opportunity to review the final design plans and specifications to
check that our engineering recommendations have been properly incorporated into the
design documents. This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of RPDG and their
consultants for the specific application to the Tennyson Apartments located at 3860 and
3868 Tennyson Street in Denver, Colorado.
Taken From Google Earth
Site
Site Vicinity Map
Tennyson Apartments
FIGURE NO.
JOB NO.
1a
532964
Taken From USGS Map -
Site
Site Vicinity Map
Tennyson Apartments
FIGURE NO.
JOB NO.
1b
532964
Taken From Google Earth
Indicates Approximate location of Boring
B3
B2
B4
B1
B5
Boring Location Map
Tennysone Apartments
FIGURE NO.
JOB NO.
2a
532964
Taken from Proposal Documentation
Indicates Approximate location of Boring
B3
B2
B1
B4
B5
Boring Location Map
Tennyson Apartments
FIGURE NO.
JOB NO.
2b
532964
FIGURE: 3
DRILL COMPANY:
Dakota Drilling
DRILLER:
Ryan
LOGGED BY:
BP
DRILL RIG:
CME-55
DRILLING METHOD:
Solid Stem Auger
SAMPLING METHOD:
Modified California
HAMMER TYPE:
Manual
EFFICIENCY
N/A
REVIEWED BY:
KD
Water
While Drilling
Upon Completion
Delay
23 feet
23 feet
N/A
BORING LOCATION:
East Center of Proposed Lot
See Figure No. 2
STANDARD PENETRATION
TEST DATA
N in blows/ft
PL
Moisture
LL
25
50
Additional
Remarks
STRENGTH, tsf
Qu
0
Qp
2.0
4.0
Approximately 2 inches of Asphalt

CLAYEY SAND (SC) - Fine to Medium
Grain Sand, Dark Brown, Moist, Medium
Dense
5420
SC
5
BORING B1
Moisture, %
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
USCS Classification
Recovery (inches)
Sample No.
Sample Type
Graphic Log
Depth, (feet)
Elevation (feet)
DATE STARTED:
4/8/15
DATE COMPLETED:
4/8/15
COMPLETION DEPTH
30.0 ft
BENCHMARK:
N/A
ELEVATION:
5421 ft
LATITUDE:
39.77012615
LONGITUDE:
105.043779396715
STATION:
N/A
OFFSET:
N/A
REMARKS:
12
7-8
N=15
21
S(500) = 0.5%
P = 0.7k
DD = 87
34
-200 = 36.2%
28
-200 = 29.1%
5415
SANDSTONE BEDROCK (SM) - Fine to
Medium Grain Sand, Gray to Brown, Moist to
Saturated, Dense to Very Dense
10
12
20-28
N=48
35-15/2"
50/4"
50/4"
>>
50/4"
>>
5410
15
5405
SM
23
>> LL = 59
PL = 31
20
5400
25
5395
30
Professional Service Industries, Inc.

1070 West 124th Avenue, Suite 800
Westminster, CO 80234
Telephone: (303) 424-5578
The stratification lines represent approximate boundaries. The transition may be gradual.
PROJECT NO.:
PROJECT:
LOCATION:
0532964
Tennyson Apartments
3860 Tennyson St.
Denver, CO
Sheet 1 of 1
FIGURE: 4
DRILL COMPANY:
Dakota Drilling
DRILLER:
Ryan
LOGGED BY:
BP
DRILL RIG:
CME-55
DRILLING METHOD:
Solid Stem Auger
SAMPLING METHOD:
Modified California
HAMMER TYPE:
Manual
EFFICIENCY
N/A
REVIEWED BY:
KD
BORING B2
Water
While Drilling
Upon Completion
Delay
See Figure No. 2
TEST DATA
N in blows/ft
PL
Moisture
LL
25
50
Additional
Remarks
STRENGTH, tsf
Qu
0
22 feet
22 feet
N/A
BORING LOCATION:
Northwest Corner of Proposed Lot
Moisture, %
USCS Classification
Recovery (inches)
Sample No.
Sample Type
Graphic Log
Depth, (feet)
Elevation (feet)
DATE STARTED:
4/8/15
DATE COMPLETED:
4/8/15
COMPLETION DEPTH
30.0 ft
BENCHMARK:
N/A
ELEVATION:
5420 ft
LATITUDE:
39.77012615
LONGITUDE:
105.043779396715
STATION:
N/A
OFFSET:
N/A
REMARKS:
Qp
2.0
4.0

Grain Sand, Dark Brown, Moist, Loose
SC
5415
12
5-6
N=11
20
LL = 36
PL = 19
23
S(1000) = 0.0%
DD = 101
28
Gradation
-200 = 48.2%
SM
28
>> -200 = 45.6%

Medium Grain Sand, Gray to Dark Brown to
Brown, Moist to Saturated, Dense to Very
Dense
5410
10
5405
15
25-25/2"
35-15/1"
SM
5400
20
5395
25
5390
50/5"
50/6"
50/5"
>>
25
>> -200 = 29.4%
30

Telephone: (303) 424-5578
PROJECT NO.:
PROJECT:
LOCATION:
0532964
Tennyson Apartments
3860 Tennyson St.
Denver, CO
Sheet 1 of 1
FIGURE: 5
Water
18 feet
18 feet
N/A
BORING LOCATION:
Southwest Corner of Proposed Lot
See Figure No. 2
Moisture, %
BORING B3
While Drilling
Upon Completion
Delay
TEST DATA
N in blows/ft
PL
Moisture
LL
25
50
Additional
Remarks
STRENGTH, tsf
Qu
0
Qp
2.0
4.0

5420
DRILL COMPANY:
Dakota Drilling
DRILLER:
Ryan
LOGGED BY:
BP
DRILL RIG:
CME-55
DRILLING METHOD:
Solid Stem Auger
SAMPLING METHOD:
Modified California
HAMMER TYPE:
Manual
EFFICIENCY
N/A
REVIEWED BY:
KD
USCS Classification
Recovery (inches)
Sample No.
Sample Type
Graphic Log
Depth, (feet)
Elevation (feet)
DATE STARTED:
4/8/15
DATE COMPLETED:
4/8/15
COMPLETION DEPTH
30.0 ft
BENCHMARK:
N/A
ELEVATION:
5421 ft
LATITUDE:
39.77012615
LONGITUDE:
105.043779396715
STATION:
N/A
OFFSET:
N/A
REMARKS:
19
12
12
50/6"
>>
50/3"
>>
SC
5-6
N=11
Gradation
-200 = 31.2%
SC
5415
10
5410
25-25
N=50

Medium Grain Sand, Dark Brown, Moist to
26
50/6"
>> S(1500) = 0.0%

DD = 96
15
5405
SM
20
35-15/1"
26
S(2000) = 0.9%
P = 8.0k
DD = 98
5400
25
5395
30

Telephone: (303) 424-5578
PROJECT NO.:
PROJECT:
LOCATION:
0532964
Tennyson Apartments
3860 Tennyson St.
Denver, CO
Sheet 1 of 1
FIGURE: 6
Water
10 feet
10 feet
9.5 feet
BORING LOCATION:
Center Of Proposed Lot
See Figure No. 2
Moisture, %
BORING B4
While Drilling
Upon Completion
Delay
TEST DATA
N in blows/ft
PL
Moisture
LL
25
50
Additional
Remarks
STRENGTH, tsf
Qu
0
Qp
2.0
4.0

5420
DRILL COMPANY:
Dakota Drilling
DRILLER:
Ryan
LOGGED BY:
BP
DRILL RIG:
CME-55
DRILLING METHOD:
Solid Stem Auger
SAMPLING METHOD:
Modified California
HAMMER TYPE:
Manual
EFFICIENCY
N/A
REVIEWED BY:
KD
USCS Classification
Recovery (inches)
Sample No.
Sample Type
Graphic Log
Depth, (feet)
Elevation (feet)
DATE STARTED:
4/8/15
DATE COMPLETED:
4/8/15
COMPLETION DEPTH
30.0 ft
BENCHMARK:
N/A
ELEVATION:
5421 ft
LATITUDE:
39.77012615
LONGITUDE:
105.043779396715
STATION:
N/A
OFFSET:
N/A
REMARKS:
12
12
50/6"
50/5"
SC
5-6
N=11
16
S(500) = 0.0%
DD = 101
27
-200 = 30.9%
5415
10
5410
10-30
N=40

Saturated, Medium Dense to Very Dense
30-20/2"
15
5405
SM
20
30-20/2"
5400
24
>> S(2500) = 0.0%

DD = 100
25
5395
>>
30

Telephone: (303) 424-5578
PROJECT NO.:
PROJECT:
LOCATION:
0532964
Tennyson Apartments
3860 Tennyson St.
Denver, CO
Sheet 1 of 1
FIGURE: 7
5410
10
5405
15
5400
20
5395
25
5390
Water
19 feet
19 feet
N/A
BORING LOCATION:
Southeast Corner of Proposed Lot
See Figure No. 2
Moisture, %
BORING B5
While Drilling
Upon Completion
Delay
TEST DATA
N in blows/ft
PL
Moisture
LL
25
50
Additional
Remarks
STRENGTH, tsf
Qu
0
5415
DRILL COMPANY:
Dakota Drilling
DRILLER:
Ryan
LOGGED BY:
BP
DRILL RIG:
CME-55
DRILLING METHOD:
Solid Stem Auger
SAMPLING METHOD:
Modified California
HAMMER TYPE:
Manual
EFFICIENCY
N/A
REVIEWED BY:
KD
USCS Classification
Recovery (inches)
Sample No.
Sample Type
Graphic Log
Depth, (feet)
Elevation (feet)
DATE STARTED:
4/8/15
DATE COMPLETED:
4/8/15
COMPLETION DEPTH
30.0 ft
BENCHMARK:
N/A
ELEVATION:
5420 ft
LATITUDE:
39.77012615
LONGITUDE:
105.043779396715
STATION:
N/A
OFFSET:
N/A
REMARKS:
Qp
2.0
4.0

Grain Sand, Dark Brown to Brown with White
in Parts, Moist, Loose
SC
12
11
35-15/1"
50/5"

6-8
N=14
20-30/5"
26
Gradation
-200 = 42.4%
SC
29
S(1000) = 0.1%
P = 2.0k
DD = 89
50/6"
SM
>>
30-20/2"
28
22
S(2000) = 0.0%
DD = 83
>> -200 = 25.9%
30

Telephone: (303) 424-5578
PROJECT NO.:
PROJECT:
LOCATION:
0532964
Tennyson Apartments
3860 Tennyson St.
Denver, CO
Sheet 1 of 1
Elevation
5,390
5,395
5,400
5,405
5,410
5,415
5,420
5,425
w=22%
w=28%
w=29%
w=26%
B5
10

Telephone: (303) 424-5578
50/5"
35-15/1"
30-20/2"
50/6"
20-30/5"
6-8
N=14
10
20
20
w=24%
w=27%
w=16%
B4
30
50/5"
50/6"
30-20/2"
30-20/2"
10-30
N=40
5-6
N=11
30
40
w=25%
50/3"
50/6"
35-15/1"
w=28%
50/6"
w=28%
25-25
w=23%
N=50
5-6
w=20%
N=11
B2
50
50/5"
50/6"
50/5"
35-15/1"
25-25/2"
5-6
N=11
50
Profile
Distance Along Baseline
w=26%
w=26%
w=19%
B3
40
70
70
80
80
Tennyson Apartments
PSI Project Number: 0532964
60
Approximate
Basement Floor
Elevation
60
w=23%
w=28%
w=34%
w=21%
B1
90
50/4"
50/4"
50/4"
35-15/2"
20-28
N=48
7-8
N=15
90
5,390
5,395
5,400
5,405
5,410
5,415
5,420
5,425
Appendix A
Laboratory Test Results
SWELL-CONSOLIDATION TEST
12
10
PERCENT SWELL / CONSOLIDATION (%)
-2
100
1000
10000
100000
SWELL PRESSURE (PSF)
Sample Location
Sample Depth
Sample Description
USCS Classification
B1
5 feet
Clayey Sand
SC
Dry Density
In-Situ Moisture Content
Volume Change
Swell Pressure
Tennyson Apt
SWELL - CONSOLIDATION TEST
JOB NO.
FIGURE NO.
87
20.9
0.5
700
pcf
%
%
psf
532964
A-1
12
10
-2
100
1000
10000
100000
Sample Location
Sample Depth
Sample Description
USCS Classification
B2
10 feet
Sandstone Bedrock
SM
Dry Density
Volume Change
Swell Pressure
Tennyson Apt
JOB NO.
FIGURE NO.
101 pcf
22.8 %
0.0 %
psf
532964
A-2
12
10
-2
100
1000
10000
100000
Sample Location
Sample Depth
Sample Description
USCS Classification
B3
15 feet
Sandstone Bedrock
SM
Dry Density
Volume Change
Swell Pressure
Tennyson Apt
JOB NO.
FIGURE NO.
96 pcf
25.8 %
-0.8 %
psf
532964
A-3
12
10
-2
-4
-6
100
1000
10000
100000
Sample Location
Sample Depth
Sample Description
USCS Classification
B3
20 feet
Sandstone Bedrock
SM
Dry Density
Volume Change
Swell Pressure
Tennyson Apt
JOB NO.
FIGURE NO.
98
26.0
0.9
8,000
pcf
%
%
psf
532964
A-4
12
10
-2
100
1000
10000
100000
Sample Location
Sample Depth
Sample Description
USCS Classification
B4
5 feet
Clayey Sand
SC
Dry Density
Volume Change
Swell Pressure
Tennyson Apt
JOB NO.
FIGURE NO.
101 pcf
16.1 %
-0.3 %
psf
532964
A-5
12
10
-2
100
1000
10000
100000
Sample Location
Sample Depth
Sample Description
USCS Classification
B4
25 feet
Sandstone Bedrock
SM
Dry Density
Volume Change
Swell Pressure
Tennyson Apt
JOB NO.
FIGURE NO.
100 pcf
23.8 %
-0.5 %
psf
532964
A-6
12
10
-2
100
1000
10000
100000
Sample Location
Sample Depth
Sample Description
USCS Classification
B5
10 feet
Sandstone Bedrock
SM
Dry Density
Volume Change
Swell Pressure
Tennyson Apt
JOB NO.
FIGURE NO.
89
28.8
0.1
2,000
pcf
%
%
psf
532964
A-7
12
10
-2
100
1000
10000
100000
Sample Location
Sample Depth
Sample Description
USCS Classification
B5
20 feet
Sandstone Bedrock
SM
Dry Density
Volume Change
Swell Pressure
Tennyson Apt
JOB NO.
FIGURE NO.
83 pcf
27.7 %
-2.1 %
psf
532964
A-8
US SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES

1.5
US SIEVE NUMBERS
3/4 3/8
10
16
30 40
HYDROMETER
100
200
100
90
80
70
60
%
F
I
N 50
E
R
by40
W
E
30
I
G
H
T 20
10
0
1000
100
10
0.1
0.01
0.001
GRAIN SIZE (mm)
GRAVEL
COBBLES
Specimen I.D.
COARSE
FINE
SAND
CRS
Description
MED
USCS
SILT OR CLAY
FINE
AASHTO Group Index
LL
PI
PL
B2
@ 15 FEET Silty Sand
SM
A-7-5
10
59
28
31
B3
@ 5 FEET Clayey Sand
SC
A-2-6
36
17
19
B5
@ 5 FEET Clayey Sand
SC
A-6
36
17
19
D10
Cc
Cu
Specimen I.D.
D100
D60
D30
%Gravel %Sand %Silt&Clay
B2
@ 15 FEET
4.75
0.21
52
48
B3
@ 5 FEET
4.75
0.26
69
31
B5
@ 5 FEET
9.50
0.22
57
42
Tennyson Apartments
GRADATION CURVES
JOB NO.
FIGURE NO.
0532964
A-9
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 01 2500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
B.
Additional Information:
1.
Products Selected Under an Allowance: Section 01 2100 "Allowances."
2.
Products Selected Under an Alternate: Section 01 2300 "Alternates."
3.
Comparable Products: Section 01 4000 "Product Requirements."
4.
Specific Requirements and Limitations for Substitutions: Divisions 02 through 49
Sections.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from

those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1.
Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to
changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or
unavailability of required warranty terms.
2.
Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not
required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to
Contractor or Owner.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Substitution Requests: Submit each request for consideration electronically, in .pdf file format.
Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification
Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
Substitutions During the Bidding Phase:
a.
Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 15 days
prior to the Bid Date. Requests received after that time may be considered or
rejected at discretion of Architect. Architect will take action on substitution requests
no later than 7 days prior to the Bid Date.
b.
Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 1.5C.
c.
Form of Acceptance: Addendum to Bidding Documents.
d.
Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
2.
Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and
requirements indicated.
b.
Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
c.
Samples, where applicable or requested.
01 2500 - 1

CA 15-001
d.
e.
f.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.
3.
Substitutions After the Bidding Phase:

a.
Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days
after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be
considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. If necessary, Architect will request
additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a
request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection
of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of
additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
b.
Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. Facsimile of form provided at
end of Section.
c.
Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or
Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
d.
Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
4.
Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a.
Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.
b.
Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors, which will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
c.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and
requirements indicated.
d.
Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
e.
Samples, where applicable or requested.
f.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
g.
Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
h.
Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
i.
Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.
j.
Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
k.
Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.
l.
Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
results.
01 2500 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
1.5

CA 15-001
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution

with related products and materials. Engage qualified testing agency to perform compatibility
tests recommended by manufacturers.
PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved
substitutions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately upon discovery of need
for change, but not later than 7 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related
submittals.
1.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect
will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with the
requirements:
a.
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
b.
Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
c.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
d.
Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
e.
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
f.
Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
g.
Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
h.
When requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested
substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and
consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors
involved.
B.
Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within
60 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be
considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.
1.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect
will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
a.
Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities
Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include
compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of
other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.
b.
Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents.
c.
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
d.
Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
e.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
f.
Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
01 2500 - 3

CA 15-001
g.
h.
i.
j.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.

Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
When requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested
substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and
consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors
involved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
01 2500 - 4
SUBSTITUTION
REQUEST
(During the Bidding/Negotiating Stage)
Substitution Request Number:
Project:
From:
Date:
To:
A/E Project Number:

Re:
Contract For:
Specification Title:
Section:
Description:
Page:
Proposed Substitution:
Manufacturer:
Trade Name:
Article/Paragraph:
Address:
Phone:
Model No.:
Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, and performance and test data adequate for evaluation
of the request; applicable portions of the data are clearly identified.
Attached data also includes a description of changes to the Contract Documents that the proposed substitution will require for its proper
installation.
The Undersigned certifies:
Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product.
Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product.
Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available.
Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule.
Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances.
Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the
substitution.
Submitted by:
Signed by:
Firm:
Address:
Telephone:
A/Es REVIEW AND ACTION
Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures.
Substitution approved as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures.
Substitution rejected - Use specified materials.
Substitution Request received too late - Use specified materials.
Signed by:
Supporting Data Attached:
Date:
Drawings
Copyright 2010, Construction Specifications Institute,

110 South Union St., Suite 100, Alexandria, VA 22314
Product Data
Samples
Page ___ of ___
Tests
Reports
Form Version: November 2010
This is not an official CSI Construction Contract Administration (CCA) Form. Please use CSI's official CCA Forms if required by your project needs.
SUBSTITUTION
REQUEST
(After the Bidding/Negotiating Phase)
Substitution Request Number:
Project:
From:
Date:
To:
A/E Project Number:

Contract For:
Re:
Specification Title:
Section:
Description:
Page:
Article/Paragraph:
Proposed Substitution:
Manufacturer:
Address:
Phone:
Trade Name:
Model No.:
Installer:
History:
Address:
New product
1-4 years old
Phone:
5-10 years old
More than 10 years old
Differences between proposed substitution and specified product:
Point-by-point comparative data attached REQUIRED BY A/E

Reason for not providing specified item:
Similar Installation:
Project:
Architect:
Address:
Owner:
Date Installed:
Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work:
No
Yes; explain
Savings to Owner for accepting substitution:
($
Proposed substitution changes Contract Time:
No
Yes [Add]
Supporting Data Attached:
Product Data
Samples
Drawings

Page ___ of ___
).
[Deduct]
Tests
days.
Reports

CSI Form 13.1A
SUBSTITUTION
REQUEST
(After the Bidding/Negotiating Phase Continued)
The Undersigned certifies:
Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product.
Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product.
Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available.
Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule.
Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become
apparent are to be waived.
Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances.
Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the substitution.
Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects.
Submitted by:
Signed by:
Firm:
Address:
Telephone:
Attachments:
A/Es REVIEW AND RECOMMENDATION

Approve Substitution - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures.
Approve Substitution as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures.
Reject Substitution - Use specified materials.
Substitution Request received too late - Use specified materials.
Signed by:
Date:
OWNER'S REVIEW AND ACTION

Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures. Prepare Change
Order.
Substitution approved as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures. Prepare
Change Order.
Substitution rejected - Use specified materials.
Signed by:
Additional Comments:
Other:
Date:
Contractor

Subcontractor
Page ___ of ___
Supplier
Manufacturer
A/E

CSI Form 13.1A
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 01 2600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
B.
1.
Substitutions Made After Contract Award: Section 01 2500 "Substitution Procedures."
1.3
MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A.
1.4
Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not
involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on Architect's standard form.
PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A.
Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed

changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If
necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1.
Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them
instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
2.
Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a
quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time
necessary to execute the change.
a.
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey
data to substantiate quantities.
b.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
c.
Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
d.
Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an
extension of the Contract Time.
e.
Quotation Form: Use CSI Forms 13.6C "Proposal Worksheet Detail" and 13.6D
"Proposal Worksheet Summary." Facsimiles of forms provided at end of Section.
B.
Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the

Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect.
1.
Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2.
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
3.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
01 2600 - 1

CA 15-001
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.

Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time.
Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed
change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
Proposal Form: Use CSI Forms 13.6A "Change Order Request (Proposal)" with
attachments CSI Form 13.6C "Proposal Worksheet Detail" and 13.6D "Proposal
Worksheet Summary." Facsimiles of forms provided at end of Section.
CHANGE ORDERS
A.
On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures
of Owner and Contractor.
B.
Administrative Change Orders:

1.
Allowance Adjustment: Refer to Division 01 Section "Allowances" for administrative
procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to
reflect actual costs of allowances.
2.
Unit Price Adjustment: Refer to Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative
procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to
reflect measured scope of unit price work.
C.
Form of Change Order: AIA Document G701.
1.6
CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A.
Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA
Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change
in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1.
Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It
also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the
Contract Time.
B.
Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Change Directive.
1.
After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary
to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

01 2600 - 2
CHANGE ORDER
REQUEST (PROPOSAL)
Project:
Change Order Request Number:

From (Contractor):
To:
Date:
A/E Project Number:
Re:
Contract For:
This Change Order Request (C.O.R.) contains an itemized quotation for changes in the Contract Sum or Contract Time in response to
proposed modifications to the Contract Documents based on Proposal Request No.
.
Description of Proposed Change:
Attached supporting information from:
Subcontractor
Supplier
Reason For Change:
Does Proposed Change involve a change in Contract Sum?

Does Proposed Change involve a change in Contract Time?
Attached pages:
No
No
[Increase] [Decrease]
[Increase] [Decrease]
$
days.
Proposal Worksheet Summary:

Proposal Worksheet Detail(s):
Signed by:
Copies:
Yes
Yes
Date:
Owner
Consultants

File
Page ___ of ___

CSI Form 13.6A
PROPOSAL
WORKSHEET SUMMARY
Project:
To:
From:
Re:
Date:
Proposal Request Number:
A/E Project Number:
Complete and attach Proposal Worksheet Detail for each element of Work. Enter Worksheet Information below.
ADDITIONS:
Sheet
Description
Material
Labor
Subtotal
Material
Labor
Subtotal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Subtotal:
DEDUCTIONS:
Sheet
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Subtotal:
Subcontractor's Net:
Subcontractor's OH&P:
Subcontractor's Bond:
Subcontractor's Total:
Contractor's OH&P:
Contractor's Bond:
Insurance:
Tax:
WORKSHEET TOTAL:
Page
of

CSI Form 13.6D
Quantity
Subtotal (Enter this number on Worksheet Summary.)
Item Description
Subtotal (Enter this number on Worksheet Summary.)
Item Description
110 South Union St., Suite 100 Alexandria, VA 22314
1
2
3
4
Ref. No.
DEDUCTIONS
1
2
3
4
Ref. No.
ADDITIONS
Page ___ of ___
Materials
UNIT PRICES
Materials
Labor
Labor
Materials
SUBTOTALS
Materials
SUBTOTALS
A/E Project Number:
Proposal Request Number:
UNIT PRICES
Date:
Re:
Quantity
From:
To:
SHADED AREAS FOR A/E USE
Project:
Contact:
Labor
Labor
CSI Form 13.6C
TOTAL
TOTAL
PROPOSAL
WORKSHEET DETAIL
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 01 2900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and

process Applications for Payment.
B.
1.
2.
Unit Price Requirements: Section 01 2200 "Unit Prices."
3.
Changes to the Contract: Section01 2600 "Contract Modification Procedures."
4.
Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule: Section 01 3200
"Construction Progress Documentation."
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract

Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's
Applications for Payment.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of

Contractor's Construction Schedule.
1.
Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms
and schedules, including the following:
a.
Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets.
b.
Submittals Schedule.
c.
2.
3.
B.
Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than 7
days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Application for Payment.
Subschedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased
payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment.
Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line
items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1.
Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
a.
Project name and location.
b.
Name of Architect.
c.
Architect's project number.
d.
Contractor's name and address.
e.
Date of submittal.
2.
3.
Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703.

Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the
following for each item listed:
a.
Related Specification Section or Division.
b.
Description of the Work.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01 2900 - 1

CA 15-001
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Name of subcontractor.
Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
Name of supplier.
Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest onehundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.
1)
Labor.
2)
Materials.
3)
Equipment.
4.
Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued

evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Provide multiple line items
for principal subcontract amounts in excess of 5 percent of Contract Sum.
a.
Include separate line items for project closeout requirements under General
Conditions and principal subcontracts in an amount totaling five percent of the
Contract Sum and subcontract amount.
5.
6.
Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated
and stored, but not yet installed.
a.
Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include
evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing.
7.
Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance.
Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by
measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine
quantities.
Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a.
Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of
Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
8.
9.
10.
1.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next
Application for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result
in a change in the Contract Sum.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A.
Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
1.
Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion,
and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B.
Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement
between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application
for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C.
Payment applications shall be submitted to Architect by the 20th of the month. The period
covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month.
D.
Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation
Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.
01 2900 - 2
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
E.
Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Execute by a person authorized to

sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor and notarize. Architect will return incomplete
applications without action.
1.
Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction
Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2.
Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether
or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of
Application for Payment.
3.
Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before
last day of construction period covered by application.
F.
Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or
equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between
items stored on-site and items stored off-site.
1.
Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of
surety to payment, for stored materials.
2.
Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices.
Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include
overhead and profit on stored materials.
3.
Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:
a.
Materials previously stored and included in previous Applications for Payment.
b.
Work completed for this Application utilizing previously stored materials.
c.
Additional materials stored with this Application.
d.
Total materials remaining stored, including materials with this Application.
G.
Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to
Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien
and similar attachments if required.
1.
Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
H.
Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's
liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by
the previous application.
1.
Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
deduction for retainage, on each item.
2.
When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
3.
Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
4.
Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity
involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled
to a lien.
5.
Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms executed in a manner acceptable to
Owner.
I.
Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1.
List of subcontractors.
2.
Schedule of Values.
3.
Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).
4.
Schedule of unit prices.
5.
Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final).
6.
List of Contractor's staff assignments.
7.
Copies of building permits.
8.
Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance
of the Work.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01 2900 - 3

CA 15-001
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Initial progress report.

Report of preconstruction conference.
Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
Performance and payment bonds.
Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.
J.
Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuance of the Certificate of

Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for
portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1.
Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2.
This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
K.
Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting
documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the
following:
1.
Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2.
Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof
that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3.
Updated statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4.
AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
5.
AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
6.
AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
7.
Evidence that claims have been settled.
8.
Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of
date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed
responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
9.
Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
01 2900 - 4
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 01 3100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project

including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
General project coordination procedures.
2.
Administrative and supervisory personnel.
3.
Coordination drawings.
4.
Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).
5.
Project meetings.
B.
1.
Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule: Section 01 3200
2.
General Installation and Field-Engineering Services: Section 01 7300 "Execution."
3.
Closeout of the Contract: Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures."
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Request for Interpretation (RFI): Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification
of the Contract Documents.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the

Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1.
Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
2.
Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
3.
Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to
ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and
repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.
B.
Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees
at meetings.
1.
Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
C.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative

procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1.
Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2.
Preparation of Submittals Schedule.
01 3100 - 1

CA 15-001
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
1.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Preparation of the Schedule of Values.

Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
Delivery and processing of submittals.
Progress meetings.
Preinstallation conferences.
Project closeout activities.
Startup and adjustment of systems.
Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
1.
Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually
incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials
that are designated as Owner's property.
COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A.
Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare Coordination Drawings where installation is not

completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates
coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials
fabricated or installed by more than one entity.
1.
Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to
indicate and resolve conflicts.
a.
Use the Construction Documents as the basis for preparation of Coordination
Drawings. Prepare plans, sections, elevations, and details as necessary to
demonstrate relationships between various systems and components.
b.
Coordinate the incorporation of trade-specific information into the Coordination
Drawings by all applicable sub-contractors in the sequence that best facilitates
coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between components to
be installed before submitting for review.
c.
Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,
structural, civil, mechanical, electrical, and special systems.
d.
Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated
replacement of components during the life of the installation.
e.
Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers,
valves, and other controls.
f.
Indicate required installation sequences.
g.
Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that
appear to conflict with proposed equipment and clearance requirements. Provide
sketches of alternative schemes derived to resolve such conflicts.
B.
Modification of Architectural Features: When development of Coordination Drawings reveals

that certain conflicts cannot be resolved without changing ceiling layouts, heights, wall
locations, or modification of other Architectural features, inform Architect and request
instructions.
1.
Do not modify Architectural features without obtaining approval from the Architect.
2.
Revise Coordination Drawings as necessary to preserve the architectural intent
expressed in the construction documents.
C.
Review: Architect will review Coordination Drawings to confirm that the Work is being
coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are the Contractor's responsibility.
If Architect determines Coordination Drawings are not sufficient in scope or detail, make
necessary additions and modifications and resubmit.
D.
Coordination Drawing Submittals: Prepare Coordination Drawings in accordance with

requirements of Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures."
01 3100 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
E.
Architect will furnish Contractor electronic data files of the Drawings for use in preparing
coordination drawings, subject to the requirements in Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures."
F.
Schedule: Complete Coordination Drawings prior to submitting Shop Drawings for structural
framing, and overhead fire protection, plumbing, mechanical, and electrical rough-in operations.
G.
Cost Ramifications: Preparation of Coordination Drawings and discovery of conflicts requiring

resolution shall not be constituted as opportunity to submit claims for increased cost, provided
resolution does not result in a substantial increase in the scope of Work.
1.6
KEY PERSONNEL
A.
1.7
Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key
personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project
site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone
numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and email addresses.
Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the
absence of individuals assigned to Project.
1.
Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each
temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.
REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)
A.
General: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents,
and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in
the form specified.
1.
RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will
be returned with no response.
2.
Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.
B.
Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the
following:
1.
Project name.
2.
Date.
3.
Name of Contractor.
4.
Name of Architect.
5.
RFI number, numbered sequentially.
6.
Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
7.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
8.
Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
9.
Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time
or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
10. Contractor's signature.
11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data,
Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing
interpretation.
a.
Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions,
thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials,
assemblies, and attachments.
C.
RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above,
acceptable to Architect.
1.
Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.
D.
Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it.
Allow 10 days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be
considered as received the following working day.
01 3100 - 3

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
1.
The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a.
Requests for approval of submittals.
b.
Requests for approval of substitutions.
c.
Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents.
d.
Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
e.
Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
f.
Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.
2.
Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will start again.
Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."
a.
If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI
response.
3.
E.
On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response
to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within 7 days if Contractor disagrees
with response.
F.
RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log at each Progress Meeting. Include the following:
1.
Project name.
2.
Name and address of Contractor.
3.
Name and address of Architect.
4.
RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
5.
RFI description.
6.
Date the RFI was submitted.
7.
Date Architect's response was received.
8.
Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
Proposal Request, as appropriate.
1.8
PROJECT MEETINGS
A.
General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
2.
Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3.
Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the
meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 3 days of
the meeting.
B.
Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting

construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after
execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient
location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
1.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned
parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar
with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2.
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a.
Tentative construction schedule.
b.
Phasing.
c.
Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
01 3100 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
z.
3.
C.

CA 15-001
Designation of key personnel and their duties.

Lines of communication.
Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
Procedures for RFIs.
Procedures for testing and inspecting.
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
Distribution of the Contract Documents.
Submittal procedures, including Submittals Schedule.
Preparation of Record Documents.
Use of the premises.
Work restrictions.
Working hours.
Owner's occupancy requirements.
Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
Procedures for moisture and mold control.
Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.
Construction waste management and recycling.
Parking availability.
Office, work, and storage areas.
Equipment deliveries and priorities.
First aid.
Security.
Progress cleaning.
Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes.
Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each

construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1.
Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect
of scheduled meeting dates.
2.
Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a.
The Contract Documents.
b.
Options.
c.
Related RFIs.
d.
Related Change Orders.
e.
Purchases.
f.
Deliveries.
g.
Submittals.
h.
Review of mockups.
i.
Possible conflicts.
j.
Compatibility problems.
k.
Time schedules.
l.
Weather limitations.
m.
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
n.
Warranty requirements.
o.
Compatibility of materials.
p.
Acceptability of substrates.
q.
Temporary facilities and controls.
r.
Space and access limitations.
s.
Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
t.
Testing and inspecting requirements.
u.
Installation procedures.
01 3100 - 5

CA 15-001
v.
w.
x.
y.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Coordination with other work.

Required performance results.
Protection of adjacent work.
Protection of construction and personnel.
Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including

required corrective measures and actions.
Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present.
Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the
Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at [weekly] [biweekly] [monthly] [regular]

<Insert appropriate interval> intervals.
1.
Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
2.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized
to conclude matters relating to the Work.
3.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,
in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction
behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do
so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1)
Review schedule for next period.
b.
4.
5.
01 3100 - 6
Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1)
Interface requirements.
2)
Sequence of operations.
3)
Status of submittals.
4)
Deliveries.
5)
Off-site fabrication.
6)
Access.
7)
Site utilization.
8)
Temporary facilities and controls.
9)
Progress cleaning.
10) Quality and work standards.
11) Status of correction of deficient items.
12) Field observations.
13) Status of RFIs.
14) Status of proposal requests.
15) Pending changes.
16) Status of Change Orders.
17) Pending claims and disputes.
18) Documentation of information for payment requests.
Minutes: Record the meeting minutes.

Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
a.

CA 15-001
Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each

progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized.
Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

01 3100 - 7
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 01 3200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1.
Submittals Schedule.
2.
Start-Up Construction Schedule.
3.
4.
Daily construction reports.
5.
Field condition reports.
6.
Special reports.
B.
1.
Schedule of Values: Section 01 2900 "Payment Procedures."
2.
Meeting and Conference Minutes: Section "Project Management and Coordination."
3.
Submitting Schedules and Reports: Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures."
4.
Submitting Schedules of Tests and Inspections: Section 01 4000 "Quality
Requirements."
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,
and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.
1.
Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the
planned early start and finish times.
2.
Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3.
Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B.
CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction
project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations
determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
C.
Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network
schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
D.
Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
E.
Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1.
Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a
jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet
schedule milestones and Contract completion date.
2.
Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the
early start of the successor activity.
3.
Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely
affecting the planned Project completion date.
F.
Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction

element.
01 3200 - 1

CA 15-001
G.
1.4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.

ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Submittals Schedule: Initial and Final Submittals. Comply with requirements in Part 2.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Start-Up Construction Schedule.
B.
Preliminary Network Diagram: Large enough to show entire network for entire construction
period. Show logic ties for activities.
C.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule
for entire construction period.
D.
CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit two copies of each of the following
computer-generated reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number,
activity description, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late
start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days.
1.
Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or
actual start date if known.
2.
Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in
ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if
known.
3.
Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of

subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required
schedules and reports.
1.
Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties
involved.
2.
Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
A.
Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates

required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering,
manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.
1.
Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and
2.
Comply with the requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for each
line-item submittal on the schedule.
3.
Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with Start-Up Construction Schedule. Include
submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to
maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time
for manufacture or fabrication.
4.
Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
01 3200 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.2

CA 15-001
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A.
General:
1.
Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in (Associated General Contractors of
America) AGC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling."
2.
Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to
date of Final Completion.
a.
Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that
shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
3.
Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each
principal element of the Work. Comply with the following:
a.
Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless
specifically allowed by Architect.
b.
Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items
and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in
schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals,
approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
c.
Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in
Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review
times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.
d.
Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 10 days for startup and testing.
e.
Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
f.
Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for punch list and
final completion.
4.
Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract

Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is
affected.
a.
Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.
b.
Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed
by Owner.
c.
Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product.
Include delivery date indicated in Division 01 Section "Summary." Delivery dates
indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.
d.
Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product.
1)
Notify Owner of required delivery date.
e.
Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
1)
Coordination with existing construction.
2)
Limitations of continued occupancies.
3)
Uninterruptible services.
4)
Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
5)
Use of premises restrictions.
6)
Provisions for future construction.
7)
Seasonal variations.
8)
Environmental control.
f.
Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of
the Work, including, but not limited to, the following:
1)
Subcontract awards.
2)
Submittals.
3)
Purchases.
4)
Mockups.
5)
Fabrication.
01 3200 - 3

CA 15-001
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
g.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Sample testing.
Deliveries.
Installation.
Tests and inspections.
Adjusting.
Curing.
Startup and placement into final use and operation.
Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion
of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be
sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the
following:
1)
Structural completion.
2)
Permanent space enclosure.
3)
Completion of mechanical installation.
4)
Completion of electrical installation.
5)
Substantial Completion.
Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule,

including, but not limited to, commencement of the Work, Substantial Completion, and
Final Completion.
Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to
occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following
issues:
a.
Unresolved issues.
b.
Unanswered RFIs.
c.
Rejected or unreturned submittals.
d.
Notations on returned submittals.
Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 15 or more days behind
the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by
which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to
working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance,
and date by which recovery will be accomplished.
Computer Software: Prepare schedules using a program that has been developed
specifically to manage construction schedules.
B.
Start-Up Construction Schedule:

1.
Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule
within 7 days of date established for commencement of the Work.
2.
Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first
workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction
activities for first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of
the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.
C.
Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule:

1.
General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.
2.
Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 15 days of date established for
commencement of the Work. Outline significant construction activities for the first 60
days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash
requirement prediction based on indicated activities.
3.
CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a computerized, timescaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work.
a.
Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be
accepted for use no later than 30 days after date established for commencement of
the Work.
01 3200 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
b.
c.
d.
4.
d.
e.
6.
Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel,

including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using
CPM schedule information.
Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting
progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request
dates.
Use "one workday" as the unit of time. Include list of nonworking days and
holidays incorporated into the schedule.
CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work.
Using the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable
critical paths.
a.
Failure to include any activity required to complete the Work shall not excuse
Contractor from completing the Work within applicable completion dates,
regardless of Architect's acceptance of Construction Schedule.
b.
Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and
relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time
frames for the following activities:
1)
Preparation and processing of submittals.
2)
Mobilization and demobilization.
3)
Purchase of materials.
4)
Delivery.
5)
Fabrication.
6)
Utility interruptions.
7)
Installation.
8)
Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities.
9)
Testing.
c.
5.

CA 15-001
Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim
completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with
Contract milestone dates.
Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, timescaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as
often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the
Contract Time.
Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network;
locate paths with most float near the edges.
1)
Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the
critical path.
Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its
submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the
effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.
Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare an initial network diagram from a list of straight "early
start-total float" sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the
following:
a.
Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.
b.
Description of activity.
c.
Principal events of activity.
d.
Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.
e.
Early and late start dates.
f.
Early and late finish dates.
g.
Activity duration in workdays.
h.
Total float or slack time.
i.
Average size of workforce.
j.
Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the Schedule of Values).
01 3200 - 5

CA 15-001
7.
2.3
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated

reports showing the following:
a.
Identification of activities that have changed.
b.
Changes in early and late start dates.
c.
Changes in early and late finish dates.
d.
Changes in activity durations in workdays.
e.
Changes in the critical path.
f.
Changes in total float or slack time.
g.
Changes in the Contract Time.
REPORTS
A.
Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site:
1.
List of subcontractors at Project site.
2.
List of separate contractors at Project site.
3.
Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
4.
Equipment at Project site.
5.
Material deliveries.
6.
High and low temperatures and general weather conditions.
7.
Accidents.
8.
Meetings and significant decisions.
9.
Unusual events (refer to special reports).
10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
11. Meter readings and similar recordings.
12. Emergency procedures.
13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
14. Change Orders received and implemented.
15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented.
16. Services connected and disconnected.
17. Equipment or system tests and startups.
18. Partial Completions and occupancies.
19. Substantial Completions authorized.
B.
Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and
the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for
interpretation. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with
recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
C.
Special Reports
1.
General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within 3 days of an occurrence.
Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.
2.
Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at
Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special
report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel,
evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in
advance when these events are known or predictable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A.
Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect

actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before submitting
monthly Application for Payment.
01 3200 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015
1.
2.
3.
B.

CA 15-001
Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
such meeting.
Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors,

testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know
schedule responsibility.
1.
Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
2.
When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in
the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their
assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction
activities.
01 3200 - 7
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 01 3300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings,
Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
B.
1.
Submitting Applications for Payment and Schedule of Values: Section 01 2900 "Payment
Procedures."
2.
Submitting Coordination Drawings: Division 01 Section "Project Management and
Coordination."
3.
Submitting and Distributing Meeting and Conference Minutes: Division 01 Section
"Project Management and Coordination."
4.
Submitting Schedules and Reports: Section 01 3200 "Construction Progress
Documentation."
5.
Submitting Test and Inspection Reports: Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements."
6.
Mockup Requirements: Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements."
7.
Comparable Products: Section 01 6000 "Product Requirements."
8.
Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data: Section 01 7839
"Project Record Documents."
9.
Submitting Warranties: Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures."
10. Submitting Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Section 01 7823 "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
11. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those
Sections.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require
Architect's responsive action.
B.
Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not
require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with
requirements.
C.
Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems
used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent
fixed-layout document format.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review
of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittals
have been approved by the Architect.
01 3300 - 1

CA 15-001
1.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
A.
General:
1.
Make submittals electronically, in text-searchable Portable Document Format (PDF),
unless Architect agrees to paper submittals for certain portions of the Work.
2.
Electronic copies of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's
use in preparing submittals.
3.
Reproduction and cost of reproduction of processed submittals for distribution to
concerned parties is Contractors responsibility.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

construction activities.
1.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,
and related activities that require sequential activity.
2.
Package each major category of submittals (Product Data; Shop Drawings) to include all
information requiring Architect's review (for example, do not make separate submittals for
individual products when several products are required; do not submit product data for
items being obtained from individual vendors when products from several vendors are
required to perform the work of the Section).
a.
Exception: Multiple-package, sequenced submittals for major work such as
structural steel are acceptable when a single submittal would hinder the progress
of the Work.
3.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a.
Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination
with other submittals until related submittals are received.
C.
Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress

Documentation" for compiling list of submittals with review time requirements coordinated with
1.
Submittals received prior to receipt of the initial Submittals Schedule will be rejected.
2.
Submittals received prior to the release time indicated on the Submittals Schedule will be
rejected.
D.
Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of
the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in
advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1.
Initial Review: Allow 20 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if
coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor
when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
a.
Multiple-Package Submittals: Allow 20 days for review of each sub-submittal in the
series.
2.
3.
E.
Resubmittal Review: Allow 20 days for review of each resubmittal.

Concurrent Consultant Review: Submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to
Architect and Architect's consultants to reduce time required for transit.
a.
Submittal will be returned to Contractor by Architect. Submittals returned to
Contractor by parties other than Architect are not valid.
Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1.
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2.
Provide a space on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval
markings and action taken by Architect.
3.
Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a.
Project name.
01 3300 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Date.
Name and address of Contractor.
Name and address of subcontractor.
Name and address of supplier.
Name of manufacturer.
Submittal number, including revision identifier.
1)
Use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point, then a
number to differentiate each distinct submittal required by the Section (e.g.,
06 1000.01). For resubmittals, add an alphabetic suffix after a second
decimal point (e.g., 06 1000.01.A).
i.
j.
k.
l.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
Other necessary identification.
F.
Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as
follows:
1.
Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal
requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling
navigation to each item.
2.
Name file with submittal number, as specified above. Include revision identifier.
3.
Provide means to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and
action taken by Architect.
4.
Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file
metadata:
a.
Project name.
b.
Submittal number.
c.
d.
Manufacturer name.
e.
Product name.
G.
Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract
Documents on submittals.
H.
Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling.
Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without
review, received from sources other than Contractor.
1.
Transmittal Form: Provide the following information:
a.
Project name.
b.
Date.
c.
Destination (To:).
d.
Source (From:).
e.
Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
f.
Submittal number.
g.
Submittal purpose and description.
h.
Specification Section number and title.
i.
j.
Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
k.
Remarks.
l.
Signature of transmitter.
2.
On an attached page, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than
those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in
the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations.
01 3300 - 3

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
I.
Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form as initial submittal.

1.
Note date and content of previous submittal.
2.
Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
3.
Make resubmittals until no further exceptions are taken by Architect.
J.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,

fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance
of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
1.6
CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S ELECTRONIC FILES

A.
General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's electronic files will be provided to
Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions:
1.
Contractor must execute Electronic File Transfer Agreement, a facsimile of which is
included at the end of this Section.
2.
Electronic files are provided for Contractor's convenience; their use is at the Contractor's
risk.
a.
There is no assurance information in electronic files is current, complete or
accurate.
1)
Field-verify all dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1.
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2.
Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3.
Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
b.
Manufacturer's product specifications.
c.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d.
Standard color charts.
e.
Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
f.
Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
g.
Printed performance curves.
h.
Operational range diagrams.
i.
Mill reports.
j.
Standard product operation and maintenance manuals.
k.
Compliance with specified referenced standards.
l.
Testing by recognized testing agency.
m.
Application of testing agency labels and seals.
n.
Notation of coordination requirements.
4.
5.
B.
Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

Paper Submittals: When allowed, submit 2 copies of Product Data. When submitting for
Concurrent Consultant Review, submit 2 copies to Consultant and 1 copy to Architect.
Architect will return 1 copy. Mark up and retain returned copy as a Project Record
Document.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
01 3300 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
1.
Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the

following information, as applicable:
a.
Dimensions.
b.
Identification of products.
c.
Fabrication and installation drawings.
d.
Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
e.
Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control
wiring.
1)
Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
2.
C.

CA 15-001
Shopwork manufacturing instructions.

Templates and patterns.
Schedules.
Design calculations.
Compliance with specified standards.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
Relationship to adjoining construction.
Seal and signature of professional engineer (when required).
Paper Submittals: When allowed, submit 2 copies of each Shop Drawing. When
submitting for Concurrent Consultant Review, submit 2 copies to Consultant and 1 copy
to Architect. Architect will return 1 copy. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a
Project Record Drawing.
a.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit
Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42
inches.
Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1.
Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories
together in one submittal package.
2.
Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a.
Generic description of Sample.
b.
Product name and name of manufacturer.
c.
Sample source.
d.
3.
Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a.
Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time
of use.
b.
Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property, are the property of Contractor.
4.
Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be
used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with
material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture
variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial
sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials;
complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and
pattern; color range sets; components used for independent testing and inspection.
a.
Number of Samples: Submit 2 sets of Samples. Architect will retain 1 Sample set;
the other will be returned.
01 3300 - 5

CA 15-001
1)
2)
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication

techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to
be demonstrated.
If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in
material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least two sets of
paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
D.
Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction

Progress Documentation."
E.
Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment
Procedures."
F.
Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment

Procedures."
G.
Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information in tabular form:
1.
Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying
products.
2.
Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
3.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
4.
Number of Copies: Submit 2 copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return 1 copy.
a.
Mark up and retain returned copy as a Project Record Document.
2.2
A.
Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project

Management and Coordination."
B.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section

C.
Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience
of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
D.
Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure
Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names
of firms and personnel certified.
E.
Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
F.
Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying

that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
G.
Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
H.
Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
01 3300 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
I.
Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect
for Project. Include the following information:
1.
Name of evaluation organization.
2.
Date of evaluation.
3.
Time period when report is in effect.
4.
Product and manufacturers' names.
5.
Description of product.
6.
Test procedures and results.
7.
Limitations of use.
J.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section
"Quality Requirements."
K.
Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
L.
Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during
installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
M.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized

service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:
1.
Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative
making report.
2.
Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3.
Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4.
Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
5.
Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
6.
Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7.
Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
N.
Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of
insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of
coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
O.
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to
Architect, except as required in "Action Submittals" Article.
2.3
DELEGATED DESIGN
A.
Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a

design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1.
If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a
written request for additional information to Architect.
B.
Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
submittals, submit statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for
each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a
design professional.
1.
Statement shall indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design
criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in
performing these services.
01 3300 - 7

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A.
Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for
compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with
approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2
ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A.
General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
1.
Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate
corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect's review of submittals is for
the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design
concept expressed in the Construction Documents. Review of submittals is not
conducted for the purpose of determining accuracy and completeness of other details
such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or
performance of equipment or systems. Architect's review does not constitute approval of
safety precautions or construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures. Approval of a specific item does not indicate approval of an assembly of
which the item is a component. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp
and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken.
B.
Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return
it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate
party.
C.
Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
without review.
D.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be
discarded.
01 3300 - 8
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 01 4000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.
B.
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1.
Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities
are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those
Sections may also cover production of standard products.
2.
Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other qualityassurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
3.
Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required
by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this
Section.
C.
1.
Scheduling Tests and Inspections: Section 01 3200 "Construction Progress
Documentation."
2.
Repair and Restoration of Construction Disturbed by Testing and Inspecting Activities:
Section 01 7300 "Execution."
3.
Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
B.
Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract
enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C.
Mockups: Full size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed
to verify selections made under sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to
show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified
installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved
mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
1.
Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from
the building but on the project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies and
subassemblies.
01 4000 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
D.
Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation
of the Work and for completed Work.
E.
Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
1.
NRTL: A Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
2.
NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to (National Institutes of Standards)
NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program.
F.
Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an

employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1.
Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must
be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name,
such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively
to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.
G.
Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a
minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with
special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.4
CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A.
Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the
standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels,
comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are
different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B.
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision
before proceeding.
1.5
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockup, provide plans, sections, and elevations,
indicating materials and size of mockup construction.
1.
Indicate manufacturers and model names and numbers (if applicable) of individual
components.
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B.
Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:
1.
Date of issue.
2.
Project title and number.
3.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5.
Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6.
Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
8.
Complete test or inspection data.
01 4000 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
C.
1.7

CA 15-001
Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.

Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling

work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
C.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar

to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
D.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated

for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
E.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this
Project in material, design, and extent.
F.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the

experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented
according to (ASTM International) ASTM E 329 and with additional qualifications specified in
individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to
authorities.
G.
Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project.
H.
Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing

for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the
following:
1.
Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a.
Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.
b.
Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing
results to prevent delaying the Work.
c.
Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory
mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with
performance requirements.
d.
Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will
perform same tasks for Project.
01 4000 - 3

CA 15-001
e.
f.
2.
I.
Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods
of construction indicated for the completed Work.
When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and
laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection,
and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests
and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies
with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1.
Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
a.
Erect integrated exterior mockup with finish materials facing south.
2.
3.
4.
Notify Architect 7 days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before ordering materials, starting work,
fabrication, or construction.
a.
Allow 10 days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
5.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work.
a.
Cover mock-ups to protect them from deterioration and weathering.
6.
7.
Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.

Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by
Architect in writing.
Integrated Exterior Mockup: Construct integrated exterior mockup [as indicated on
Drawings] [in accordance with approved Shop Drawings]. Coordinate installation of
exterior envelope materials and products for which mockups are required in individual
specification sections, along with supporting materials, including, but not limited to, the
following:
a.
Framing, Section 06 1000 "Rough Carpentry."
b.
Sheathing, Section 06 1600 "Sheathing."
c.
Water-resistive barrier, Section 07 2500 "Weather Barriers."
d.
Continuous exterior wall insulation, Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation."
e.
Decorative CMU, Section 04 2000 "Unit Masonry."
f.
Brick, Section 04 2000 "Unit Masonry."
g.
Metal wall panels, Section 07 4213 "Metal Wall Panels."
h.
Metal flashing and trim, Section 07 6200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
i.
Storefront framing, Section 08 4113 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefront."
j.
Fiberglass window, Section 08 5413 "Fiberglass Windows and Doors."
k.
Glass, Section 08 8000 "Glazing."
l.
Sealants, Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."
8.
1.8
Design Development
October 02, 2015
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,

Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1.
Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged
to perform.
01 4000 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.
B.

CA 15-001
Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are
Contractor's responsibility. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by
authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
1.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required
by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor
by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
2.
Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality-control services.
a.
Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed.
Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service to Architect.
Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal
Procedures."
D.
Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
E.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of

duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1.
Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
2.
Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
3.
Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4.
Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar qualitycontrol service through Contractor.
5.
Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
6.
Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
F.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1.
Access to the Work.
2.
Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3.
Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4.
Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5.
Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
01 4000 - 5

CA 15-001
6.
G.
1.9
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance

and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1.
Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A.
Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified special inspector as required by

authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows:
1.
Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures
and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
2.
Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in
the Work during performance of its services.
3.
Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
4.
Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which
includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
5.
Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
6.
Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A.
General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1.
Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 01 Section "Execution."
B.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for quality-control services.
01 4000 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
B.
1.
Work Restrictions: Section 01 1000 "Summary."
2.
Progress Cleaning Requirements: Section 01 7300 "Execution."
3.
Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity
requirements for products in those Sections.
4.
Detailed Erosion Control Requirements: Section <Insert Section No.> "Temporary
Erosion and Sedimentation Control."
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is

complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all
openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.
USE CHARGES
A.
General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included
in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost,
including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing
agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Sewer Service: Pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction
operations.
C.
Water Service: Pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction
operations.
D.
Electric Power Service: Pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all
entities for construction operations.
1.5
A.
Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for
construction personnel.
B.
Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of (National Fire Protection

Association) NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel
responsible for management of fire-prevention program.
C.
Traffic Control Plan: Include phasing for the entire duration of the project.
D.
Water, Erosion, and Sedimentation Control Plan: Submit prior to start of construction, including
but not limited to:
1.
Description of the sequence of construction.
01 5000 - 1

CA 15-001
2.
3.
1.6
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Description of control facilities. Indicate the location of vehicle tracking control areas,
straw bales, sediment traps, silt fence, and other facilities.
Description of inspection and maintenance procedures.
a.
Comply with "Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual, Volume 3, Best Management
Practices", State of Colorado Urban Drainage and Flood Control District.
b.
Prepare schedules for accomplishing all required temporary and permanent
erosion control work and submit them for acceptance at the preconstruction
conference. Include all construction activities within the project, haul roads, borrow
pits, storage and pallet sites, and the plan for disposal of waste material. Do not
start Work until temporary erosion control schedules have been accepted.
c.
Where required, submit plan to Authorities Having Jurisdiction for approval prior to
commencing Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electric Service: Comply with (National Electrical Contractors Association) NECA, (National
Electrical Manufacturing Association) NEMA, and (Underwriters Laboratory) UL standards and
regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with (National Fire
Protection Association) NFPA 70.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Temporary Use of Permanent Services: Installer of each permanent service shall assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during
construction before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inchthick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric
fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line
posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top rails.
B.
Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric
fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line
posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails.
Provide galvanized steel bases for supporting posts.
C.
Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Section 06 1000 "Rough Carpentry."
D.
Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch thick by 48 inches wide by maximum available lengths;
regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with (ASTM International) ASTM C 1396.
E.
Insulation: Kraft-faced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool;
with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.
F.
Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections.
G.
Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10 mils minimum thickness, with flamespread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84.
H.
Dust Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches.
I.
Dust Palliative: Provide compound that is either miscible in water or can be directly applied to
surfaces without water.
01 5000 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.2

CA 15-001
1.
Compounds with binders miscible in water:

a.
Resin emulsion.
b.
SS-1 type asphaltic emulsion.
c.
Material composed primarily of lignin sulfonate.
d.
Other binder miscible in water which is non-corrosive and effective as a dust
palliative.
2.
Compounds with binders that are applied to the surface without water:
a.
Product prepared from crude petroleum that is effective as a dust palliative.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A.
Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature
controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
B.
Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel.

Keep office clean and orderly.
C.
Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to
accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.
1.
Store combustible materials apart from building.
2.3
EQUIPMENT
A.
Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
B.
HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,
self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1.
Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating
units is prohibited.
2.
Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
3.
Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for
temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille in
system and remove at end of construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
B.
Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A.
General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1.
Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
B.
Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.

1.
Connect temporary sewers to local system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction.
01 5000 - 3

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
D.
Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location,
operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
E.
Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from
adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
F.
Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction

activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to
produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
G.
Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size,
capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
H.
Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
1.
Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
I.
Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by
all construction personnel. Install one telephone line for each field office.
1.
Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
a.
Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer in
each field office.
J.
3.3
2.
At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.

a.
Police and fire departments.
b.
Ambulance service.
c.
Contractor's home office.
d.
Architect's office.
e.
Engineers' offices.
f.
Owner's office.
g.
Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
3.
Provide superintendent and other key personnel with cellular telephone and portable twoway radio for use when away from field office.
Internet Service: Broadband modem, router and ISP, equipped with hardware firewall,
providing minimum 384 Kbps upload and 1 Mbps download speeds at each computer.
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with the following:

1.
Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction
area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136.
Comply with NFPA 241.
2.
Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial
Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use
permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
B.
Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.
Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
2.
Furnish, install, maintain, and remove temporary traffic control signs and devices for
vehicular and pedestrian traffic.
01 5000 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
a.

CA 15-001
Barricades and markers shall meet the requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation, Federal Highway Administrations "Manual on Uniform Traffic
Control Devices," the M & S Standard plans of Colorado Department of
Transportation, and the requirements of the local Traffic Engineer for work in the
streets.
3.
Provide traffic control flag persons as necessary during entire period of construction.
a.
Flag-persons shall be properly qualified, equipped, and trained per the Manual on
Uniform Traffic Control Devices.
4.
Maintain a minimum of one 12-foot lane on all adjacent streets at all times during
construction. Traffic may be disrupted through the use of flag persons to accommodate
the safe movement of construction related vehicles in, out and across the through traffic
lanes.
a.
Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
C.
Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.

1.
Control construction-related parking to preclude interference with public traffic and
parking, access by emergency vehicles, Owner's operations, and construction
operations.
a.
Monitor parking areas for construction personnel's private vehicles to preclude
them from becoming a public nuisance or endangering public safety.
D.
Dust Control: Use one of the following, or both, methods:

1.
Water Method:
a.
Apply water by means of pipelines and sprinklers, or by mobile units with a
minimum tank capacity of 1000 gallons.
1)
If mobile units are utilized, they shall be present at site at all times and tanks
shall be kept full, except when in-use.
b.
2.
Apply water for compacting embankment material, fill materials, sub-base, base,
and surfacing material, and for controlling dust by means of pressure type
distribution or pipelines with a spray system, or hoses with nozzles that will ensure
a uniform application of water.
Resin Emulsion Method:

a.
Provide resin emulsion products composed of 56 to 63 percent semi-liquid
petroleum resin and water with emulsifier, readily miscible with normal or hard
water. Do not use resin emulsion which has been stored for more than 3 months
unless tested and found acceptable.
1)
Mix binders with water at the rate of 4 to 19 parts of water to one part binder,
the exact rate to be determined by dust control requirements. Mix by placing
binder and water in spreading equipment or by other mixing method that will
produce equivalent results.
b.
Apply the mixture with a spray system or pressure type asphalt distributors at an
approximate rate of 0.2 to 0.8 gallons per sq. yd. as required for effective dust
control.
E.
Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
1.
Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining
properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
2.
Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
F.
Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs.
Install signs where required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project.
Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
1.
Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.
01 5000 - 5

CA 15-001
2.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.
G.
Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 7419

"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
1.
Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction
operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with
Section 01 7300 "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements.
H.
Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
1.
Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and
equipment" and not temporary facilities.
I.
Temporary Use of New Elevator: Refer to Division 14 Sections for temporary use of new
elevators.
J.
Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders
are not adequate.
K.
Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering
of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance.
3.4
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A.
Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct

construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that
minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable
effects.
1.
Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."
B.
Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: As specified in Division 31 Section "Temporary

Erosion and Sedimentation Control."
C.
Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,
according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Temporarily divert, detain or otherwise control drainage through the construction area as
construction progresses. Determine the means to control alluvial or subsurface flow,
springs, surface runoff, irrigation flow, excessive soil moisture, and any and all other
forms of water which may occur during normal, drought, or flood conditions. Control
water (surface water and/or groundwater) in such a manner that recently constructed
portions of the project are not damaged by either normal or flood flows. Repair any such
damage at no cost to the Owner. Re-establish soil, top soil, grading, sod or grass seed,
replace damaged concrete work or riprap, and remove silt or debris deposited within the
project area by flows of water.
a.
Use berms, dikes, dams, sediment basins and/or traps, geotextiles, stone checks,
hay bales, silt fences, surface roughing, mats and nets, aggregate, mulch, grasses,
slope drains, and other approved measures at locations necessary to control
erosion and water pollution.
1)
Temporarily relocate drainage ways, by-pass the flow, dewater excavated
areas, or otherwise control drainage so the Project can be constructed in
accordance with the Drawings.
2)
Stabilize cut and fill slopes with seeding, mulching, or other appropriate
measures where construction activity will not occur for a period of 14 or more
calendar days.
3)
Silt Fences: Set stakes, excavate 4 inch by 4 inch trench upslope of stakes,
place filter fabric, backfill and compact trench.
4)
Straw Bales: Excavate 4 inch deep trench the width of bale. Place bales in
trench with tight abutting ends. Stake each bale with two stakes.
01 5000 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
a)
5)
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove and replace sediment laden and ineffective erosion bales with
new straw bales.
Vehicle Tracking Control: Maintain regularly. Remove gravel that has

migrated onto public streets. Place additional gravel necessary to ensure
vehicle tracking control is functioning properly to remove mud from the tires
of construction equipment.
If Project is subject to a water quality permit, the quantities, locations, and

composition of discharges, the quantities of dredging and fills, and the erosion and
sediment control measures will be stated in the Permit. If changes from permit
conditions are anticipated, or if construction activities result in noncompliance,
submit the anticipated changes or noncompliance in a written report. Architect will
approve or disapprove the request for change, or detail the course of action after
non-compliance.
Provide temporary erosion and pollution control measures to manage unforeseen
conditions that develop during construction, or during an emergency situation, to
provide continuous erosion and sediment control for the duration of the Project.
Do not affect drainage patterns of adjacent property at any time during construction.
Repair damage to adjacent properties which results from the alteration of drainage
patterns, irrigation flows, alluvial or groundwater flows, or surface drainage.
Hazardous Materials: Use chemicals such as soil stabilizers, dust palliatives, sterilants,
growth inhibitors, fertilizers, and deicing salts, etc., during construction in accordance with
those materials' manufacturers' recommended application rates, frequency, and
instructions. Do not use, store, or stockpile such chemicals within 50 feet of the ordinary
high water line of any watercourse or impoundment. Where such chemicals are stored or
stockpiled, take spill prevention and containment measures to prevent the pollution of any
watercourse or impoundment due to accidental spills.
Do not store or stockpile any construction waste or salvable material, excavation excess
material, fill material, or construction equipment within 50 feet of the ordinary high water
line of any watercourse or impoundment.
Continuously maintain all erosion and sediment control measures so that they perform
their intended function during the construction of the project.
Install permanent erosion and sediment control measures at the earliest practical time.
Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during
construction until permanent vegetation has been established.
Remove water, erosion, and sedimentation control measures when no longer necessary
and approved by Authority Having Jurisdiction.
D.
Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around
excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy
rains.
E.
Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and
harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control
procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial
Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using
environmentally safe materials.
F.
Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure
fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by
entrance gates.
1.
Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined
sufficient to accommodate construction operations.
2.
Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized
personnel. Provide Owner with one set of keys.
01 5000 - 7

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
G.
Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially
completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,
vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.
H.
Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
I.
Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated
and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
J.
Covered Walkway: Erect structurally adequate, protective, covered walkway for passage of
individuals along adjacent public street(s). Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and
obstructions. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
K.
Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, inprogress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and
similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1.
Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate
temporary enclosures.
L.
Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with
NFPA 241.
1.
Prohibit smoking in construction areas.
2.
Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.
Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel
at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
4.
Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning
sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed.
Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
3.5
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A.
Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B.
Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1.
Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C.
Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D.
Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1.
Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2.
Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent
paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate
fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials
contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other
substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street
01 5000 - 8
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.

CA 15-001
paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having

jurisdiction.
At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in
Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures."
01 5000 - 9
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 01 6000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in
Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; and nameplate restrictions.
B.
1.
2.
Products Selected Under an Alternate: Section 01 2300 "Alternates."
3.
Requests for Substitutions: Section 01 2500 "Substitution Procedures."
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1.
Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2.
New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
products.
3.
Comparable Product: Product that is approved through submittal process to have
demonstrated the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or
exceed those of specified product.
B.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's

product is designated as the "Basis-of-Design Product," including make or model number or
other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, inservice performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of
evaluating comparable products by additional manufacturers named in the specification, and,
when additional manufacturers are not named, for evaluating comparable products proposed
by Contractor.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more

products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if
previously selected products were also options.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
01 6000 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
B.
Delivery and Handling:

1.
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
2.
Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
3.
Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4.
Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and
to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.
C.
Storage:
1.
Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
2.
Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3.
Store products that are subject to damage by the elements under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
4.
Store foam plastic away from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period
of installation and concealment.
5.
Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
6.
Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
1.6
PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a
particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
2.
Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide
specific rights for Owner.
B.
Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution.
1.
Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
2.
Refer to Divisions 02 through 49. Sections for specific content requirements and
particular requirements for submitting special warranties.
C.
Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A.
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
are free of hazardous materials in any form that can cause death, serious injury, disease, and
other long-lasting health effects, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at
time of installation.
1.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2.
Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
01 6000 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.
4.
5.

CA 15-001
Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish salient characteristics of products.
B.
Nameplates:
1.
Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer's or
producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products which will be
exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior.
2.
Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface or, where
required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface that is not
conspicuous.
3.
Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of serviceconnected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface which
is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. Provide the following information and other
essential operating data:
a.
Name of product and manufacturer.
b.
Model and serial number.
c.
Capacity.
d.
Speed.
e.
Ratings.
f.
Power characteristics (where applicable).
g.
(Underwriters Laboratory) UL label or compliance (where applicable).
C.
Named Manufacturers and Products: In general, where manufacturers and products are
named, hyperlinks to product information on the manufacturer's Website are incorporated.
Architect does not guarantee that links lead to products that comply with the specified
requirements or are comparable to a specified Basis-of-Design product.
1.
Provide products that comply with specified requirements.
D.
Product Selection Procedures:

1.
Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named
product, provide it complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for
Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
2.
Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the
named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or
substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
3.
Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers who produce
comparable products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.
Substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
4.
Basis-of-Design Product with Restricted List: Where Specifications designate a Basis-ofDesign product and include a list of manufacturers who produce comparable products,
provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Substitutions for
Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
5.
Basis-of-Design Products: Where Specifications name specific Basis-of-Design
products, the design is based on the specific product(s) named. When additional
manufacturers are not named, the named product may have unique characteristics that
cannot be duplicated; however alternative comparable products will be considered, under
the conditions that follow. Proposed comparable products may be acceptable, provided
their details and characteristics comply with size and profile requirements, and material
and performance standards. The characteristics of the Basis-of-Design Product establish
the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance,
physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating
comparable products.
01 6000 - 3

CA 15-001
a.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Comparable Products:
1)
Submit proposed comparable product(s) for evaluation by Architect at least
14 days prior to time contract for the product must be executed.
2)
Select comparable products that comply with the Basis-of-Design Product's
characteristics, or that accomplish the Basis-of-Design Product's purpose by
alternative means.
3)
Submit samples of proposed comparable product(s), displayed side-by-side
with samples of Basis-of-Design products.
4)
Architect will determine whether proposed comparable product is acceptable.
Architect is not obligated to prove non-equivalence of proposed comparable
products.
E.
Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications state "match Architect's sample," provide
a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision
will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
1.
If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution
Procedures" for proposal of product.
F.
Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with
requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's
product line that includes both standard and premium items.
01 6000 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 01 7300 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of

the Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Construction layout.
2.
Field engineering and surveying.
3.
Installation of the Work.
4.
Cutting and patching.
5.
Progress cleaning.
6.
Starting and adjusting.
7.
Protection of installed construction.
8.
Correction of the Work.
B.
1.
Submitting Surveys: Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures."
2.
Submitting Final Property Survey with Project Record Documents: Section 01 7700
"Closeout Procedures."
3.
Recording of Owner-Accepted Deviations from Indicated Lines and Levels: Section
01 7700 "Closeout Procedures."
4.
Final Cleaning: Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures."
5.
Patching Penetrations in Fire-Rated Construction: Section 07 8413 "Penetration
Firestopping."
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of

other work.
B.
Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after
installation of other work.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Cutting and Patching Plans: Submit plans describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the
time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:
1.
Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching.
2.
Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building
appearance and other significant visual elements.
3.
Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform
patching work.
4.
Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
5.
Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting
and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be
relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services
and systems will be disrupted.
EXECUTION
01 7300 - 1

CA 15-001
1.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
A.
Certified Surveys: Submit 2 copies signed by land surveyor.
B.
Final Property Survey: Submit 2 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice
in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying
services of the kind indicated.
B.
Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of
construction elements.
1.
Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of
locations and details of cutting and await directions from the Architect before proceeding.
Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and
patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or
increase deflection
2.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components
in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results
in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
3.
Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or
components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in
reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance
or decreased operational life or safety.
4.
Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a
manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities.
Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually
unsatisfactory manner.
C.
Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved
in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential
interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before
proceeding.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written

recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials
so as not to void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B.
In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed
surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible.
1.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when
installed, will provide a match acceptable to the Architect for the visual and functional
performance of in-place materials.
01 7300 - 2
EXECUTION
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical
systems, and other construction affecting the Work.
1.
Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services,
and other utilities.
2.
Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities
serving Project site.
B.
Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the
Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance.
1.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.
2.
Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
3.
Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
4.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or
relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances
located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
C.
Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown

diagrammatically on Drawings.
D.
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control
of the Contractor, submit a Request for Interpretation (RFI) to Architect according to
requirements in Section 01 3100 "Project Management and Coordination."
3.3
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A.
Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B.
General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.
1.
Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2.
Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
EXECUTION
01 7300 - 3

CA 15-001
3.
4.
5.
6.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.

Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established
by authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill
and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.
D.
Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
E.
Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name
and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log
available for reference by Architect.
3.4
FIELD ENGINEERING
A.
Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar
reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and
control points during construction operations.
1.
Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written
approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points
promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to
Architect before proceeding.
2.
Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base
replacements on the original survey control points.
B.
Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,
referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1.
Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
2.
Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide
temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
a.
Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked
construction to its original condition.
C.
Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work
requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations,
angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.
D.
Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing
significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by
land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately
positioned as shown on the survey.
1.
Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing
improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours,
and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point.
2.
Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with
authorities having jurisdiction as the official property survey.
01 7300 - 4
EXECUTION
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.5

CA 15-001
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2.
Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
3.
Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
4.
Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in
unoccupied spaces.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C.
Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or

loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E.
Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.
G.
Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate
size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned
with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify
size and type required for load conditions.
1.
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
2.
Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3.
Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
H.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
I.
Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.6
CUTTING AND PATCHING

A.
Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching.
Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1.
Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
B.
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
C.
Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
EXECUTION
01 7300 - 5

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
D.
Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1.
In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2.
Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3.
Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
4.
Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections
when required by cutting and patching operations.
5.
Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6.
Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
E.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections, where applicable.
1.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
2.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of
patching and refinishing.
a.
Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing
materials.
b.
Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
3.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
a.
Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer
and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply
final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide
additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
4.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an evenplane surface of uniform appearance.
Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition.
5.
F.
3.7
Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,
mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1.
Comply with requirements in (National Fire Protection Association) NFPA 241 for removal
of combustible waste materials and debris.
2.
Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if
the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
01 7300 - 6
EXECUTION
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
3.
Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
a.
Utilize containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.
4.
Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has
worked.
B.
Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C.
Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1.
Remove liquid spills promptly.
2.
Where dust will impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire
work area, as appropriate.
D.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed
surfaces.
E.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F.
Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to
ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G.
Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials
down sewers or into waterways.
H.
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through

the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J.
Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the

construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or
otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.8
STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A.
Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove

malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B.
Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation
without binding.
C.
Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 01 4000

"Quality Requirements."
3.9
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
EXECUTION
01 7300 - 7

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
C.
Do not cause deterioration or damage to adjacent properties or utilities, public or private,

directly or indirectly.
D.
Notify Architect and Owner immediately when any construction, new or existing, building, or
grounds elements, are damaged through fire, water, wind, or construction activities.
E.
Construction not specifically required to be modified or removed shall remain undisturbed

throughout the execution of the work.
1.
Provide appropriate means of protection necessary to accomplish this objective.
2.
Provide protection from natural elements.
F.
Provide, install, and maintain shoring, bracing, and other temporary construction necessary for
the protection of existing construction to remain, and as required for the safety of personnel and
public.
G.
Handle mechanical and electrical equipment required to be removed and reinstalled to

accommodate Work with care; restore to full operation and function. Notify Architect
immediately if any equipment intended for relocation and reuse cannot be removed and reinstalled without damage which will render it unable to function as intended.
H.
Protect existing sod, trees, plants, bushes, ground cover, and landscaping not scheduled for
removal.
1.
Restore or replace damaged landscape materials and elements upon completion of
construction operations.
a.
Restore damaged lawn areas, whether damaged by construction activities or lack
of water, by proper soil preparation and treatment, grading, filling, and laying new
sod.
I.
Repair damage to irrigation systems in the vicinity of construction unless documented as preexisting.
1.
Inspect and test existing system in presence of Owner to establish performance criteria
for the re-established system following construction.
a.
Notify Owner prior to dismantling portions of existing irrigation systems.
J.
Take precautions to protect existing pavement from damage due to vehicle loads, parking, and
storage.
1.
Schedule loading to minimize pavement material consolidation during hot weather.
Distribute wheel loads to the greatest extent possible.
2.
Restore or replace damaged pavement upon completion of construction operations.
3.10
CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A.
Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and
finishes.
1.
Repair includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching-up with
matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B.
Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C.
Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be
repaired without visible evidence of repair.
D.
Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components
that cannot be repaired.
E.
Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
01 7300 - 8
EXECUTION
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 01 7419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1.
Recycling nonhazardous construction waste.
2.
Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.
B.
1.
Environmental-Protection Measures During Construction: Section 01 5000 "Temporary
Facilities and Controls."
2.
Site Clearing Waste: Section 31 1000 "Site Clearing."
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting
from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes
packaging.
B.
Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,
recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in

preparation for reuse.
1.4
A.
1.5
Recycle Goals: Owner's goal is to salvage and recycle as much nonhazardous construction
waste as possible.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 30 days of date established for the Notice to
Proceed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods
and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of Waste
Management Coordinator.
2.
Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its
disposition.
3.
Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of
containers and bins needed to avoid delays.
01 7419 - 1

CA 15-001
4.
5.
1.7
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and
disposal facilities.
Review waste management requirements for each trade.
WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A.
General: Develop a waste management plan according to (ASTM International) ASTM E 1609
and requirements of this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification and waste reduction
work plan.
B.
Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of site-clearing and construction
waste generated by the Work.
C.
Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be recycled or
disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, means of recovery,
and handling and transportation procedures.
1.
Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled
materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
2.
Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include
name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.
3.
Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating
recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated
location on Project site where materials separation will be located.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A.
General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers,

storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management
plan during the entire duration of the Contract.
1.
Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for operation,
termination, and removal requirements.
B.
Waste Management Coordinator: Assign a waste management coordinator to be responsible

for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan.
Coordinator shall be present at Project site full time for duration of Project.
C.
Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management

procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site.
1.
Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal
return.
2.
Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review
plan procedures and locations established for recycling and disposal.
D.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and
used facilities.
1.
Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that
are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
2.
Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust
and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.
01 7419 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.2

CA 15-001
RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A.
General:
1.
Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
2.
Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives
received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor.
3.
Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to
recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives,
solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling
process.
4.
Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris.
Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical.
a.
Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste
until they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and
unacceptable materials at each container and bin.
1)
Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated
materials if found.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials.

Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent
windblown dust.
Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.
Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver
or processor.
B.
Packaging:
1.
Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry
location.
2.
Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
3.
Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from
Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood
pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
4.
Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements
for recycling wood.
C.
Site-Clearing Wastes: Chip brush, branches, and trees on-site.
D.
Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other
metals.
1.
Pulverize masonry to maximum 4-inch size.
2.
Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets.
E.
Metals: Separate metals by type.

1.
Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length.
2.
Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.
F.
Wood Materials:
1.
Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.
2.
Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.
G.
Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location.
1.
Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper
or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.
01 7419 - 3

CA 15-001
3.3
Design Development
October 02, 2015
DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A.
General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove
waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of
accumulate on-site.
2.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
B.
Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
01 7419 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,
but not limited to, the following:
1.
Substantial Completion procedures.
2.
Final Completion procedures.
3.
Warranties.
4.
Final cleaning.
B.
1.
Requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion: Section
01 2900 "Payment Procedures."
2.
Progress Cleaning: Section 01 7300 "Execution."
3.
Submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data: Section
01 7839 "Project Record Documents."
4.
Operation and Maintenance Manual Requirements: Section 01 7823 "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
5.
Requirements for Instructing Owner's Personnel: Section 01 7900 "Demonstration and
Training."
6.
Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements
for the Work in those Sections.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Punch List: A list, prepared by Contractor and amended by Architect, of Work remaining to be
completed and corrected subsequent to the date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems
used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent
fixed-layout document format.
1.4
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures:
1.
Prepare Punch List.
a.
Document reasons various items of Work are not complete.
b.
Indicate date each item of incomplete Work will be completed.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 7700 - 1

CA 15-001
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
B.
1.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Verify Owner is in receipt of permanent keys, security cores, and other security keys, to
have been delivered directly from door hardware supplier to Owner. Make final
changeover of permanent locks. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security
provisions.
Complete startup testing of systems.
Submit test/adjust/balance records.
Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
Advise Owner of utility changeover circumstances.
Submit occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance changeover information.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
Inspection: Submit written request to Architect, with Punch List attached, for inspection for
Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or
notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Following inspection, Architect will provide
amended Punch List of Work to be completed to Contractor. Architect will either prepare
Certificate of Substantial Completion (with Punch List attached), or notify Contractor of items on
Punch List that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
2.
Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.
FINAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final
Completion, complete the following:
1.
Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment
Procedures."
2.
Submit certified copy of Punch List, endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy
of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance.
3.
Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
4.
Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.
5.
Submit Project Record Documents.
6.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
B.
Inspection: Submit a written request to Architect for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt
of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Following inspection, Architect will either prepare a final Certificate for Payment
or will notify Contractor of Work that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be
issued.
1.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.6
PUNCH LIST
A.
Preparation: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction
operations for incomplete items and items needing correction, including if necessary, areas
disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1.
Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and
proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.
01 7700 - 2
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.
3.
4.
1.7

CA 15-001
Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
Include the following information at the top of each page:
a.
Project name.
b.
Date.
c.
Name of Architect.
d.
Name of Contractor.
e.
Page number.
Submit Punch List in PDF electronic file.
WARRANTIES
A.
Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the
Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated.
B.
Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 14 days of completion of

designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during
construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.
C.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
paper.
2.
Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
3.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"
Project name, and name of Contractor.
D.
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or

fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 7700 - 3

CA 15-001
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
C.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish
mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
1)
Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical
nameplates.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment[, elevator equipment,] and
similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and
other foreign substances.
Replace parts subjected to unusual operating conditions.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply
with requirements for new fixtures.
Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid
Project of rodents, insects, and other pests.
01 7700 - 4
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 01 7823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1.
Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
2.
Emergency manuals.
3.
Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
4.
Product maintenance manuals.
5.
Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
B.
1.
Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual
requirements for the Work in those Sections.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular

interaction.
B.
Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect
will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.
1.
Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of
each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments.
COORDINATION
A.
Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more

than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information
furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A.
Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1.
List of documents.
2.
List of systems.
3.
List of equipment.
4.
Table of contents.
B.
List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation
and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.
01 7823 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
C.
List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For
pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
D.
Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and
maintenance manual.
E.
Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual,
identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the
Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to (American
Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers) ASHRAE Guideline 4,
"Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."
2.2
MANUALS, GENERAL
A.
Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for
each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a
system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1.
Title page.
2.
Table of contents.
3.
Manual contents.
B.
Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:
1.
Subject matter included in manual.
2.
Name and address of Project.
3.
Name and address of Owner.
4.
Date of submittal.
5.
Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.
6.
7.
Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
C.
Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed
to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
1.
If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to
accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each
volume of the set.
D.
Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
E.
Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic
PDF file for each manual type required.
1.
Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where
scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable
file size.
2.
File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file
names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment
names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each
system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite
manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment
names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark
panel on opening file.
F.
Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.
1.
Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on
01 7823 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded
oversize sheets.
a.
If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize
data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Crossreference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper
operation or maintenance of equipment or system.
b.
Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents.
Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
c.
Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark
each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components
of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to
Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.
d.
Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose
diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.
e.
Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.
f.
Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
1)
If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages
and use as foldouts.
2.3
EMERGENCY MANUALS
A.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1.
Type of emergency.
2.
Emergency instructions.
3.
Emergency procedures.
B.
Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include
instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:
1.
Fire.
2.
Flood.
3.
Gas leak.
4.
Water leak.
5.
Power failure.
6.
Water outage.
7.
System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
8.
Chemical release or spill.
C.
Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,
and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for
notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
D.
Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1.
Instructions on stopping.
2.
Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
3.
Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
4.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
5.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
2.4
OPERATION MANUALS
A.
Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in

individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
2.
Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
3.
Operating standards.
4.
Operating procedures.
01 7823 - 3

CA 15-001
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Operating logs.
Wiring diagrams.
Control diagrams.
Piped system diagrams.
Precautions against improper use.
License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
B.
Descriptions: Include the following:

1.
Product name and model number.
2.
Manufacturer's name.
3.
Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4.
Equipment function.
5.
Operating characteristics.
6.
Limiting conditions.
7.
Performance curves.
8.
Engineering data and tests.
9.
Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C.
Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1.
Startup procedures.
2.
Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3.
Routine and normal operating instructions.
4.
Regulation and control procedures.
5.
6.
Normal shutdown instructions.
7.
Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8.
9.
D.
Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls
as installed.
E.
Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
identification.
2.5
PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and
sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C.
Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1.
Product name and model number.
2.
Manufacturer's name.
3.
Color, pattern, and texture.
4.
Material and chemical composition.
5.
Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D.
Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1.
Inspection procedures.
2.
Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3.
List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4.
Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
01 7823 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
5.

CA 15-001
Repair instructions.
E.
Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
F.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1.
Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
2.6
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A.
Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance
service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each
product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance
service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C.
Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation

including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1.
Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins.
2.
Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly
and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3.
Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4.
List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
D.
Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential
maintenance procedures:
1.
Test and inspection instructions.
2.
Troubleshooting guide.
3.
Precautions against improper maintenance.
4.
Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
5.
Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
6.
Demonstration and training video, when required.
E.
Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
1.
Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,
quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
2.
Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording
maintenance.
F.
Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G.
Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.
H.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1.
Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
01 7823 - 5

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MANUAL PREPARATION
A.
Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that

provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
B.
Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures

for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies
indicated.
C.
Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care
and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
1.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information
for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
2.
Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an
instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
E.
Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
1.
Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and
where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment
or systems.
F.
Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the

relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence
and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings
to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1.
Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
2.
Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Section 01 3100
"Project Record Documents."
G.
Comply with Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and
maintenance documentation.
01 7823 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 01 7839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents,
including the following:
1.
Record Drawings.
2.
Record Specifications.
3.
Record Product Data.
B.
1.
Final Property Survey: Section 01 7300 "Execution."
2.
General Closeout Procedures: Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures."
3.
Operation and Maintenance Manual Requirements: Section 01 7823 "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
4.
Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents
of the Work in those Sections.
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Record Drawings: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints, and color scan of Record Prints
in electronic PDF format.
B.
Record Specifications: Submit one marked-up copy of Project's Specifications, including

addenda and contract modifications, and color scan of marked-up specifications in electronic
PDF format.
C.
Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal, and color scan of
product data submittals in PDF format.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop
Drawings.
1.
Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide
information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.
a.
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b.
Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
c.
Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
d.
Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
2.
Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Dimensional changes to Drawings.
b.
Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
01 7839 - 1

CA 15-001
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
2.2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Depths of foundations below first floor.

Locations and depths of underground utilities.
Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
Revisions to electrical circuitry.
Actual equipment locations.
Duct size and routing.
Locations of concealed internal utilities.
Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
Changes made following Architect's written orders.
Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked,
cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.
Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1.
Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification
on cover sheets.
2.
Identification: As follows:
a.
Project name.
b.
Date.
c.
Designation: "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
d.
Name of Architect.
e.
Name of Contractor.
RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A.
2.3
Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1.
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2.
Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3.
Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
4.
Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where
applicable.
RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A.
Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1.
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2.
Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
01 7839 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.
2.4

CA 15-001
Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where
applicable.
MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A.
Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous

record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A.
Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project
Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as
they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.
B.
Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in
the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project
Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and
in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to
Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
01 7839 - 3
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 01 7900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel,
including the following:
1.
Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
2.
Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
B.
1.
Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training
for products in those Sections.
1.3
A.
1.4
Instruction Program: Submit outlines of instructional programs for demonstration and training,
including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names
for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.
1.
At completion of training, provide training manual(s) for Owner's use.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance

personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project,
and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning
performance.
B.
Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with

requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and
maintenance procedures and training.
1.5
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to

minimize disrupting Owner's operations.
B.
Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time,
and course content.
C.
Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance
data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
A.
Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for
each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification
Sections.
01 7900 - 1

CA 15-001
B.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include
a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each
module, include instruction for the following:
1.
Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:
a.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
b.
Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
c.
Operating standards.
d.
Regulatory requirements.
e.
Equipment function.
f.
Operating characteristics.
g.
Limiting conditions.
h.
Performance curves.
2.
Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a.
Emergency manuals.
b.
Operations manuals.
c.
Maintenance manuals.
d.
Project Record Documents.
e.
Identification systems.
f.
Warranties and bonds.
g.
Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
3.
Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a.
Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.
b.
c.
Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
d.
Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.
e.
Sequences for electric or electronic systems.
f.
4.
Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a.
Startup procedures.
b.
Equipment or system break-in procedures.
c.
Routine and normal operating instructions.
d.
Regulation and control procedures.
e.
Control sequences.
f.
Safety procedures.
g.
h.
Normal shutdown instructions.
i.
Operating procedures for emergencies.
j.
Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.
k.
Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
l.
m.
5.
Adjustments: Include the following:

a.
Alignments.
b.
Checking adjustments.
c.
Noise and vibration adjustments.
d.
Economy and efficiency adjustments.
6.
Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a.
Diagnostic instructions.
b.
Test and inspection procedures.
01 7900 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
7.
Maintenance: Include the following:

a.
Inspection procedures.
b.
Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
c.
List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
d.
Procedures for routine cleaning
e.
Procedures for preventive maintenance.
f.
Procedures for routine maintenance.
g.
Instruction on use of special tools.
8.
Repairs: Include the following:

a.
Diagnosis instructions.
b.
Repair instructions.
c.
Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly
instructions.
d.
Instructions for identifying parts and components.
e.
Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training
module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual.
B.
Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.
3.2
INSTRUCTION
A.
Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules,
to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of
participants, instruction times, and location.
B.
Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
1.
Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.
2.
Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that
requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.
a.
Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.
b.
Cleanup: Dispose of used and leftover educational materials. Remove
instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing
before initial training use.
01 7900 - 3
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 03 3000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,

mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:
1.
Footings.
2.
Foundation walls.
3.
Slabs-on-grade.
4.
Suspended slabs.
5.
Concrete toppings.
6.
Building frame members.
7.
Building walls.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 03 Section "Unbonded Post-Tensioned Concrete."
2.
Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks.ARCHITECT EDIT
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the
following: blended hydraulic cement, and fly ash; subject to compliance with requirements.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments. Conform to ACI 318 Chapter 5. Submit mix designs based on field
experience, trial mixture, or both with all supporting data as outlined in ACI.
C.
Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings, comply with ACI 315: Placing drawings that detail
fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules,
stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections,
tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.
D.
Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional

engineer registered in the state of jurisdiction detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of
formwork.
1.
Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping
formwork, shoring removal, and reshoring installation and removal.
2.
E.
All submittals related to formwork, shoring, and reshoring shall be sealed by the
responsible professional engineer.
Exposed Concrete Forming: for exposed concrete submit form material and tie layout for
architects approval.
03 3000 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
F.
Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the
structure. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.
G.
Material Certificates: For each of the following:

1.
Cementitious materials.
2.
Admixtures.
3.
Form materials and form-release agents.
4.
Steel reinforcement and accessories.
5.
Fiber reinforcement.
6.
Waterstops.
7.
Curing compounds.
8.
Floor and slab treatments.
9.
Bonding agents.
10.
Adhesives.
11.
Vapor retarders.
12.
Semirigid joint filler.
13.
Joint-filler strips.
14.
Repair materials.
H.
Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance
with requirements:
1.
Aggregates.
I.
Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified
tolerances.
J.
Field quality-control reports.
K.
Minutes of preinstallation conference shall be prepared by the general contractor and distributed
for review and approval.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer with a minimum of five years experience on projects
of similar scope and complexity.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete

products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and
equipment.
1.
Manufacturer certified according to NRMCAs Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities.
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
1.
Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.
2.
Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing
Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency
laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician Grade II.
D.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures
from single source from single manufacturer.
E.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M,
"Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."
03 3000 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
F.
ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1.
ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5 and Section 7,
"Lightweight Concrete."
2.
ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
G.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.
Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine
procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each
entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:
a.
Contractor's superintendent.
b.
Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.
c.
Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.
d.
Concrete subcontractor.
e.
Special concrete finish subcontractor.
2.
1.6
Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality
control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures,
curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips,
semirigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring
procedures, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation
tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness
measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.
Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and
damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.
B.
Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other
contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A.
Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
1.
Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.
2.
Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,
and one of the following subject to approval by the architect:
a.
High-density overlay, Class 1 or better.
b.
Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge
sealed.
c.
Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
d.
B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
B.
Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.

Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C.
Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic,
paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not
exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist
plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
D.
Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.
03 3000 - 3

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
E.
Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.
F.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
1.
Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
G.
Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic

form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of
concrete on removal.
1.
Form tie layout shall be approved by the architect for exposed concrete.
2.
Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane
of exposed concrete surface.
3.
Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in
diameter in concrete surface.
4.
Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing
or waterproofing.
2.2
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.
B.
Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.
C.
Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed bars,
epoxy coated, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch (300-mm) bar length.
D.
Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M.
E.
Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn
steel wire into flat sheets.
2.3
REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A.
Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut true to
length with ends square and free of burrs.
B.
Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars,
ASTM A 775/A 775M epoxy coated.
C.
Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on
reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 775M.
D.
Form-Saving Splice Connectors: Flanged devices to permit insertion of threaded reinforcing

bars into a previously formed face. Available products include, but are not limited to:
1.
Form Saver; Lenton.
2.
DB-SAE Splices System; Dayton/Richmond
3.
Rebar Flange Coupler; Williams
E.
Mechanical Connectors and Splice Devices: Propietary products suitable for the use intended
and listed in ACI 439-3R.
F.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports
from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice,"
of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:
1.
For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms,
use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar
supports.
03 3000 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.
2.4

CA 15-001
For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated

wire bar supports.
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source, throughout Project:
1.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II, if recommended by the geotechnical
report, provide Type V in all foundation concrete. Supplement with the following:
a.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C.
B.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide

aggregates from a single source.
1.
Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal for all concrete unless
other sizes are required.
2.
Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/8 inch (9 mm) where clear bar spacings are less
than 1 inch (25 mm) including splices or in slabs and toppings of total thickness, including
deck ribs, of 2 inches (51 mm) or less.
3.
Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C.
Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330.

1.
Retain coarse-aggregate size from three options in first subparagraph below; insert
gradation requirements if preferred. Aggregate size limits relate to spacing of steel
reinforcement, depth of slab, or thickness of concrete member.
2.
Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal for all concrete unless
other sizes are required. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/8 inch (9 mm) where clear
bar spacings are less than 1 inch (25 mm) including splices or in slabs and toppings of
total thickness, including deck ribs, of 2 inches (51 mm) or less.
3.
Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. Water:
ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
2.1
ADMIXTURES
A.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
B.
Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other

admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in
hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2.
Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
5.
High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
6.
Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
C.
Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or

mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing
chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CN-CI.
b.
BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Rheocrete CNI.
c.
Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company.
d.
Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; DCI.
e.
Sika Corporation; Sika CNI.
03 3000 - 5

CA 15-001
D.
2.2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Non-Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, non-setaccelerating, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a
protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete.
1.
a.
BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Rheocrete 222+.
b.
Cortec Corporation; MCI- 2000, 2005NS.
c.
Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; DCI-S.
d.
Sika Corporation; FerroGard 901.
WATERSTOPS
A.
Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, with factory-installed metal eyelets, for
embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners,
intersections, and directional changes.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
Greenstreak.
b.
Williams Products, Inc.
2.
3.
B.
Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of
fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.
1.
the following:
a.
BoMetals, Inc.
b.
Greenstreak.
c.
Paul Murphy Plastics Company.
d.
Vinylex Corp.
2.
3.
C.
2.3
Profile: Ribbed with center bulb.

Dimensions: 4 inches by 3/16 inch thick (100 mm by 4.75 mm thick); nontapered.
Profile: Ribbed with center bulb.

Dimensions: 4 inches by 3/16 inch thick (100 mm by 4.75 mm thick); nontapered.
Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl

rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete,
3/4 by 1 inch (19 by 25 mm).
1.
a.
Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; MiraSTOP.
b.
CETCO; Volclay Waterstop-RX.
c.
Concrete Sealants Inc.; Conseal CS-231.
d.
Greenstreak; Swellstop.
e.
Henry Company, Sealants Division; Hydro-Flex.
f.
JP Specialties, Inc.; Earth Shield Type 20.
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended

adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide minimum 15 mil vapor
retarder, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
03 3000 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
B.
2.4

CA 15-001
Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; Blackline 400.

Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 15.
Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Florprufe 120.
Insulation Solutions, Inc.; Viper VaporCheck 16.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Perminator 15 mil.
Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 15.
Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 15 mil Class A.
Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and
manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch (9.5mm) sieve, 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 (0.15-mm) sieve, and at least 5 percent passing
No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve; complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine
aggregates.
LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS
A.
Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic
silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens,
and densifies concrete surfaces.
1.
a.
ChemMasters; Chemisil Plus.
b.
ChemTec Int'l; ChemTec One.
c.
Conspec by Dayton Superior; Intraseal.
d.
Curecrete Distribution Inc.; Ashford Formula.
e.
Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Sure Hard (J-17).
f.
Edoco by Dayton Superior; Titan Hard.
g.
Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Euco Diamond Hard.
h.
Kaufman Products, Inc.; SureHard.
i.
L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Seal Hard.
j.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; LIQUI-HARD.
k.
Metalcrete Industries; Floorsaver.
l.
Nox-Crete Products Group; Duro-Nox.
m.
Symons by Dayton Superior; Buff Hard.
n.
US SPEC, Division of US Mix Products Company; US SPEC Industraseal.
o.
Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Vexcon StarSeal PS Clear.
B.
Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatments for Polished Concrete Finish: Clear, waterborne solution of
inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates,
hardens, and is suitable for polished concrete surfaces.
1.
a.
Advanced Floor Products; Retro-Plate 99.
b.
L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; FGS Hardener Plus.
c.
QuestMark, a division of CentiMark Corporation; DiamondQuest Densifying
Impregnator Application.
2.5
CURING MATERIALS
A.
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application

to fresh concrete.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements and compatibility with floor coverings,
available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CimFilm.
b.
BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm.
03 3000 - 7

CA 15-001
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
ChemMasters; SprayFilm.
Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm.
Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74).
Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm.
Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar.
Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor-Aid.
Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin.
L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE.
Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold.
Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM.
Sika Corporation; SikaFilm.
SpecChem, LLC; Spec Film.
Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid.
TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TRI-FILM.
Unitex; PRO-FILM.
Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Envio Set.
B.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.
C.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
D.
Water: Potable.
E.
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,

dissipating.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements and compatibility with floor coverings,
available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB.
b.
BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure 200.
c.
ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear.
d.
Conspec by Dayton Superior; W.B. Resin Cure.
e.
Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W).
f.
Edoco by Dayton Superior; Res X Cure WB.
g.
Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Kurez W VOX; TAMMSCURE
WB 30C.
h.
Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420.
i.
Lambert Corporation; AQUA KURE - CLEAR.
j.
L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R.
k.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100-CLEAR.
l.
Nox-Crete Products Group; Resin Cure E.
m.
Right Pointe; Clear Water Resin.
n.
SpecChem, LLC; Spec Rez Clear.
o.
Symons by Dayton Superior; Resi-Chem Clear.
p.
TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2519 DC WB.
q.
Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100.
F.
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1,
Class A.
1.
a.
BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure 1315.
b.
ChemMasters; Polyseal WB.
c.
Conspec by Dayton Superior; Sealcure 1315 WB.
d.
Edoco by Dayton Superior; Cureseal 1315 WB.
03 3000 - 8
Design Development
October 02, 2015
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
2.6

CA 15-001
Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Super Diamond Clear VOX;
LusterSeal WB 300.
Kaufman Products, Inc.; Sure Cure 25 Emulsion.
Lambert Corporation; UV Safe Seal.
L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal WB Plus.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-30.
Metalcrete Industries; Metcure 30.
Right Pointe; Right Sheen WB30.
Symons by Dayton Superior; Cure & Seal 31 Percent E.
Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Vexcon Starseal 1315.
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.
B.
Bond Breaker: No. 30 unperforated organic felt, complying with ASTM D 226, Type II.
C.
Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A
shore durometer hardness of 80 or aromatic polyurea with a Type A shore durometer hardness
range of 90 to 95 per ASTM D 2240.
D.
Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
E.
Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing
and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit
requirements, and as follows:
1.
Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
hardened concrete.
F.
Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet.
Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.
G.
Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) thick,
with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of
concrete or debris.
2.7
REPAIR MATERIALS
A.
Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be

applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match
adjacent floor elevations.
1.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement
as defined in ASTM C 219.
2.
Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,
and application.
3.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 maximum (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as
recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
4.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested
according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.
B.
Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be

applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to
match adjacent floor elevations.
1.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement
as defined in ASTM C 219.
2.
Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application.
03 3000 - 9

CA 15-001
3.
4.
2.8
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as
recommended by topping manufacturer.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days when tested
according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.
CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A.
Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
1.
Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture
designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.
B.
Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than

portland cement in concrete as follows:
1.
Fly Ash: 25 percent, where permitted.
C.
Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of

cement.
D.
Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1.
Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as
required, for placement and workability.
2.
Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
3.
Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for parking structure slabs,
concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio
below 0.50.
4.
Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.
2.9
CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A.
Footings, Stemwalls, and Gradebeams: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) at 28 days.
2.
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50.
3.
Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) or 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of
2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or
plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
4.
Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-mm)
nominal maximum aggregate size.
5.
Fly ash permitted.
B.
Basement Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Air Content: maximum 3.0 percent.
5.
Fly ash permitted.
C.
Interior Slabs-on-Grade (Non Post-Tensioned): Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as

follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
03 3000 - 10

Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
5.
6.

CA 15-001
Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's

recommended rate, but not less than 1.5 lb/cu. yd. (0.90 kg/cu. m).
Fly ash not permitted.
D.
Suspended Slabs and Integral Beams, Including Interior Slabs-On-Grade Over Void (Non-Post
Tensioned): Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Concrete Toppings: Proportion structural lightweight concrete mixture over metal deck and
precast members as follows:
1.
2.
Calculated Equilibrium Unit Weight: 115 lb/cu. ft. (1842 kg/cu. m), plus or minus 3 lb/cu.
ft. (48.1 kg/cu. m) as determined by ASTM C 567.
3.
Maximum Water-Cementious Materials Ratio: 0.45
4.
For slabs of total thickness, including deck ribs, of 2 inches (51 mm) or less, the
maximum coarse aggregate size shall be 3/8 inch (9 mm).
5.
6.
7.
F.
Concrete Toppings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture over metal deck and precast
members as follows:
1.
2.
3.
For slabs of total thickness, including deck ribs, of 2 inches (51 mm) or less, the
maximum coarse aggregate size shall be 3/8 inch (9 mm).
4.
5.
Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished toppings to exceed 3 percent.
6.
G.
Building Frame Members, Including Columns, Walls, and Non-integral Beams: Proportion
normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 4,000 psi.
2.
3.
4.
Fly ash permitted.
H.
Exterior Stoops and Stairs on Grade:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-mm)
nominal maximum aggregate size.
5.
2.10
A.
FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
03 3000 - 11

CA 15-001
2.11
Design Development
October 02, 2015
CONCRETE MIXING
A.
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to

ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information.
1.
Mixing and delivery as measured from batch time to completion of discharge from truck
shall not exceed 1 1/2 hours. When air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce
mixing, delivery time, and discharge to 60 minutes.
B.
Project-Site Mixing: Not permitted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FORMWORK
A.
Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure
can support such loads.
B.
Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C.
Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1.
Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces.
2.
Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces.
D.
Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide
top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
1.
Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
2.
Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
F.
Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed
strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G.
Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork
is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to
prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous
locations.
H.
Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
I.
Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads
required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
J.
Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt,
and other debris just before placing concrete.
K.
Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and
maintain proper alignment.
L.
Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.
03 3000 - 12
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.2

CA 15-001
EMBEDDED ITEMS
A.
3.3
Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work
that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1.
Install anchor rods or bolts, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with
tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges."
2.
Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face
of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and
other conditions.
3.
Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.
REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A.
General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does
not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50
deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be
damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be
maintained.
1.
Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports
weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 75 percent of its 28-day
design compressive strength.
B.
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply
new form-release agent.
C.
When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.
Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete
surfaces unless approved by Architect.
3.4
SHORES AND RESHORES

A.
Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring
and reshoring.
1.
Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.
B.
In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to

distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will
induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.
C.
Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and
provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.
3.5
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturers recommended tape.
B.
Granular Course: Place vapor retarder over granular fill, which has been moistened, and
compacted with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 mm) or minus
3/4 inch (19 mm).
1.
Place and compact a 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick layer of fine-graded granular material over
granular fill.
03 3000 - 13

CA 15-001
3.6
Design Development
October 02, 2015
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1.
Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that
would reduce bond to concrete.
C.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld
crossing reinforcing bars.
1.
Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated.
D.
Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E.
Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to
minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one closed mesh spacing,
but not less than 6 inches (153 mm). Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent
continuous laps in either direction.
F.
Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair
coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M.
3.7
JOINTS
A.
General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B.
Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
1.
Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through
sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
2.
Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.
3.
Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset
joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder
intersection.
4.
Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and
girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
5.
Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls,
near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.
6.
Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
C.
Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: (Non post-tensioned) Form weakened-plane contraction

joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal
to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness by one of the following methods:
1.
Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints
after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
2.
Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete
when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface, but more than 18
hours after placement.
D.
Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler or bond breakers
strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade
beams, and other locations, as indicated.
03 3000 - 14
Design Development
October 02, 2015
1.
2.
3.
E.
3.8

CA 15-001
Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.
Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch
(25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07
Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.
Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip sections together.
Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate
or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
WATERSTOPS
A.
Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a
continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed
waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated,
according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and
firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.
3.9
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items
is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless
approved by Architect.
C.
Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of
weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1.
Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures
and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
2.
Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
3.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6
inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of
concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to
time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and
other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
D.
Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1.
Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked
around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2.
Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
3.
Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
4.
Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
5.
Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured
surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb
slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
E.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
03 3000 - 15

CA 15-001
1.
2.
3.
F.
3.10
Design Development
October 02, 2015
When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C)
for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the
temperature range required by ACI 301.
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete
on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1.
Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled
mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water
equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to
cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2.
Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A.
Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes
and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified
limits on formed-surface irregularities.
1.
Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed or where indicated.
B.
Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in

an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface
irregularities.
1.
Apply to exposed concrete surfaces or those to receive a rubbed finish, or to be covered
with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.
C.
Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where
indicated:
1.
Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete
surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform
color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing
process.
2.
Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick
paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and onehalf parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white
portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match
adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout
whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36
hours.
3.
Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part portland
cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white
portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match
adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion,
finish surface with a cork float.
D.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent
formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
03 3000 - 16
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.11

CA 15-001
FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A.
General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B.
Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bullfloated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch
(6 mm) in one direction.
1.
Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to receive concrete floor toppings or to
receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes.
C.
Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or
inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.
Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.
1.
Apply float finish to surfaces indicated and to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet
waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.
D.
Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand
or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of
trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that
would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1.
Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring,
carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-filmfinish coating system.
2.
Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M),
for a randomly trafficked floor surface:
a.
Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-ongrade.
3.
Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an
unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on two high spots and
placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
E.
Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces indicated or where ceramic
or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still
plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
1.
Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.
F.
Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere
as indicated.
1.
Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with
fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish
with Architect before application.
3.12
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A.
Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in
place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with inplace construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to
complete the Work.
B.
Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green
and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and
terminations slightly rounded.
03 3000 - 17

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
C.
Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as
shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations,
complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
D.
Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items.
Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish
concrete surfaces.
3.13
CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather
protection during curing.
B.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and
during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing,
screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C.
Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after
loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the
remainder of the curing period.
D.
Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed
surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.
E.
Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1.
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a.
Water.
b.
Continuous water-fog spray.
c.
Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2.
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover

for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at
least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less
than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover
material and waterproof tape.
a.
Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to
receive floor coverings.
b.
Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to
receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.
c.
Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining
cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with
bonding of floor covering used on Project.
3.
Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
a.
Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without
damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound
manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with
bonding of floor covering used on Project.
03 3000 - 18
Design Development
October 02, 2015
4.
3.14

CA 15-001
Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity
of coating and repair damage during curing period.
LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS
A.
Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and
complete surface repairs.
2.
Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and
repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is
dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.
B.
Polished Concrete Floor Treatment: Apply polished concrete finish system to cured and
prepared slabs to match accepted mockup.
1.
Machine grind floor surfaces to receive polished finishes level and smooth and to depth
required to reveal aggregate to match approved mockup.
2.
Apply penetrating liquid floor treatment for polished concrete in polishing sequence and
according to manufacturer's written instructions, allowing recommended drying time
between successive coats.
3.
Continue polishing with progressively finer grit diamond polishing pads to gloss level to
match approved mockup.
4.
Control and dispose of waste products produced by grinding and polishing operations.
5.
Neutralize and clean polished floor surfaces.
C.
Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to
hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.15
JOINT FILLING
A.
Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until
construction traffic has permanently ceased.
B.
Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact
faces of joint clean and dry.
C.
Install semirigid joint filler, where indicated, full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50
mm) deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.16
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A.
Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove
and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
B.
Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two
and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water
for handling and placing.
C.
Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and
stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1.
Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than
1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19 mm).
Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface.
03 3000 - 19

CA 15-001
2.
3.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and
compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with
patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding
color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match
before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher
than surrounding surface.
Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and
structural performance as determined by Architect.
D.
Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and
verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness.
1.
Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or
that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
width, and other objectionable conditions.
2.
After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3.
Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired
areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
4.
Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather
edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
5.
Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low
areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent
floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level
surface.
6.
Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with
clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm)
clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and
apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original
concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with
adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
7.
Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching
mortar or semi-rigid joint filler as directed by the Architect. Groove top of cracks and cut
out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen
cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before
bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent
concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E.
Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and
patching mortar.
F.
Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's
approval.
3.17
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and
inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
03 3000 - 20
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
B.
Inspections:
1.
Steel reinforcement placement.
2.
Steel reinforcement welding.
3.
Headed bolts and studs.
4.
Verification of use of required design mixture.
5.
Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.
6.
Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.
7.
Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and
slabs.
C.
Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to

ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1.
Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for
each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.
2.
Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform
additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
3.
Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete;
ASTM C 173/C 173M, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for
each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture.
4.
Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is
40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test
for each composite sample.
5.
Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test
for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each
concrete mixture.
6.
Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.
a.
Cast and laboratory cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each
composite sample.
b.
Cast and field cure two additional standard cylinder specimens for early testing of
post-tensioned concrete prior to stressing.
7.
Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M.

a.
b.
c.
8.
9.
For non post-tensioned concrete, test one lab cured specimen at 7 days and two
lab-cured specimens at 28 days, hold one in reserve.
For post-tensioned concrete, test one field cured specimen at age required by
contractors stressing schedule, hold second field cured specimen in reserve for
subsequent testing, if required. Test one lab cured specimen at 7 days and two
lab-cured specimens at 28 days, hold one in reserve.
A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set
of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age
indicated.
Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three
consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive
strength and no single compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive
strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).
Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and
Contractor within 48 hours of testing.
03 3000 - 21

CA 15-001
10.
11.
12.
13.
D.
3.18
A.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and

number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency,
location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete
mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for
both 7- and 28-day tests.
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may
be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of
concrete.
Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete,
at contractors expense, when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment,
compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by
Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of
concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as
directed by Architect.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply
with the Contract Documents.
Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M)
within 48 hours of finishing.
PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS
Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction
period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in
writing by liquid floor treatments installer.
03 3000 - 22
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 03 5413 - GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes self-leveling gypsum cement underlayment for application below interior floor
coverings.
B.
1.
Framing and Support: Section 06 1000 "Rough Carpentry."
2.
Substrate Material: Section 06 1600 "Sheathing."
3.
Patching and Leveling Compounds: Division 09 flooring Sections.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For sound mat and underlayment, manufacturer's published technical data
sheets, including product description and applications, Reference Standard classification,
technical properties, features, benefits, and limitations.
A.
1.5
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems

certifying that products are compatible.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Entity approved by manufacturer for application of underlayment

products required for Project.
B.
Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems shall certify

in writing that products are compatible.
C.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide gypsum-cement underlayment systems

identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per (ASTM International) ASTM E 119
by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
1.
Indicate design designations from (Underwriters Laboratory) UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.
D.
Sound Transmission Characteristics: Where indicated, provide gypsum-cement underlayment

systems identical to those of assemblies tested for STC and IIC ratings per ASTM E 90 and
ASTM E 492 by a qualified testing agency.
E.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Section 01 3100 "Project Management and Coordination."
1.6

A.
Comply with delivery, storage, and handling requirements in Section 01 6000 "Product
Requirements."
03 5413 - 1

CA 15-001
1.7
Design Development
October 02, 2015
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate

temperature, ventilation, ambient temperature and humidity, and other conditions affecting
underlayment performance.
1.
Place gypsum-cement-based underlayments only when ambient temperature and
temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate application of underlayment with requirements of floor-covering products and

adhesives, specified in Division 09 Sections, to ensure compatibility of products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2
Basis-of-Design Products: When a Basis-of-Design product is identified, the design is based

on the product named.
1.
Requirements for proposing products comparable to the Basis-of-Design product are
specified in Section 01 6000 "Product Requirements"
MATERIALS
A.
Sound Control Mat: Moisture-resistant fabric-faced entangled nylon filament mat.

1.
Thickness: 2 mm.
2.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Pliteq, Inc.; RST-02, or comparable acceptable to
Architect.
B.
Underlayment: Gypsum-cement-based, self-leveling product that can be applied in minimum

uniform thickness of 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor
elevations.
1.
Cement Binder: Gypsum or blended gypsum cement as defined by ASTM C 219.
2.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 2000 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109.
3.
Underlayment Additive: Resilient-emulsion product of underlayment manufacturer,
formulated for use with underlayment when applied to substrate and conditions indicated.
4.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Maxxon Corporation; Gyp-Crete, or a comparable
product by:
a.
Ardex.
b.
USG Corporation.
C.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch; or coarse sand as recommended by
underlayment manufacturer.
1.
Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for
underlayment thickness required.
D.
Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F.
E.
Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate,

conditions, and application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Comply with examination requirements in Section 01 7300 "Execution."
03 5413 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.2

CA 15-001
PREPARATION
A.
General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1.
Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to
prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment.
2.
Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.
B.
Wood Substrates: Mechanically fasten loose boards and panels to eliminate substrate
movement and squeaks. Sand to remove coatings that might impair underlayment bond and
remove sanding dust.
C.
Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment
3.3
APPLICATION
A.
Sound Control Mat: Install sound control materials according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1.
Do not install mechanical fasteners that penetrate through the sound control materials.
B.
Underlayment:
1.
General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
a.
Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after
application recommended in writing by manufacturer.
b.
Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-tosubstrate and intercoat adhesion.
c.
At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width
to continue through underlayment.
2.
3.
Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface.
a.
For systems using aggregate, apply a final layer without aggregate to surface
installation.
4.
Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent

contamination during application and curing processes.
Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in
writing by underlayment manufacturer.
Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate,
including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.
5.
6.
3.4
ADJUSTING AND CLEANUP

A.
Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period.
B.
Leave work areas clean in accordance with progress cleaning requirements in Section
01 7300 "Execution."
03 5413 - 3
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 04 2000 - UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Concrete masonry units (CMUs).
2.
Decorative concrete masonry units.
3.
Face brick.
4.
Precast concrete trim units.
5.
Mortar and grout.
6.
Reinforcing steel.
7.
Masonry joint reinforcement.
8.
Ties and anchors.
9.
Embedded flashing.
10. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
B.
1.
Framing and Support for Veneer Masonry: Section 05 4000 "Cold-Formed Metal
Framing."
2.
Framing and Support for Veneer Masonry: Section 06 1000 "Rough Carpentry."
3.
Substrate Material for Veneer Masonry: Section 06 1600 "Sheathing."
4.
Water-Resistive Barrier for Veneer Masonry: Section 07 2500 "Weather Barriers."
C.
Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include:

1.
Steel lintels and shelf angles for unit masonry, furnished under Section 05 5000 "Metal
Fabrications."
2.
Manufactured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing, furnished under Section
07 6200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
1.3
A.
Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths (f'm) at
28 days.
B.
Determine net-area compressive strength (f'm) of masonry by testing masonry prisms according
to (ASTM International) ASTM C 1314.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product required, manufacturer's published technical data
B.
Shop Drawings: Plans, elevations, sections, and details necessary to demonstrate installation
requirements for unit masonry.
1.
Stone Trim Units: Show sizes, profiles, and locations of each stone trim unit required.
2.
Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.
Comply with (American Concrete Institute) ACI 315. Show elevations of reinforced walls.
C.
Samples: For each type and color of the following:
UNIT MASONRY
04 2000 - 1

CA 15-001
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Decorative concrete masonry units.

Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks.
Pigmented mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used
on Project. Label Samples to indicate types and amounts of pigments used.
Precast Concrete Trim: For each required profile, full-size cross-sections, 12 inch
lengths.
A.
Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with

requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards.
Provide for each type and size of the following:
1.
Masonry units.
a.
For bricks, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within
specified tolerances.
b.
For exposed brick, include material test report for efflorescence according to
ASTM C 67.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.

Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
Reinforcing bars.
Joint reinforcement.
Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
B.
Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
1.
Include test reports, per ASTM C 780, for mortar mixes required to comply with property
specification.
C.
Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be

used to comply with cold-weather requirements.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from a single
source and a single manufacturer for each product required.
B.
Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from a single
source or producer for each aggregate.
C.
Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to
perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made by
Owner. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at
Contractor's expense.
1.
Prism Test: For each type of construction required, per ASTM C 1314.
D.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those
of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and
inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E.
Mockups: Furnish and install unit masonry and accessory components for integrated mockup
indicated on Drawings.
1.
Where masonry is to match existing, erect mockups adjacent and parallel to existing
surface.
04 2000 - 2
UNIT MASONRY
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.
F.
1.7

CA 15-001
Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of
mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities
of workmanship.
a.
Do not begin masonry work until mockup is approved by Architect.

A.
1.8
Requirements," and the following:
1.
Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an
enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied.
If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
2.
Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
3.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained
and contamination avoided.
4.
Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting
and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery
containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal
dispensing silo with weatherproof cover.
5.
Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation
of dirt and oil.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
1.
Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.
2.
Where 1 wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,
secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold
cover in place.
B.
Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least
3 days after building masonry walls or columns.
C.
Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such
masonry.
1.
Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading
coverings on ground and over wall surface.
2.
Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3.
Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
4.
Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
D.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by
frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with (ACI/American Society of Civil Engineers The
Masonry Society) ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 cold-weather construction requirements.
1.
Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days
after completing cleaning.
UNIT MASONRY
04 2000 - 3

CA 15-001
E.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in

ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the
standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified
dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will
impair the quality of completed masonry.
B.

1.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Concrete Masonry Units (CMUs): ASTM C 90

1.
Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:
a.
Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints,
headers, bonding, and other special conditions.
b.
Provide square-edged units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of [1900 psi] [2150 psi] [2800 psi] [3050 psi] <Insert value>.
Weight Classification: [Lightweight] [Medium weight] [Normal weight], unless
otherwise indicated.
Sizes: As indicated on Drawings, manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal
dimensions:
Decorative Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90.
a.
Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions specified in "Concrete Masonry Units"
Paragraph above.
b.
Pattern and Texture:
1)
Standard pattern, ground finish.[ Match Architect's samples.]
2)
Standard pattern, split-face finish.[ Match Architect's samples.]
3)
Standard pattern, split-ribbed finish.[ Match Architect's samples.]
4)
Scored vertically so units laid in running bond appear as square units laid in
stacked bond, standard finish.[ Match Architect's samples.]
5)
Triple scored vertically so units laid in running bond appear as vertical units
laid in stacked bond (soldier courses), standard finish.[ Match Architect's
samples.]
c.
Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B.
Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam concrete
masonry units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure
precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until
cured.
C.
Brick:
1.
General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:
04 2000 - 4
UNIT MASONRY
Design Development
October 02, 2015
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
D.

CA 15-001
For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose
unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed
surfaces finished.
Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate
special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams,
sashes, and lintels.
Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and
texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.
Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would
result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.
Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade SW, Type FBS.

a.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide <Insert manufacturer; product> or comparable
product acceptable to Architect.
1)
Use where brick is exposed, unless otherwise indicated.
Precast Concrete Trim:

1.
General: Comply with ASTM C 1364, and the following:
a.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, containing not more than 0.60 percent
total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114.
b.
Coarse Aggregates: Granite, quartz, or limestone complying with ASTM C 33,
gradation as needed to produce required textures and colors as needed to produce
required precast concrete colors.
c.
Fine Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone complying with ASTM C 33,
gradation as needed to produce required textures and colors as needed to produce
required precast concrete colors.
d.
Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored waterreducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to
lime and other alkalis.
e.
Admixtures: Do not use admixtures unless specified or approved in writing by
Architect.
1)
Do not use admixtures that contain more than 0.1 percent water-soluble
chloride ions by mass of cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures
containing calcium chloride.
2)
Use only admixtures that are certified by manufacturer to be compatible with
cement and other admixtures used.
3)
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. Add to mixes for units exposed to
the exterior at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in an air content of 4
to 6 percent, except do not add to zero-slump concrete mixes.
4)
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
5)
Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
6)
Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.
2.
Reinforcement: Deformed steel bars complying with ASTM A 615. Use galvanized or
epoxy-coated reinforcement when covered with less than 1-1/2 inches of precast
concrete material.
a.
Epoxy Coating: ASTM A 775.
b.
Galvanized Coating: ASTM A 767.
3.
Embedded Anchors and Other Inserts: Fabricated from stainless steel complying with
ASTM A 240, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
Fabrication:
a.
Provide precast concrete units complying with ASTM C 1364 using the vibrant dry
tamp or wet-cast method.
4.
UNIT MASONRY
04 2000 - 5

CA 15-001
1)
Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by

laboratory testing according to ASTM C 666, Procedure A, as modified by
ASTM C 1364.
b.
Fabricate units with sharp arris and details accurately reproduced with indicated
texture on all exposed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
1)
Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12, unless otherwise indicated.
2)
Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into
jambs.
3)
Provide drips on projecting elements, unless otherwise indicated.
c.
Fabrication Tolerances:
1)
Variation in Cross Section: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more
than 1/8 inch.
2)
Variation in Length: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than
1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater, but in no case by
more than 1/4 inch.
3)
Warp, Bow, and Twist: Not to exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch,
whichever is greater.
4)
Location of Grooves, False Joints, Holes, Anchorages, and Similar Features:
Do not vary from indicated position by more than 1/8 inch on formed surfaces
of units and 3/8 inch on unformed surfaces.
d.
Cure units by one of the following methods:

1)
Cure units with steam in enclosed curing room at temperature of 105 deg F
or above and 95 to 100 percent relative humidity for 6 hours.
2)
Cure units with dense fog and water spray in enclosed warm curing room at
95 to 100 percent relative humidity for 24 hours.
3)
Cure units to comply with one of the following:
a)
Not less than 5 days at mean daily temperature of 70 deg F or above.
b)
c)
d)
4)
5)
E.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be
exposed to view.
Color and Texture: Provide units with fine-grained texture and buff color
resembling Indiana limestone.
Mortar and Grout:

1.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for coldweather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce
mortar color indicated.
2.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
3.
Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded
for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in
masonry mortar.
a.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors, or
comparable product by:
1)
Lanxess Corporation.
2)
Solomon Colors; SGS Mortar Colors.
4.
5.
04 2000 - 6
Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime
containing no other ingredients.
Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement, hydrated lime,
and mortar pigments. Mix shall produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected
UNIT MASONRY
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
from manufacturer's standard colors. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland
cement by weight.
a.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Holcim (US) Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custom
Color Cement/Lime, or comparable product by:
1)
Essroc, Italcementi Group.
2)
Lafarge North America.
3)
Lehigh Cement Company.
F.
6.
Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

a.
For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural
sand or crushed stone.
b.
For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing
the No. 16 sieve.
7.
8.
Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying
with ASTM C 494, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry
mortar of composition indicated.
a.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Grace Construction Products; Morset, or
1)
Euclid Chemical Company.
2)
Sonneborn, Div. of BASF.
9.
Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use

with concrete masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.
a.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Grace Construction Products; Dry-Block Mortar
Admixture or comparable product by BASF.
10.
Water: Potable.
Reinforcement:
1.
Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615 or ASTM A 996, Grade 60.
2.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951.
a.
Material: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.
b.
Wire Size: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter.
c.
Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c.
d.
Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units.
3.
4.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with
single pair of side rods.
Ties And Anchors:
a.
Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2
coating.
b.
Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel, hotdip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153.
c.
Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least
halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer
ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer.
d.
Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4
inches wide.
1)
Wire: Fabricate from 1/4-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. Millgalvanized wire ties may be used in interior walls, unless otherwise indicated.
e.
UNIT MASONRY
Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structure: Provide anchors that allow vertical
or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to
plane of wall.
04 2000 - 7

CA 15-001
1)
2)
f.
g.
h.
i.
G.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- diameter, hotdip galvanized steel wire. Mill-galvanized wire may be used at interior walls,
unless otherwise indicated.
Tie Section: Triangular, rectangular, or T-shaped wire tie, sized to extend
within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0.25 inch diameter, hot-dip
galvanized steel wire. Mill-galvanized wire may be used at interior walls,
Adjustable Anchors for Cold-Formed Metal and Wood Framing:

1)
General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension
and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over
sheathing to studs.
a)
Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a
100-lbf load in both tension and compression without deforming or
developing play in excess of 0.05 inch.
2)
Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and

a metal anchor section.
a)
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Thermal
2-Seal Wing Nut Anchor, or comparable product acceptable to
Architect.
3)
Wire Ties: Triangular, rectangular, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from 0.25
inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
Polymer-Coated, Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C 954, except
manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer, No. 10 diameter by
length required to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than 3 exposed threads,
and with organic polymer coating with salt-spray resistance to red rust of more than
800 hours per ASTM B 117.
Polymer-Coated, Steel Drill Screws for Wood Studs: Self-drilling, bugle-head or
wafer-head wood screws recommended by veneer anchor manufacturers for
fastening to wood studs; not less than No. 10, 1-1/2 inches long, and with organic
polymer coating with more than 500-hour, salt-spray resistance to red rust per
ASTM B 117.
Anchor Bolts: Headed steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with
ASTM A 563, hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to
comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of dimensions indicated.
Embedded Flashing:
1.
Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual" and as follows:
a.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240 or ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.016 inch (28 gage)
thick.
b.
Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches long minimum, but not
exceeding 12 feet. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing.
c.
Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge where indicated. Fabricate by
extending flashing 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees
and hemmed.
1)
Fabricate metal drip edges from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into
wall and 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and
hemmed.
d.
04 2000 - 8
Fabricate through-wall flashing with sealant stop where indicated. Fabricate by

bending metal back on itself 3/4 inch at exterior face of wall and down into joint 1/4
inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.
UNIT MASONRY
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
1)
e.
2.
Use metal flashing where indicated on Drawings.
Flexible Flashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use the following, unless
otherwise indicated:
a.
Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable,
adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated
polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch.
1)
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Grace Construction Products; Perm-ABarrier Wall Flashing, or comparable product by:
a)
Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing.
b)
Fiberweb, Clark Hammerbeam Corp.
c)
Heckmann Building Products Inc.
d)
Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
e)
W. R. Meadows, Inc.
f)
Polyguard Products, Inc.
g)
Williams Products, Inc.
2)
3.
H.
Fabricate metal sealant stops from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches
into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal
back on itself for 3/4 inch and down into joint 1/4 inch to form a stop for
retaining sealant backer rod.
Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes,

and seaming materials produced by flashing manufacturer.
Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard
products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets
to each other and to substrates.
Miscellaneous Materials:
1.
Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from
neoprene, urethane, or PVC.
2.
Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound,
complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D
2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral
stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
3.
Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
4.
Mesh Weep/Vent: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full height and
width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe; in color selected
from manufacturer's standard.
a.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net Weep Vents,
or comparable product acceptable to Architect.
5.
Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not
degrade within the wall cavity.
a.
Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches wide, with dovetail shaped notches 7
inches deep that prevent mesh from being clogged with mortar droppings.
1)
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net, or
comparable product acceptable to Architect.
6.
Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning
masonry unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are
formed from 0.142-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units with
either two loops or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated.
UNIT MASONRY
04 2000 - 9

CA 15-001
7.
2.3
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for

removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new
masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly
approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units
being cleaned.
MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A.
General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,

retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
B.
Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients
before delivering to Project site.
C.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the
following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to
provide required compressive strength of masonry.
1.
For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.
D.
Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other
ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products.
1.
Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of Portland cement by weight.
E.
Grout: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1.
Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will
comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces
and pour height.
a.
Fly ash (Type F or C) in proportions not greater than 25 percent of the total
cementitious materials may be used.
b.
Provide slump of 9 inches, +/- 1 inch.
c.
Minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2000 psi required.
d.
Fine Grout: Proportion by volume. One part Portland cement, with not more than
one-tenth part hydrated lime or lime putty added, and two and one-fourth to three
parts sand.
e.
Coarse Grout: Proportioned by volume. One part Portland cement with not more
than one-tenth part hydrated lime or lime putty added, two to three parts sand and
not more than two parts gravel.
2.
Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Comply with examination requirements in Section 01 7300 "Execution," and the following:
1.
Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
2.
Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full
thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units
of widths indicated.
04 2000 - 10
UNIT MASONRY
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.

CA 15-001
Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to
opening.
Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean,
sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is
specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors
and textures.
a.
Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing
masonry.
Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq.
in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are
damp but not wet at time of laying.
Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the
following:
a.
For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10
feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
b.
For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than
1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
c.
For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not
vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch
maximum.
d.
For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by
more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances
specified for warpage of units.
e.
For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight
line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next.
Laying Masonry Walls:

1.
Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and
offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where
possible, at other locations.
2.
Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in
[running bond] [stack bond] [one-third running bond] [Flemish bond] [English bond]
[bond pattern indicated on Drawings]; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch
horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
3.
For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose
unfinished brick surfaces, install units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces
finished.
4.
Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from
those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that
are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required
before laying fresh masonry.
5.
Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other
Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
6.
Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer
of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into
core.
UNIT MASONRY
04 2000 - 11

CA 15-001
7.
8.
C.
Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates,
beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or
roof structure above, unless otherwise indicated.
a.
Leave clearance between top of partition and underside of structure above as
b.
Fasten partition top anchors to structure above as indicated on Drawings.
c.
At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above to comply with Section 07 8446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."
Mortar Bedding and Jointing:

1.
Lay hollow brick and concrete masonry units as follows:
a.
With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed
joints.
b.
With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
c.
With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on
footings.
d.
With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting
course on footings where cells are not grouted.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with
sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints
or slush head joints.
Set precast concrete trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel,
anchor, and similar holes.
a.
Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than
joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
Cavity Walls:
1.
Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods:
a.
Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties in horizontal joints, but not less than one metal
tie for 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area spaced not to exceed 24 inches o.c. horizontally and
16 inches o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties
within 12 inches of openings and space not more than 36 inches apart around
perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more
than 24 inches o.c. vertically.
1)
Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type ties.
2)
Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use
adjustable (two-piece) type ties to allow for differential movement regardless
of whether bed joints align.
04 2000 - 12
b.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints for both veneer
and non-veneer masonry.
1)
Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement
extending across both wythes or tab-type reinforcement.
2)
Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type
reinforcement.
3)
Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use
adjustable (two-piece) type reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in
facing wythe attached to ties to allow for differential movement regardless of
whether bed joints align.
c.
Masonry Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry

veneers.
UNIT MASONRY
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.
3.
4.
E.

CA 15-001
Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel
beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to
trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity.
Coat cavity face of backup wythe to comply with Division 07 Section "Bituminous
Dampproofing."
Installing Cavity-Wall Insulation: Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section
"Thermal Insulation."
a.
Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with spray foam insulation specified in
Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."
Masonry Joint Reinforcement:

1.
General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of
5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6
inches.
a.
Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.
b.
Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and
extending 12 inches beyond openings.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners,
returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
F.
Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to
comply with the following:
1.
Provide an open space not less than 1 inch in width between masonry and structural
member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid
materials.
2.
Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints and
attached to structure.
3.
Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 16 inches
o.c. horizontally.
G.
Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the
following requirements:
1.
Fasten screw-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing with metal fasteners of
type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener.
2.
Embed tie sections in masonry joints. Ensure air space between back of masonry veneer
and face of insulation is not less than that shown on Drawings.
3.
Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and
down.
4.
Space anchors not more than 18 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c. horizontally,
with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within
12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches, around perimeter.
H.
Control and Expansion Joints:

1.
General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry
progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision
to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.
2.
Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods:
a.
Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on
one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in
exposed faces for application of sealant.
b.
Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
UNIT MASONRY
04 2000 - 13

CA 15-001
c.
d.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at
joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of
sealant.
Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit
masonry is complete for application of sealant.
3.
Form expansion joints in brick as follows:

a.
Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated.
4.
Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a

compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch.
a.
Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting
masonry.
I.
Lintels:
1.
Install steel lintels where indicated.
2.
Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches for
brick-size units and 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or
other supporting lintels.
3.
Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
J.
Flashing, Weep Holes, Cavity Drainage, and Vents:

1.
General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels,
ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install
vents at tops of walls, and shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of
air in cavities, and where indicated.
2.
Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
a.
Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could
puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing
on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal
penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by
flashing manufacturer.
b.
At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer
wythe, turned up a minimum of 8 inches, and through inner wythe to within 1/2 inch
of the interior face of wall in exposed masonry. Where interior face of wall is to
receive furring or framing, carry flashing completely through inner wythe and turn
flashing up approximately 2 inches on interior face.
c.
At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind
veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches; with upper edge tucked under
building paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches.
d.
At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at
each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less
than 2 inches to form end dams.
e.
Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is
completed.
3.
4.
04 2000 - 14
Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are
shown to be built into masonry.
Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately
above embedded flashing and as follows:
a.
Use weep/vent material to form weep holes above flashing and at top of brick
veneer walls to form vents.
1)
Space weep holes 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
2)
Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at 48 inches o.c. Use specified
weep/vent products to form vents.
UNIT MASONRY
Design Development
October 02, 2015
5.
K.
3.3

CA 15-001
Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for
cavity drainage material in Part 2 "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.
Reinforced Unit Masonry:

1.
Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
2.
Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained
enough strength to resist grout pressure.
a.
Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for
grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
b.
Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.
A.
Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections
and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to
perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified
requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
B.
Inspections: [Level 1] [Level 2] special inspections according to the "International Building

Code."
1.
Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of siteprepared mortar.
2.
Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades,
sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
3.
Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.
C.
Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.
D.
Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.
E.
Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 67.
F.
Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 140.
G.
Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 1019.
H.
Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, per ASTM C 1314 at 7 days and 2 at 28
days. Make and test 3 grouted and 3 non-grouted prisms.
3.4
REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A.
Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install
in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B.
Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,
where indicated.
C.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1.
Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape
hoes or chisels.
2.
Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding
with cleaning of masonry.
UNIT MASONRY
04 2000 - 15

CA 15-001
3.
4.
5.
3.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering
them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking
tape.
Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by
rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's
written instructions.

A.
Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's
property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
B.
Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess masonry waste and legally dispose of off Owner's
property.
C.
04 2000 - 16
UNIT MASONRY
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 05 1200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Structural steel.
2.
Grout.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures
and administrative requirements.
2.
Division 05 Section "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing" for additional
requirements for architecturally exposed structural steel.
3.
Division 05 Section "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors through
deck.
4.
Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to
structural-steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications and other metal items not defined
as structural steel.
5.
Division 05 Section "Metal Stairs."
6.
Division 09 Painting Sections.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of

Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
A.
1.5
Connections: Where connections are not fully detailed in drawings:

1.
Include all steel-to-steel connections and steel-to-steel portion of all connections to other
materials.
2.
Design connections for specific forces where shown on the drawings. Where specific
forces are not shown, design shall be for maximum conditions based on capacities of
connecting members.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Provide erection plans and fabrication details of structural-steel components.
1.
Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
2.
Include embedment drawings.
3.
Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,
and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed
and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.
4.
For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
design data.
05 1200 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
C.
Welding certificates.
D.
Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Firms which have (5) five years successful experience in
fabrication and erection of structural steel systems of similar scope and complexity as required
for this project will be acceptable. Fabricator must have sufficient production capacity to
produce required units without causing delay in work.
B.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
C.
Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1.
AISC 303, Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.
2.
AISC 360, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.
3.
RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
D.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.7

A.
Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off
ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel
members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.
1.
Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or
overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or
structures as directed.
B.
Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.
1.
Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes
repackaging and seals containers.
2.
Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.
3.
Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating
ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are
compatible with one another.
B.
Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction

without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and
directions for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS
A.
W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.
B.
Channels, Angles, S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C.
Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D.
Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B.
E.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.
05 1200 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
1.
2.
F.
2.2

CA 15-001
Weight Class: As indicated.

Finish: Plain.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A.
High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex
steel structural bolts; all with plain finish.
B.
Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished
carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.
C.
Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 or ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1.
Configuration: Hooked.
2.
Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex carbon steel.
3.
Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
4.
Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel.
5.
Finish: Plain.
D.
Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, ASTM A307, Grade A, straight.
1.
2.
Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
3.
4.
Finish: Plain.
E.
Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1.
2.
3.
Finish: Plain.
F.
Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108,
Grade 1035.
G.
Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1030.
H.
Sleeve Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1018.
2.3
PRIMER
A.
Primer: Comply with Division 09 Painting Sections.
B.
Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer

complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
2.4
GROUT
A.
2.5
Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic

aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for
application and a 30-minute working time.
FABRICATION
A.
Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate
according to AISC 303 "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and
AISC 360 Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.
1.
Camber structural-steel members where indicated.
2.
Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.
3.
Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain
markings until structural steel has been erected.
05 1200 - 3

CA 15-001
4.
5.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.

Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shoppriming operations.
B.
Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1.
Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in
AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C.
Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.
D.
Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.
E.
Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted.
F.
Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear

connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.
G.
Steel Wall-Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wallopening framing to be attached to structural steel. Straighten as required to provide uniform,
square, and true members in completed wall framing.
H.
Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural steel. Weld exposed
joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld fixed steel bar stops to frames. Secure
removable stops to frames with countersunk machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than
10 inches (250 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to
pass through steel framing members.
1.
Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes
or enlarge holes by burning.
2.
Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces.
3.
Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.
2.6
SHOP CONNECTIONS
A.
High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
1.
Joint Type: Snug tightened.
B.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding
procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1.
Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes
without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.
2.7
SHOP PRIMING
A.
Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1.
Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded
members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).
2.
Surfaces to be field welded.
3.
Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
4.
Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing).
5.
Galvanized surfaces.
B.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and
spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and
standards:
1.
SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."
2.
SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
05 1200 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
C.
2.8

CA 15-001
Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's

written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness
of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners,
edges, and exposed surfaces.
1.
Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or
erection.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Fabricator Approval: In accordance with Section 1704.2.2 of the IBC, special inspections are
not required where the work is done on the premises of a fabricator registered and approved to
perform such work without special inspection. Approval shall be based upon review of the
fabricators written procedural and quality control manuals and periodic auditing of fabrication
practices by an approved special inspection agency. At completion of fabrication, the approved
fabricator shall submit a certificate of compliance to the building official stating that the work was
performed in accordance with the approved construction documents.
B.
Testing Agency: For fabricators not registered and approved to perform work without special
inspection, Contractor will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1.
Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being
fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.
C.
Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the
Contract Documents.
D.
Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to

RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
E.
Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested

and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at
testing agency's option:
1.
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
2.
Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.
Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.
3.
Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
4.
Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
F.
In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected
according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:
1.
Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous
360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.
2.
Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear
connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Contractor shall verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing
surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance
with requirements.
B.
05 1200 - 5

CA 15-001
3.2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural
steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in
intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel,
connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.
ERECTION
A.
Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to
AISC 303 and AISC 360.
B.
Base Bearing and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bondreducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of
plates.
1.
Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
2.
Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.
Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before
packing with grout.
3.
Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain.
Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with
manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
C.
Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges."
D.
Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before
permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be
in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for
discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1.
Level and plumb individual members of structure.
E.
Splice members only where indicated.
F.
Do not use thermal cutting during erection, unless approved by Architect.
G.
Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be
enlarged to admit bolts.
H.
Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear

connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4
FIELD CONNECTIONS
A.
High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
1.
Joint Type: Snug tightened.
B.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding
procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1.
Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary
connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
2.
Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel
smooth.
3.
Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes
without exceeding tolerances in AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings
and Bridges" for mill material.
05 1200 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.5

CA 15-001

A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. In accordance with Section 1704.3 of
the IBC and as follows.
B.
Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification

for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C.
Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
1.
In addition to visual inspection, full penetration field welds will be tested and inspected
according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing
agency's option:
a.
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
b.
Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on
finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be
accepted.
c.
Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
d.
Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
D.
In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to
requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:
1.
Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree
flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.
2.
Conduct tests on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors
already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
E.
Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the
Contract Documents.
3.6
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged
or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPCPA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1.
Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool
cleaning.
05 1200 - 7
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 05 5000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section is general in nature. Fabrications specified may or may not be required for Project.
B.
Section Includes:
1.
Fasteners.
2.
Steel framing and supports for overhead doors.
3.
Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
4.
Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified
in other Sections.
5.
Elevator hoist beams.
6.
Shelf angles.
7.
Loose bearing and leveling plates.
8.
Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete not specified in other Sections.
9.
Miscellaneous steel trim.
10. Metal pipe, tube and bar railings.
11. Metal ladders.
12. Metal bollards.
C.
Products furnished, but not installed:

1.
Loose steel lintels.
2.
Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into
concrete or built into unit masonry.
D.
1.
Primary Structural Members: Section 05 1200 "Structural Steel Framing."
2.
Steel Stairs and Stair Railings: Section 05 5100 "Metal Stairs."
3.
Balcony Railings: Section 05 5219 "Architectural Railings."
4.
Metal Framing Anchors: Section 06 1000 "Rough Carpentry."
5.
Finish Painting for Metal Fabrications: Division 09 painting Sections.
1.3
A.
Provide steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not
indicated on Drawings or specified in other Sections.
B.
Delegated Design: Design railings and ladders, including comprehensive engineering analysis,
by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria
indicated.
C.
Structural Performance of Railings: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of

gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1.
Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a.
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction.
b.
Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.
c.
Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2.
Infill of Guards:
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 5000 - 1

CA 15-001
a.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
D.
Structural Performance of Ladders: Provide ladders capable of withstanding the effects of

loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in (American National Standards
Institute) ANSI A14.3.
E.
Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by
preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and
other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials
due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
F.
Where thickness of steel members is not indicated on Drawings, provide 1/4 inch minimum
thickness.
G.
Where welding or other connection requirements are not indicated on Drawings, weld
components all around with 3/16 inch fillet weld, all faying surfaces.
H.
Where items are noted as embedded in concrete and are not fully defined on Drawings, provide
1/2 inch diameter by 4 inch long headed anchor studs at 12 inches on center.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Shop Drawings: Plans, elevations, sections, and details necessary to demonstrate fabrication
and installation requirements for metal fabrications.
1.
Indicate anchorage and accessory items.
2.
Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
3.
For installed products required to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
A.
Delegated Design Submittal: Submit structural analysis data, signed and sealed by qualified
professional engineer responsible for preparation.
B.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.7
Welding Qualifications: Qualify field-welding procedures and personnel according to (American

Welding Society) AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
A.
1.8
Requirements."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings.
1.
Established Dimensions: When Project schedule precludes making field measurements
prior to commencing fabrication, establish dimensions and proceed with fabrication
without field measurements.
a.
Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to
established dimensions.
05 5000 - 2
METAL FABRICATIONS
Design Development
October 02, 2015
b.
1.9

CA 15-001
Account for fitting and trimming at Project site.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings,

templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
to Project site in time for installation.
B.
Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are
specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver to Project site in time
for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
MATERIALS
A.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: (ASTM International) ASTM A 36.
B.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
C.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or
required by structural loads.
D.
Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels with continuous slot complying with
MFMA-3.
1.
Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches.
2.
Material: Steel complying with ASTM A 1008, commercial steel, Type B; 0.105 inch (12
gage) minimum thickness; coated with rust-inhibitive, baked-on, acrylic enamel.
E.
1.
Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd
primer complying with MPI #79 and compatible with topcoat.
2.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: (Master Painter's Institute) MPI #18, MPI #19, or (Steel
Structural Painting Council) SSPC-Paint 20.
3.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal
alloy welded.
4.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically
recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
5.
Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 03 3000 "Castin-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum
28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3
FASTENERS
A.
General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior
use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at
exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for
type, grade, and class required.
B.
Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 5000 - 3

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
C.
Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts,
ASTM A 563, and where indicated, flat washers.
D.
Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts
and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts, Alloy
Group 1.
E.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.

1.
Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts where item being
fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
F.
Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.
G.
Machine Screws: (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) ASME B18.6.3.
H.
Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
I.
Wood Screws: (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) ASME B18.6.1.
J.
Power-Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Service (NES) NER-272.
K.
Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.
L.
Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.
M.
Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal
to four times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted
by a qualified independent testing agency.
1.
Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47, malleable iron,
or ASTM A 27, cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip
galvanized per ASTM A 153.
N.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure,
a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the
load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488,
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to
comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
General:
1.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible.
Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for
reassembly and coordinated installation.
2.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a
radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough
areas on exposed surfaces.
3.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
4.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight
edges.
a.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
b.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
c.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
d.
Remove welding flux immediately.
e.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended
so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that
of adjacent surface.
05 5000 - 4
METAL FABRICATIONS
Design Development
October 02, 2015
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.

CA 15-001
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head
(countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least
conspicuous.
Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to
exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware,
screws, and similar items.
Provide suitable anchorage; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring
devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
a.
Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with
integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch
embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units
and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
Miscellaneous Framing and Supports:

1.
Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless
otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles necessary to receive
adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to
receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.
a.
Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where warranted.
b.
Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed.
2.
Galvanize exterior miscellaneous framing and supports and miscellaneous framing and
supports located in exterior walls.
C.
Loose Steel Lintels:

1.
Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings
and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Weld adjoining
members together to form a single unit where indicated.
2.
Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear
span but not less than 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
D.
Shelf Angles
1.
Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete
framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more
than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
a.
Provide mitered and welded units at corners.
b.
Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint
approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint.
2.
3.
Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.

Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to
cast-in-place concrete and fully-grouted concrete unit masonry.
E.
Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates:

1.
Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete
construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
2.
Galvanize plates after fabrication.
F.
Steel Weld Plates and Angles:

1.
Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported
from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with not
less than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 5000 - 5

CA 15-001
G.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Miscellaneous Steel Trim:

1.
Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles
shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and
use concealed field splices where possible.
2.
Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and
installation with other work.
a.
Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or
masonry construction.
3.
Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.
H.
Metal Railings:
1.
Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details,
finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage,
but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads.
a.
Guard Configuration: As indicated on Drawings.
b.
Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope
components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this
purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
c.
Form changes in direction of railings by flush bends.
d.
Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform
curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of
member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise
deforming exposed surfaces of components.
e.
Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
f.
Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated.
Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or
less.
g.
Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures,
flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and
for attaching to other work.
h.
Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant
material, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to
structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce
adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate.
I.
Metal Ladders:
1.
General:
a.
Comply with ANSI A14.3 unless otherwise indicated.
b.
For elevator pit ladders, comply with ANSI/ASME A17.1.
c.
Space siderails 18 inches apart, unless otherwise indicated.
d.
Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with
welded or bolted brackets, made from same metal as ladder.
2.
Steel Ladders:
a.
Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges.
1)
Extend siderails of ladders at least 42 inches above the top landing where
applicable.
2)
Return siderails over tops of walls to support top landing and rungs on
opposite side of wall where applicable.
b.
c.
d.
e.
05 5000 - 6
Rungs: 3/4-inch- diameter steel bars.

Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with
aluminum-oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of
manufactured rung filled with aluminum-oxide grout.
Galvanize exterior ladders, including brackets and fasteners.
METAL FABRICATIONS
Design Development
October 02, 2015
f.
J.
2.5

CA 15-001
Ladders Traversing Parapets: Fabricate top landing of 1 inch deep by 3/16 inch
thick galvanized bar grating, 1 3/6 inch bar spacing, 4 inch cross-bar centers, sized
to span top of wall.
Metal Bollards
1.
Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe.
2.
Fabricate bollards with 3/8 inch thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill
baseplates at all 4 corners for 3/4inch anchor bolts.
a.
Where bollards are to be anchored to sloping concrete slabs, angle baseplates for
plumb alignment of bollards.
FINISHES
A.
Comply with (National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers) NAAMM's "Metal

Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" AMP 500-06 for recommendations for
applying and designating finishes.
B.
Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
C.
Steel Finishes
1.
Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to metal
fabrications according to ASTM A 123 for steel and iron products, and ASTM A 153 for
galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
2.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
minimum requirements indicated below for (Society for Protective Coatings) SSPC
surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed
metal fabrications:
a.
Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3 "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
b.
Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
3.
Shop Priming: Apply Universal Shop Primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications,
except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on
fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, for shop
painting.
a.
Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
b.
Apply two shop coats to steel and iron that will be inaccessible after erection.
4.
Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils.
Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating,
and applying and baking finish.
a.
Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2

INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation;
with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from
established lines and levels.
2.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections
that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 5000 - 7

CA 15-001
3.
4.
5.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hotdip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where
metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded
fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts,
wood screws, and other connectors.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
B.
Miscellaneous Framing and Supports:

1.
General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being
supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on
Shop Drawings.
2.
Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building
structure.
C.
Bearing and Leveling Plates:

1.
Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen
to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
2.
Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing
members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove
wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing
with grout.
a.
Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids
remain.
D.
Metal Railings:
1.
Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space
posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts
in each direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows:
a.
Anchor posts to steel by welding directly to steel supporting members.
E.
Metal Bollards:
1.
Where possible, anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align
bollards in holes 3 inches above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or
tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.
2.
Anchor bollards to concrete structure with anchor bolts. Provide four 3/4-inch bolts at
each bollard, unless otherwise indicated.
a.
Embed anchor bolts at least 4 inches in concrete.
3.
3.3
Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.

A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
05 5000 - 8
METAL FABRICATIONS
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
C.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 5000 - 9
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 05 5100 - METAL STAIRS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads.
2.
Steel railings attached to metal stairs.
3.
Steel handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs.
4.
Railing gates at the level of exit discharge.
B.
1.
Concrete Fill: Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
2.
Metal Railings Not Associated with Stairs or Balconies: Section 05 5000 "metal
Fabrications."
3.
Balcony Railings: Section 05 5219 "Architectural Railings."
4.
Finish Painting: Division 09 painting Sections.
1.3
A.
Delegated Design: Design stairs and railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by
a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria
indicated.
B.
Structural Performance of Stairs: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects of
1.
Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft.
2.
Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in.
3.
4.
Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to
loads specified above.
5.
Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360.
C.
Structural Performance of Railings: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of

1.
Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a.
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction.
b.
Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.
c.
2.
1.4
Infill of Guards:
a.
Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
and installation requirements for stairs and railings.
1.
Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
2.
Fully detail provisions for attachment to each applicable substrate.
a.
Indicate requirements for work provided by others.
METAL STAIRS
05 5100 - 1

CA 15-001
1.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
A.
Delegated Design Submittal: Submit structural analysis data, signed and sealed by qualified
professional engineer responsible for preparation.
B.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
B.
(National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers) NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply

with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM
AMP 510, for class of stair designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1.
Preassembled Stairs: Commercial class.
C.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1.
(American Welding Society) AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
2.
AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
1.7

A.
1.8
Requirements."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal stairs by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
1.
a.
b.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items
with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without
seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
MATERIALS
A.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
B.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold formed, or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn).
05 5100 - 2
METAL STAIRS
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
C.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless
another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
D.
Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011, either commercial steel, Type B, or
structural steel, Grade 30, unless another grade is required by design loads.
E.
Fasteners: As specified in Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications."
F.
1.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal
alloy welded.
2.
3.
Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 03 3000 "Castin-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum
28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated.
4.
Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, 6 by 6 inches--W1.4 by W1.4, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
General:
1.
Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings,
clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor
stairs and platforms on supporting structure.
a.
Join components by welding, unless otherwise indicated.
b.
Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
c.
Fabricate treads and platforms of exterior stairs so finished walking surfaces slope
to drain.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble

units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for
reassembly and coordinated installation.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a
radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough
areas on exposed surfaces.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight
edges.
Weld connections to comply with the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Weld exposed corners and seams continuously, unless otherwise indicated.
e.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head
(countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least
conspicuous.
Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide
weep holes where water may accumulate.
METAL STAIRS
05 5100 - 3

CA 15-001
B.
Steel-Framed Stairs:
1.
Stair Framing:
a.
Fabricate stringers of steel channels.
1)
Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers.
b.
2.
C.
Construct platforms of steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members

as needed to comply with performance requirements.
1)
Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers.
2)
Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting
struts designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry.
Metal-Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown
from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not
less than 0.075 inch (14 gage).
a.
Steel Sheet: Uncoated hot-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated.
b.
Directly weld metal pans to stringers; locate welds on top of subtreads where they
will be concealed by concrete fill. Do not weld risers to stringers.
c.
Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser.
d.
Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same as
subtreads. Weld subplatforms to platform framing.
Steel Railings:
1.
General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and
anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads.
a.
Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding, unless otherwise indicated.
b.
Guard Configuration: As indicated on Drawings.
c.
Gates: Form gates from steel tube of same size and shape as top rails, with infill to
match guards. Provide with cam-type self-closing hinges for fastening to wall and
overlapping stop with rubber bumper to prevent gate from opening in direction
opposite egress.
d.
Handrail Configuration: As indicated on Drawings.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at

connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around
at connections, including at fittings.
Form changes in direction of railings by flush bends.
Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform
curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member
throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming
exposed surfaces of components.
Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated.
Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.
Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges,
miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to
other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or
masonry work.
a.
Provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves,
except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry construction.
FINISHES
A.

05 5100 - 4
METAL STAIRS
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
B.
Finish metal stairs after assembly.
C.
(Society for Protective Coatings) SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4 surface preparation specifications.
D.
Shop Priming: Apply Universal Shop Primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stairs, except those
with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry, unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, for shop painting.
1.
Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
2.
Apply two shop coats to steel and iron that will be inaccessible after erection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2

INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where
necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners
for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.
2.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from
established lines and levels and free of rack.
3.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
masonry construction.
4.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections
that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping
size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hotdip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
5.
Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
B.
Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Section 03 3000
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
Steel Railings:
1.
Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space
posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts
in each direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows:
a.
Anchor posts to steel by welding directly to steel supporting members.
2.
Attach handrails to walls with wall brackets. Provide bracket with 1-1/2 inch clearance
from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if
not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to
building construction as follows:
a.
For solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag
bolts.
b.
For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
METAL STAIRS
05 5100 - 5

CA 15-001
3.3
Design Development
October 02, 2015

A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
B.
05 5100 - 6
METAL STAIRS
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Framing with dimension lumber.
2.
Framing with timber.
3.
Framing with engineered wood products.
4.
Shear wall panels.
5.
Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
6.
Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.
7.
Wood furring and grounds.
8.
Wood sleepers.
9.
Utility shelving.
10.
Plywood backing panels.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
Division 06 Section "Heavy Timber Construction."
2.
Division 06 Section "Sheathing."
3.
Division 06 Section "Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses" for wood trusses made from
dimension lumber.
4.
Division 06 Wood decking.
5.
Division 06 Glued-Laminated Timber.
6.
Division 31 Section "Termite Control" for site application of borate treatment to wood
framing. - ARCHITECT EDIT
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.
B.
Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5
inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension.
Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) or greater in least dimension.
C.
D.
1.4
A.
Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1.
NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
2.
RIS: Redwood Inspection Service.
3.
WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
4.
WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
Structural Performance: Where specific wood I-joists manufacturer and size is not indicated,
provide wood I-joists that are capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under condi
tions indicated.
1.
Design Criteria and Loads: As indicated.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1000 - 1

CA 15-001
2.
1.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Deflection Limits: Design wood I-joists to withstand design loads without deflections
greater than the following:
a.
Floor Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/480 for live loads and 1/360 for total
loads of the span.
b.
Roof Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the horizontally projected span
for total load.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate
component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1.
Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
2.
Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include
physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency.
3.
For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before
and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.
4.
For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content
of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
5.
Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
A.
Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the
ALSC Board of Review.
B.
Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1.
Wood-preservative-treated wood.
2.
Fire-retardant-treated wood.
3.
Engineered wood products.
4.
Shear panels.
5.
Power-driven fasteners.
6.
Powder-actuated fasteners.
7.
Expansion anchors.
8.
Metal framing anchors.
C.
1.7
Shop Drawings: Show layout, designation. Number, type, location, and spacings of
wood I-joists. Include anchorage details, bracing, bridging, joist accessories, and hangers.
1.
Comprehensive engineering analysis of joists provided under the Performance Requirements of this specification signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for its preparation and registered in the state of jurisdiction.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
06 1000 - 2
Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for
fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the
classification marking is representative of the material tested.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Design Development
October 02, 2015
1.8

CA 15-001

A.
Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely
anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency
is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1.
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2.
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on
end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade
compliance issued by grading agency.
3.
Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
4.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent.
C.
Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that
show compliance with building code in effect for Project.
1.
Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design
stresses, as published by manufacturer that meet or exceed those indicated.
Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational
engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a
qualified independent testing agency.
2.2
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A.
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in
contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
1.
Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.
2.
For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical
formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise
adversely affect finishes.
B.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C.
Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
1.
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of
each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by
inspection agency.
D.
Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1000 - 3

CA 15-001
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry
or concrete walls.
Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in
crawlspaces or unexcavated areas.
Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS - ARCHITECT EDIT

A.
General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with
requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with firetest-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test
method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame

spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of
significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with
the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at
any time during the test.
1.
Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
2.
Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fireretardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to
accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where
indicated.
3.
Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less
when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where
exterior type is not indicated.
4.
Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according
ASTM D 5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to
ASTM D 6841.[ For enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces, and where high
temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, provide material with adjustment
factors of not less than 0.85 modulus of elasticity and 0.75 for extreme fiber in
bending for Project's climatological zone.]
C.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.[ Kiln-dry

plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.]
D.
Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing

agency.
1.
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, [mark end or back of
each piece] [or] [omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance
issued by testing agency].
E.
For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations
that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.
F.
Application: Treat [all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated.] [items indicated on
Drawings, and the following:]
1.
Framing for raised platforms.
2.
Framing for stages.
3.
Concealed blocking.
4.
Framing for non-load-bearing partitions.
5.
Framing for non-load-bearing exterior walls.
6.
Roof construction.
06 1000 - 4
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Design Development
October 02, 2015
7.
2.4

CA 15-001
Plywood backing panels.
DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING

A.
Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade.

1.
Application: Interior partitions not indicated as load-bearing.
2.
Species:
a.
Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
b.
Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
c.
Hem-fir; WCLIB, or WWPA.
d.
Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
e.
Northern species; NLGA.
f.
Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
B.
Load-Bearing Walls: No. 2 grade.

1.
Application: Exterior walls and interior load-bearing walls.
2.
Species:
a.
b.
Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.
c.
Douglas fir-south; WWPA.
d.
Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.
e.
Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA.
C.
Ceiling Joists: Construction or No. 2 grade.

1.
Species:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
D.
Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: No. 2 or better Construction or No. 2
Construction, Stud, or No. 3 grade.
1.
Species:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
E.
Exposed Framing: Provide material hand-selected for uniformity of appearance and freedom
from characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish appearance,
including decay, honeycomb, knot-holes, shake, splits, torn grain, and wane. - ARCHITECT
EDIT
1.
Application: Exposed [exterior] [and] [interior] framing[ indicated to receive a stained
or natural finish].
2.
Species and Grade: As indicated above for load-bearing construction of same type.
3.
Species and Grade: Hem-fir (north); [Select Structural] [No. 1] grade; NLGA.
4.
Species and Grade: Southern pine; [Select Structural] [No. 1] [No. 2] grade; SPIB.
5.
Species and Grade: Douglas fir-larch; [Select Structural] [No. 1] grade; WCLIB or
WWPA.
6.
Species and Grade: Mixed southern pine; [Select Structural] [No. 1] [No. 2] grade;
SPIB.
7.
Species and Grade: Spruce-pine-fir; [Select Structural] [No. 1] grade; NLGA.
8.
Species and Grade: Douglas fir-south; [Select Structural] [No. 1] grade; WWPA.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1000 - 5

CA 15-001
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
2.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Species and Grade: Hem-fir; [Select Structural] [No. 1] grade; WCLIB or WWPA.
Species and Grade: Douglas fir-larch (north); [Select Structural] [No. 1] grade; NLGA.
Species and Grade: Spruce-pine-fir (south); [Select Structural] [No. 1] grade; NeLMA,
WCLIB, or WWPA.
Species and Grade: Eastern hemlock-balsam fir or eastern hemlock-tamarack; [Select
Structural] [No. 1] grade; NeLMA.
Species and Grade: Beech-birch-hickory; [Select Structural] [No. 1] grade; NeLMA.
Species and Grade: Northern red oak; [Select Structural] [No. 1] grade; NeLMA.
Species and Grade: Redwood; [Clear Heart Structural] [Clear Structural] [Select
Structural] [No. 1] grade; RIS.
Species and Grade: Mixed oak; [Select Structural] [No. 1] grade; NeLMA.
Species and Grade: Mixed maple; [Select Structural] [No. 1] grade; NeLMA.
Species and Grade: Western cedars; [Select Structural] [No. 1] grade; WCLIB or
WWPA.
ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS

A.
Engineered Wood Products, General: Products shall contain no urea formaldehyde.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of engineered wood product from single source from a
single manufacturer.
C.
Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain
primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and
manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Boise Cascade Corporation.
b.
Georgia-Pacific.
c.
Louisiana-Pacific Corporation.
d.
Roseburg Forest Products Co.
e.
Weyerhaeuser Company.
2.
3.
D.
Parallel-Strand Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood strand elements with
grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456
and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559.
1.
the following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
E.
Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2600 psi (17.9 MPa) for 12-inch nominal(286-mm actual-) depth members.
Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 1,900,000 psi (13 050 MPa).
Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2900 psi (20 MPa) for 12-inch nominal(286-mm actual-) depth members.
Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,200,000 psi (15 100 MPa).
Wood I-Joists: Prefabricated units, I-shaped in cross section, made with solid or structural
composite lumber flanges and wood-based structural panel webs, let into and bonded to
flanges. Provide units complying with material requirements of and with structural capacities
established and monitored according to ASTM D 5055.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
06 1000 - 6
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Design Development
October 02, 2015
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
F.
2.6

CA 15-001
Boise Cascade Corporation.

Roseburg Forest Products Co.
Web Material: Either oriented strand board or plywood, complying with DOC PS 1 or
DOC PS 2, Exposure 1.
Structural Properties: Provide units with depths and design values not less than those
indicated.
Provide units complying with APA PRI-400, factory marked with APA trademark
indicating nominal joist depth, joist class, span ratings, mill identification, and compliance
with APA standard.
Rim Boards: Product designed to be used as a load-bearing member and to brace wood I-joists
at bearing ends, complying with research/evaluation report for I-joists.
1.
Manufacturer: Provide products by same manufacturer as I-joists.
2.
Material: All-veneer product.
3.
Thickness: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
4.
Provide performance-rated product complying with APA PRR-401, rim board grade,
factory marked with APA trademark indicating thickness, grade, and compliance with
APA standard.
SHEAR WALL PANELS
A.
2.7
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated

on Drawings, as manufactured by:
1.
Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A.
General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1.
Blocking.
2.
Nailers.
3.
Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
4.
Cants.
5.
Furring.
6.
Grounds.
7.
Utility shelving.
B.
For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber and any of the
following species:
1.
2.
Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
3.
4.
5.
C.
For utility shelving, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and[ any of] the
following species and grades: - ARCHITECT EDIT.
1.
Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; [Premium or
No. 2 Common (Sterling)] [Standard or No. 3 Common] grade; NeLMA, NLGA,
WCLIB, or WWPA.
2.
Mixed southern pine; No. [1] [2] grade; SPIB.
3.
Hem-fir or hem-fir (north); [Select Merchantable or No. 1 Common] [Construction or
No. 2 Common] grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1000 - 7

CA 15-001
4.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir; [Select Merchantable or No. 1 Common]

[Construction or No. 2 Common] grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
D.
For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
E.
For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots
capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.8
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A.
2.9
Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, C-C Plugged in thickness indicated or, if not
indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness.
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this article for material and manufacture.
1.
Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative
treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B.
C.
Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D.
Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E.
Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).
F.
Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);
with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
G.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to four times the load imposed as determined
by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting
agency.
1.
Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
2.
following:
a. Wej-it.
b. Hilti Corporation
c. ITW Red Head.
d. Simpson Storng-Tie.
2.10
METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1.
B.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M,
G60 (Z180) coating designation.
C.
Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), highstrength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B
(HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick.
1.
Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated.
D.
Where not otherwise indicated provide metal framing anchors as follows. All material shall be a
minimum of 18 gauge sheet steel.
06 1000 - 8
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
E.
Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- (50-mm-) long seat and 1-1/4-inch- (32-mm) wide nailing flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth.
F.
I-Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- (50-mm-) long seat and 1-1/4-inch- (32mm-) wide nailing flanges full depth of joist. Nailing flanges provide lateral support at joist top
chord.
G.
Top Flange Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers, full depth of joist, formed from metal strap with
tabs bent to extend over and be fastened to supporting member.
1.
Strap Width: 2 inches (50 mm).
H.
Bridging: Rigid, V-section, nailless type, length to suit joist size and spacing.
I.
Post Bases: Adjustable-socket type for bolting in place with standoff plate to raise post 1 inch
(25 mm) above base and with 2-inch- (50-mm-) minimum side cover.
J.
Rafter Tie-Downs: Simpson H2.5.
K.
Floor-to-Floor Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying upper floor wall studs to band
joists and lower floor studs, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 36 inches (914 mm) long.
L.
Hold-Downs: Brackets for bolting to wall studs and securing to foundation walls with anchor
bolts or to other hold-downs with threaded rods and designed with first of two bolts placed
seven bolt diameters from reinforced base.
1.
Bolt Diameter: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
2.
Width: 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).
3.
Body Thickness: 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).
4.
Base Reinforcement Thickness: 0.239 inch (6.1 mm).
2.11
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill
sealer; 1-inch (25-mm) nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm); selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
B.
Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
C.
Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, [butyl

rubber] [or] [rubberized-asphalt] compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film,
aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025
inch (0.6 mm). - ARCHITECT EDIT.
D.
Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying
with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.
1.
Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
E.
Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active
ingredient.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for
attaching other construction.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1000 - 9

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
B.
Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with
D.
Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring
backing panels.
E.
Shear Wall Panels: Install shear wall panels to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
F.
Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.
G.
Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and foundation walls.
H.
Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
1.
Do not provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and
intersections, provide framing or blocking at surfaces for fastening edges of panels.
J.
Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated
and as follows:
1.
Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96
inches (2438 mm) o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately
fitted to close furred spaces.
2.
Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at
ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. Where fire
blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks
of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal- (38-mm actual-) thickness.
3.
Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to
limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) and to solidly fill space
below partitions.
4.
Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more
than 20 feet (6 m) o.c.
K.
Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with
function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
L.
Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1.
NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2.
Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
M.
Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails
snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.
N.
For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with
fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered. - ARCHITECT EDIT
1.
Comply with [approved] [indicated] fastener patterns where applicable.[ Before
fastening, mark fastener locations, using a template made of sheet metal, plastic,
or cardboard.]
2.
Use finishing nails unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with
wood filler.
06 1000 - 10
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.
3.2

CA 15-001
Use common nails unless otherwise indicated. Drive nails snug but do not countersink
nail heads.
WOOD GROUND, SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A.
Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to
shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate
locations with other work involved.
B.
Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces
C.
Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not

less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact
thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
3.3
WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION

A.
Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required
for tolerance of finish work.
B.
Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal- (19-by-63-mm

actual-) size furring horizontally or vertically at 24 inches (610 mm) 600 mm o.c.
C.
Furring to Receive Gypsum Board Plaster Lath: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal- (19-by-38-mm
actual-) size furring vertically at 16 inches (406 mm) 400 mm o.c.
3.4
WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION

A.
General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal
(38-mm actual) thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used
for non-load-bearing partitions. Fasten plates to supporting construction unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
For exterior walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal- (38-by-140-mm actual-) size wood studs
spaced 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
2.
For interior partitions and walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal- (38-by-140-mm actual-) or
2-by-4-inch nominal- (38-by-89-mm actual-) size wood studs spaced 16 inches (406 mm)
600 mm 400 mm o.c. as indicated.
3.
Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches
(2438 mm) high, using members of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness and of same
width as wall or partitions.
B.
Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs.
C.
Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness
equal to width of studs. Support headers on jack studs.
1.
For non-load-bearing partitions, provide a single-trimmer stud and headers not less than
4-inch nominal (89-mm actual) depth for openings 48 inches (1200 mm) and less in
width, 6-inch nominal (140-mm actual) depth for openings 48 to 72 inches (1200 to 1800
mm) in width, 8-inch nominal (184-mm actual) depth for openings 72 to 120 inches (1800
to 3000 mm) in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal (235-mm actual) depth for
openings 10 to 12 feet (3 to 3.6 m) in width.
2.
For load-bearing walls, provide jacks, king-studs, and headers as indicated.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1000 - 11

CA 15-001
3.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
FLOOR AND ROOF JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION

A.
General: Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less
than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of bearing on wood or metal. Attach floor joists as follows:
1.
Where supported on wood members, by toe nailing or by using metal framing anchors.
2.
Where framed into wood supporting members, by using wood ledgers as indicated or, if
not indicated, by using metal joist hangers.
B.
Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers as indicated.
C.
Do not notch joists. Do not bore holes larger than 11/2 inches (37 mm) depth of joist; do not
locate closer than 2 inches (50 mm) from top or bottom, or within 24 inches (51 mm) of any
support.
D.
Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness by depth of joist at ends of
joists unless nailed to header or rim joist.
E.
Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders, or load bearing walls not less than
4 inches (102 mm) or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch
nominal (38-mm actual) thickness by depth of joist over supports.
F.
Anchor members paralleling masonry as indicated.
G.
Provide solid blocking between joists under jack and king studs for openings.
H.
Where bottom edge or flange is not braced by a direct applied hard ceiling or other bracing
provide bridging of type indicated below, at intervals of 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c., between
joists.
1.
Diagonal wood bridging formed from bevel-cut, 1-by-3-inch nominal- (19-by-64-mm
actual-) size lumber, double-crossed and nailed at both ends to joists.
2.
Steel bridging installed to comply with bridging manufacturer's written instructions.
3.6
TIMBER FRAMING INSTALLATION

A.
Install timber with crown edge up and provide not less than 4 inches (102 mm) of bearing on
supports. Provide continuous members unless otherwise indicated; tie together over supports
as indicated if not continuous.
B.
Where beams or girders are framed into pockets of exterior concrete or masonry walls, provide
1/2-inch (13-mm) air space at sides and ends of wood members.
C.
Install wood posts using metal anchors indicated.
D.
Treat ends of timber beams and posts exposed to weather with water-repellent.
3.7
STAIR FRAMING INSTALLATION

A.
Provide stair framing members of size, space, and configuration indicated or, if not indicated, to
comply with the following requirements:
1.
Size: 2-by-12-inch nominal- (38-by-286-mm actual-) size, minimum.
2.
Material: Laminated-veneer lumber, parallel-strand lumber or solid lumber.
3.
Notching: Notch rough carriages to receive treads, risers, and supports; leave at least 31/2 inches (89 mm) of effective depth. Stair stringers shall not be notched.
4.
Spacing: At least three framing members for each 36-inch (914-mm) clear width of stair.
B.
Provide stair framing with no more than 3/16-inch (4.7-mm) variation between adjacent treads
and risers and no more than 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) variation between largest and smallest treads
and risers within each flight.
06 1000 - 12
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.8

CA 15-001
PROTECTION
A.
Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
B.
Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes
sufficiently wet that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA-registered borate
treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1000 - 13
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 06 1600 - SHEATHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Wall sheathing.
2.
Roof sheathing.
3.
Composite nail base insulated roof sheathing. - ARCHITECT EDIT
4.
Subflooring.
5.
Underlayment. - ARCHITECT EDIT
6.
Sheathing joint and penetration treatment.
1.
Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.
2.
Division 07 Section "Weather Barriers" for water-resistive barrier applied over wall
sheathing.
A.
Evaluation Reports: For following products, from ICC-ES:

1.
1.4
Foam-plastic sheathing.

A.
Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored.
Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS - ARCHITECT EDIT

A.
2.2
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide

materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per
ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from [UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory."] [GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual."] <Insert listing organization
and publication>.
WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS
A.
Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2 unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2.
C.
Thickness: As indicated.
D.
Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.
SHEATHING
06 1600 - 1

CA 15-001
2.3
Design Development
October 02, 2015
WALL SHEATHING
A.
Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.

1.
Span Rating: Not less than 24/0.
2.
Nominal Thickness: Not less than 15/32 inch (11.9 mm).
B.
Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.

1.
2.
C.
Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, gypsum sheathing; with
water-resistant-treated core and with water-repellent paper bonded to core's face, back, and
long edges.
1.
the following:
a.
American Gypsum.
b.
G-P Gypsum Corporation.
c.
LaFarge North America Inc.
d.
National Gypsum Company.
e.
Temple-Inland Inc.
f.
United States Gypsum Co.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M. - ARCHITECT EDIT

1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide
one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a.
CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc.
b.
G-P Gypsum Corporation; Dens-Glass Gold.
c.
Temple-Inland Inc.; GreenGlass
d.
United States Gypsum Co.; Securock.
e.
<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.
2.
3.
E.
Type and Thickness: [Regular, 1/2 inch (13 mm)] [Type X, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm)] thick.
Size: [48 by 96 inches (1219 by 2438 mm)] [48 by 108 inches (1219 by 2743 mm)] [48
by 120 inches (1219 by 3048 mm)] [1200 by 2400 mm] [1200 by 2750 mm] [1200 by
3050 mm] for vertical installation.
Cementitious Backer Units: ASTM C 1325, Type A.

1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide
one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a.
C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990.
b.
Custom Building Products; Wonderboard.
c.
FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board.
d.
USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.
e.
<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.
2.
2.4
Type and Thickness: As indicated.

Edge and End Configuration: Square.
Size: 48 by 96 inches (1219 by 2438 mm) for vertical installation.
Thickness: [1/2 inch (12.7 mm)] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm)] [As indicated].
ROOF SHEATHING
A.
Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
06 1600 - 2
SHEATHING
Design Development
October 02, 2015
1.
2.
B.
2.5

CA 15-001

Oriented-Strand-Board Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.

1.
2.
SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT
A.
Plywood Subflooring: Exposure 1 single-floor panels or sheathing, tongue and groove edges.
1.
Span Rating: Not less than 24 o.c. or 48/24.
2.
B.
Oriented-Strand-Board Subflooring: Exposure 1, single-floor panels or sheathing, tongue and

groove edges.
1.
Span Rating: Not less than 24 o.c. or 48/24.
2.
C.
Underlayment, General: Provide underlayment in nominal thicknesses indicated or, if not

indicated, not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) over smooth subfloors and not less than 3/8 inch (9.5
mm) over board or uneven subfloors.
D.
Plywood Underlayment for Resilient Flooring: DOC PS 1, [Exterior A-C] [Exterior B-C]
[Exterior, C-C Plugged] [Exposure 1 Underlayment] with fully sanded face.- ARCHITECT
EDIT.
E.
Plywood Underlayment for Ceramic Tile: DOC PS 1, Exterior, C-C Plugged, not less than 5/8inch (15.9-mm) nominal thickness, for ceramic tile set in [organic adhesive] [epoxy adhesive]
[EGP (exterior glue plywood) latex-portland cement mortar].
F.
Plywood Underlayment for Carpet: DOC PS 1, [Exterior, C-C Plugged] [Exposure 1,

Underlayment] [Interior, Underlayment].
G.
Particleboard Underlayment: ANSI A208.1, [Grade PBU] [Grade M-2, made with binder
containing no urea formaldehyde].
H.
Hardboard Underlayment: ANSI A135.4, Class 4 (Service), Surface S1S; with back side
sanded.
2.6
FASTENERS
A.
B.
C.
Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D.
Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E.
Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954,
except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for
material being fastened.
F.
Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in
length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached.
1.
For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch (0.835 mm) thick, use screws that comply with
ASTM C 1002.
2.
For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick, use screws that
comply with ASTM C 954.
SHEATHING
06 1600 - 3

CA 15-001
G.
2.7
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Screws for Fastening Oriented-Strand-Board-Surfaced, Polyisocyanurate-Foam Sheathing to

Metal Roof Deck: Steel drill screws, in type and length recommended by sheathing
manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached.
SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS - ARCHITECT EDIT
A.
Sealant for [Paper-Surfaced] [Glass-Mat] Gypsum Sheathing: Elastomeric, medium-modulus,

neutral-curing silicone joint sealant compatible with joint substrates formed by gypsum
sheathing and other materials, recommended by sheathing manufacturer for application
indicated and complying with requirements for elastomeric sealants specified in Division 07
Section "Joint Sealants."
B.
Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with
ASTM C 834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and
sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed
fasteners.
1.
Sheathing Tape: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches (50 mm) wide, 10 by
10 or 10 by 20 threads/inch (390 by 390 or 390 by 780 threads/m), of type recommended
by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing
joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing and with a history of successful in-service use.
C.
Sheathing Tape for Foam-Plastic Sheathing: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by

sheathing manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in sheathing.
2.8
A.
Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 or
ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by
manufacturers of both adhesives and panels.
1.
Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50> g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to
use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. To the greatest extent
possible, arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.
B.
Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting
construction unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1.
NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2.
Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."
D.
Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.
E.
Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so
these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from
passing through completed assembly.
F.
Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match width of
expansion joint.
06 1600 - 4
SHEATHING
Design Development
October 02, 2015
G.
3.2

CA 15-001
Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so

sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is
forecast.
WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood
Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. All end joints
shall be staggered.
B.
Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:

1.
Subflooring:
a.
Glue and nail to wood framing.
b.
Screw to cold-formed metal framing.
c.
Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends.
3.3
2.
Wall and Roof Sheathing:

a.
Nail (staples not allowed) to wood framing.
b.
Screw to cold-formed metal framing.
c.
Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends.
3.
Underlayment:
a.
Nail or staple to subflooring.
b.
Space panels 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) apart at edges and ends.
c.
Fill and sand edge joints of underlayment receiving resilient flooring immediately
before installing flooring.
GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A.
Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.

1.
Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with nails or screws.
2.
Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws.
3.
Install boards with a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts
structural elements.
4.
Install boards with a 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where they abut masonry or similar materials
that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.
B.
Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing.
C.
Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up.
Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent boards
without forcing. Abut ends of boards over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent
boards not less than one stud spacing. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to
each steel stud.
1.
Space fasteners approximately 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8
inch (9.5 mm) from edges and ends of boards.
2.
For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws
if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs
immediately after sheathing is installed.
D.
Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of
each board with those of adjacent boards and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less
than one stud spacing. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud.
1.
Space fasteners approximately 8 inches (200 mm) o.c., unless a closer spacing is
indicated and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) from edges and ends of boards.
2.
For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws
if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs
SHEATHING
06 1600 - 5

CA 15-001
E.
3.4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions.

1.
Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient amount
of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other
penetrations and openings.
2.
Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and
trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to
exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other
penetrations and openings.
CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNIT INSTALLATION
A.
3.5
Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions
for type of application indicated.
FOAM-PLASTIC SHEATHING INSTALLATION - ARCHITECT EDIT.
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Foam-Plastic Wall Sheathing: Install vapor-relief strips or equivalent for permitting escape of
moisture vapor that otherwise would be trapped in stud cavity behind sheathing.
C.
Apply sheathing tape to joints between foam-plastic sheathing panels and at items penetrating
sheathing. Apply at upstanding flashing to overlap both flashing and sheathing.
3.6
PARTICLEBOARD UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A.
3.7
Comply with CPA's recommendations for type of subfloor indicated. Fill and sand gouges,
gaps, and chipped edges. Sand uneven joints flush.
1.
Fastening Method: [Glue and nail] [Nail] [Nail or staple] underlayment to subflooring.
HARDBOARD UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A.
3.8
A.
Comply with CPA's recommendations and hardboard manufacturer's written instructions for
preparing and applying hardboard underlayment.
1.
Fastening Method: [Nail] [Nail or staple] underlayment to subflooring.
PROTECTION
Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Sheathing: Protect sheathing by covering exposed exterior surface of
sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper securely fastened to framing. Apply covering
06 1600 - 6
SHEATHING
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 06 1753 - SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Wood roof trusses.
2.
Wood floor trusses.
3.
Wood girder trusses.
4.
Wood truss bracing.
B.
1.
Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry.
2.
Division 06 Section "Sheathing" for roof sheathing and subflooring
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses: Planar structural units consisting of metal-plateconnected members fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and assembled before delivery
to Project site.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For metal-plate connectors, metal truss accessories, and fasteners.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for trusses.

1.
Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss
required.
2.
Indicate sizes, stress grades, and species of lumber.
3.
Indicate locations of permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of individual truss
members due to design loads.
4.
Indicate locations, sizes, and materials for permanent bracing required to prevent
buckling of individual truss members due to design loads.
5.
Indicate type, size, material, finish, design values, orientation, and location of metal
connector plates.
6.
Show splice details and bearing details.
C.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer registered in the state of jurisdiction and responsible for their
preparation.
1.5
A.
Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1.
Metal-plate connectors.
2.
Metal truss accessories.
06 1753 - 1

CA 15-001
1.6
Design Development
October 02, 2015
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Metal Connector-Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI

and that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 for manufacture of connector plates.
1.
Fabricator's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed
to assume engineering responsibility.
2.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer registered in the state of
jurisdiction.
B.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that

complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1.
1.
Metal-plate connectors.
2.
Metal truss accessories.
1.7

A.
Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations in TPI BCSI, "Building Component
Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining, & Bracing Metal
Plate Connected Wood Trusses."
1.
Store trusses flat, off of ground, and adequately supported to prevent lateral bending.
2.
Protect trusses from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored.
3.
Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
B.
Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard

and replace trusses that are damaged or defective.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer registered in the state of

jurisdiction to design metal-plate-connected wood trusses.
B.
Structural Performance: Provide metal-plate-connected wood trusses capable of withstanding

design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. Comply with requirements in TPI 1
unless more stringent requirements are specified below.
1.
Design Loads: As indicated.
2.
Maximum Deflection Under Design Loads:
a.
Roof Trusses: Total load vertical deflection of 1/360 of span.
b.
Floor Trusses: Total load vertical deflection of 1/360 of span; live load vertical
deflection of 1/600 of span.
c.
Maximum shall not exceed 1.0 inches (25.4 mm).
C.
Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following publications:

1.
TPI 1, "National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction."
2.
TPI DSB, "Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate
Connected Wood Trusses."
3.
TPI BCSI, "Building Component Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for
Handling, Installing, Restraining, & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses."
D.
Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AF&PA's "National
Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement."
06 1753 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.2

CA 15-001
DIMENSION LUMBER
A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency
is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1.
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2.
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit grade stamp and
provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.
3.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S.
4.
Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing.
B.
Minimum Chord Size for Roof Trusses: 2 by 6 inches nominal (38 by 140 mm actual) for top
chords.
C.
Minimum Specific Gravity for Top Chords: 0.43.
D.
Permanent Bracing: Provide wood bracing that complies with requirements for miscellaneous
lumber in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."
2.3
METAL CONNECTOR PLATES

A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Alpine Engineered Products, Inc.; an ITW company.
2.
Cherokee Metal Products, Inc.; Masengill Machinery Company.
3.
CompuTrus, Inc.
4.
Eagle Metal Products.
5.
Jager Building Systems, Inc.; a Tembec/SGF Rexfor company.
6.
MiTek Industries, Inc.; a subsidiary of Berkshire Hathaway Inc.
7.
Robbins Engineering, Inc.
8.
Truswal Systems Corporation; an ITW company.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain metal connector plates from single manufacturer.
C.
General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1.
D.
Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), high-strength
low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS
Type B); G60 (Z180) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick.
1.
Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Hot-Dip Heavy-Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), highstrength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B
1.
Use for exterior locations.
2.4
FASTENERS
A.
1.
Provide fasteners for use with metal framing anchors that comply with written
recommendations of metal framing manufacturer.
2.
Where trusses are exposed to weather, or in area of high relative humidity, provide
fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B.
Nails: ASTM F 1667. Brads and staples are not permitted.
06 1753 - 3

CA 15-001
2.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
METAL FRAMING ANCHORS AND ACCESSORIES

A.

1.
Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
2.
KC Metals Products, Inc.
3.
Phoenix Metal Products, Inc.
4.
5.
USP Structural Connectors.
B.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M,
G60 (Z180) coating designation.
1.
Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Hot-Dip Heavy-Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), highstrength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B
1.
Use for exterior locations and where indicated.
D.
Truss Tie-Downs: Bent strap tie for fastening roof trusses to wall studs below, 1-1/2 inches (38
mm) wide by 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick.
E.
Roof Truss Clips: Angle clips for bracing bottom chord of roof trusses at non-load-bearing
walls, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick. Clip is fastened to truss through
slotted holes to allow for truss deflection.
F.
Floor Truss Hangers: Where not indicated provide U-shaped hangers, full depth of floor truss,
with 1-3/4-inch- (44-mm-) long seat; formed from metal strap 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick with tabs
bent to extend over and be fastened to supporting member.
G.
Roof Truss Bracing/Spacers: U-shaped channels, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 1 inch (25
mm) deep by 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick, made to fit between two adjacent trusses and
accurately space them apart, and with tabs having metal teeth for fastening to trusses.
2.6
FABRICATION
A.
Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close-fitting joints.
B.
Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations, thicknesses, and anchorage details
required to withstand design loads for types of joint designs indicated.
C.
Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure
uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1.
Position members to produce design camber indicated.
1.
Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1.
D.
Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded
simultaneously in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured.
B.
If trusses are delivered to Project site in more than one piece, assemble trusses before
installing.
C.
Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required,
exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes.
06 1753 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
D.
Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated.
E.
Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction.
F.
Space trusses as indicated; adjust and align trusses in location before permanently fastening.
G.
Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal truss tie-downs or floor truss hangers as
applicable. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in metal framing anchors according to
manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions.
H.
Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses.
1.
Anchor trusses to girder trusses as indicated.
I.
Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are
applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams.
1.
2.
Install bracing to comply with Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."

Install and fasten strongback bracing vertically against vertical web of parallel-chord floor
trusses at centers indicated.
J.
Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1.
K.
Do not alter trusses in field. Do not cut, drill, notch, or remove truss members.
L.
Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements.

1.
Damaged trusses may be repaired according to truss repair details signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for truss design, when approved by
Architect.
06 1753 - 5
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 06 4023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Interior standing and running trim.
2.
Residential cabinets.
3.
Plastic-laminate cabinets.
4.
Plastic-laminate countertops.
5.
Solid-surface countertops.
6.
Quartz-agglomerate surface countertops.
7.
Stone countertops.
8.
Shelving.
B.
1.
Framing and Blocking:
a.
Section 05 4000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing."
b.
Section [06 1000] [06 1053] "[Miscellaneous ]Rough Carpentry."
c.
Section 09 2216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing."
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
MDF: Medium-density fiberboard.
B.
Exposed Portions of Cabinets: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including
bottoms of cabinets more than 48 inches above floor, and surfaces visible in open cabinets.
C.
Semiexposed Portions of Cabinets: Surfaces behind opaque doors, such as interiors of

cabinets, shelves, dividers, interiors and sides of drawers, and interior faces of doors. Tops of
cases 78 inches or more above floor are defined as semiexposed.
D.
Concealed Portions of Cabinets: Surfaces not usually visible after installation, including
sleepers, web frames, dust panels, and ends and backs that are placed directly against walls or
other cabinets.
1.4
A.
1.5
Provide furring, blocking, shims, hanging strips, and other materials and devices necessary for
installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork
installation.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product required, including cabinet hardware and accessories
and finishing materials and processes, manufacturer's published technical data sheets,
including product description and applications, Reference Standard classification, technical
properties, features, benefits, and limitations.
B.
and installation requirements for interior architectural woodwork.
06 4023 - 1

CA 15-001
1.
2.
3.
C.
Include location of each item, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other
components.
Indicate locations and sizes of required furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including
concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections and to be provided by
others.
a.
Identify blocking to be installed during rough framing.
Indicate locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, soap dispensers
and other items to be installed in architectural woodwork.
a.
Obtain equipment and fixture templates.
Samples:
1.
Plastic laminates, 12 inches square, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with
1 sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to 1 edge.
2.
Thermoset decorative-panels, 12 inches square, for each type, color, pattern, and
surface finish, with edge banding on 1 edge.
3.
Solid-surfacing materials, 6 inches square.
4.
Quartz-agglomerate surfacing materials, 6 inches square.
5.
Stone, 6 inches square.
6.
1.6
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Entity that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance.
B.
C.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with (Architectural Woodwork Institute)
AWI, Architectural Woodwork Manufacturer's Association of Canada, and Woodwork Institute's
"Architectural Woodwork Standards" for Custom Grade interior architectural woodwork for
construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.
D.

1.7

A.
1.8
1.
Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage
woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in
other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply
with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and
90 deg F and relative humidity between 17 and 50 percent during the remainder of the
construction period.
B.
Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify

dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work.
06 4023 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
1.
2.
1.9

CA 15-001
Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
a.
b.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections and to be provided by others.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's Custom Grade quality standard for
each type of woodwork, unless otherwise indicated.
B.

1.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Wood Products:
1.
Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Poplar, Douglas fir-larch or Douglas fir south, Prime or
D finish; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
2.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading
agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any ruleswriting agency certified by the (American Lumber Standard Committee) ALSC Board of
Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to
inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
a.
Mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide
certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.
b.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Hardboard: (American Hardboard Association) AHA A135.4.

MDF: (American National Standards Institute) ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.
Softwood Plywood: (U.S. Department of Commerce) DOC PS 1.
Hardwood Plywood: (Hardwood, Plywood, and Veneer Association) HPVA HP-1, either
veneer core, MDF core, or particleboard core, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with

thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with (Laminating Materials
Association) LMA SAT-1.
1.
Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with
exposed or semiexposed edges.
C.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: (National Electrical Manufacturers Association)

NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.
1.
Basis-of-Design Product(s): Provide the product(s) indicated on Drawings, or
comparable product(s) by:
06 4023 - 3

CA 15-001
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Abet Laminati, Inc.

Formica Corporation.
Lamin-Art, Inc.
Panolam Industries International, Inc.
Wilsonart International.
D.
Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with
(International Solid Surface Fabricators Association) ISSFA-2.
1.
Type: Standard type, unless Special Purpose type is indicated.
2.
Thickness: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 1/2 inch.
3.
Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
4.
Products: Provide solid-surfacing material by one of the following:
5.
Basis-of-Design Product(s): Provide <Insert manufacturer; product> [the product(s)
indicated on Drawings], or comparable product(s) [by:] [acceptable to Architect.]
a.
Solitex Surfaces.
b.
Avonite Surfaces; Aristech Acrylics LLC.
c.
E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company.
Formica Corporation.
d.
e.
LG Solid Source, L.L.C.
f.
Meganite Inc.; a division of The Pyrochem Group.
g.
Samsung; Cheil Industries Inc.
h.
Swan Corporation (The).
i.
Transolid, Inc.
j.
Wilsonart International.
E.
Quartz Agglomerate: Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a
matrix of filled plastic resin and complying with the "Physical Characteristics of Materials" Article
of (American National Standards Institute/International Cast Polymer Alliance) ANSI/ICPA SS1.
1.
Thickness: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 2 cm.
2.
Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
3.
Products: Provide quartz agglomerate material by one of the following:
4.
Basis-of-Design Product(s): Provide <Insert manufacturer; product> [the product(s)
indicated on Drawings], or comparable product(s) [by:] [acceptable to Architect.]
F.
Stone:
1.
Granite: ASTM C 615.
a.
Description: [Fine] [Medium]-grained, [white] [pink] [gray] [black] stone [Uniform
pattern, without veining].
2.
G.
Marble: ASTM C 503, Classification [I Calcite] [II Dolomite] [III Serpentine] [IV
Travertine].
a.
Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained, white stone with only slight veining.
1.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried
to less than 15 percent moisture content.
2.
Fasteners: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish
required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where
possible.
3.
Anchors: Material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure
anchorage.
a.
Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face
of exterior walls and elsewhere required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothedsteel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
4.
06 4023 - 4
Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by

manufacturer for general carpentry use.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
5.
6.
2.3

CA 15-001
Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498;

recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer.
Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.
a.
Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above.
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A.
General: Provide cabinet hardware that complies with (Builders Hardware Manufacturers
Association) BHMA A156.9 "Cabinet Hardware."
B.
Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of
opening.
C.
Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.

1.
Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter.
D.
Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141 or roller catches, BHMA A156.9, B03071.
E.
Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal, two-pin type with shelf hold-down clip.
F.
Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091.

1.
Standard Duty (Grade 1, Grade 2, and Grade 3): Side mounted and extending under
bottom edge of drawer; full-extension type; epoxy-coated steel with polymer rollers.
G.
Countertop Support Brackets: Angular steel bracket, 18 inch minimum legs.

1.
Provide where countertops span distances greater than 4'-0" for each 4'-0" of span,
unless indicated otherwise.
H.
Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
I.
Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.
J.
Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch, color as selected by Architect,
molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Doug Mockett & Company; SG Series, or comparable
K.
Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1.
Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.
2.
Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.
L.
Concealed Hardware Finishes: Manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class
requirements in BHMA A156.9.
2.4
RESIDENTIAL CABINETS
A.
Quality Standard: Provide cabinets that comply with (Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers
Association) KCMA A161.1.
1.
KCMA Certification: Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet" seal affixed in a
semiexposed location of each unit and showing compliance with the above standard.
B.
Face Style: Flush overlay; door and drawer faces cover cabinet fronts with only enough space
between faces for operating clearance.
C.
Cabinet Style: Face frame.
D.
Door and Drawer Front Style: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
E.
Cabinet Interiors: Thermoset decorative panels.

1.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
06 4023 - 5

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
F.
Cabinet Hardware:
1.
Hinges, Drawer Slides, and Catches: Manufacturer's standard.
2.
Pulls: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
G.
Countertops and Backspashes:

1.
Core Material: Medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue.
2.
Cladding: High-pressure decorative laminate.
a.
Grade: HGS.
b.
Edge Treatment: Square.
c.
Color and Pattern: As indicated on Drawings.
3.
H.
2.5
Fabricate tops with loose backsplashes for field application.
Provide residential cabinets by:

1.
Kitchen Craft Cabinetry.
2.
Aristokraft Cabinetry.
3.
SACO Industries, Inc.
4.
Master Woodcraft Cabinstry.
CLOSET SHELVING
A.
Ventilated Wire Shelving: Grade C-1008 bright, basic, cold-drawn steel wire coated with epoxypolyester-hybrid powder-coat.
1.
Shelving: 12 inches deep with 2 inch deep stiffening lip.
a.
Support Bar Spacing: Maximum 6 inch o.c.
b.
Cross Wire Spacing: 1/2 inch o.c.
c.
Fixed Mounting System: Manufacturer's standard system comprised of support
braces, wall brackets, back clips, clamps, anchors, joiner plates, and finish end
caps.
1)
Support Bracket Spacing: Gusseted, maximum 30 inches o.c.
2.
B.
2.6
Clothes Shelf and Rod: 12 inches deep shelf unit with hanger rod suspended on hooks
below leading edge of shelf.
a.
Support Bar Spacing: Maximum 6 inch o.c.
b.
Cross Wire Spacing: 1 inch o.c.
c.
Hanger Rod Hook Spacing: 12 inches o.c.
d.
Support Brackets: Gusseted, maximum 30 inches o.c.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Rubbermaid Home Products; Ventilated Wire Shelving

System or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
ClosetMaid.
2.
Elfa.
3.
Schulte.
FABRICATION
A.
General:
1.
Comply with Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), Architectural Woodwork
Manufacturer's Association of Canada, and Woodwork Institute's "Architectural
Woodwork Standards" for Custom Grade interior architectural woodwork construction,
finishes, installation, and other requirements.
2.
Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for
wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in
installation areas.
3.
Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
4.
Interior Carpentry:
a.
Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to
maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble
06 4023 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for
fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1)
Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork
fabrication will be complete.
2)
Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely
assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening
devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as
intended and check measurements of assemblies against field
measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for
shipment.
b.
Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances,

plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately
and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and
shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
1)
Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
B.
Interior Trim:
1.
Solid lumber or primed MDF exposed surfaces for opaque finish:
a.
Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent with at least 85 percent of shipment at 12
percent or less.
b.
Finger Jointing: Not allowed.
c.
Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth).
d.
Base Pattern: S4S, 1/2 by 4 inches.
e.
Opening Casing Pattern: S4S, 1/2 by 2-1/2 inches.
f.
Window Stools: S4S, 1/2 inch by width require for 1 inch projection from finished
wall surface.
1)
Aprons: S4S, 1/2 by 2-1/2 inches.
a)
Length: 1 inch shorter than stool.
C.
Plastic-Laminate Cabinets:
1.
AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.
2.
Cabinet Body Construction:
a.
Particle Board: 3/4 inch thick unless indicated otherwise.
b.
Joinery: Glued and doweled.
1)
Minimum 6 dowels per joint for 24 inch deep cabinets; 4 dowels per joint for
12 inch deep cabinets.
3.
c.
d.
e.
Cabinet Backs: minimum 1/4 inch thick medium density fiberboard.

Bases: 3/4 inch exterior-grade plywood, glued and doweled.
Drawers: AWI Premium grade drawer construction.
1)
Sides, backs, and sub-fronts: Minimum 1/2 inch thick thermoset decorative
particle board panels, glued and doweled into sides.
2)
Bottoms: Minimum 1/2 inch thick thermoset decorative particle board panel
screwed directly to bottom edges of drawer box.
f.
g.
Drawer/Door Fronts: 3/4 inch particleboard.

Shelves: 3/4 inch particle board.
Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following

requirements:
a.
Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS.
b.
Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS.
c.
Edges: PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch thick, matching laminate in color, pattern,
and finish.
1)
Adhesive: Use adhesive tested and proven effective in the Project
environment.
06 4023 - 7

CA 15-001
d.
E.
Semiexposed Surfaces: Thermoset decorative panels.

a.
Edges of Shelves: PVC tape, 0.018-inch minimum thickness, matching laminate in
color, pattern, and finish.
b.
For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide
surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade CLS.
c.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate
manufacturer's full range.
5.
Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure

decorative laminate, Grade BKL.
Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments
and drawers, unless located directly under tops.
Plastic-Laminate Countertops:
1.
Core Material: Medium-density fiberboard.
a.
Core Material at Sinks: Medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue.
2.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.

a.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
3.
4.
Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.

Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of
countertop substrate.
<Solid-Surface Material> <Quartz-Agglomerate> Countertops:

1.
Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacingmaterial manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and
finishing.
a.
Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges of materials and configuration indicated.
b.
Fabricate tops with loose backsplashes for field application.
2.
3.
F.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate

4.
6.
D.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Install integral sink bowls in countertops in shop.

Drill holes in countertops for plumbing fittings and soap dispensers in shop.
Stone Countertops:
1.
Fabricate as illustrated on Drawings and as detailed on Shop Drawings. Provide holes
and sinkages cut or drilled for anchors, fasteners and as shown and necessary to secure
countertops in-place. Cut and back check as required for proper fit and clearance.
a.
Receive templates for items to be installed in tops, before cutting of any stone.
b.
Cut accurately to shape and dimensions indicated on Shop Drawings. Comply with
the following tolerances:
1)
Flat and true within plus or minus 1/32 inch per 60 inch length.
2.
3.
Allowable Patching: Chips at the edges or corners may be patched providing the
structural integrity of the stone is not affected and providing the patch matches the color
and finish of the natural stone.
Anchors: Stainless steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
06 4023 - 8
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.2

CA 15-001
PREPARATION
A.
Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation

areas.
B.
Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Install woodwork in accordance with requirements of AWI's Custom Grade quality standard,
B.
Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for
fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.
C.
Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed plastic
shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
D.
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish
at cuts.
E.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use
fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with
woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
F.
Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length
pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use
pieces less than 96 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary.
Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
1.
Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with flexible sealant material specified in
Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants," sand smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished.
2.
Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch
in 96 inches.
G.
Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1.
Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a
straight line.
2.
Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16
inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood framing,
blocking, or hanging strips and No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal
backing or metal framing behind wall finish.
H.
Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop.
1.
Align adjacent countertop segments, and form seams to comply with manufacturer's
written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress
joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
2.
Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from
a straight line.
3.
Secure backsplashes to walls with adhesive.
4.
Calk space between backsplash and wall with mildew-resistant sealant specified in
Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."
06 4023 - 9

CA 15-001
3.4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

A.
Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.
B.
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C.
Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to

restore damaged or soiled areas.
D.
Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, chromated copper arsenate, or

ammoniacal copper zinc arsenate to co-generation facilities or "waste-to-energy" facilities.
E.
Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill
F.
Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.
G.
06 4023 - 10
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 07 1326 - SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Modified bituminous sheet waterproofing for at-grade horizontal conditions.
2.
Adhesive-coated HDPE sheet waterproofing for blind-side basement walls.
B.
1.
Substrate Material: Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
2.
Permanent Below-Grade Support Systems: Section 31 5000 "Excavation Support and
Protection."
3.
Subsurface Drainage Systems: Section 33 4000 "Subdrainage."
4.
Related Sections:
a.
07 1413 "Hot Fluid-Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing."
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.
Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating
substrate.
B.
requirements.
1.
Indicate locations and extent of waterproofing.
2.
Include details illustrating the following:
a.
Treatment for substrate joints and cracks.
b.
Sheet flashings.
c.
Sealing of penetrations.
d.
Inside and outside corners.
e.
Tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing.
f.
Termination conditions.
1.4
A.
1.5
Inspection Report: Copy of waterproofing system manufacturer's inspection report of

completed waterproofing installation.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Entity approved or licensed by manufacturer for installation of

waterproofing required for this Project and eligible to receive special warranties specified.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain primary waterproofing materials and primers through a single
source and a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by
manufacturer of primary materials.
07 1326 - 1

CA 15-001
C.
1.6
Design Development
October 02, 2015

1.
Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition
and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details
and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and
protection and repairs.
A.
1.7
1.
Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and
directions for storing and mixing with other components.
2.
Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected
location and within temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.
3.
Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
4.
Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instructions.
5.
Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
6.
Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:
a.
Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and
concealment.
b.
Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to
Project site before installation time.
c.
Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in
each area of construction.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a
damp or wet substrate.
1.
Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist.
B.
Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of waterproofing materials.
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees

to replace waterproofing material that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain
watertight within specified warranty period.
1.
Failure includes, but is not limited to, failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate
prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in
substrate exceeding 1/16 inch in width.
2.
Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Special Installer's Warranty: Special Project Warranty: Submit waterproofing Installer's

warranty, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of
waterproofing system such as waterproof membrane, base flashing, protection boards, and
molded-sheet drainage panels, for the following warranty period:
1.
Warranty includes removing and reinstalling protection board, drainage panels, and
insulation.
2.
07 1326 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2

1.
MATERIALS
A.
Modified Bituminous Sheet: 60 mil thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of 56 mils of rubberized
asphalt laminated to a 4 mil thick, polyethylene film with release liner on adhesive side and
formulated for application with primer or surface conditioner that complies with VOC limits of
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Tensile Strength: 250 psi minimum; (ASTM International) ASTM D 412, Die C, modified.
2.
Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified.
3.
Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970.
4.
Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch movement; ASTM C 836.
5.
Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf minimum; ASTM E 154.
6.
Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 150 feet minimum; ASTM D 5385.
7.
Water Absorption: 0.15 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at 70
deg F; ASTM D 570.
8.
Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms; ASTM E 96, Water Method.
9.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Grace Construction Products; Bituthene 3000, or
Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; CCW MiraDRI 860/861.
a.
b.
CETCO.
c.
Chargar Corporation.
d.
Henry Company.
e.
W. R. Meadows.
f.
Polyguard Products.
g.
Tamko Roofing Products, Inc.
B.
Adhesive-Coated HDPE Sheet:

1.
Tensile Strength, Film: 4000 psi minimum; ASTM D 412.
2.
Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 10 deg F; ASTM D 1970.
3.
Peel Adhesion to Concrete: 5 lbf/in.; ASTM D 903, modified.
4.
Lap Adhesion: 2.5 lbf/in.; ASTM D 1876, modified.
5.
Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 231 feet; ASTM D 5385, modified.
6.
Vapor Permeance: 0.01 perms; ASTM E 96, Water Method.
7.
Water Absorption: 0.5 percent; ASTM D 570.
8.
Vertical Applications: 32-mil- thick, uniform, flexible sheets consisting of 16-mil- thick,
HDPE sheet coated with a pressure-sensitive rubber adhesive, a protective adhesive
coating, and a release liner.
a.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Grace Construction Products; Preprufe 160R.
C.
Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforcedasphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and as follows:
1.
Thickness: 1/8 inch, nominal, for vertical applications; 1/4 inch, nominal, elsewhere.
2.
Adhesive: Rubber-based solvent type recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for
type of protection course.
D.
Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite

subsurface drainage panels consisting of a nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with
an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 sieve laminated to one side with or without a
07 1326 - 3

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
polymeric film bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet

drainage core, with a vertical flow rate of 9 to 15 gpm per ft.
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Grace Construction Products; Hydroduct 220, or
a.
American Hydrotech, Inc.
Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing, Inc.
b.
c.
Protecto-Wrap Company.
E.
Insulation: Extruded Polystyrene Board, ASTM C 578, Type IV, 25-psi minimum compressive
strength, 2 inch thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
1.
General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for
intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing.
a.
Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities
having jurisdiction.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Primer: Liquid primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet

waterproofing material.
Surface Conditioner: Liquid surface conditioner recommended for substrate by
manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.
Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, asphalt-modified coating.
Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt sheet strips of same material and
thickness as sheet waterproofing.
Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick, predrilled at 9
inch centers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
1.
Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by
waterproofing manufacturer.
2.
Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by
plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide
clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.
B.
Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray
affecting other construction.
C.
Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other
penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
D.
Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,
holes, and other voids.
E.
Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints
and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.
1.
Install sheet strips and center over treated construction and contraction joints and cracks
exceeding a width of 1/16 inch.
07 1326 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
F.
Bridge and cover isolation joints and discontinuous deck-to-wall and deck-to-deck joints with
overlapping sheet strips.
1.
Invert and loosely lay first sheet strip over center of joint. Firmly adhere second sheet
strip to first and overlap to substrate.
G.
Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135.
H.
Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations
through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Insulation:
1.
Install one or more layers of board insulation to achieve required thickness over
waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 3/4 inch of projections and penetrations.
2.
On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive or tape applied according to
3.
On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
B.
Protection and Drainage Courses

1.
Install protection course with butted joints over completed waterproofing used for
basement walls. Comply with waterproofing material manufacturer's written
recommendations for attaching protection course.
2.
Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from
substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives or mechanical
fasteners that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to
maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent
construction.
C.
Adhesive-Coated HDPE Sheets:

1.
Install adhesive-coated HDPE sheets according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2.
Install adhesive-coated HDPE sheet with HDPE face against substrate. Accurately align
sheets and maintain uniform 3-inch- minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal
seams and stagger and tape end laps to ensure watertight installation. Mechanically
fasten to substrate.
a.
Securely fasten top termination of membrane with continuous metal termination bar
anchored into substrate and cover with detailing tape.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Corners: Seal lapped terminations and cut edges of sheet waterproofing at inside and
outside corners with detail tape.
Seal penetrations through sheet waterproofing to provide watertight seal with detail tape
patches or wraps and a liquid-membrane troweling.
Install sheet waterproofing and auxiliary materials to produce a continuous watertight tie
into adjacent waterproofing.
Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements.
Tape perimeter of damaged or nonconforming area extending 6 inches beyond repaired
areas in all directions. Apply a patch of sheet waterproofing and firmly secure with detail
tape.
Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements;
repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.
Modified Bituminous Sheets:

1.
Install sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and
according to recommendations in ASTM D 6135.
2.
Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that
will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more
than 24 hours.
07 1326 - 5

CA 15-001
3.
Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align
sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2 inch minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and
seal seams and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.
a.
When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F, install
self-adhering, modified bituminous sheets produced for low-temperature
application. Do not use low-temperature sheets if ambient or substrate
temperature is higher than 60 deg F.
4.
Apply continuous sheets over sheet strips bridging substrate cracks, construction, and
contraction joints.
Seal exposed edges of sheets at terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or
ending in reglets with mastic.
Install sheet waterproofing and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent waterproofing.
Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements.
Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6
inches beyond repaired areas in all directions.
Correct deficiencies in or remove sheet waterproofing that does not comply with
requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

A.
3.5
Inspection: Arrange for manufacturer's representative to inspect completed installation and

provide written report that installation complies with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Remove and replace applications of waterproofing where inspection indicates that it does
not comply with specified requirements.
A.
Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
B.
Protect installed insulation from damage due to UV light, harmful weather exposures, physical
abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation will be subject to
abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after
installation.
C.
Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
D.
07 1326 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 07 1800 - TRAFFIC COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes traffic coatings for pedestrian and vehicular traffic.
B.
1.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product, manufacturer's published technical data sheets,
1.
Include installation instructions.
B.
and installation requirements for traffic coatings.
1.
Include details for treating substrate joints and cracks, flashings, deck penetrations, and
other termination conditions.
2.
C.
Samples: For traffic coating, prepared on rigid backing, 12 inches square.

1.
Provide stepped Sample demonstrating buildup of coating.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Provide traffic coatings with a Class A rating in accordance with ASTM E 108.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Entity trained and approved by manufacturer.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain primary traffic-coating materials, including primers, from trafficcoating manufacturer. Obtain accessory materials including aggregates, sheet flashings, joint
sealants, and substrate repair materials of types and from sources recommended in writing by
primary material manufacturer.
D.

1.5

A.
1.6
Requirements."
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Apply traffic coatings within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended in writing by manufacturer. Do not apply traffic coatings to damp
or wet substrates, when temperatures are below 40 deg F, when relative humidity exceeds 85
percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F above dew point.
TRAFFIC COATINGS
07 1800 - 1

CA 15-001
1.
B.
1.7
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Do not apply traffic coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist, or when such weather conditions
are imminent during the application and curing period. Apply only when frost-free
conditions occur throughout the depth of substrate.
Do not install traffic coating until items that penetrate membrane have been installed.
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace traffic coating that fails in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Adhesive or cohesive failures.
b.
Abrasion or tearing failures.
c.
Surface crazing or spalling.
d.
Intrusion of water, oils, gasoline, grease, salt, deicer chemicals, or acids into deck
substrate.
2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General:
1.
Material Compatibility: Provide primers; base, intermediate, and topcoat; and accessory
materials that are compatible with one another and with substrate under conditions of
service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
B.
Traffic Coatings: Comply with ASTM C 957.

1.
Primer: Manufacturer's standard factory-formulated primer recommended for substrate
and conditions indicated.
2.
Preparatory and Base Coats: Single- or multicomponent liquid urethane elastomer.
3.
Intermediate Coat: Single- or multicomponent liquid urethane elastomer.
4.
Topcoat: Single or multicomponent, aliphatic liquid urethane elastomer.
a.
C.
Component Coat Thicknesses: As recommended by manufacturer for substrate and service

conditions indicated, but not less than the following (measured excluding aggregate):
1.
Base Coat: 25 mil minimum dry film thickness.
2.
Intermediate Coat: 15 mil minimum dry film thickness.
3.
Topcoat: 10 mil minimum dry film thickness.
D.
Aggregate: Uniformly graded, washed silica sand of particle sizes, shape, and minimum
hardness recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer.
1.
Spreading Rate: As recommended by manufacturer for substrate and service conditions
indicated, but not less than the following:
a.
Intermediate Coat: 12.5 lb. per gallon of coating.
E.
Basis-of-Design Products:
1.
Pedestrian Traffic Coating: Provide Neogard; Pedagard, or comparable product
2.
Vehicular Traffic Coating: Provide Neogard; Autogard, or comparable product acceptable
to Architect.
F.
1.
Joint Sealants: As specified in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."
07 1800 - 2
TRAFFIC COATINGS
Design Development
October 02, 2015
a.
b.
2.

CA 15-001
Where traffic coatings are installed over joint sealants, provide sealants that are
compatible with traffic coating.
Where joint sealants are installed with traffic coatings, coats shall be tested for
adhesive and chemical compatibility.
Reinforcing Strip: Fiberglass mesh recommended in writing by traffic-coating

manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
1.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for surface
smoothness, surface moisture, and other conditions affecting performance of trafficcoating work.
2.
Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture.
a.
Test for moisture according to ASTM D 4263 and as recommended by coating
manufacturer.
b.
Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation
only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of
water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
3.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after substrate construction and penetrating work have
been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
a.
Begin coating application only after minimum concrete curing and drying period
recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer has passed and after
substrates are dry.
PREPARATION
A.
General:
1.
Before applying traffic coatings, clean and prepare substrates according to ASTM C 1127
and manufacturer's written instructions to produce clean, dust-free, dry substrate for
traffic-coating application. Remove projections, fill voids, and seal joints if any, as
recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer.
2.
Schedule preparation work so dust and other contaminants from process do not fall on
wet, newly coated surfaces.
3.
Mask adjoining surfaces not receiving traffic coatings to prevent overspray, spillage,
leaking, and migration of coatings. Prevent traffic-coating materials from entering deck
substrate penetrations and clogging weep holes and drains.
4.
Concrete Substrates: Mechanically abrade surface to a uniform profile acceptable to
manufacturer, according to ASTM D 4259. Do not acid etch.
a.
Remove grease, oil, paints, and other penetrating contaminants from concrete.
b.
Remove concrete fins, ridges, and other projections.
c.
Remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners,
form-release agents, and other incompatible materials that might affect coating
adhesion.
d.
Remove remaining loose material to provide a sound surface, and clean surfaces
according to ASTM D 4258.
B.
Terminations and Penetrations:

1.
Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through traffic
coatings and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 1127 and
TRAFFIC COATINGS
07 1800 - 3

CA 15-001
C.
Joint and Crack Treatment:

1.
Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrates according to ASTM C 1127
and manufacturer's written recommendations. Before coating surfaces, remove dust and
dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.
a.
Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation.
2.
3.3
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Apply reinforcing strip in traffic-coating system where recommended in writing by trafficcoating manufacturer.
APPLICATION
A.
3.4
Traffic Coatings:
1.
Apply traffic coating according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written instructions.
2.
Apply number of coats of specified compositions for each type of traffic coating at
locations as indicated on Drawings.
3.
Verify that wet film thickness of each coat complies with requirements every 100 sq. ft..
4.
Cure traffic coatings. Prevent contamination and damage during application and curing
stages.
A.
Protect traffic coatings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
B.
Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
C.
D.
Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 "Construction

Waste Management and Disposal."
07 1800 - 4
TRAFFIC COATINGS
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 07 2100 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Foam-plastic board insulation.
2.
Glass-fiber batt insulation.
3.
Vapor retarders.
B.
1.
Roof Insulation: Section 07 5423 "TPO Roofing System."
2.
Fire-Resistive Joint System Insulation: Section 07 8446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."
3.
Acoustical Insulation: Section 09 2900 "Gypsum Board."
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of product required from a single source and single
manufacturer.
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to

(ASTM International) ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
C.
Mockups: Furnish and install insulation and vapor retarders for integrated mockup indicated on
Drawings.
1.5

A.
Comply with examination requirements in Section 01 6000 "Product Requirements," and the
following:
1.
Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture,
soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
2.
Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:
a.
Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and
concealment.
b.
Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to
Project site before installation time.
c.
Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in
each area of construction.
THERMAL INSULATION
07 2100 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 or Class 2, with
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per
ASTM E 84.
1.
Provide product that passes (National Fire Protection Association) NFPA 285 testing for
use in wall assemblies indicated on Drawings.
2.
Provide foil-faced, polyisocyanurate board insulation by:
a.
Atlas Roofing Corporation.
b.
Dow Chemical Company.
c.
Hunter Panels.
Rmax, Inc.
d.
3.
B.
Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I, with maximum flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing
ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
1.
Provide unfaced, glass-fiber blanket insulation by:
a.
CertainTeed Corporation.
b.
Guardian Building Products, Inc.
c.
Johns Manville.
d.
Knauf Insulation.
e.
Owens Corning.
2.
C.
Use for framed exterior wall construction and general building insulation as indicated on
Drawings.
Insulation Fasteners:
1.
Mechanical Fasteners: Insulation manufacturer's standard engineered case-hardened
and tempered carbon-steel pancake-head screws of length required to engage framing 3
turns minimum.
2.
Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable
of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking
washer in place.
a.
Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches
square.
b.
Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter;
length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
c.
Provide adhesively attached, spindle-type anchors by:
AGM Industries, Inc.
1)
2)
Gemco.
3.
D.
Use for continuous exterior wall insulation.
Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inchthick

galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to
hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter.
a.
Provide insulation-retaining washers by:
1)
AGM Industries, Inc.
2)
Gemco.
Vapor Retarders:
1.
Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance
rating of 0.13 perm.
2.
07 2100 - 2
Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder

manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
THERMAL INSULATION
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.
E.

CA 15-001
Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer

and has demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates
indicated.
1.
Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.
2.
Joint Tape: Self-adhesive asphalt or butyl based flashing tape recommended by
insulation manufacturer for sealing insulation joints, 4 inch minimum width.
3.
Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: 1 or 2-component, foamed-in-place, polyurethane
foam sealant, 1.5- to 2.0-lb/cu. ft. density; flame-spread index of 25 or less according to
ASTM E 162 with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended by foam
sealant manufacturer.
a.
Use for:
1)
Sealing cracks and gaps in board insulation.
2)
Sealing spaces around doors and windows.
3)
Sealing shim spaces and other gaps in exterior wall and roof construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2

PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including
removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation
attachment.
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
2.
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed
to ice, rain, or snow at any time.
3.
Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around
obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with
placement.
4.
Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce
thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up
total thickness.
5.
Seal cracks, gaps and other voids in exterior wall and roof construction with spray-foam
sealant.
B.
Continuous Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation:

1.
Mechanically fasten in accordance with insulation manufacturer's recommended pattern
and spacing.
2.
Seal joints between units with spray-foam sealant.
a.
Trim sealant flush with insulation surface after curing is complete.
C.
Glass-Fiber Batt Insulation for Framed Construction:

1.
Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:
THERMAL INSULATION
07 2100 - 3

CA 15-001
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
D.
3.4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members.
If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will
produce a snug fit between ends.
Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit
between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support
unfaced batts mechanically and support faced batts by taping flanges of insulation
to flanges of metal studs.
Maintain 3 inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated
for or protected from contact with insulation.
Install batts according to ASTM C 1320.
Vapor Retarders:
1.
Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor
retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor
retarders in place with adhesives. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids
in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.
2.
Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs.
3.
Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating
vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating
objects and vapor retarders.
4.
Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other
work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.
A.
Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather
exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures
where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent
construction immediately after installation.
B.
07 2100 - 4
THERMAL INSULATION
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 07 2500 - WEATHER BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Water-resistive barriers.
2.
Flexible flashing.
B.
1.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of product required from a single source and a single
manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by manufacturer of weather barrier.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide weather barrier with the following fire-testresponse characteristics as determined by testing identical products applied with identical
fasteners to substrates per test method indicated below by (Underwriters Laboratory) UL or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows, per (ASTM International) ASTM E 84:
a.
Flame-Spread Index: 75 or less.
b.
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
2.
C.
1.5
Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to

NFPA 285.
Mockups: Furnish and install weather barrier and accessory components for integrated
mockup indicated on Drawings.
A.
Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.

1.
WEATHER BARRIERS
07 2500 - 1

CA 15-001
2.2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
MATERIALS
A.
Water-Resistive Barriers:
1.
Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air barrier; UV stabilized; and acceptable to
a.
Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 8 perms per ASTM E 96 (Procedure A).
b.
Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not less than three months.
c.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide DuPont; Tyvek CommercialWrap D, or
1)
Pactiv, Inc.
2)
Tamlyn.
B.
Flexible Flashing: Provide one of the following:

1.
Butyl Rubber Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable,
butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or
spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch, unless
a.
Building Wrap Flashing: 0.025 inch.
2.
C.
Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a

pliable, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film,
aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than
0.040 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
a.
Building Wrap Flashing: 0.025 inch.
1.
Joint Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by weather barrier
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in weather barrier.
2.
Joint and Penetration Sealant: ASTM C 920 Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.
a.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Dow Corning Corporation; 758, or comparable
3.
Fasteners:
a.
Metal Framing: 1-5/8 inch stainless-steel or zinc-plated screws with 2 inch
diameter plastic caps or manufacturer-approved 1-1/4 or 2 inch metal-gasketed
washers.
b.
Wood Framing: Nails or staples, ASTM F 1667, as recommended by
manufacturer, with 1 inch diameter plastic caps, length as required to penetrate
framing members minimum 5/8 inches.
4.
Primer: Product recommended by manufacturer of flashing for substrates encountered.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2

INSTALLATION
A.
General: Cover exposed exterior surface of sheathing with weather barrier securely fastened to
framing immediately after sheathing is installed.
1.
Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansionor control-joint locations.
2.
Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4 inch overlap unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Building Wrap:
07 2500 - 2
WEATHER BARRIERS
Design Development
October 02, 2015
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
3.3

CA 15-001

Install prior to installation of windows and doors.
Start installation at a building corner, leaving 6 to12 inches of weather barrier extended
beyond corner to overlap.
Install in a horizontal manner starting at the lower portion of the wall surface with
subsequent layers installed in a shingling manner to overlap lower layers. Maintain
weather barrier plumb and level.
a.
Sill Plate Interface: Extend lower edge of weather barrier over sill plate interface 3
to 6 inches. Secure to foundation with elastomeric sealant as recommended by
weather barrier manufacturer.
b.
Window and Door Openings: Extend weather barrier completely over openings.
c.
Overlap distances:
1)
Exterior Corners: Minimum 12 inches.
2)
Seams: Minimum 6 inches and as recommended by manufacturer.
Attach to framing through exterior sheathing. Secure using manufacturer's recommend
fasteners. Space 12 to 18 inches vertically on center at vertical framing members and 24
inches on center maximum horizontally.
Seaming:
a.
Seal seams with joint tape at all vertical and horizontal overlaps.
b.
Seal any tears or cuts as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.
c.
Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.
Penetrations: Tape or seal building wrap around items penetrating weather barrier as
necessary to prevent air leakage.
Flexible Flashing:
1.
Apply flexible flashing to perimeter of openings in exterior wall construction, and as
otherwise indicated on Drawings, to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
a.
Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
b.
Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches except that at
flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.
c.
Lap flashing over weather barrier at bottom and sides of openings.
d.
Lap weather barrier over flashing at heads of openings.
e.
Lap flashing over weather-resistant building paper at bottom and sides of openings.
f.
After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to
ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates.
A.
WEATHER BARRIERS
07 2500 - 3
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 07 4213 - METAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes concealed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels.
B.
1.
a.
b.
Section 06 1000 "Rough Carpentry."
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3

Continuous Insulation: Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation."
Water-Resistive Barrier: Section 07 2500 "Weather Barriers."
Flexible Flashing: Section 07 2500 "Weather Barriers."
Metal Flashing: Section 07 6200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
A.
General Performance: Metal wall panel assemblies shall comply with performance
requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other
defects in construction.
B.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint
sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For wall panels and accessory products, manufacturer's published technical
data sheets, including product description and applications, Reference Standard classification,
1.
Include material descriptions, profiles and dimensions of individual components, and
finishes.
B.
and installation requirements for metal wall panels.
1.
Illustrate layout of each required panel assembly.
2.
Include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment
system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories.
a.
Distinguish between factory, shop, and field-assembled work.
3.
C.

a.
Samples:
1.
Metal Wall Panels: For each profile and finish required, 18 inch length of actual panel.
2.
Trim and Closures: For each profile required, 18 inch length.
METAL WALL PANELS
07 4213 - 1

CA 15-001
1.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Entity trained and approved by wall panel manufacturer.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal wall panel from a single source and a single
manufacturer.
C.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide metal wall panels identical to those of
assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify
products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
Indicate design designations from (Underwriters Laboratory) UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.
D.
Mockups: Furnish and install metal wall panels for integrated exterior mockup indicated on
Drawings.
E.

1.
Meet with metal wall panel Installer and installers whose work interfaces with or affects
metal wall panels, including installers of doors, windows, and louvers.
2.
Review methods and procedures related to metal wall panel installation, including
3.
Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment
between and attachment to structural members.
4.
Review flashings, special details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of other
construction that will affect metal wall panels.
5.
Review temporary protection requirements for metal wall panel assembly during and after
installation.
1.6

A.
1.7
1.
Deliver components, sheets, metal wall panels, and other manufactured items so as not
to be damaged or deformed. Package metal wall panels for protection during
transportation and handling.
2.
Unload, store, and erect metal wall panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping,
twisting, and surface damage.
3.
Stack metal wall panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable
weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal wall panels to ensure dryness, with
positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal wall panels in contact with other
materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
4.
Retain strippable protective covering on metal wall panels during panel installation.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit assembly of metal wall panels to be performed according to manufacturers'
written instructions and warranty requirements.
B.
Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions by
field measurements before metal wall panel fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
1.
a.
07 4213 - 2
METAL WALL PANELS
Design Development
October 02, 2015
b.
1.8

CA 15-001
COORDINATION
A.
1.9
Coordinate metal wall panel assemblies with rain drainage provisions, flashing, trim, and
construction of studs, soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and
noncorrosive installation.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of metal wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
a.
Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
b.
Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
2.
B.
Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair finish or replace metal wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of
factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1.
Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b.
Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c.
Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2.
Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2

1.
MATERIALS
A.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip
process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755.
1.
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90 coating designation; structural
quality.
2.
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation,
Grade 40; structural quality.
3.
Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
B.
Panel Sealants:
1.
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, nonstaining,
single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability,
nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone sealant.
a.
Provide one of the following:
1)
Dow Corning Corporation; 791.
2)
Momentive Performance Materials; SCS 2000 SilPruf LM.
3)
Tremco, Inc.; Spectrem 2.
2.
Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 1311.
METAL WALL PANELS
07 4213 - 3

CA 15-001
a.
3.
C.
2.3
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Tremco; Tremco Butyl Sealant, or comparable

product by:
1)
Bostik Findley.
2)
Pecora Corporation.
Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound

sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic,
nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
1.
Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: ASTM C 645 cold-formed metallic-coated steel
sheet, ASTM A 653, G60 hot-dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion
resistance unless otherwise indicated.
a.
Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion
resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten miscellaneous
metal framing members to substrates.
2.
Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, endwelded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide
exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal wall panels by means of plastic
caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers.
a.
Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use galvanized
steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
3.
Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel
assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings,
sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of
metal wall panels, unless otherwise indicated.
a.
Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal
wall panels.
b.
Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from
material recommended by manufacturer.
c.
Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefinfoam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inchthick, flexible closure
strips; cut or premolded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips
where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
4.
Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.018 inch (26 gage) minimum thickness, zinc-coated
(galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil
coating. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide
finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs,
corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and
fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal wall panels.
CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS

A.
General: Provide factory-formed metal wall panels designed to be field assembled by lapping
and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to
supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight
installation.
B.
Reveal-Joint, Concealed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with vertical panel edges and
flat pan between panel edges; with beveled reveal joint between panels.
1.
Metal Thickness: 0.030 inch (22 gage).
2.
Panel Coverage: 12 inches.
3.
Panel Height: 7/8 inch.
4.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Centria; Concept Series Concealed Fastener Panels,
CS-200, or comparable product acceptable to Architect.
07 4213 - 4
METAL WALL PANELS
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.4

CA 15-001
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate and finish metal wall panels and accessories at the factory to greatest
extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill
indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated
profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
B.
Fabricate metal wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel
and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals.
C.
Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length
of panel.
D.
Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and
other characteristics of item indicated.
1.
Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,
and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded
back to form hems.
2.
Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to
be seamed, form seams, and solder.
3.
Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate
elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.
4.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
5.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by metal wall panel
manufacturer.
a.
Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal
wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being
secured.
2.5
FINISHES
A.

B.
Protect painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
C.
Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

1.
2-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70
percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat,
and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin
manufacturers' written instructions.
2.
Mica Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. 2-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended mica flakes
containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare,
pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin
3.
Metallic Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. 3-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended metallic
flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and
clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply
with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
D.
Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored

acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total
dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.
METAL WALL PANELS
07 4213 - 5

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
1.
Verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is
within flatness tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer.
2.
Verify that weather barrier installation is complete.
3.
Examine rough-in of objects penetrating metal wall panels to verify actual locations of
penetrations relative to seam locations of metal wall panels before metal wall panel
installation.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Miscellaneous Framing: Install subgirts, base angles, sills, furring, and other miscellaneous
wall panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal wall panel
manufacturer's written recommendations.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install metal wall panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in

orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to girts
and subgirts unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of
the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1.
Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal wall panels.
2.
Flash and seal metal wall panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping
screws. Do not begin installation until weather barrier and flashings that will be
concealed by metal wall panels are installed.
3.
Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
4.
Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
5.
Install flashing and trim as metal wall panel work proceeds.
6.
Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices
and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
7.
Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and
concrete and elsewhere as indicated or, if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing.
8.
Align bottom of metal wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping
screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with selftapping screws.
9.
Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.
B.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.
C.
Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for
weathertight performance of metal wall panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and
sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.
1.
Seal metal wall panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel.
Seal side joints where recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.
2.
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 9200 "Joint
Sealants."
D.
Lap-Seam Metal Wall Panels: Fasten metal wall panels to supports with fasteners at each
lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.
1.
Apply panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel
creep" or application not true to line.
2.
Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather
side of metal wall panels.
07 4213 - 6
METAL WALL PANELS
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use
proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of
washer.
Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress
washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in
predrilled holes.
Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of metal wall panels and between panels and
protruding equipment, vents, and accessories.
Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to weather-side surface of fastenings on end
laps; on side laps of nesting-type panels; on side laps of corrugated nesting-type, ribbed,
or fluted panels; and elsewhere as needed to make panels weathertight.
At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with butyl-rubber
sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.
Accessories:
1.
General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight
mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and
other components.
a.
Install components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including
trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure
strips, and similar items.
2.
3.4

CA 15-001
Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written

installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide
concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated.
Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather
resistant.
a.
Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and
tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded
back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to
result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance.
b.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24
inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be
used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion
joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic
sealant (concealed within joints).

A.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are
installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of metal wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal
wall panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
B.
After metal wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt,
and sealant.
C.
Replace metal wall panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
D.
METAL WALL PANELS
07 4213 - 7
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 07 5423 - TPO ROOFING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes adhered membrane roofing system.
B.
1.
2.
Blocking and Nailers: Section 06 1000 "Rough Carpentry."
3.
4.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Roofing Terminology: Refer to (ASTM International) ASTM D 1079, and glossary of (National
Roofing Contractors Association) NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for
definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
B.
TPO Roofing: Single-ply thermoplastic polyolefin roofing.
1.4
A.
General Performance: Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift
pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roofing and
base flashings shall remain watertight.
1.
Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when
tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.
2.
Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to
ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272.
B.
Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under
conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing membrane
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
C.
Roofing System Design: Provide a membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that
have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift
pressure calculated according to (American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering
Institute) ASCE/SEI 7 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures."
1.
Corner Uplift Pressure: 90 lbf/sq. ft.
2.
Perimeter Uplift Pressure: 60 lbf/sq. ft.
3.
Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: 30 lbf/sq. ft.
1.5
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, manufacturer's published technical data
TPO ROOFING SYSTEM
07 5423 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
B.
requirements for roofing system.
1.
Include base flashings and membrane termination details.
2.
Illustrate tapered insulation, including slopes.
3.
Illustrate insulation fastening patterns.
4.
C.
Samples:
1.
12 inch square of roof membrane, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap
seam.
2.
12 inch square of walkway pads or rolls, of color required.
3.
Precast Concrete Pavers: Each type and texture required, 12 by 12 by 2 inches.
4.
Wood Paver Tiles: Each type required, full size.
1.6
A.
Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is

approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system.
1.
Attach certificate to Special Warranty, and include in "Warranties" binder.
B.
Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system

complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
1.
Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements.
2.
Attach certificate to Special Warranty, and include in "Warranties" binder.
C.
Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed

roofing installation.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Entity that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system

manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's
warranty.
B.
Source Limitations: Provide complete roofing system comprised of components approved and
accepted by roofing membrane manufacturer.
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofing materials with the fire-testresponse characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method
below by (Underwriter's Laboratory) UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate
markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1.
Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class B; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes
indicated.
2.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119, for fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies of which
roofing system is a part.
D.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in

Section 01 3100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to roofing system including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Meet with roofing installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck installer,
and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including installers of roof
accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2.
Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's
3.
Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements,
including flatness and fastening.
4.
Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
07 5423 - 2
TPO ROOFING SYSTEM
Design Development
October 02, 2015
5.
6.
7.
1.8

CA 15-001
Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,
equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.
Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after
installation.
Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.

A.
1.
Deliver roofing materials to Project site in containers labeled with manufacturer's name,
product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing
with other components.
2.
Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected
location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer.
Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.
a.
Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its
stated shelf life.
3.
4.
1.9
Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.10
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions
and warranty requirements.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which

manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks.
1.
Special warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, roofing membrane
accessories, vapor retarder, roof insulation, fasteners, roof pavers, walkway products,
and other components of membrane roofing system.
2.
B.
Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, signed by Installer, covering
Work of this Section, including all components of membrane roofing system such as roofing
membrane, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor
retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period:
1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.

1.
TPO ROOFING SYSTEM
07 5423 - 3

CA 15-001
2.2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
MATERIALS
A.
Vapor Retarder:
1.
Self-Adhering-Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 1970, polyethylene film laminated to layer
of rubberized asphalt adhesive, minimum 40 mil total thickness; maximum permeance
rating of 0.1 perm; cold applied, with slip-resisting surface and release paper backing.
Provide primer when recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.
B.
Roof Insulation:
1.
General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and
referenced standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses
indicated.
2.
Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat facer
on both major surfaces.
3.
Tapered Insulation: Factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per
12 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
4.
Provide preformed drain sumps, saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other
insulation shapes where required and where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to
slopes indicated.
5.
Provide roof insulation by:
a.
Atlas Roofing Corporation.
b.
Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
c.
Firestone Building Products Company.
d.
GAF Materials Corporation.
e.
GenFlex Roofing Systems.
f.
Hunter Panels.
g.
Johns Manville International, Inc.
h.
RMAX.
C.
Insulation Accessories:
1.
General: Provide roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer
for intended use that are compatible with roof membrane.
2.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosionresistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate,
and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
3.
Cold Fluid-Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied adhesive
formulated to adhere roof insulation to substrate.
4.
Joint Tape: 6 or 8 inch wide, coated, glass-fiber joint tape.
A.
Fabric-Reinforced TPO Sheet: Uniform, flexible sheet formed from a thermoplastic polyolefin,
internally fabric or scrim reinforced, and as follows:
1.
Thickness: 60 mils, nominal.
2.
Exposed Face Color: White.
3.
Physical Properties:
a.
Breaking Strength: 225 lbf; ASTM D 751, grab method.
b.
Elongation at Break: 15 percent; ASTM D 751.
c.
Tearing Strength: 55 lbf minimum; ASTM D 751, Procedure B.
d.
Brittleness Point: Minus 22 deg F.
e.
Ozone Resistance: No cracks after sample, wrapped around a 3-inch- diameter
mandrel, is exposed for 166 hours to a temperature of 104 deg F and an ozone
level of 100 pphm; ASTM D 1149.
f.
Resistance to Heat Aging: 90 percent minimum retention of breaking strength,
elongation at break, and tearing strength after 166 hours at 240 deg F;
ASTM D 573.
g.
Water Absorption: Less than 4 percent mass change after 166 hours' immersion at
158 deg F; ASTM D 471.
07 5423 - 4
TPO ROOFING SYSTEM
Design Development
October 02, 2015
h.
4.
B.

CA 15-001
Linear Dimension Change: Plus or minus 2 percent; ASTM D 1204.
Provide TPO roof membrane by:

a.
Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
b.
Firestone Building Products Company.
c.
GAF Materials Corporation.
d.
GenFlex Roofing Systems.
e.
Johns Manville International, Inc.
Auxiliary Roofing Membrane Materials:

1.
General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended
use and compatible with membrane roofing.
a.
Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall meet VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet

flashing, 55 mils thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane.
Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard VOC-compliant bonding adhesive for
membrane, and manufacturer's standard bonding adhesive for base flashings.
Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum
bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosionresistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and
acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.
Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet
flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, termination
reglets, cover strips, and other accessories.
C.
Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-resisting,

surface-textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to
membrane roofing system manufacturer.
1.
Color: Match membrane color.
D.
Precast Concrete Pavers: Heavyweight, hydraulically pressed, concrete units, square edged,
manufactured for use as plaza deck pavers; minimum compressive strength 7500 psi ,
ASTM C 140; absorption not greater than 5 percent, ASTM C 140; no breakage and maximum
1 percent mass loss when tested for freeze-thaw resistance according to ASTM C 67.
1.
Provide plaza pavers by:
a.
Hanover Architectural Products.
b.
Roofblok Limited.
c.
Sunny Brook Pressed Concrete.
d.
Wausau Tile, Inc.
e.
Oldcastle Precast, Westile.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Thickness: 2 inches.
Face Size: 24 inches square.
Wood Paver Tiles: Hardwood planks secured to hardwood plank cross-members to form tiles
for support by paver support system.
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Bison Innovative Products; WT-FSC-IPE -24 Ipe Wood
Tile or a comparable acceptable to Architect.
2.
Thickness: 1.69 inches.
3.
Face Size: 24 inches square.
TPO ROOFING SYSTEM
07 5423 - 5

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
1.
Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof
drains are securely clamped in place.
2.
Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at
penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
3.
Verify that deck is securely fastened with no projecting fasteners and with no adjacent
units in excess of 1/16 inch out of plane relative to adjoining deck.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing
installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp
projections.
B.
Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or
migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking
place or when rain is forecast.
C.
Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from
entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is
forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Self-Adhering-Sheet Vapor Retarder: Prime substrate if required by manufacturer. Install selfadhering-sheet vapor retarder over area to receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each
sheet a minimum of 3-1/2 inches and 6 inches, respectively. Seal laps by rolling.
B.
Insulation:
1.
Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed
to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.
2.
Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing
roof insulation.
3.
Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
4.
Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required
thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2 inches or greater, install 2 or more
layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a
minimum of 6 inches in each direction.
5.
Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush
and does not restrict flow of water.
6.
Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints
staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding
1/4 inch with insulation.
a.
Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
7.
C.
Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and
secure first layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed
and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type.
a.
Fasten first layer of insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and
field of roof.
b.
Install subsequent layers of insulation in a cold fluid-applied adhesive.
Base Flashing:
07 5423 - 6
TPO ROOFING SYSTEM
Design Development
October 02, 2015
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.

CA 15-001
Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates
according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and
allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing.
Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured
sheet flashing.
Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping
sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed
edges of sheet flashing terminations.
Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
termination bars.
Adhered Roofing Membrane:

1.
Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing
system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax
before installing.
a.
Install according to ASTM D 5036.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of membrane roofing system

manufacturer's technical personnel.
Accurately align roofing membrane and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum
dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
Bonding Adhesive: Apply bonding adhesive to substrate at rate required by manufacturer
and immediately install roofing membrane. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area
of roofing membrane.
Mechanically or adhesively fasten roofing membrane securely at terminations,
penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.
Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing membrane, and hot-air weld side and end
laps of roofing membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a
watertight seam installation.
a.
Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal
cut edges of roofing membrane.
b.
Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample
areas.
c.
Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing membrane that does not meet
requirements.
Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal
roofing membrane in place with clamping ring.
E.
Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or
adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system
F.
Plaza Deck Pavers:

1.
Install pavers in locations indicated according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2.
Accurately install adjustable-height paver pedestals and accessories in locations and to
elevations required. Adjust for final level and slope with shims.
3.
Loosely lay pavers on pedestals, maintaining a uniform open joint width. Tightly seat
pavers against spacers to eliminate lateral movement or drift of paving assembly. Align
joint patterns parallel in each direction.
a.
Lay out pavers to avoid less-than-half-width pavers at perimeter or other
terminations.
4.
Install pavers to not vary more than 1/16 inch in elevation between adjacent pavers or
more than 1/16 inch from surface plane elevation of individual paver.
TPO ROOFING SYSTEM
07 5423 - 7

CA 15-001
5.
3.4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Maintain tolerances of paving installation within 1/4 inch in 10 feet of surface plane in any
direction.

A.
Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to
inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect.
1.
Notify Architect and Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.
B.
Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or
inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
3.5

A.
Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction
period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for
deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to
Architect and Owner.
B.
Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with
requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition
free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty
requirements.
C.
Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
D.
07 5423 - 8
TPO ROOFING SYSTEM
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 07 6200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Manufactured products:
a.
Manufactured reglets and counterflashing.
2.
B.
1.3
Formed products:
a.
Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications.
b.
Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
c.
Miscellaneous formed sheet metal fabrications.
1.
Blocking and Nailers: Section 06 1000 "Rough Carpentry."
2.
Membrane Roofing: Section 07 5423 "TPO Roofing System."
A.
General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads,
structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure
due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain
watertight.
B.
Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements
from ambient and surface temperature changes.
1.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of manufactured product required, manufacturer's published
technical data sheets, including product description and applications, technical properties,
features, benefits, and limitations.
B.
and installation requirements for sheet metal flashing and trim.
1.
Distinguish between shop and field-assembled work. Include the following:
a.
Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in
Project.
b.
Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams,
and dimensions.
c.
Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including
layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
d.
Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.
e.
Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and
counterflashings as applicable.
f.
Details of special conditions.
g.
Details of connections to adjoining work.
07 6200 - 1

CA 15-001
2.
C.
1.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015

a.
Samples: For each type of metal and exposed finish required, 4 by 18 inch sample
demonstrating finished appearance.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Entity that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal
flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of
successful in-service performance.
B.
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association) SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more
stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.
C.
Mockups: Furnish and install sheet metal flashing and trim for integrated exterior mockup
D.

1.
Meet with Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects sheet metal
flashing and trim including installers of roofing materials, roof accessories, unit skylights,
and roof-mounted equipment.
2.
Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim.
3.
Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and
attachment to structural members.
4.
Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and
condition of other construction that will affect sheet metal flashing.
1.6

A.
1.7
1.
Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that
might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and
trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.
2.
Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to
sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal
flashing and trim installation.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of
factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1.
Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to (ASTM
International) ASTM D 2244.
b.
Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c.
Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2.
07 6200 - 2
Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2

1.
MATERIALS
A.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip
process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755.
1.
quality.
2.
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation,
Grade 40; structural quality.
3.
Surface: Smooth, flat.
B.
1.
General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective
coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete
sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary
sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets
and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and
recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.
a.
General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
1)
Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps
or factory-applied coating.
2)
Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for
metal being fastened.
3)
Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule
matching internal gutter width.
b.
Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) and Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel

Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153, or ASTM F 2329, or
Series 300 stainless steel.
3.
4.
Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil- thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397.
Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.
a.
Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized.
5.
Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound

sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic,
nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, nonstaining,
single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability,
nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone sealant.
a.
1)
2)
3)
6.
7.
Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 1311.

a.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Tremco; Tremco Butyl Sealant, or comparable
product by:
1)
Bostik Findley.
07 6200 - 3

CA 15-001
2)
8.
9.
2.3
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Pecora Corporation.
Polyurethane Elastomeric Coating: Pacific Polymers; Elasto-Deck BT, or comparable

Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, of consistency required for application.
MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

A.
Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of
separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factorymitered and -welded corners and junctions with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of
same metal as reglet.
1.
Material: Galvanized steel, 0.024 inch (24 gage) thick.
2.
Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint.
3.
Accessories:
a.
Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure
flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal
counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing.
b.
Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before
counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge.
4.
5.
2.4
Finish: Mill.
Provide reglets and counterflashing pieces by:
Cheney Flashing Company.
a.
b.
Fry Reglet Corporation.
c.
Heckmann Building Products Inc.
d.
Hickman, W. P. Company.
e.
Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; STF Sawtooth Flashing.
f.
Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.
FABRICATION
A.
General:
1.
Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions,
geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at
the shop to greatest extent possible.
a.
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply
with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application
and metal.
b.
Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
c.
Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and
tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to
form hems.
d.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners
are not allowed on faces exposed to view.
2.
3.
4.
5.
07 6200 - 4
Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of
installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated
and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate
elastomeric sealant.
Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form
expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with
butyl rubber sealant concealed within joints.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
6.
7.
8.
B.
2.
Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet
tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections.
Furnish flat-stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as
gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness.
Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers,[ gutter bead reinforcing bars,] and
gutter accessories from same metal as gutters.
a.
Gutter Style: SMACNA designation [A][C][F].
b.
Expansion Joints: Butt type with cover plate.
c.
Accessories: [Continuous removable leaf screen with sheet metal frame and
hardware cloth screen] [Wire ball downspout strainer] [Valley baffles].
d.
Metal Thickness:
1)
Gutters with Girth up to 15 Inches: [16 oz./sq. ft.] [0.024 inch (24 gage)].
2)
Gutters with Girth 16 to 20 Inches: [16 oz./sq. ft.] [0.30 inch (22 gage)].
3)
4)
5)
3.
Downspouts: Fabricate open-face downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish

with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.
a.
b.
Fabricated Hanger Style: SMACNA figure designation 1-35A.
4.
Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions required with closure flange trim to
exterior, 4-inch- wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or
tapered strip into field of roof.
Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge
and of dimensions and shape indicated complete with outlet tubes, exterior flange trim,
and built-in overflows.
Low-Slope Roof Sheet Metal Fabrications:

1.
Material(s): Unless otherwise noted, fabricate roof drainage fabrications from the
following material(s):
a.
Galvanized steel.
b.
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel.
2.
D.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's

"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and by FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for
application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with
elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended
use.
Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
Roof Drainage Sheet Metal Fabrications:

1.
Material(s): Unless otherwise noted, fabricate roof drainage fabrications from the
following material(s):
a.
Galvanized steel, 0.030 inch (22 gage).
b.
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel, 0.030 inch (22 gage).
5.
C.

CA 15-001
Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 10-foot- long, sections.
Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to
support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter
corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight.
a.
Coping Profile: SMACNA figure designation 3-4A.
b.
Joint Style: Butt, with 12-inch- wide, concealed backup plate.
c.
Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Fabrications:
07 6200 - 5

CA 15-001
1.
2.
2.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Vent Pipe Flashings: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, at least 1/16 inch thick. Provide lead
sleeve sized to slip over and turn down into pipe, soldered to skirt at slope of roof, and
extending at least 4 inches from pipe onto roof.
Drip Edges: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet with 2 inch roof-deck flange and
1-1/2 inch fascia flange with 3/8 inch drip at lower edge.
FINISHES
A.

Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and
designating finishes.
B.
C.
Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

1.
2-Coat Fluoropolymer: (American Architectural Manufacturer's Association) AAMA 621
fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene difluoride (PVDF)
resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating
to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written
instructions.
2.
Mica Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. 2-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended mica flakes
containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare,
pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin
3.
Metallic Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. 3-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended metallic
flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and
clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply
with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
a.
D.
Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or

polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film
thickness of 0.5 mil.
1.
Inside Faces of Open-Face Downspouts: Finish to match exposed surfaces. Do not use
concealed finish product.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
1.
Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.
2.
Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored.
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder,
welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as
required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
a.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide
uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
07 6200 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before
fabricating sheet metal.
Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners.
Bend tabs over fasteners.
Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks.
Install sealant tape where necessary.
Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
2.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with polyurethane
elastomeric coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.
a.
Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or
install a course of polyethylene sheet.
3.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches
of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would
not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not
less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl rubber sealant concealed within joints.
Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than
1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws and for metal decking
not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out
resistance.
Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.
a.
Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not
less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When
ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F,
set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting
proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install
sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.
b.
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 9200
"Joint Sealants."
4.
5.
B.

CA 15-001
Roof Drainage Fabrications:

1.
Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system
according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of
roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.
2.
Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints
sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to
firmly anchor them in position. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant.
Slope to downspouts.
a.
Fasten gutter spacers to front and back of gutter.
b.
Anchor and loosely lock back edge of gutter to continuous eave or apron flashing.
c.
Anchor gutter with spikes and ferrules spaced not more than 24 inches apart.
d.
Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet
apart. Install expansion-joint caps.
3.
Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints.

a.
Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls.
Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between.
b.
Provide elbows and 12 by 48 inch precast concrete splash blocks at base of
downspouts to direct water away from walls.
07 6200 - 7

CA 15-001
C.
4.
Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously

support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants
or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane.
a.
Seal exterior wall scupper flanges into back of conductor head with elastomeric
sealant.
5.
Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with elevation of conductor head rim 1 inch
below scupper discharge.
Roof Flashings:
1.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet
metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and
level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently
watertight and weather resistant.
2.
Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in
FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated.
a.
Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to
substrate at 16-inch centers.
b.
Anchor interior leg of coping with screw fasteners and washers at 24-inch centers.
3.
3.3
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with
top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base
flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
3.4
Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance
of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8 inch offset of
adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
A.
Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B.
Clean off excess sealants.
C.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of installation, remove remaining protective materials and clean finished surfaces.
Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
D.
Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
E.
07 6200 - 8
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 07 8100 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes exposed SFRM.
B.
1.
Substrate Material: Section 05 1200 "Structural Steel Framing."
2.
Related Sections:
a.
07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping."
b.
07 8446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
SFRM: Sprayed fire-resistive material.
B.
Exposed: Fire-resistive materials applied to surfaces that are exposed to view when the Work
is completed, and that are accessible through suspended ceilings.
C.
Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
1.
NRTL: A Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
2.
NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to (National Institutes of Standards)
NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program.
1.4
A.
1.5
Select and provide applied fireproofing systems that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing
agency for fire-protection ratings indicated, and are produced and installed to protect structural
components from deterioration and failure due to fire according to requirements indicated and
to maintain original fire-resistance rating.
1.
Fire-Resistance Requirements: As indicatedon Drawings.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For fireproofing and accessory products, manufacturer's published technical
data sheets, including product description and applications, Reference Standard classification,
B.
Shop Drawings: Structural framing plans and details indicating the following:
1.
Locations and types of surface preparations required before applying SFRM.
2.
Extent of SFRM for each construction and fire-resistance rating, including the following:
a.
Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1)
For steel joist assemblies, include applicable fire-resistance design
designations, with each steel joist tested with the same maximum tensile
stress as each steel joist indicated on Drawings. Design designations with
steel joists tested at lower maximum tensile stress than those indicated are
not permitted.
07 8100 - 1

CA 15-001
b.
3.
1.6
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Minimum thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance ratings of

structural components and assemblies.
Treatment of SFRM after application.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Entity certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by SFRM manufacturer

as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to
specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its SFRM to Contractor or to an
installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain SFRM through a single source and a single manufacturer.
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the fire-test-response characteristics

indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify
bags containing SFRM with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory," (FM Global) FMG's "Approval Guide, Building Materials," Omega Point
Laboratories Inc., Directory of Listed Building Products, Materials and Assemblies
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for SFRM serving as direct-applied
protection tested per ASTM E 119.
2.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
D.
Provide products containing no detectable asbestos as determined according to the method

specified in 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix E, Section 1.
E.

related to SFRM including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Review products, exposure conditions, design ratings, restrained and unrestrained
conditions, calculations, densities, thicknesses, bond strengths, and other performance
requirements.
2.
Review weather predictions, ambient conditions, and proposed temporary protections for
SFRM during and after installation.
3.
Review surface conditions and preparations.
4.
Review field quality-control testing procedures.
1.7

A.
1.8
1.
Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with intact and legible
manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, shelf
life if applicable, and fire-resistance ratings applicable to Project.
2.
Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from Project site and
discard materials whose shelf life has expired.
3.
Store materials inside, under cover, and aboveground; keep dry until ready for use.
Remove from Project site and discard wet or deteriorated materials.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not apply SFRM when ambient or substrate temperature is

40 deg F or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature
at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application.
07 8100 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
B.
1.9

CA 15-001
Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of SFRM. Use natural
means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fire-resistive material dries
thoroughly.
COORDINATION
A.
1.10
A.
Sequence and coordinate application of SFRM with other related work specified in other
Sections to comply with the following requirements:
1.
Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations and protect the
environment.
2.
Provide temporary enclosures for applications to prevent deterioration of fire-resistive
material due to exposure to weather and to unfavorable ambient conditions for humidity,
temperature, and ventilation.
3.
Avoid unnecessary exposure of fire-resistive material to abrasion and other damage likely
to occur during construction operations subsequent to its application.
4.
Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until concrete topping, if
any, has been completed. For metal roof decks without concrete topping, do not apply
fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until roofing has been completed;
prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fire-resistive material.
5.
Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal floor deck substrates until concrete topping
has been completed.
6.
Do not begin applying fire-resistive material until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and
other items penetrating fire protection are in place.
7.
Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fireresistive material until application of fire protection is completed.
8.
Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fire-resistive material has
been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to defective
applications.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Contractor and by Installer, in
which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace SFRMs that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.
a.
Cracking, flaking, spalling, or eroding in excess of specified requirements; peeling;
or delaminating of SFRM from substrates.
b.
Not covered under the warranty are failures due to damage by occupants and
Owner's maintenance personnel, exposure to environmental conditions other than
those investigated and approved during fire-response testing, and other causes not
reasonably foreseeable under conditions of normal use.
2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.

1.
07 8100 - 3

CA 15-001
2.2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
MATERIALS
A.
Exposed Cementitious SFRM:

1.
Material Composition: Factory-mixed, dry, cement aggregate formulation; or chloridefree formulation of gypsum or portland cement binders, additives, and inorganic
aggregates mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and
application.
2.
Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher values
required to attain designated fire-resistance ratings, measured per standard test methods
referenced with each property as follows:
a.
Dry Density: Values for average and individual densities as required for fireresistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A,
Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method," but with an average density of not less than
39 lb/cu. ft.
b.
Bond Strength: 1000 lbf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736.
c.
Compressive Strength: 300 lbf/sq. in. minimum per ASTM E 761.
d.
Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937.
e.
Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759.
f.
Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per
ASTM E 760.
g.
Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. per ASTM E 859.
h.
Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136.
i.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following surfaceburning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84
by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction:
1)
2)
Smoke-Developed Index: 0.
j.
3.
B.
For exterior applications of SFRM, provide formulation listed and labeled by testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for surfaces
exposed to exterior.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Grace Construction Products; Monokote Type Z106, or

Carboline Co.
a.
b.
Isolatek International Corp.
c.
Pyrok, Inc.
1.
General: Provide auxiliary fire-resistive materials that are compatible with SFRM and
substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.
2.
Substrate Primers: For use on each substrate and with each sprayed fire-resistive
product, provide primer that complies with one or more of the following requirements:
a.
Primer's bond strength complies with requirements specified in UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory" for coating materials based on a series of bond tests per
ASTM E 736.
b.
Primer is identical to those used in assemblies tested for fire-test-response
characteristics of SFRM per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
3.
4.
07 8100 - 4
Adhesive for Bonding Fire-Resistive Material: Product approved by manufacturer of

SFRM.
Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration, and
finish required to comply with fire-resistance designs indicated and fire-resistive material
manufacturer's written recommendations. Include clips, lathing accessories, corner
Design Development
October 02, 2015
5.
6.
7.

CA 15-001
beads, and other anchorage devices required to attach lath to substrates and to receive
SFRM.
Reinforcing Fabric: Glass- or carbon-fiber fabric of type, weight, and form required to
comply with fire-resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by manufacturer of
SFRM.
Reinforcing Mesh: Metallic mesh reinforcement of type, weight, and form required to
comply with fire-resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by manufacturer of
intumescent mastic coating fire-resistive material. Include pins and attachment.
Topcoat: Type recommended in writing by manufacturer of each SFRM for application
over concealed and exposed SFRM.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
1.
Verify substrates are in compliance with requirements affecting performance of work. A
substrate is in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following:
a.
Substrate complies with requirements in the Section where the substrate and
related materials and construction are specified.
b.
Substrate is free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale,
loose scale, incompatible primers, incompatible paints, incompatible encapsulants,
or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fire-resistive materials
with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure.
c.
Objects penetrating fire-resistive material, including clips, hangers, support
sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrate.
d.
Substrate is not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended
construction that will interfere with applying fire-resistive material.
2.
3.
4.
3.2
Verify that concrete work on steel deck has been completed.

Verify that roof construction, installation of roof-top HVAC equipment, and other related
work are completed.
Conduct tests according to fire-resistive material manufacturer's written
recommendations to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering
with bond.
PREPARATION
A.
Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire-resistive materials during
application.
B.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fire-resistive material, including dirt,
oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, and incompatible
primers, paints, and encapsulants.
C.
For exposed applications, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect
uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of SFRM. Remove minor projections and
fill voids that would telegraph through fire-resistive products after application.
3.3
APPLICATION
A.
General:
1.
Comply with fire-resistive material manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials,
application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and spray on fireresistive material, as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to
achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
07 8100 - 5

CA 15-001
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Apply SFRM that is identical to products tested as specified in Part 1 "Quality Assurance"
Article and substantiated by test reports, with respect to rate of application, accelerator
use, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, water overspray, or other materials and
procedures affecting test results.
Install metal lath and reinforcing fabric, as required, to comply with fire-resistance ratings
and fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of
exposure and intended use. Securely attach lath and fabric to substrate in position
required for support and reinforcement of fire-resistive material. Use anchorage devices
of type recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer. Attach accessories where
indicated or required for secure attachment of lath and fabric to substrate.
Coat substrates with bonding adhesive before applying fire-resistive material where
required to achieve fire-resistance rating or as recommended in writing by SFRM
manufacturer for material and application indicated.
Extend fire-resistive material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be
protected. Unless otherwise recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer, install
body of fire-resistive covering in a single course.
Spray apply fire-resistive materials to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying
operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement
method recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer.
Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from SFRM
over which they are applied.
Exposed SFRM:
1.
Apply exposed SFRM in thicknesses and densities not less than those required to
achieve fire-resistance ratings designated for each condition.
2.
Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of material.
3.
Apply exposed cementitious SFRM to produce the following finish:
a.
Spray-textured finish with no further treatment.
4.
5.
3.4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Cure exposed SFRM according to product manufacturer's written recommendations.

Apply sealer or topcoat to concealed SFRM, as applicable.

A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections
and prepare test reports.
1.
Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested
work complies with or deviates from requirements.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of SFRM shall take
place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed
with application of SFRM for the next area until test results for previously completed
applications of SFRM show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or
exceed values indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design.
1.
Thickness for Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: For each 1000-sq. ft. area, or partial
area, on each floor, from the average of 4 measurements from a 144-sq. in. sample area,
with sample width of not less than 6 inches per ASTM E 605.
2.
Thickness for Structural Frame Members: From a sample of 25 percent of structural
members per floor, taking 9 measurements at a single cross section for structural frame
beams or girders, 7 measurements of a single cross section for joists and trusses, and 12
measurements of a single cross section for columns per ASTM E 605.
3.
Density for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Frame Members: At frequency and from
sample size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and
structural framing member, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A,
Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method."
07 8100 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
4.
Bond Strength for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Framing Members: For each
10,000-sq. ft. area, or partial area, on each floor, cohesion and adhesion from one
sample of size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and
structural framing member, per ASTM E 736.
a.
Field test SFRM that is applied to flanges of wide-flange, structural-steel members
on surfaces matching those that will exist for remainder of steel receiving fireresistive material.
b.
If surfaces of structural steel receiving SFRM are primed or otherwise painted for
coating materials, perform series of bond tests specified in UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory." Provide bond strength indicated in referenced UL fire-resistance
criteria, but not less than 150 lbf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736.
5.
If testing finds applications of SFRM are not in compliance with requirements, testing and
inspecting agency will perform additional random testing to determine extent of
noncompliance.
C.
Remove and replace applications of SFRM that do not pass tests and inspections for cohesion
and adhesion, for density, or for both and retest as specified above.
D.
Apply additional SFRM, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate that
thickness does not comply with specified requirements, and retest as specified above.
3.5

A.
Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of

Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean
exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.
1.
Exposed, "Beams Only" Fireproofed Assemblies: Thoroughly remove material overspray
from adjacent non-fireproofed metal deck surfaces.
B.
Protect SFRM, according to advice of product manufacturer and Installer, from damage
resulting from construction operations or other causes so fire protection will be without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
C.
Coordinate application of SFRM with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fire
protection. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect SFRM and patch any
damaged or removed areas.
D.
Repair or replace work that has not successfully protected steel.
E.
07 8100 - 7
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 07 8413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-resistancerated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items.
B.
1.
Related Sections:
a.
07 8446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."
1.3
A.
For penetrations through fire-resistance-rated construction, including empty penetrations and

penetrations containing ducts, pipes, conduits, cables and cable trays, and other penetrating
items, select and provide through-penetration firestop systems that are listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency for fire-protection ratings indicated, and are produced and installed to
resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other
gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.
B.
Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings
determined per (ASTM International) ASTM E 814 or (Underwriters Laboratory) UL 1479:
1.
F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated,
but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated.
2.
T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop
systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems protect penetrating
items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas:
a.
Penetrations located outside wall cavities.
b.
Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures.
C.
For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical
damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these
conditions both during and after construction.
1.
For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moistureresistant through-penetration firestop systems.
2.
For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and exposed to
possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads
involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means.
3.
For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems
not requiring removal of insulation.
D.
For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per
ASTM E 84.
07 8413 - 1

CA 15-001
1.4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each firestopping product required, manufacturer's published technical data
B.
Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system required, indicate construction
assembly penetrated and type of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of
qualified testing and inspecting agency that evidences compliance with requirements for each
condition encountered.
1.
Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting
agency, applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration required.
2.
Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting
agency's illustration for a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit
illustration, with modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop system
manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fireresistance-rated assembly.
C.
Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-penetration

firestop system, along with the following information:
1.
Types of penetrating items.
2.
Types of construction assemblies penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where
applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated.
3.
Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design
designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Entity that has been approved by (FM Global) FMG according to
FMG 4991.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration
and construction condition indicated, from a single source and a single manufacturer.
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply

with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements"
Article:
1.
Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified
testing and inspecting agency is UL, (Omega Point Laboratories) OPL, (Intertek Testing
Services) ITS, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for
firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard
referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems
complying with the following requirements:
a.
Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of
qualified testing and inspecting agency.
b.
Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference
to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by the following:
1)
UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."
2)
OPL's "Directory of Listed Building Products, Materials, & Assemblies."
3)
ITS' "Directory of Listed Products."
D.

07 8413 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
1.6

CA 15-001

A.
1.7
1.
Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in containers or
packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and
manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life if applicable, qualified testing
and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project, curing time, and
mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
2.
Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other
causes.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or

substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system
manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B.
Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural

means or, where natural means are inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration

firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.
B.
Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate

through-penetration firestop systems.
C.
Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of through-penetration

firestop system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of
installations.
D.
Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed
behind other construction until each installation has been examined by Owner's inspecting
agency, and building inspector if required by authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FIRESTOPPING
A.
Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one
another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating throughpenetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
1.
Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are
needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements"
Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system
manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop
systems indicated.
B.
Provide through-penetration firestop systems by:

1.
A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.
2.
Hilti, Inc.
3.
Metacaulk, Inc.
4.
Nelson Firestop Products.
5.
NUCO Inc.
07 8413 - 3

CA 15-001
6.
7.
8.
2.2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Specified Technologies Inc.

3M; Fire Protection Products Division.
Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division.
MIXING
A.
For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration firestop
system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if
required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time,
and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum
performance characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2

PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration

firestop systems to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and with the
1.
Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign
materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.
2.
Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces
capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove
loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
3.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B.
Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop

system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine
primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from
contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would
otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to
remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without
disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance

Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions
and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
B.
Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support

fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional
shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
1.
After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming
materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop
systems.
C.
Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:
1.
Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
07 8413 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.
3.
3.4

CA 15-001
Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.5
Identify through-penetration firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach
labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of edge of the firestop systems
so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems.
Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels. For plastic labels, use self-adhering type with
adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed and,
in combination with label material, will result in partial destruction of label if removal is
attempted. Include the following information on labels:
1.
The words "Warning - Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify
Building Management of Any Damage."
2.
Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
3.
Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
4.
Date of installation.
5.
Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name.
6.
Installer's name.
A.
Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified, independent inspecting agency to inspect
through-penetration firestops. Independent inspecting agency shall comply with ASTM E 2174,
requirements including those related to qualifications, conducting inspections, and preparing
test reports.
B.
Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they
comply with requirements.
C.
Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after
inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements.
3.6

A.
Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system
manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that
through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove
damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new
materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.
C.
07 8413 - 5
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 07 8446 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes fire-resistive joint systems for the following:

1.
Floor-to-wall joints.
2.
Head-of-wall joints.
3.
Wall-to-wall joints.
B.
1.
Related Sections:
a.
07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping."
1.3
A.
Select and provide fire-resistive joint systems that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing
agency for fire-protection ratings indicated, and are produced and installed to resist spread of
fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and
maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly in which fire-resistive joint systems are
installed.
B.
Joint Systems in and between Fire-Resistance-Rated Constructions: Provide systems with

assembly ratings equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance ratings of construction that they join,
and with movement capabilities indicated as determined by (Underwriters Laboratory) UL 2079.
1.
Load-bearing capabilities as determined by evaluation during the time of test.
C.
For fire-resistive systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per (ASTM
International) ASTM E 84.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each fire-resistive joint system required, indicate construction assembly
and location in which joints are installed; also indicate relationship to adjoining construction.
Include fire-resistive joint system design designation of testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that demonstrates compliance with requirements for
each condition indicated.
1.
Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting
agency that is applicable to each fire-resistive joint system configuration for elements to
be joined.
2.
Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting
agency's illustration for a particular fire-resistive joint condition, submit illustration, with
modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's
fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated
assembly.
07 8446 - 1

CA 15-001
C.
1.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Fire Resistive Joint System Schedule: Indicate locations of each fire resistive joint system,
along with the following information:
1.
Types of construction assemblies joined, including fire-resistance ratings and, where
applicable, thicknesses of construction materials and assemblies.
2.
Fire resistive joint systems for each location identified by design designation of qualified
testing and inspecting agency.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Entity that has been approved by (FM Global) FMG according to
FMG 4991.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain fire-resistive joint systems, for each kind of joint and construction
condition indicated, from a single source and a single manufacturer.
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that comply with the
following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article:
1.
Fire-resistance tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A
qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing testing and
follow-up inspection services for fire-resistive joint systems acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
2.
Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per methods indicated in Part 1
"Performance Requirements" Article and comply with the following:
a.
Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing
and inspecting agency.
b.
Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by referencing system
designations of the qualified testing and inspecting agency.
1.6

A.
1.7
1.
Deliver fire-resistive joint system products to Project site in containers or packages with
qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project and
with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of
manufacture, lot number, shelf life, curing time, and mixing instructions for
multicomponent materials.
2.
Store and handle materials for fire-resistive joint systems to prevent their deterioration or
damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate
temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when
substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B.
Ventilate fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or,
if natural means are inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed
according to specified requirements.
B.
Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems.
C.
Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of fire-resistive joint system
installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations.
07 8446 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
D.

CA 15-001
Do not cover up fire-resistive joint system installations that will become concealed behind other
construction until Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector of authorities having
jurisdiction have examined each installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1

A.
Compatibility: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint substrates,
under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire-resistive joint system
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B.
Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming
materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance
Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system
manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems
indicated.
C.
Provide fire resistive joint systems by:

A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.
1.
2.
Hilti, Inc.
3.
Metacaulk, Inc.
4.
Nelson Firestop Products.
5.
NUCO Inc.
6.
Specified Technologies Inc.
7.
3M; Fire Protection Products Division.
8.
Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2

PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to
comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following
requirements:
1.
Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with
adhesion of fill materials.
2.
Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum
bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
3.
B.
Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system

manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers
to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from
contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would
otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to
remove smears from fire-resistive joint system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible
without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates or damaging adjoining
surfaces.
07 8446 - 3

CA 15-001
3.3
Design Development
October 02, 2015
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements"
Article and fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated.
B.
Install forming/packing/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill
materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and
depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
C.
Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following
results:
1.
Fill voids and cavities formed by openings and forming/packing/backing materials as
required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2.
Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints.
3.
For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.4

A.
Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to inspect
fire-resistive joint systems and prepare inspection reports.
B.
Testing Services: Inspecting of completed installations of fire-resistive joint systems shall take
place in successive stages as installation of fire-resistive joint systems proceeds. Do not
proceed with installation of joint systems for the next area until inspecting agency determines
completed work shows compliance with requirements.
1.
Inspecting agency shall state in each report whether inspected fire-resistive joint systems
comply with or deviate from requirements.
C.
Remove and replace fire-resistive joint systems where inspections indicate that they do not
comply with specified requirements.
D.
Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of

replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
E.
Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection
reports are issued and fire-resistive joint systems comply with requirements.
3.5

A.
Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and
that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fireresistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If
damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fireresistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.
C.
07 8446 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 07 9200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section is general in nature. Sealants specified may or may not be required for Project.
B.
Section Includes:
1.
Nonstaining silicone joint sealants.
2.
Urethane joint sealants.
3.
Mildew-resistant joint sealants.
4.
Latex joint sealants.
C.
1.
Firestopping Sealants: Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping."
2.
Fire-Resistive Joint Sealants: Section 07 8446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."
3.
Pavement Sealants: Section 32 1373 "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants."
1.3
A.
1.4
Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous
joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each joint sealant and accessory product required, manufacturer's published
technical data sheets, including product description and applications, Reference Standard
classification, technical properties, features, benefits, and limitations.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants
showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, Samples with joint
sealants in 3/8 inch wide joints formed between two 12 inch long by 6 inch wide strips of
material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
1.5
A.
1.6
Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Entity trained and approved to install specified products by

manufacturers of each type of product required.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant from a single source and a single
manufacturer.
C.
Mockups: Furnish and install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that
are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section.
D.

JOINT SEALANTS
07 9200 - 1

CA 15-001
1.7
Design Development
October 02, 2015

A.
1.8
Requirements.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1.
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer.
2.
When joint substrates are wet.
3.
Where joint widths are greater or less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer
for applications indicated.
4.
Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not
comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified
warranty period.
1.
B.
Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or

replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements
specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1.
C.
Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from
the following:
1.
Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant
manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.
2.
Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications.
3.
Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4.
Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B.
Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will
come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with United States Code of
Federal Regulations 21 CFR 177.2600.
C.
Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Nonstaining Silicone Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to ASTM
C 1248.
1.
Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag,
plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-
07 9200 - 2
JOINT SEALANTS
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
curing silicone joint sealant; (ASTM International) ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 100/50, Use NT.
a.
1)
2)
3)
2.
B.
Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus 50

percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone
joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.
a.
1)
2)
3)
Urethane Joint Sealants:

1.
Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and
minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
a.
1)
BASF; Sonolastic Ultra.
2)
Sika Corporation; Sikaflex 1a.
3)
Tremco, Inc.; Vulkem 116.
2.
Urethane, S, P, 25, T: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25

percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant;
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Use T.
a.
1)
BASF; Sonolastic SL 1.
2)
Sika Corporation; Sikaflex 1c SL.
3)
Tremco, Inc.; Vulkem 45SSL.
3.
Urethane, M, NS, 25, T: Multicomponent, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent
movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920,
Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use T.
a.
BASF; Sonolastic NP 2.
1)
2)
Pecora Corporation; Dynatred.
3)
Sika Corporation; Sikaflex 2c NS.
C.
Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants:

1.
Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with
fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth.
2.
Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, singlecomponent, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability,
nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25, Use NT.
a.
1)
2)
Momentive Performance Materials; SCS1700 Sanitary.
3)
Tremco, Inc.; Tremsil 200.
D.
Latex Joint Sealants:

1.
Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.
a.
1)
Pecora Corporation; AC-20 +Silicone.
2)
Tremco, Inc.; Tremflex 834.
JOINT SEALANTS
07 9200 - 3

CA 15-001
2.
E.
Acoustical Sealant: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex acoustical sealant complying

with ASTM C 834.
a.
Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints
and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
b.
1)
Accumetric. LLC; BOSS 826 Acoustical Sound Sealant.
2)
Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sound and Smoke Sealant.
3)
Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR.
4)
Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant.
5)
USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Acoustical Sealant.
Joint-Sealant Backing:
1.
Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates,
sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by
sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
2.
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of size and density to control sealant depth
and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
a.
Type O (open-cell material): Use unless otherwise indicated.
b.
Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin): Use for joints in paving and
flooring.
c.
Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin): Use for irregular joints, and where
breaking the skin of Type C backings is a concern.
d.
Use any of the preceding types when approved in writing by joint-sealant
manufacturer for joint application indicated.
3.
F.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials
or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
1.
Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for
adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction
joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
2.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of
sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable
of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and
formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
3.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
1.
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants for compliance with requirements for
joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1.
Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
07 9200 - 4
JOINT SEALANTS
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.
3.
4.

CA 15-001
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning
operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
Porous joint substrates include the following:
a.
Concrete.
b.
Masonry.
c.
Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a.
Metal.
b.
Glass.
c.
Porcelain enamel.
d.
Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as

indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of jointsealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or
by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after
tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C.
Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919, for
use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and
conditions indicated.
1.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at
openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical joint sealant. Install
acoustical joint sealants at both faces of partitions, at perimeters, and through
penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919, ASTM C 1193, and manufacturer's written
recommendations for closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies,
including sealing partitions to underside of floor slabs above acoustical ceilings.
2.
Acoustical Ceiling Areas: Apply acoustical joint sealant at perimeter edge moldings of
acoustical ceiling areas in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of
moldings before they are installed.
D.
Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1.
Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3.
Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application,
and replace them with dry materials.
JOINT SEALANTS
07 9200 - 5

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
E.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
sealants and backs of joints.
F.
Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1.
Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2.
Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3.
Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
G.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to
form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1.
Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2.
Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3.
Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.
3.4

A.
Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1.
Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:
a.
Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and
joint substrate.
b.
Perform one test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or one test per each
floor per elevation.
2.
Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint
Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in
ASTM C 1521.
a.
For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately;
extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure
for opposite side.
3.
Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a.
Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.
b.
Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified
requirements.
c.
Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind
of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion
complies with sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.
4.
Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were
installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether
joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant material, sealant
configuration, and sealant dimensions.
Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same
procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean
and that new sealant contacts original sealant.
5.
B.
Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from

testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.
Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other
requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated
requirements.
07 9200 - 6
JOINT SEALANTS
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.5

CA 15-001

A.
Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and
of products in which joints occur.
B.
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so
sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite
such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or
deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable
from original work.
C.
3.6
EXTERIOR JOINT SCHEDULE

A.
Joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1.
Uses related to joint substrates: M.
2.
Joint Locations:
a.
Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
3.
B.
Joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1.
2.
Joint Locations:
a.
Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.
b.
Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete units.
c.
Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
d.
Joints between different materials listed above.
e.
Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows.
f.
Control and expansion joints in overhead surfaces.
3.
C.
Joint Sealant: Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, NT.

1.
Uses related to joint substrates: G, A.
2.
Joint Locations:
a.
Joints between metal panels.
b.
Joints between different materials listed above.
c.
Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows.
3.
3.7
Joint Sealant: Urethane, M, NS, 25, T.
Joint Sealant: Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT.
INTERIOR JOINT SCHEDULE

A.
Joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1.
2.
Joint Locations:
a.
Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b.
Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
3.
Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, P, 25, T.
JOINT SEALANTS
07 9200 - 7

CA 15-001
B.

1.
2.
Joint Locations:
a.
Tile control and expansion joints.
3.
C.
Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex, OP, NF.
Mildew-resistant joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1.
Uses related to joint substrates: M, O.
2.
Joint Locations:
a.
Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
b.
Joints at intersections of tile wall surfaces.
c.
Joints between countertops and backsplashes and backsplashes and adjacent wall
surfaces
3.
E.
Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT.
Joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant
movement.
1.
Joint Locations:
a.
Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and
windows and elevator entrances.
b.
Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2.
D.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT.
Acoustical joints.
1.
Joint Locations: Exposed and concealed joints, as indicated on Drawings.
2.
Joint Sealant: Acoustical sealant.
07 9200 - 8
JOINT SEALANTS
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 08 1113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes Standard hollow metal doors and frames.
B.
1.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
1.3

Electrical Connections: Division 26 Sections.
Related Sections:
a.
08 7100 "Door Hardware."
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to (American National
Standards Institute/Steel Door Institute) ANSI/SDI A250.8, "Recommended Specifications:
Standard Doors and Frames."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit Product Data, Shop Drawings, and Schedules for hollow metal doors and frames
concurrently with submittals for other Division 08 door Sections, including Section 08 7100
"Door Hardware."
1.
Project Door Schedule: Prepare overall Project Door Schedule, included or coordinated
with Door Hardware Schedule specified in Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware," in tabular
form, including pertinent information required for fabrication and installation of each type
of door, frame, and associated accessory, in Project.
B.
Product Data: For doors and frames, and each accessory product required, manufacturer's
published technical data sheets, including product description and applications, technical
C.
and installation requirements for hollow metal doors and frames.
1.
Include elevations of each door design.
2.
Include details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal
thicknesses.
a.
Fully detail provisions for attachment to each type of substrate.
1)
3.
4.
D.
Indicate locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.

Include details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
Product Schedule: Include hollow metal doors and frames in Project Door Schedule. Use
same designations indicated on Drawings.
08 1113 - 1

CA 15-001
1.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from a single source and a single manufacturer.
B.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with (National Fire Protection Association)
NFPA 80, that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings
indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252, or (Underwriter's
Laboratory) UL 10C "Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies."
C.

1.6

A.
1.
Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during
transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
a.
Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.
2.
3.
1.7
Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack
welded to jambs and mullions.
Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units
maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inchhigh wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.
a.
Provide minimum 1/4 inch space between each stacked door to permit air
circulation.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before

fabrication.
1.
a.
b.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: (ASTM International) ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
suitable for exposed applications.
B.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting,
or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60
or A60 metallic coating.
08 1113 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
D.
Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to
ASTM C 143.
E.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting
of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6 to 12 lb./cu. ft. density; with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing
ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
F.
Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879, 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1.
For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008 or
ASTM A 1011, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153, Class B.
G.
1.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153.
2.
3.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,
complying with (Society for Protective Coatings) SSPC-Paint 20.
4.
2.2
STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A.
General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with
smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1.
Design: Flush panel.
2.
Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,
polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core.
a.
Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated.
b.
Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with
thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 4.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when
tested according to ASTM C 1363.
1)
Locations: Exterior doors.
3.
Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled edge.

a.
Beveled Edge: 1/8 inch in 2 inches.
4.
Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.048 inch (18 gage) thick, end
closures or channels of same material as face sheets.
Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117.
5.
B.
Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors
complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and
model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1.
Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless).
C.
Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide doors complying
with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and
ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1.
Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless).
D.
Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6, with reinforcing plates

from same material as door face sheets.
E.
Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel
sheet.
08 1113 - 3

CA 15-001
2.3
Design Development
October 02, 2015
STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A.
General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
B.
Exterior Frames: Fabricated from 0.060 inch (16 gage) thick metallic-coated steel sheet.
1.
Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
2.
Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Interior Frames: Fabricated from 0.060 inch (16 gage) thick cold-rolled steel sheet.
1.
Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
2.
Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high
E.
Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates

from same material as frames.
F.
Jamb Anchors:
1.
Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not
less than 0.048 inch (18 gage) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2
inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (7 gage) thick.
2.
Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.048
inch (18 gage) thick.
G.
Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.048 inch (18 gage) thick,
and as follows:
1.
Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
2.
Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,
allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish
floor surface.
2.4
ACCESSORIES
A.
Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4 inch thick by 1 inch wide steel.
B.
Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.024 inch (24 gage) thick.
2.5
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.6
Provide standard hollow metal doors and frames by:

1.
Ceco Door Products.
2.
Curries Company.
3.
Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc.
Rocky Mountain Metals, Inc.
4.
5.
Southwest Hollow Metal.
6.
Security Metal Products Corp.
7.
Steelcraft.
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where
practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project
site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B.
Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.
C.
Hollow Metal Doors:
08 1113 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
1.
2.
D.

CA 15-001
Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit

moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by
NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch
beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.
Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal
as frames.
1.
Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,
flush, and invisible.
2.
Provide countersunk, flat or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
3.
Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
4.
Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
welds per anchor.
5.
Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a.
Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1)
Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
2)
Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3)
Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.
4)
Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.
b.
6.
Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1)
Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
2)
Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3)
Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
4)
Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.
5)
Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in
metal-stud partitions.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as
follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a.
Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
b.
Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
E.
Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or
hot-rolled steel sheet.
F.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door
Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware."
1.
Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
2.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted
door hardware.
3.
Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115
specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
4.
Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with
Division 26 Sections.
08 1113 - 5

CA 15-001
2.7
Design Development
October 02, 2015
FINISHES
A.

B.
Finish hollow metal doors and frames after assembly.
C.
Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to hollow metal work
according to ASTM A 123 for steel and iron products, and ASTM A 153 for galvanizing steel
and iron hardware.
D.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPCSP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning" surface preparation specifications.
E.
Shop Priming: Apply Universal Shop Primer to uncoated surfaces of hollow metal doors and
frames, except those with galvanized finishes, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPCPA 1, for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
1.
Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before
frame installation.
PREPARATION
A.
Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,
filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed
faces.
B.
Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness,
alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:
1.
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees
from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
2.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to
plane of wall.
3.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel
lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
4.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from
head to floor.
C.
Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door
hardware.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in
place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
ANSI/SDI A250.11.
1.
Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a.
At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
08 1113 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;
grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.
Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim
as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
Field apply polyurethane elastomeric coating to backs of frames that are filled with
grout containing antifreezing agents.
Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and
secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
Fire-Rated Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.
Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between
frames and masonry with grout.
Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take
precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or
damaged by grout forces.
Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead
structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to
other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for
securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to
frame jamb members.
Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a.
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
c.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1.
Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a.
Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
b.
Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
c.
Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch.
d.
Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4
inch.
2.
3.4

CA 15-001
Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

A.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B.
Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.
C.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
08 1113 - 7

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
D.
Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint
E.
08 1113 - 8
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 08 1400 - WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.
2.
Hollow-core doors with hardboard or MDF faces.
3.
Factory finishing flush wood doors.
4.
Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
B.
1.
Steel Doors and Frames: Section 08 1113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames."
2.
Hardware: Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware."
3.
Glass: Section 08 8000 "Glazing."
4.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit Product Data, Shop Drawings, and Schedules for flush wood doors concurrently with
submittals for other Division 08 door Sections, including Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware."
1.
with Door Hardware Schedule specified in Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware," in tabular
form, including pertinent information required for fabrication and installation of each type
of door, frame, and associated accessory, in Project.
B.
Product Data: For each type of door indicated, manufacturer's published technical data sheets,
including product description and applications, technical properties, features, benefits, and
limitations.
1.
Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings.
2.
Include factory-finishing specifications.
C.
and installation requirements for flush wood doors.
1.
Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware
blocking; and other pertinent data.
2.
Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
3.
Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
4.
Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
5.
Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
6.
Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
D.
Samples:
1.
For each type of flush wood door required, corner section of door, 12 inches square, with
door faces and edgings representing typical range of color and grain for each species of
veneer and solid lumber required, finished with same materials proposed for factoryfinished doors.
E.
Product Schedule: Include flush wood doors in Project Door Schedule. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings.
08 1400 - 1

CA 15-001
1.4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from a single source and a single manufacturer.
B.
Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with (Wood Door

Manufacturers Association) WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
C.
Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with (National Fire Protection Association) NFPA 80,
that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated,
based on testing at positive pressure according to (Underwriter's Laboratory) UL 10C.
D.

1.5

A.
1.6
1.
Comply with requirements of WDMA I.S.1-A and manufacturer's written instructions.
2.
Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
3.
Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the
remainder of the construction period.
WARRANTY
A.

replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
a.
Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42 by 84 inch section.
b.
Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch
span.
2.
3.
Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or
replacement of defective doors.
Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Fire-Protection-Rated Doors:
1.
Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating
indicated.
2.
Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by
outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
3.
Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated
without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent
seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
B.
Mineral-Core Doors:
1.
Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced
quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.
08 1400 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
C.
2.2

CA 15-001
2.
Blocking: Provide composite blocking with enhanced screw-holding capability approved

for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting
hardware.
a.
5 inch top-rail blocking.
b.
5 inch bottom-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have protection plates.
3.
Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved

screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for
exposed edges.
a.
Screw-Holding Capability: 475 lbf, (Window & door Manufacturers Association)
WDMA T.M.-10.
Hollow-Core Doors:
1.
Construction: Standard hollow core.
2.
Blocking: Provide wood blocking with minimum dimensions as follows:
a.
5 by 18 inch lock blocks.
VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A.
2.3
Interior Solid-Core Doors:

1.
Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces.
2.
Species: Maple.
Cut: [Plain sliced (flat sliced)] [Quarter sliced] [Rift cut].
3.
4.
Match between Veneer Leaves: [Book] [Slip] match.
5.
Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match.
6.
Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by
mullions.
7.
Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Same species as faces, 3 7/8 inches deep.
8.
Core: Particleboard with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde, complying with ANSI
A208.1, Grade M-2.
9.
Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive
planed before veneering.
10. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty.
DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A.
Interior Hollow-Core Doors:

1.
Grade: Custom.
2.
Faces: Hardboard or MDF.
a.
Hardboard Faces: AHA A135.4, Class 1 (tempered) or Class 2 (standard).
b.
MDF Faces: ANSI A208.2, Grade 150 or 160.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
Exposed Vertical Edges: Any closed-grain hardwood.

Construction: Three plies.
WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Standard Duty.
PREFABRICATED WOOD DOOR FRAMES

A.
Frames, complete with casings, fabricated from solid lumber or primed MDF exposed surfaces
for opaque finish:
1.
Species and Grade: Poplar, Douglas fir-larch or Douglas fir south, Prime or D finish;
NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
a.
Optional Material: Primed MDF of same actual dimensions as lumber indicated.
2.
3.
4.
Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent with at least 85 percent of shipment at 12

percent or less.
Finger Jointing: Not allowed.
Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth).
08 1400 - 3

CA 15-001
2.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.6
Provide wood doors and frames by:

1.
Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
2.
Ampco, Inc.
3.
Eggers Industries.
Graham Wood Doors.
4.
5.
Haley Brothers, Inc.
6.
Ipik Door Company.
7.
Lambton Doors.
8.
Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.
9.
Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.
10. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company.
11. Vancouver Door Company.
12. VT Industries Inc.
FABRICATION
A.
Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of
referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
B.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply
with (Door and Hardware Institute) DHI-WDHS-3 "Recommended Hardware Locations for
Wood Flush Doors." Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI
A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.
1.
Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment
before factory machining.
2.
Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for
pairs of fire-rated doors.
C.
Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.

1.
Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2.
Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with
applicable requirements in Section 08 8000 "Glazing."
2.7
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
General: Comply with WDMA I.S.1-A for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including
fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before
finishing.
1.
Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be
omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B.
Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime doors with one coat of wood primer specified in Section
09 9123 "Interior Painting." Seal all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with primer.
C.
Transparent Finish:
1.
Grade: Premium.
2.
Finish: WDMA TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.
3.
Staining: As selected by Architect.
4.
Effect: Open-grain finish.
5.
Sheen: Satin.
08 1400 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
1.
Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
a.
Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and
swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
b.
Reject doors with defects.
INSTALLATION
A.
Frames:
1.
Assemble wood frames and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was
not completed in the shop.
2.
Install wood frames level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed
shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
3.
Anchor frames to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure
with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or
finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.
a.
Scribe and cut wood frames to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair
damaged finish at cuts.
B.
Hardware: As specified in Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware."
C.
Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality
standard, and as indicated.
1.
Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
D.
Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
E.
Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at

Project site.
3.3

A.
Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B.
Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be
repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or
refinishing.
C.
Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, chromated copper arsenate, or

ammoniacal copper zinc arsenate to co-generation facilities or "waste-to-energy" facilities.
D.
Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill
E.
Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.
F.
08 1400 - 5
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 08 3113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.
B.
1.
a.
Section 06 1053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry."
b.
2.
1.3
Substrate Material:
a.
Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
b.
Section 04 2000 "Unit Masonry."
c.
Section 09 2900 "Gypsum Board."
A.
Provide suitable access to every chase, valve, control, or other item of equipment requiring
adjustment and maintenance that would otherwise be inaccessible.
1.
Use minimum 16 by 16 inch access doors where hand/arm-reach access is sufficient to
perform required service.
2.
Use minimum 24 by 24 inch access doors where full-personnel access is necessary to
perform required service.
B.
Where access doors and frames are located in fire-rated construction, provide doors and
frames with fire ratings equal to that of the element in which they are located.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of access door and frame required, manufacturer's published
technical data sheets, including product description and applications, technical properties,
B.
requirements for access doors and frames.
1.
a.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain access doors and frames from a single source and a single
manufacturer.
B.
Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with (National Fire Protection
Association) NFPA 80, that are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for firetest-response characteristics per the following test method and that are listed and labeled by
(Underwriters Laboratory) UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction:
1.
NFPA 252 or UL 10B for vertical access doors and frames.
08 3113 - 1

CA 15-001
2.
1.6
Design Development
October 02, 2015
(ASTM International) ASTM E 119 or UL 263 for horizontal access doors and frames.

A.
Requirements."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS

A.
Flush Access Doors and Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet.

1.
Door: Minimum 0.075 inch (14 gage) thick sheet metal, set flush with exposed face
flange of frame.
2.
Frames:
a.
Concrete or Masonry Walls: Minimum 0.060 inch (16 gage) thick sheet metal with
1 inch wide, surface-mounted trim.
b.
Gypsum Board Walls and Ceilings: Minimum 0.060 inch (16 gage) thick sheet
metal with drywall bead.
3.
4.
B.
Fire-Rated, Insulated, Flush Access Doors and Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet.
1.
Fire-Resistance Rating: As required by Building Code for type and rating of construction
in which door is installed.
2.
Temperature Rise Rating: 250 deg F at the end of 30 minutes.
3.
Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a
minimum thickness of 0.036 inch (20 gage).
4.
Frames:
a.
Concrete or Masonry Walls: Minimum 0.060 inch (16 gage) thick sheet metal with
1-inch wide, surface-mounted trim.
b.
Gypsum Board Walls: Minimum 0.060 inch (16 gage) thick sheet metal with
drywall bead.
5.
6.
7.
C.
2.2
Hinges: Spring-loaded, concealed-pin type.

Latch: Cam latch, operated by screwdriver, with interior release.
Hinges: Concealed-pin type.

Automatic Closer: Spring type.
Latch: Self-latching device operated by ring turn with interior release.
Provide access doors and frames by:

1.
Acudor Products, Inc.
2.
Babcock-Davis.
3.
Bar-Co, Inc.
4.
Cendrex Inc.
5.
Elmdor/Stoneman.
6.
J. L. Industries, Inc.
7.
Karp Associates, Inc.
8.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
9.
MIFAB, Inc.
10. Milcor Inc.
11. Nystrom, Inc.
12. Williams Bros. Corporation of America.
FABRICATION
A.
General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for
installation.
08 3113 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
B.
Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
C.
Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish
attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports
indicated.
1.
For trimless frames with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board securely
attached to perimeter of frames.
2.
Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing.
3.
Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors.
D.
Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when
closed.
2.3
FINISHES
A.

B.
C.
minimum requirements indicated below for (Society for Protective Coatings) SSPC surface
preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal
fabrications:
1.
Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other
contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from
uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1 (NACE International) or SSPCSP 8.
D.
Factory-Primed Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2

INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels
aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.
C.
Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
3.3

A.
Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
B.
Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
08 3113 - 3

CA 15-001
C.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
08 3113 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 08 3213 - SLIDING ALUMINUM-FRAMED GLASS DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes sliding aluminum-framed glass doors.
B.
1.
Door Hardware not Specified in this Section: Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware."
2.
Related Sections:
a.
08 4113 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts."
b.
08 4229 "Automatic Entrances."
c.
08 5113 "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls."
1.3
A.
Structural Performance: Provide sliding aluminum-framed glass doors capable of withstanding

the effects of the following loads, based on testing units representative of those indicated for
Project that pass AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, Uniform Load Structural Test:
1.
Design Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
2.
Deflection Limits: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges
to less than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch, whichever is less, at design pressure
based on testing performed according to AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, Uniform
Load Deflection Test, or structural computations.
B.
changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain
and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit Product Data, Shop Drawings, and Schedules for sliding aluminum-framed glass doors
concurrently with submittals for other Division 08 door Sections, including "Door Hardware."
1.
with Door Hardware Schedule specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware," in
tabular form, including pertinent information required for fabrication and installation of
each type of door, frame, and associated accessory, in Project.
B.
Product Data: For each type of door required, manufacturer's published technical data sheets,
1.
Include construction details, material descriptions, glazing methods, profiles and
dimensions of individual components, hardware, and finishes.
C.
requirements for sliding aluminum-framed glass doors.
1.
Detail flashings, sealants, and interface with adjacent materials.
2.
a.
08 3213 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
D.
Samples: 18 inch length of typical sash rail member, demonstrating exterior and interior
finishes.
E.
Product Schedule: Include sliding aluminum-framed glass doors in Project Door Schedule.
Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.5
A.
1.6
Delegated-Design Submittal: For sliding aluminum-framed glass doors indicated to comply with
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation and used to determine the
following:
1.
Structural test pressures and design pressures from wind loads indicated.
2.
Deflection limitations of glass framing systems.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to sliding door manufacturer for installation of

units required for this Project.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain sliding aluminum-framed glass doors from a single source and a
single manufacturer.
C.

1.7

A.
1.8
Requirements."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of sliding aluminum-framed glass door openings
by field measurements before fabrication.
1.
a.
b.
WARRANTY
A.

replace components of sliding aluminum-framed glass doors that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
a.
Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware.
b.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
2.
08 3213 - 2
Warranty Period:
a.
Sliding Door: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion.
b.
Metal Finish: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2

1.
specified in Section 01 6000 "Product Requirements."
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum Extrusions: Provide alloy and temper recommended by sliding aluminum-framed

glass door manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish.
Comply with (American Architectural Manufacturers Association/Window & Door Manufacturers
Association/Canadian Standards Association) AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
B.
Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other materials

warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive for SC 3 severe service conditions and
compatible with members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components of sliding aluminumframed glass doors. Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
1.
Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed
fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or
hardware being fastened, as appropriate.
C.
Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Provide anchors, clips, and accessories of aluminum,
nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron for sliding aluminum-framed glass
doors, complying with (ASTM International) ASTM B 456 or ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe
service conditions.
D.
Reinforcing Members: Provide aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated

steel reinforcing members that are noncorrosive for SC 3 severe service conditions and that
comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
E.
Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard.
F.
Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated sliding doors, provide sliding aluminum-framed
glass door manufacturer's standard, permanently elastic, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating type
recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint size and movement.
2.3

A.
Frames and Door Panels: Fabricated from aluminum extrusions complying with
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
1.
Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate frames and door panels with an integral,
concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier located between exterior and interior
surfaces in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact.
B.
Threshold and Sill Cap/Track: Provide extruded-aluminum threshold and track of thickness,
dimensions, and profile indicated; designed to comply with performance requirements
indicated, and to drain to exterior; with manufacturer's standard finish.
1.
Low-Profile Floor Track: Americans with Diabilities Act (ADA)-Architectural Barriers
Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) compliant.
C.
Glazing System:
1.
Glass: As specified in Section 08 8000 "Glazing."
2.
Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or
extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.
3.
Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.
08 3213 - 3

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
D.
Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware, fabricated from a corrosion-resistant

material compatible with aluminum complying with AAMA 907 and designed to smoothly
operate, tightly close, and securely lock sliding aluminum-framed glass doors. Do not use
aluminum in frictional contact with other metals.
1.
Hardware Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
2.
Roller Assemblies: Provide movable panels with adjustable-height roller assemblies,
complying with AAMA 906, consisting of manufacturer's standard self-lubricating nylon or
steel ball-bearing rollers, dual tandem; two roller assemblies per panel.
3.
Door Pulls: Provide manufacturer's standard flush extruded-aluminum pulls.
4.
Locks: Install manufacturer's keyed cylinder lock and multipoint locking device on each
movable panel, lockable from the inside and outside. Adjust locking device to allow
unobstructed movement of the panel across adjacent panel in the direction indicated.
E.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Western Window Systems; Series 600 Multi-Slide Doors, or
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate sliding aluminum-framed glass doors in sizes indicated. Include a complete system
for assembling components and anchoring doors.
B.
Fabricate sliding aluminum-framed glass doors that are reglazable without dismantling panel
framing.
C.
Weather Stripping: Provide operable panels with a double row of sliding weather stripping in
horizontal rails and single or double-row weather stripping in meeting or jamb stiles. Provide
compression-type weather stripping at the perimeter of each movable panel where sliding-type
weather stripping is not appropriate.
1.
Provide weather stripping locked into extruded grooves in door panels or frames.
D.
Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal drainage passages to conduct infiltrating water
to exterior.
E.
Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to
greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and
installation.
2.5
FINISHES
A.

B.
Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
D.
Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, (Aluminum Association) AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm
or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
08 3213 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
1.
3.2

CA 15-001
Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of threshold substrate, and operational

clearances.
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing
doors, hardware, accessories, and other components.
B.
Install sliding aluminum-framed glass doors level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion,
warp or rack of frames and panels, or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place
to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing, vapor retarders, air barriers,
water/weather barriers, and other adjacent construction.
C.
Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, to provide weathertight
construction.
D.
Install sliding aluminum-framed glass doors and components to drain condensation, water
penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within doors to the exterior.
E.
Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic
action at points of contact with other materials according to ASTM E 2112, Section 5.12
"Dissimilar Materials."
3.3

A.
Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
B.
Adjust hardware for proper alignment, smooth operation, and proper latching without
unnecessary force or excessive clearance.
C.
Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing sliding doors. Comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Avoid damaging
protective coatings and finishes. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
D.
Protect sliding door surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations. During construction, monitor sliding door surfaces adjacent to and
below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits,
stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact sliding door surfaces,
remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Replace damaged components.
F.
08 3213 - 5
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 08 3324 - OVERHEAD RAPID COILING DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes the following types of electrically operated overhead coiling doors:
B.
1.
Steel Support Framing: Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications."
2.
1.3
A.
1.4
Structural Performance: Provide overhead coiling doors capable of withstanding the effects of
gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of
door components:
1.
Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward and
outward.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit Product Data, Shop Drawings, and Schedules for overhead coiling doors concurrently
with submittals for other Division 08 door Sections, including "Door Hardware."
1.
with Door Hardware Schedule specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware," in
tabular form, including pertinent information required for fabrication and installation of
each type of door, frame, and associated accessory, in Project.
B.
Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory, manufacturer's
C.
requirements for overhead coiling doors.
1.
Include summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs.
2.
a.
D.
Product Schedule: Include overhead coiling doors in Project Door Schedule. Use same
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Entity trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of
products required for this Project.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors from a single source and a single
manufacturer.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70
"National Electrical Code," Article 100.
08 3324 - 1

CA 15-001
1.6
Design Development
October 02, 2015

A.
Requirements."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2

1.
specified in Section 01 6000 "Product Requirements."
HIGH-SPEED COILING DOOR
A.
Curtain: Manufacturer's standard multi-layered, woven, dimensionally stable, puncture

resistant, polymer impregnated, multifilament polyester fabric.
B.
Side Frames: Manufacturer's standard reinforced rames with front and rear wind bar guides
and full-height front and rear weather seals.
1.
Include 2 sets of factory-installed through-beam safety photo eyes.
C.
Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard breakaway bar, capable of breaking away when hit from
either direction without damaging or bending bar, safety astragal, or side covers.
1.
Include bottom safety edge that reverses door to its full open limit it contacts obstructions
above floor line during downward travel.
2.
Include kill-switch to automatically shut off motor when door is impacted.
D.
Counterweight and Tensioning System: Manufacturer's standard independent counterbalance

and fabric tensioning mechanisms.
1.
Include guided counterweights sized to properly balance door.
2.
Tensioning system shall maintain constant panel tension utilizing polyester belting and
ultra-high molecular weight spools.
E.
Provide roller and motor guards, ground level manual brake release, and operating capability
when side covers are removed or damaged.
F.
Drive System: Variable speed, manufacturer's standard.

1.
Travel Speed: Adjustable, factory-set to open at 50 inches per second.
2.
G.
Hood: Mnaufacturer's standard, formed to act as weatherseal and entirely enclose coiled
curtain and operating mechanism at opening head.
H.
Electronic Controller: Manufacturer's standard programmable system, housed in (Underwriters

Laboratory) UL listed NEMA 4X-rated enclosure with factory set parameters.
I.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Rytec Corporation; Fast-Seal FS-100, or comparable product

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
08 3324 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.2

CA 15-001
INSTALLATION
A.
3.3
General: Install coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware,
jamb and head molding strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports.
A.
Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or
distortion and with weathertight fit around entire perimeter.
B.
Startup Services
1.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
a.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
b.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
C.
Demonstration: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors. Refer to
Section 01 7900 "Demonstration and Training."
D.
08 3324 - 3
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 08 4113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Exterior and interior storefront framing.
2.
Exterior and interior manual-swing entrance doors.
B.
1.
Door Hardware not Specified in this Section: Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware."
2.
Glass: Section 08 8000 "Glazing."
3.
Related Sections:
a.
08 3213 "Sliding Aluminum-Framed Glass Doors."
b.
08 5113 "Aluminum Windows."
c.
08 5413 "Fiberglass Windows and Doors."
1.3
A.
General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following
performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective
manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:
1.
Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to,
story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
2.
Failure includes the following:
a.
Deflection exceeding specified limits.
b.
Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
c.
Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
structural movements to glazing.
d.
Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements.
e.
Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
f.
Sealant failure.
g.
Failure of operating units.
B.
Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering

analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
C.
Structural Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
D.
Deflection of Framing Members:

1.
Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6
inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or
an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is
less.
2.
Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces
glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge
clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components directly
below them to less than 1/8 inch and clearance between members and operable units
directly below them to less than 1/16 inch.
08 4113 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
E.
Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to (ASTM

International) ASTM E 330 as follows:
1.
When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not
evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
2.
When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,
systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and
permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
3.
Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds.
F.
Story Drift: Provide aluminum-framed systems that accommodate design displacement of

building height divided by 400.
1.
Test Performance: Meet criteria for passing, based on building occupancy type, when
tested according to (American Architectural Manufacturer's Association) AAMA 501.4, at
design displacement and 1.5 times design displacement.
G.
Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed
glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to
ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
H.
Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not
evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to
ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load
design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.
I.
Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not
evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to
AAMA 501.1 under dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design
pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.
1.
Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating aluminum-framed systems
or water appearing on systems' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other
than condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and
gutters that is drained to exterior and water that cannot damage adjacent materials or
finishes.
J.
Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to (National Fenestration
Research Council) NFRC as follows:
1.
Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor of
not more than 0.45 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100.
2.
Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified
condensation resistance rating of no less than 45 as determined according to NFRC 500.
K.
Noise Reduction: Test according to ASTM E 90, with ratings determined by ASTM E 1332, as
follows.
1.
Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class: Minimum 30.
L.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface
temperature changes:
1.
Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
sheets, including product description and applications, technical properties, features, benefits,
and limitations.
1.
finishes.
B.
and installation requirements for aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts.
08 4113 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
1.
2.

CA 15-001
Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of
moisture in the system to the exterior.
a.
C.
Samples: Storefront framing corner, demonstrating jamb and sill configurations, including
thermal breaks and glazing gaskets, in specified finish.
D.
Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing
fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.
Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to
ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.
1.5
A.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.
Detail fabrication and assembly of aluminum-framed systems.
2.
Include design calculations.
B.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Entity trained and approved by storefront system manufacturer.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.
C.
Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop

Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in
systems similar to those indicated for this Project.
D.
Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and
Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities," and
(International Code Council/American National Standards Institute) ICC/ANSI A117.1.
E.
Source Limitations: Obtain system components from a single source and a single
manufacturer.
F.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to (American Welding

Society) AWS D1.2.
G.
Mockups: Furnish and install storefront for integrated exterior mockup indicated on Drawings.
H.

1.7

A.
1.8
Requirements."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural supports and wall opening dimensions by
field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.
Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings.
08 4113 - 3

CA 15-001
2.
1.9
Design Development
October 02, 2015

a.
b.
WARRANTY
A.

replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
a.
Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
b.
Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
c.
weathering.
d.
Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas.
e.
Failure of operating components.
f.
B.
Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal
weathering.
1.
1.10
A.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of entrance door hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2

1.
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
1.
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
2.
Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
3.
Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
4.
Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308.
5.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10.
B.
Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying

with (Structural Steel Painting Council) SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after
surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to
08 4113 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC

standard.
1.
Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
2.
Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008.
3.
Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011.
C.
2.3
1.
Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in
Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."
2.
FRAMING SYSTEMS
A.
Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness

required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
B.
Exterior Systems:
1.
Profile: 2-1/4 by 4-1/2 inches.
2.
Construction: Thermally improved.
3.
Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
4.
Glazing Plane: Front.
5.
Basis-of-Design Product: Proved EFCO Corporation; Series 945, or comparable product
C.
Interior Systems:
1.
Profile: 1-3/4 by 4-1/2 inches.
2.
Construction: Nonthermal.
3.
Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
4.
Glazing Plane: Center.
5.
Basis-of-Design Product: Proved EFCO Corporation; Series 401, or comparable product
D.
Miscellaneous Extrusions: As indicated on Drawings, of thickness required to comply with

Performance Requirements.
1.
Exterior Sub-Sills: Thermally broken, guttered and weeped.
E.
Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with

nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
F.
Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,

nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1.
Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from
thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
2.
Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
3.
Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing
system.
G.
Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate
fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials
and recommended by manufacturer.
1.
Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel
inserts, complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153.
H.
Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding

flashing compatible with adjacent materials.
I.
Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by

manufacturer for joint type.
08 4113 - 5

CA 15-001
J.
2.4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Glazing System:
1.
Glass: As specified in Section 08 8000 "Glazing."
2.
Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or
extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.
3.
Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.
ENTRANCE DOORS
A.
Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.

1.
Door Construction: 1-3/4 inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125 inch thick,
extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with
reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate
concealed tie rods.
2.
B.
Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware," and the following:
1.
Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.
a.
Compression Type: ASTM D 2000 molded neoprene or ASTM D 2287 molded
PVC.
b.
Sliding Type: AAMA 701, wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylonfabric or aluminum-strip backing.
2.
3.
2.5
Door Design: [As indicated] [Narrow stile; 2-1/8-inch nominal width] [Medium stile;
3-1/2-inch nominal width] [Wide stile; 5-inch nominal width] <Insert description>.
a.
Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches above floor or ground
plane.
b.
Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and
preformed gaskets.
Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed

fasteners on mounting strip.
Thresholds: (Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association) BHMA A156.21 raised
thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with maximum height of 1/2 inch.
FABRICATION
A.
Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B.
Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of

finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or
grinding.
C.
Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following
characteristics:
1.
Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2.
Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.
3.
Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
4.
Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture
migrating within the system to exterior.
5.
Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
6.
Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
7.
Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
D.
Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce with structural steel to support loads imposed by door
operation and for installing entrance door hardware.
1.
At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.
08 4113 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.

CA 15-001
At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install

three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames
for pairs of doors.
E.
Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
1.
At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable
strip and mortised into door edge.
2.
At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.
F.
Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest
extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying
finishes.
G.
After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
Shop Drawings.
2.6
FINISHES
A.

B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
D.
or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2

INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
Do not install damaged components.
3.
Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4.
Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5.
Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration.
6.
Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Metal Protection:
1.
Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting
contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive
spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2.
Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with polyurethane elastomeric coating.
C.
Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
08 4113 - 7

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
D.
Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 07 9200
"Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.
E.
Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without
warp or rack.
F.
Install glazing as specified in Section 08 8000 "Glazing."
G.
Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1.
Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather
stripping.
2.
Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door
hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using
concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
H.
Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants" to produce
weathertight installation.
3.3
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances:
1.
Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4
inch over total length.
2.
Alignment:
a.
Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.
b.
Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch.
B.
Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch.
3.4

A.
Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by

manufacturer.
1.
For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3
second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70 degree open position to 3
inches from the latch, measured to the leading door edge.
B.
08 4113 - 8
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 08 5113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes [fixed] [and] [operable] aluminum-framed windows for exterior locations.
B.
1.
Framing and Support: Section 05 4000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing."
2.
Related Sections:
a.
Section 08 4113 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts."
b.
Section 08 5413 "Fiberglass Windows and Doors."
1.3
A.
General: Provide aluminum windows capable of complying with performance requirements

indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified,
and that are of minimum test size indicated below:
1.
Size required by AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for gateway performance.
B.
Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows:

1.
Minimum Performance Class: [R] [LC] [CW] [AW] [As indicated on Drawings].
2.
Minimum Performance Grade: [15] [20] [25] [30] [35] [40] [45] [50] [As indicated on
Drawings].
A.
Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum whole-unit U-factor of 0.35 Btu/sq. ft. x h x
deg F.
B.
Condensation-Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal

performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 45.
C.
Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal
movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface
temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of
joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering
calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky
heat loss.
1.
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces.
D.
Sound Transmission Class (STC): Rated for not less than 26 STC when tested for laboratory
sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 413.
E.
Outside-Inside Transmission Class (OITC): Rated for not less than 22 OITC when tested for
laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 1332.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
and limitations.
1.
finishes.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08 5113 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
B.
and installation requirements for aluminum windows. Include the following:
1.
Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners.
2.
Joinery details.
3.
Expansion provisions.
4.
Flashing and drainage details.
5.
Weather-stripping details.
6.
Thermal-break details.
7.
Glazing details.
8.
Window cleaning provisions.
C.
Samples: 12 by 12 inch long, full-size window corner including full-size sections of extrusions
with factory-applied color finish, weather stripping, and glazing.
D.
Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Entity capable of fabricating aluminum windows that meet or

exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion
in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Entity acceptable to aluminum window manufacturer for installation of

units required for this Project.
1.
Installer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to
assume engineering responsibility.
2.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for aluminum windows, including Shop
Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in
assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows through a single source and a single
manufacturer.
D.
Fenestration Standard: Comply with (American Architectural Manufacturers

Association/Window and Door Manufacturers Association/Canadian Standards Association)
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, "North American Fenestration Standard Voluntary
Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass Doors," for definitions and
minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication.
Comply with more stringent requirements if indicated.
E.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and

with (Glass Association of North America) GANA "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
F.

related to aluminum windows including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Review and discuss the finishing of aluminum windows that is required to be coordinated
with the finishing of other aluminum work for color and finish matching.
2.
Review, discuss, and coordinate the interrelationship of aluminum windows with other
exterior wall components. Include provisions for structural anchorage, glazing, flashing,
weeping, sealants, and protection of finishes.
3.
Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and
weathertight exterior building envelope.
4.
Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by
other trades.
08 5113 - 2
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Design Development
October 02, 2015
1.6

CA 15-001

A.
1.7
Requirements."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Field Measurements: Verify aluminum window openings by field measurements before

fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.
a.
b.
WARRANTY
A.

replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1.
a.
Failure to meet performance requirements.
b.
Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or
condensation.
c.
d.
Deterioration of metals, other materials, and metal finishes beyond normal
weathering.
e.
Failure of insulating glass.
2.
Warranty Period:
a.
Window: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
b.
Glazing: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
c.
Metal Finish: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2

1.
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum window manufacturer for
strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 22,000-psi
ultimate tensile strength, not less than 16,000-psi minimum yield strength, and not less than
0.062-inch thickness at any location for the main frame and sash members.
B.
Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials

warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum window
members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components.
1.
Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw anchor into aluminum less than 0.125 inch thick,
reinforce interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads,
or provide standard, noncorrosive, pressed-in, splined grommet nuts.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08 5113 - 3

CA 15-001
2.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed
fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or
hardware being fastened, as appropriate.
C.
Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel
or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient
strength to withstand design pressure indicated.
D.
Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel

complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or
iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength
to withstand design pressure indicated.
E.
Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for

permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action and for complete concealment
when aluminum window is closed.
1.
Weather-Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials complying
with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
F.
Sliding-Type Weather Stripping: Provide woven-pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene,

or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric. Comply with AAMA 701/702.
1.
Weather Seals: Provide weather stripping with integral barrier fin or fins of semirigid,
polypropylene sheet or polypropylene-coated material. Comply with AAMA 701/702.
G.
Replaceable Weather Seals: Comply with AAMA 701/702.
H.
Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated windows, provide window manufacturer's
standard, permanently elastic, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating type recommended by sealant
manufacturer for joint size and movement.
2.3
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
A.
Operating Types: Provide the following operating types in locations indicated on Drawings:
1.
Casement: Project [out] [in].
2.
Awning: Project out.
3.
Hopper: Project in.
4.
Single hung.
5.
Double hung.
6.
Horizontal sliding.
7.
Fixed.
B.
Frames and Sashes: Aluminum extrusions complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.

1.
Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate frames, sashes, and muntins with an
integral, concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier located between exterior materials
and window members exposed on interior side in a manner that eliminates direct metalto-metal contact.
C.
Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E 2190, certified through (Insulating Glass Certification Council)
IGCC as complying with requirements of IGCC.
1.
Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3.
a.
Kind: Fully tempered where indicated on Drawings and at "Hazardous Locations,"
as defined in International Building Code, Chapter 24.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Lites: Two.
Filling: Fill space between glass lites with air.
Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface.
Hardware:
1.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless
steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907 or other corrosion-resistant material
08 5113 - 4
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.
3.
4.
5.
compatible with aluminum; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock
aluminum windows, and sized to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions.
Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals.
Push-Bar Operators: Provide telescoping-type, push-bar operator designed to open and
close ventilators with fixed screens.
Gear-Type Rotary Operators: Comply with AAMA 901 when tested according to
ASTM E 405, Method A.
Four- or Six-Bar Friction Hinges: Comply with AAMA 904.
a.
Locking mechanism and handles for manual operation.
b.
Friction Shoes: Provide friction shoes of nylon or other nonabrasive, nonstaining,
noncorrosive, durable material.
Casement Windows: Provide the following operating hardware:
a.
Operator: [Gear-type rotary single-arm operator located on jamb at sill] [Geartype rotary dual-arm operator located on jamb at sill].
1)
Rating: Provide rotary operator rated [C-R15] [C-C20] [C-HC40] according to
AAMA 901.
2)
Handle: [Standard crank] [Folding crank] [Removable crank] [Knob] [Thandle].
b.
Hinges: Extension hinges or pivots, nonfriction type.
c.
Hinges: Heavy-duty, [three] [five]-knuckle butt hinges with nylon bushings.
d.
Hinges: [Standard] [Heavy]-duty, concealed, four- or six-bar friction hinges with

adjustable-slide friction shoes; designed to permit ventilator operation for inside
cleaning of outside glass face; two per ventilator.
Hinges: [Standard] [Heavy]-duty, concealed, four- or six-bar friction egress hinges
with adjustable-slide friction shoes; designed to achieve 90-degree ventilator
opening[ and to permit ventilator operation for inside cleaning of outside
glass face]; two per ventilator.
Lock: Lift-type throw, cam-action lock with keeper; [one] [two] <Insert number>
per ventilator.
Lock: Combination lever handle and cam-action lock with keeper; [one] [two]
<Insert number> per ventilator.
Lock: Combination dual lever handles, tie rod, and cam-action lock with keepers.
Lock: Key-operated custodial lock and keeper with removable handle; [one] [two]
<Insert number> per ventilator.
Lock: Concealed multipoint lock operated by single lever handle or lift-type throw;
[three] <Insert number> per ventilator.
Limit Device: Concealed [friction adjustor, adjustable stay bar] [or] [support
arms with adjustable, limited, hold-open] limit device.
1)
Safety Devices: Limit clear opening to [4 inches] [6 inches] for ventilation;
with custodial key release.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
6.

CA 15-001
[Double] [Single]-Hung Windows: Provide the following operating hardware:

a.
Counterbalancing Mechanism: Comply with AAMA 902.
1)
Sash Balances: Two per sash; concealed, of size and capacity to hold sash
stationary at any open position.
b.
c.
d.
Handles: Applied sash [lift bar] [pull-downs] on bottom rail of forward-placed

operating sash; two per sash.
Handle: Continuous, integral, sash [lift bar] [pull-down] on bottom rail of forwardplaced operating sash.
Sash Lock: Cam-action sweep lock and keeper on meeting rail; [one] [two]
<Insert number> per sash.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08 5113 - 5

CA 15-001
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
7.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Sash Lock: Spring-loaded, snap-type lock on bottom rail of lower sash; two per
sash.
Sash Lock: Spring-loaded plunger lock with keeper on meeting rail of lower sash;
two per sash.
Sash Lock: Pole-operated, cam-action lock on meeting rail of windows with
meeting rail more than 72 inches above floor; with keeper.
Pole Socket: Provide a pole socket or groove on inside face of top rail of [upper]
[lower] sash on windows with meeting rails more than 72 inches above floor.
Limit Device: [Sash stop] [Keyed sash] limit device; for [top] [bottom] [each
operable] sash located at jamb; [one] [two] per sash.
1)
Safety Devices: Limit clear opening to [4 inches] [6 inches] for ventilation;
with custodial key release.
Removable Lift-Out Sash: Design windows and provide with[ tamperproof, keyoperated] hardware to permit removal of sash from inside for cleaning.
Tilt Lock: Design windows and provide with[ tamperproof, key-operated] tilt latch
and pivot bar hardware to permit tilting of sash inward for cleaning both sides of
sash from interior.
Horizontal-Sliding Windows: Provide the following operating hardware:

a.
Sill Cap/Track: [Extruded-aluminum track with natural anodized finish] [Rigid
PVC or other weather-resistant plastic track with manufacturer's standard
integral color], of thickness, dimensions, and profile indicated; designed to comply
with performance requirements indicated and to drain to the exterior.
b.
Roller Assemblies: Low-friction design.
1)
Sash Rollers: [Nylon rollers] [Steel, lubricated ball-bearing rollers with
nylon tires] [Stainless-steel, lubricated ball-bearing rollers with nylon
tires].
c.
Locks and Latches: Designed to allow unobstructed movement of the sash across
adjacent sash in direction indicated and operated from the inside only.
Sash Lock: Cam-action sweep sash lock and keeper at meeting rails.
1)
2)
Sash Lock: Spring-loaded, snap-type lock at jambs; two per sash.
3)
Sash Lock: Spring-loaded plunger lock with keeper on meeting rail; two per
sash.
d.
Limit Device: Sash stop limit device; mounted in bottom of pull stile.
1)
Safety Devices: Limit clear opening to [4 inches] [6 inches] <Insert
dimension> for ventilation; with custodial key release.
e.
Removable Lift-Out Sash: Design windows and provide with[ tamperproof, keyoperated] hardware to permit removal of sash from inside for cleaning.
8.
Projected Windows: Provide the following operating hardware:

a.
Operator: [Underscreen push-bar] [Underscreen pivot-shoe-type, gear-type
rotary operator].
b.
Hinges: Five-knuckle butt hinges.
c.
Hinges: Concealed four- or six-bar friction hinge with adjustable-slide friction shoe;
two per ventilator.
d.
Lock: Cam-action, sweep lock handle with strike; [one] [two] <Insert number> per
ventilator.
e.
Lock: Combination lever handle and cam-action lock with concealed pawl and
keeper.
f.
Lock: Key-operated security lock and keeper.
g.
Lock: Key-operated custodial lock and keeper with removable handle.
h.
Lock: Pole-operated, [spring-catch lock and keeper] [cam-action, sweep lock
handle and strike].
08 5113 - 6
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Design Development
October 02, 2015
i.
9.
2.4

CA 15-001
arms with adjustable, limited, hold-open] limit device; located on jamb of each
ventilator.
1)
Projected Awning Windows: Provide the following operating hardware:

a.
Operator: [Push-bar] [Lever] [Gear-type rotary] operator located on jamb at sill.
1)
Handle: [Standard crank] [Folding crank] [Removable crank] [Knob] [Thandle].
b.
Hinges: Concealed four- or six-bar friction hinges located on each jamb near top
rail; two per ventilator.
c.
Lock: Lift-type throw, cam-action lock with keeper; [one] [two] <Insert number>
per ventilator.
d.
Lock: Combination lever handle and cam-action lock with concealed pawl and
keeper; [one] [two] per ventilator.
e.
Lock: Pole-operated, [combination handle and cam-action lock] [face-mounted
transom latch] and keeper.
f.
Lock: Key-operated custodial lock with removable handle.
g.
arms with adjustable, limited, hold-open] limit device; located on jamb of each
ventilator.
1)
INSECT SCREENS
A.
General: Fabricate insect screens to integrate with window frame. Provide screen for each
operable exterior sash. Screen wickets are not permitted.
1.
Type and Location:
a.
Full, outside for double-hung.
b.
Half, outside for gliding doors.
B.
Aluminum Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with (Screen

Manufacturers Association) SMA 1004 or SMA 1201. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped
joints or corner extrusions, concealed fasteners, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing
edge of frame.
1.
Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum sheet.
2.
Finish: Matching color and finish of cladding.
C.
Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-14 or 18-by-16 mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber threads;

woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact
damage, and weather deterioration. Comply with ASTM D 3656.
1.
Mesh Color: Gray.
2.5
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.6
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Gerkin Windows and Doors; 5000 Series, or comparable
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling
components and anchoring windows.
B.
Fabricate aluminum windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08 5113 - 7

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
C.
Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate aluminum windows with an integral, concealed,

low-conductance thermal barrier; located between exterior materials and window members
exposed on interior side; in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact.
1.
Provide thermal barriers tested according to AAMA 505.
2.
Provide hardware with low conductivity or nonmetallic material for hardware bridging
thermal breaks at frame or vent sash.
D.
Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and
ventilator.
1.
Horizontal-Sliding Windows: Provide operable sash with a double row of sliding weather
stripping in horizontal rails and single- or double-row weather stripping in meeting or jamb
stiles, as required to meet specified performance requirements. Provide compressiontype weather stripping at perimeter of each movable panel where sliding-type weather
stripping is not appropriate.
E.
Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior.
F.
Provide water-shed members above side-hinged ventilators and similar lines of natural water
penetration.
G.
Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with
anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances
and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections,
as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of
window units.
H.
Subframes: Provide subframes with anchors for window units as shown, of profile and
dimensions indicated but not less than 0.062-inchthick extruded aluminum. Miter or cope
corners, and weld and dress smooth with concealed mechanical joint fasteners. Finish to
match window units. Provide subframes capable of withstanding design loads of window units.
I.
Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze aluminum windows in the factory where practical and
possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing"
and with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
2.7
FINISHES
A.

B.

C.
D.
or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
1.
Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions for
performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and
08 5113 - 8
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather
barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight window
installation.
a.
Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other
construction debris.
b.
Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without
offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening
and within 3 inches of opening.
c.
Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding
slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing
windows, hardware, accessories, and other components.
B.
Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal
movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall
flashing and other adjacent construction.
C.
Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction.
D.
Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture
migrating within windows to the exterior.
E.
Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic
action at points of contact with other materials.
3.3

A.
Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at
contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate
hardware and moving parts.
B.
Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective
coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
C.
Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's
written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels,
and clean surfaces.
D.
Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged
during construction period.
E.
Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior
concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline
deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window
surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
F.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08 5113 - 9
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 08 5413 - FIBERGLASS WINDOWS AND DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes fiberglass-framed windows and doors.
B.
1.
Framing and Support: Section 05 4000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing."
2.
Water-Resistive Barrier: Section 07 2500 "Weather Barriers."
3.
4.
5.
Related Work:
a.
b.
08 3213 "Sliding Aluminum-Framed Glass Doors."
c.
d.
008 8000 "Glazing."
1.3
A.
Product Standard: Comply with (American Architectural Manufacturers Association/Window

and Door Manufacturers Association/CSA International) AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for
definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and
fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1.
Certification: WDMA certified with label attached to each window and door.
B.
Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows:

1.
Minimum Performance Class: LC.
2.
Minimum Performance Grade: 40.
C.
Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum whole-unit U-factor of 0.35 Btu/sq. ft. x h x
deg F.
D.
Sound Transmission Class (STC): Rated for not less than 26 STC when tested for laboratory
sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 413.
E.
Outside-Inside Transmission Class (OITC): Rated for not less than 22 OITC when tested for
laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 1332.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For windows and doors, and each type of accessory product required,
manufacturer's published technical data sheets, including product description and applications,
Reference Standard classification, technical properties, features, benefits, and limitations.
1.
Include construction details, material descriptions, glazing methods, dimensions of
individual components and profiles, hardware, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: Provide plans, elevations, sections, and details necessary to demonstrate
fabrication and installation requirements for fiberglass windows and doors.
1.
Detail flashings, sealants, and interface with adjacent materials.
2.
Indicate required operational clearances where applicable.
08 5413 - 1

CA 15-001
3.
Design Development
October 02, 2015

a.
C.
Samples:
1.
Exposed Finishes: 18 inch length of typical sash rail member, demonstrating exterior and
interior finishes.
2.
Glazing Units: 12 inch square Sample of each type required.
3.
Exposed Hardware: Full-size unit of each type.
D.
Product Schedule: For fiberglass windows and doors. Use same designations indicated on
Drawings.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Entity capable of fabricating fiberglass windows and doors that
meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by
test reports and calculations.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Entity acceptable to fiberglass window and door manufacturer for
installation of units required for this Project.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain fiberglass windows and doors from a single source and a single
manufacturer.
D.
Mockups: Furnish and install fiberglass window for integrated exterior mockup indicated on
Drawings.
E.

1.
Review, discuss, and coordinate the interrelationship of fiberglass windows and doors
with other exterior wall components. Include provisions for anchoring, flashing, weeping,
sealing perimeters, and protecting finishes.
2.
Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and
weathertight exterior building envelope.
3.
Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by
other trades.
1.6

A.
1.7
Requirements."
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fiberglass windows and

doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
a.
Failure to meet performance requirements.
b.
Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, and air infiltration.
c.
d.
Deterioration of materials and finishes beyond normal weathering.
e.
Failure of insulating glass.
2.
08 5413 - 2
Warranty Period:
a.
Window and Door Units: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
b.
Glazing Units: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2

1.
A.
Operating Types: Provide the following operating types in locations indicated on Drawings:
1.
Double hung windows.
2.
Fixed windows.
3.
Gliding doors.
4.
Swinging entrance doors.
B.
Frames and Sashes: Pultruded fiberglass complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440

and with exposed exterior fiberglass surfaces finished with manufacturer's standard enamel
coating complying with AAMA 613 or AAMA 623.
1.
Exterior Color: Color selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.
Interior Finish: Matching exterior finish, in color selected by Architect from manufacturer's
full range.
C.
Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E 2190, certified through (Insulating Glass Certification Council)
IGCC as complying with requirements of IGCC.
1.
Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3.
a.
Kind: Fully tempered where indicated on Drawings and at "Hazardous Locations,"
as defined in International Building Code, Chapter 24.
2.
3.
4.
Lites: Two.
Filling: Fill space between glass lites with air.
D.
Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight

seal.
E.
Hardware:
1.
General: General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware, fabricated from a
corrosion-resistant material compatible with fiberglass, complying with AAMA 907;
designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock fiberglass doors and
windows, and sized to accommodate panel weight and dimensions.
2.
Hung Window Hardware:
a.
Counterbalancing Mechanism: Complying with AAMA 902, concealed, of size and
capacity to hold sash stationary at any open position.
b.
Locks and Latches: Allow unobstructed movement of the sash across adjacent
sash in direction indicated and operated from the inside only.
c.
Tilt Hardware: Releasing tilt latch allows sash to pivot about horizontal axis to
facilitate cleaning exterior surfaces from the interior.
3.
Gliding Door Hardware:

a.
Sill Cap/Track: Manufacturer's standard of dimensions and profile indicated;
designed to comply with performance requirements indicated and to drain to the
exterior.
b.
Locks and Latches: Allow unobstructed movement of the sash across adjacent
sash in direction indicated and operated from the inside only.
1)
Auxiliary Foot Lock: Provide operating panels with auxiliary foot lock
consisting of spring loaded plunger that engages a grommet in sill.
08 5413 - 3

CA 15-001
c.
d.
4.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Roller Assemblies: Low-friction design.

Exterior and Interior Handles: Die cast aluminum pull with powder-coated finish to
match frame finishes.
Swinging Door Hardware:

a.
Lock: Install manufacturer's standard keyed multipoint locking device on each
operable panel, lockable from the inside and outside.
F.
Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless
G.
Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and
other components.
1.
Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to the greatest extent possible. For
application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened.
H.
Basis-of-Design Products:
1.
Windows and Gliding Doors: Provide Andersen Corporation, Series 100, or comparable
products acceptable to Architect.
2.
Swinging Doors: Provide Therma-Tru Corporation; S85RXJ Pulse Series, or comparable
2.3
INSECT SCREENS
A.
General: Fabricate insect screens to integrate with window frame. Provide screen for each
operable exterior sash. Screen wickets are not permitted.
1.
Type and Location:
a.
Full, outside for double-hung.
b.
Half, outside for gliding doors.
B.
Aluminum Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with (Screen

Manufacturers Association) SMA 1004 or SMA 1201. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped
joints or corner extrusions, concealed fasteners, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing
edge of frame.
1.
Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum sheet.
2.
Finish: Matching color and finish of cladding.
C.
Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-14 or 18-by-16 mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber threads;

woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact
damage, and weather deterioration. Comply with ASTM D 3656.
1.
Mesh Color: Gray.
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate fiberglass windows and doors in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for
installing and anchoring windows and doors.
B.
Glaze fiberglass windows and doors in the factory.
C.
Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight installation.
D.
Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates, matching window units, complete with anchors for
support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide
for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections. Provide
mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of window units.
E.
Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to
greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and
installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site.
08 5413 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
1.
Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances.
2.
Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in
components to ensure weathertight window installation.
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows and doors, hardware,
accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not
addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in
ASTM E 2112.
B.
Install windows and doors level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion, anchored
securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent
construction to produce weathertight construction.
3.3

A.
Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for
smooth operation and weathertight closure.
B.
Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows and doors. Remove excess
sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
1.
Keep protective films and coverings in place until final cleaning.
C.
Remove and replace sashes if glass has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged
during construction period.
D.
Protect window and door surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations. If contaminating substances do contact windows and door surfaces,
remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
08 5413 - 5
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following:

1.
2.
3.
B.
Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Division 06 Section Rough Carpentry.

Division 06 Section Finish Carpentry.
Division 08 Section Operations and Maintenance.
Division 08 Section Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
Division 08 Section Flush Wood Doors.
Division 28 Section Access Control.
Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
Mechanical door hardware.

Electromechanical door hardware.
Cylinders specified for doors in other sections.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Swinging doors.
Sliding doors.
Other doors to the extent indicated.
ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.

ICC/IBC - International Building Code.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies.
State Building Codes, Local Amendments.
Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards:
1.
2.
ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series

UL10C Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 1

CA 15-001
1.3
Design Development
October 02, 2015
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and
finishes.
B.
Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication
and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door
Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness,
hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
1.
Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and
Format for the Hardware Schedule."
2.
Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating
complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door
hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3.
Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will
be rejected and subject to resubmission.
3.
Content: Include the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
4.
C.
Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware
item.
Manufacturer of each item.
Fastenings and other pertinent information.
Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor
plans and in door and frame schedule.
Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
Mounting locations for door hardware.
Door and frame sizes and materials.
Warranty information for each product.
Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date,
particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of
other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data,
Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information
essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.
Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following:
1.
Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring
diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access
control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and
field-installed wiring. Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
DOOR HARDWARE
Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing

location and interconnection of major system components with respect to
their placement in the respective door openings.
Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring
diagrams.
Wiring instructions for each electronic component scheduled herein.
08 7100 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.

CA 15-001
Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring details
required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings.
D.
Proof of Certification: Provide copy of manufacturer(s) official certification or accreditation

document indicating proof of status as a qualified installer of Windstorm assemblies.
E.
Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate
keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format.
Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and
special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of
permanent cylinders/cores.
F.
Informational Submittals:
1.
G.
1.4
Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on
evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a
Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance

manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as
required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of

documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this
Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and
electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project
and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
C.
Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with
a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical
hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary
materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified
Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult
with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door
hardware and keying.
D.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from
a single source unless otherwise indicated.
E.
1.
Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line

by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted.
2.
Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical

door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced
standards.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 3

CA 15-001
F.
Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section

"Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying
schedule document:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.5
Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required.

Plans for existing and future key system expansion.
Requirements for key control storage and software.
Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software.
Address and requirements for delivery of keys.
Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in

Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s),
Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving,
handling, and installing door hardware.
1.
H.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct
the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their
respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware
(including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors.
Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and
physical product samples as required.
Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other
preparatory work performed by other trades.
Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening.
Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials.
Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures
At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to

manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule.
A.
Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware
delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or
accessories at Project site without prior authorization.
B.
Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware
Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
C.
Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software
and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service.
Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other
work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check
Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and
installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
B.
Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled
electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to
source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware,
and fire and detection alarm systems.
C.
Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced
and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring,
signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified
in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of
the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B.
Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace

components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are
not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.

Faulty operation of the hardware.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.
C.
Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise
indicated.
D.
Special Warranty Periods:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.8
Ten years for mortise locks and latches.

Seven years for heavy duty cylindrical (bored) locks and latches.
Five years for exit hardware.
Twenty five years for manual surface door closer bodies.
Two years for electromechanical door hardware.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of door hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A.
General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware
Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 5

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
B.
Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other
distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at
the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
C.
Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door
hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are
abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.
D.
Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and
electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in
writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01,
Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and
their designated consultants.
2.2
HANGING DEVICES
A.
Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified in
the Door Hardware Sets.
1.
Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for
door thickness and clearances required:
a.
b.
3.
Widths up to 30: 4-1/2 standard or heavy weight as specified.

Sizes from 31 to 40: 5 standard or heavy weight as specified.
Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
a.
b.
4.
Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches.

Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches.
Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches.
For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge
for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches.
Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated

bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight.
Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated
bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight.
Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets or on
Drawings:
a.
Non-removable Pins (NRP): Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when
tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is
closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
b.
c.
DOOR HARDWARE
Bommer Industires (BM).

Hager Companies (HA).
08 7100 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
d.
B.
Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Grade 1-600 certified continuous geared
hinge. with minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6060 T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a
minimum overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed, reversible and fabricated to
template screw locations. Factory trim hinges to suit door height and prepare for electrical cutouts.
1.
a.
b.
C.
McKinney Products (MK).
McKinney Products (MK).

Pemko Manufacturing (PE).
Sliding Door Hardware: Sliding door hardware is to be of type and design as specified and
should comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.14.
1.
2.
3.
Sliding Bi-Passing Pocket Door Hardware: Provide complete sets consisting of track,
hangers, stops, bumpers, floor channel, guides, and accessories indicated.
Bi-folding Door Hardware: Rated for door panels weighing up to 125 lb.
Pocket Sliding Door Hardware: Rated for doors weighing up to 200 lb.
a.
1)
2)
Hafele Manufacturing (HF).

POWER TRANSFER DEVICES
D.
Electrified Quick Connect Transfer Hinges: Provide electrified transfer hinges with Molex
standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to
accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug
directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power
supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable.
1.
a.
b.
Hager Companies (HA) - ETW-QC (# wires) Option.

McKinney Products (MK) - QC (# wires) Option.
E.
Provide mortar guard enclosure on steel frames installed at masonry openings for each
electrical hinge specified.
F.
Electric Door Wire Harnesses: Provide electric transfer wiring harnesses with standardized plug
connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Connectors plug directly to through-door
wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Provide
sufficient number of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified hardware.
Provide a connector for through-door electronic locking devices and from hinge to junction box
above the opening. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. Determine the length required for
each electrified hardware component for the door type, size and construction, minimum of two
per electrified opening.
1.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 7

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Provide one each of the following tools as part of the base bid contract:
a.
b.
2.3
McKinney Products (MK) - Electrical Connecting Kit: QC-R001.

McKinney Products (MK) - Connector Hand Tool: QC-R003.
DOOR OPERATING TRIM
A.
Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Manual flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt location
approximately six feet from the floor.
Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts.
Surface bolts to be minimum 8 in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L.
listed for windstorm components where applicable.
Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required for
appropriate installation and operation.
a.
b.
B.
Coordinators: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 certified door coordinators consisting of active-leaf, holdopen lever and inactive-leaf release trigger. Model as indicated in hardware sets.
1.
a.
b.
C.
Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).

Trimco (TC).

Trimco (TC).
Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANS/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and
design specified in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as
required where conflicting hardware dictates.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with
beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated.
Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware
sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated.
Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum
clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise
indicated.
Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware
Sets.
DOOR HARDWARE
a.
1)
2)

Trimco (TC).
08 7100 - 8
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.4

CA 15-001
CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A.
General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured
master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source
manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
a.
b.
c.
C.
Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application.
Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised
trim ring.
Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks.
Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be
flush and be free spinning with matching finishes.
Keyway: Manufacturers Standard.
Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed.

1.
2.
3.
E.
Yale Locks and Hardware (YA).

Schlage (SC)
Corbin (CR)
Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system

instructions and requirements.
Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control
number as directed by Owner.
New System: Key locks to a new key system as directed by the Owner.
Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:

1.
2.
3.
Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2)

Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5).
Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10).
F.
Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders.
G.
Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with
self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent
markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of
150% of the number of locks required for the project.
1.
a.
b.
DOOR HARDWARE
Lund Equipment (LU).

Telkee (TK).
08 7100 - 9

CA 15-001
2.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES
A.
Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational
Grade 1 certified mortise locksets furnished in the functions as specified in the Hardware Sets.
Locksets to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant, stamped 12 gauge minimum formed
steel case and be field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body. Lockset trim
(including knobs, levers, escutcheons, roses) to be the product of a single manufacturer.
Furnish with standard 2 3/4" backset, 3/4" throw anti-friction stainless steel latchbolt, and a full
1" throw stainless steel bolt for deadbolt functions.
1.
a.
b.
c.
B.
Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 1 (Commercial Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1
certified cylindrical (bored) locksets furnished in the functions as specified in the Hardware Sets.
Lock chassis fabricated steel, zinc dichromate plated, with through-bolted application. Furnish
with standard 2 3/4 backset and 1/2" throw brass or stainless steel latchbolt. Locks are to be
non-handed and fully field reversible.
1.
a.
b.
c.
C.
a.
b.
c.
Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 4600LN Series.

Schlage (SC) AL Series
Corbin (CR) CL3800
Residential Tubular Locking Devices: Standard ANSI A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 2 tubular
locksets, deadbolts, and handlesets designed to fit ANSI standard door preps. Locks are to be
non-handed and have adjustable backset. Lever/knob, handle, and rosette designs as
indicated in the hardware sets.
1.
a.
b.
E.
Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) 4700LN Series.

Schlage (SC) ND Series
Corbin (CR) CL3300
Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 2 ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 2 economical cylindrical
locksets designed to fit ANSI standard 161 door prep without additional through-bolts. Locksets
to fit in 1 3/8" or 1 3/4" thickness doors, and available with 2 3/8" standard backset adjustable to
2 3/4".
1.
D.
Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) 8800FL Series.

Schlage (SC) L9000
Corbin (CR) ML2000
Yale Residential (YA) New Traditions Series.

Schlage (SC) F Series
Lock Trim Design: As specified in Hardware Sets.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 10
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.6

CA 15-001
AUXILIARY LOCKS
A.
Cylindrical Deadlocks: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, cylindrical type deadlocks to fit standard
ANSI 161 preparation and 1 3/8" to 1 3/4" thickness doors. Provide tapered collars to resist
vandalism and 1" throw solid steel bolt with hardened steel roller pins. Deadlocks to be products
of the same source manufacturer and keyway as other locksets.
1.
a.
b.
2.7
Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - D100 Series.

SAFLOK InSync AT UNIT ENTRIES
LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES
A.
Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with
curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise
indicated, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Standards: Comply with the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
2.8
Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by

manufacturer.
Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for
aluminum framing.
Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.

Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2.
Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5.
Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.
ELECTRIC STRIKES
A.
Standard Electric Strikes: Heavy duty, cylindrical and mortise lock electric strikes conforming to
ANSI/BHMA A156.31, Grade 1, UL listed for both Burglary Resistance and for use on fire rated
door assemblies. Stainless steel construction with dual interlocking plunger design tested to
exceed 3000 lbs. of static strength and 350 ft-lbs. of dynamic strength. Strikes tested for a
minimum 1 million operating cycles. Provide strikes with 12 or 24 VDC capability and supplied
standard as fail-secure unless otherwise specified. Option available for latchbolt and latchbolt
strike monitoring indicating both the position of the latchbolt and locked condition of the strike.
1.
a.
B.
HES (HS) 1006 Series.
Surface Mounted Rim Electric Strikes: Surface mounted rim exit device electric strikes
conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.31, Grade 1, and UL Listed for both Burglary Resistance and
for use on fire rated door assemblies. Construction includes internally mounted solenoid with
two heavy-duty, stainless steel locking mechanisms operating independently to provide tamper
resistance. Strikes tested for a minimum of 500,000 operating cycles. Provide strikes with 12 or
24 VDC capability supplied standard as fail-secure unless otherwise specified. Option available
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 11

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
for latchbolt and latchbolt strike monitoring indicating both the position of the latchbolt and
locked condition of the strike. Strike requires no cutting to the jamb prior to installation.
1.
a.
C.
2.9
HES (HS) - 9500/9600 Series.
Provide electric strikes with in-line power controller and surge suppressor by the same
manufacturer as the strike with the combined products having a five year warranty.
CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES
A.
General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following
criteria:
1.
At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed
and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as
required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the
Hardware Sets.
2.
Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA
80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper
fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturers catalog and
template book for specific requirements.
a.
Fire Exit Removable Mullions: Provide keyed removable mullions for use
with fire exit devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and
NFPA 252. Mullions to be used only with exit devices for which they have
been tested.
3.
Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the
pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on
devices where specified in Hardware Sets.
4.
Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging
of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is not acceptable except in any case where
the door light extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration.
5.
Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy
duty escutcheon trim with four threaded studs for thru-bolts.
a.
b.
6.
Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and

designs to match that of the specified locksets. Provided free-wheeling type
trim where indicated.
Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or
Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets.
Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Provide and install interior surface and concealed vertical rod
exit devices as Less Bottom Rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 12
Design Development
October 02, 2015
B.

CA 15-001
7.
Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in

Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2 wide stiles.
8.
Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.
9.
Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application.
10.
Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices to be installed on wood doors.
Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic
and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets.
Mounting rails to be formed from smooth stainless steel, brass or bronze architectural materials
no less than 0.072" thick, with push rails a minimum of 0.062" thickness. Painted or aluminum
metal rails are not acceptable. Exit device latch to be investment cast stainless steel, pullman
type, with deadlock feature.
1.
a.
b.
c.
C.
Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Commercial Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified
panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets.
Mounting rails and push rail assembly to be formed from high grade, non-ferrous, architectural
steel materials. Provide heavy duty, one-piece chassis covers matching the material and finish
of the mounting and push rails, and steel latchbolts incorporating a deadlocking feature. Exit
devices and trims to be available in standard architectural finishes.
1.
a.
b.
c.
2.10
A.
Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 7000 Series.

VonDuprin (VD) 98/99 Series
Corbin (CR) ED5000 Series

VonDuprin (VD) 22 Series
Corbin (CR) ED8000
DOOR CLOSERS
All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
1.
General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the
same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size.
Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting
information on inside of cover.
2.
Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C and UBC 7-2 for Positive Pressure Fire Test
and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors.
3.
Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test
witnessed and verified by UL.
4.
Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door
closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 13

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically
handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.
5.
Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in
Hardware Sets.
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
B.
Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special
mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required. Provide through-bolt or security
type fasteners at closers to be installed on wood doors.
Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted,
heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully
operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to
be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with
adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed
control. Provide non-handed units standard.
1.
a.
b.
c.
C.
a.
b.
c.
A.

LCN (LC) 4040 Series
Norton (NO) 7500 Series
Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Light Commercial): ANSI/BHMA 156.4, Grade 1 surface
mounted, light commercial grade door closers. Non-handed, minimum sizes 2 to 4 Provide
closer standard packed for regular, top-jamb, and parallel arm type mounting applications.
1.
2.11
Where closers are indicated to have mechanical dead-stop, provide heavy

duty arms and brackets with an integral positive stop.
Where closers are indicated to have mechanical hold open, provide heavy
duty units with an additional built-in mechanical holder assembly designed to
hold open against normal wind and traffic conditions. Holder to be manually
selectable to on-off position.
Where closers are indicated to have a cushion-type stop, provide heavy duty
arms and brackets with spring stop mechanism to cushion door when
opened to maximum degree.
Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where
possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics. Provide drop plates
or other accessories as required for proper mounting.

LCN (LC) 1461 Series
Norton (NO) 8000 Series
ARCHITECTURAL TRIM
Door Protective Trim
1.
General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the
Hardware Sets.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 14
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
2.
Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door
width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1 LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and
not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width
and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in
the Hardware Sets.
3.
Metal Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified metal protection plates (kick, armor,
or mop), beveled on four edges (B4E), fabricated from the following:
a. Stainless Steel: 300 series, 050-inch thick, with countersunk screw holes (CSK).
4.
Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware

Sets.
5.
Metal Door Edging: Door protection edging fabricated from a minimum .050-inch thick
metal sheet, formed into an angle or "U" cap shapes, surface or mortised mounted onto
edge of door. Provide appropriate leg overlap to account for protection plates as required.
Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets.
6.
a.
b.
2.12

Trimco (TC).
DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS
A.
General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware
Sets.
B.
Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall
bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated,
unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor
stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide
overhead type stops and holders.
1.
a.
b.
C.

Trimco (TC).
Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead stops and
holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and
jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy
tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper
operation and function.
1.
a.
b.
DOOR HARDWARE
Rixson Door Controls (RF).

Sargent Manufacturing (SA).
08 7100 - 15

CA 15-001
2.13
Design Development
October 02, 2015
ARCHITECTURAL SEALS
A.
General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified
below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and
provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior
applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.
B.
Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by
a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control
ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.
1.
C.
Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.
Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings
indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C.
1.
Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure
Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
D.
Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting
agency, for sound ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1408.
E.
Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily
replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
F.
1.
2.
2.14
A.
2.15

Zero International (ZE).
FABRICATION
Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally
prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to
manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.
FINISHES
A.
Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes
complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes
indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.
B.
Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness,
and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified
by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.
C.

DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 16
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and
other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types,
drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have
been resolved in writing.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.
B.
Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment
to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications.
1.
B.
Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and
adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking
devices; closing devices; and seals.
Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable
publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1
"Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."
Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is
located.
C.
Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and
written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into
surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage,
and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9
Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on
substrates involved.
D.
Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with
requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 17

CA 15-001
E.
3.4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed.
Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will
not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.
A.
3.5
Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in
report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door
hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.6
Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed
hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the
latest possible time frame.
B.
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
C.
Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and
maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of
owner occupancy.
3.7
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and
electromechanical door hardware.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 18
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 08 8000 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in
other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
1.
Storefront framing.
2.
Glazed entrances.
3.
Interior borrowed lites.
B.
1.
Related Sections:
a.
b.
c.
08 5413 "Fiberglass Windows and Doors."
d.
08 8300 "Mirrors."
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in
referenced glazing publications.
B.
Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to (ASTM

International) ASTM C 1036.
C.
Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.
1.4
A.
General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and
impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to
the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to
remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in
construction.
B.
Delegated Design: Design exterior glazing, including comprehensive engineering analysis

according to ASTM E 1300 by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design
criteria:
1.
Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings.
2.
Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass
to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load.
3.
Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass
deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1
inch, whichever is less.
4.
Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential
shading within individual glass lites.
C.
changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.
1.
Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
GLAZING
08 8000 - 1

CA 15-001
1.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material required, manufacturer's published
B.
Samples: For each type of glazing unit other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches
square.
C.
Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use
same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.6
A.
1.7
Delegated-Design Submittal: For exterior glazing, including analysis data signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Entity that employs glass installers for this Project who are certified
under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.
B.
Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain each type of glass from a single source and a single
manufacturer.
1.
Fabrication processes, including tempering, glass coating, laminating, and assembly of
insulating units, shall be by a single fabricator.
C.
Source Limitations for Accessory Products: Obtain each type of product required from a single
source and a single manufacturer.
D.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers

and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1.
(Glass Association of North America) GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual."
2.
(American Architectural Manufacturers Association) AAMA Publications:
AAMA GDSG-1 and AAMA TIR-A7.
3.
(Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance) IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA
TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for
Commercial and Residential Use."
E.
Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing
with certification label of the (Safety Glazing Certification Council) SGCC or another certification
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name,
type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
F.
Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least

one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the (Insulating Glass
Certification Council) IGCC.
G.
Mockups: Furnish and install glass for integrated exterior mockup indicated on Drawings.
H.

1.
Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.
1.8

A.
08 8000 - 2
GLAZING
Design Development
October 02, 2015
1.
2.
1.9

CA 15-001
Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent

damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct
exposure to sun, or other causes.
Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and
sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.10
Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when
glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1.
Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in

which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within
specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from
normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated
glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and
other indications of deterioration in coating.
1.
B.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which

insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within
specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal
under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning
insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the
obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.
1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in

thicknesses as needed to comply with Performance Requirements.
1.
Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 6.0 mm.
2.
Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated
throughout Project.
B.
Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated
float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance
Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is warranted, provide Kind HS heattreated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance
Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is warranted, provide Kind FT heat-treated
float glass.
C.
Safety Glass: Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS
(heat-strengthened) float glass at "Hazardous Locations" in accordance with International
Building Code, Chapter 24, and as otherwise warranted or indicated on Drawings.
D.

1.
GLAZING
08 8000 - 3

CA 15-001
2.2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
GLASS
A.
Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise
indicated; of kind and condition indicated.
1.
Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion
parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.
2.
For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.
3.
For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass).
4.
Maximum Peak to Valley Rollerwave: 0.003 inch in the central area and 0.008 inch
within 10.5 inches of the leading and trailing edge.
5.
Maximum Bow and Warp: 1/32 inch per lineal foot.
6.
Tempered safety glass shall conform with ANSI Z97.1 and U.S. Consumer Products
Safety Commission 16 CFR 1201.
C.
Provide glass products by:

1.
AGC Glass Company North America.
2.
Guardian Industries Corp.
3.
Pilkington Building Products North America.
4.
PPG Industries, Inc., including affiliated licensed fabricators.
5.
Oldcastle Building Envelope.
6.
Viracon.
2.3
GLAZING MATERIALS
A.
Glazing Sealants:
1.
General:
a.
Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and
with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulatingglass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
b.
Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions
existing at time of installation.
c.
Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's
full range.
2.
B.
Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 50/50, Use NT.
a.
1)
2)
Momentive Performance Materials; SCS2800 SilGlaze II.
3)
Tremco; Spectrem 2.
Glazing Tapes:
1.
Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids
elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with
or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for
application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products
indicated below:
a.
AAMA 804.3 tape, for drop-in residential and light-commercial glazing applications.
b.
AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous
pressure.
c.
AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to
continuous pressure.
08 8000 - 4
GLAZING
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.
C.
2.4

CA 15-001
Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with
adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
a.
AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary
sealant.
b.
AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination
with a full bead of liquid sealant.
Glazing Accessories:
1.
General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced
glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for
application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in
installation.
2.
Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket
manufacturer.
3.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85,
plus or minus 5.
4.
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass
manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
5.
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement
(side walking).
6.
Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size
and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing
sealant performance.
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
B.
Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assemble units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by

a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190 and complying with other
requirements specified.
1.
Spacer: Aluminum with powdered metal paint finish in color selected by Architect.
2.
Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass" Article as indicated by
designations in Part 3 Glazing Schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
1.
Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops for compliance with the following:
a.
Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
offsets at corners.
b.
Presence and functioning of weep systems.
c.
Minimum required face and edge clearances.
d.
Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
PREPARATION
A.
GLAZING
Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
08 8000 - 5

CA 15-001
B.
3.3
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed
so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave
visible marks in the completed work.
GLAZING
A.
General:
1.
Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets,
and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including
those in referenced glazing publications.
2.
Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to
provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate
sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
3.
Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged
glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass
with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and
impair performance and appearance.
4.
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
5.
Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course
of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
6.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
7.
Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
a.
Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of
glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless
gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain
required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.
b.
Provide 1/8 inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to
sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed
thickness of tape.
8.
9.
10.
B.
3.4
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving
sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and
according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as
specified.
Sealant (Wet) Glazing:

1.
Install glazing tape, or glazing tape combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between
glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant
from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure
tape or tape and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant
relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
2.
Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or
bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
3.
Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
A.
Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
08 8000 - 6
GLAZING
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
B.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
C.
Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D.
Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged
from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E.
Wash glass, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer, on both exposed surfaces in

each area of Project not more than 4 days before date scheduled for inspections that establish
date of Substantial Completion.
F.
3.5
GLAZING SCHEDULE
A.
Glass Type [G-<#>]: Clear low-E insulating glass.

1.
Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch.
2.
Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm.
3.
Outdoor Lite: Float glass, heat-strengthened or fully tempered where indicated or
required.
a.
1)
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide <Insert Manufacturer; Product> or
4.
5.
6.
B.
Interspace Content: Air.

Indoor Lite: Float glass, heat-strengthened or fully tempered where indicated or required.
Provide safety glazing labeling.
Glass Type [G-<#>]: Clear float glass, fully tempered where indicated or required.
1.
Thickness: 6.0 mm.
2.
Provide safety glazing labeling.
GLAZING
08 8000 - 7
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 08 8300 - MIRRORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes annealed monolithic glass mirrors.
B.
1.
Substrate Material: Section 09 2900 "Gypsum Board."
2.
Metal-Framed Mirrors: Section 10 2800 "Washroom Accessories."
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Deterioration of Mirrors: Defects developed from normal use that are attributable to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for
maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to mirror manufacturer's written instructions. Defects
include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film.
A.
1.5
Provide mirrors that will not fail under normal usage. Failure includes glass breakage and
deterioration attributable to defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For mirrors, mastic, and hardware, manufacturer's published technical data
B.
Samples:
1.
Mirrors, 12 inches square, including edge treatment on 2 adjoining edges.
2.
Mirror trim, 18 inches long.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Entity that has completed mirror glazing similar in material, design, and
extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in mirror installations with a
record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project
who are certified under (National Glass Association) NGA's Certified Glass Installer Program as
Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers).
B.
manufacturer.
C.
Glazing Publications: Comply with the following published recommendations:

1.
(Glass Association of North America) GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent
requirements are indicated. Refer to this publication for definitions of glass and glazing
terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
2.
GANA Mirror Division's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care."
MIRRORS
08 8300 - 1

CA 15-001
D.
1.7
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirror
manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing, paint and
substrates on which mirrors are installed.
A.
1.8
1.
Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to
prevent damage to mirrors from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to
sun, or other causes.
2.
Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling
mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of
glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors, protected from moisture including
condensation.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by mirror
manufacturer agreeing to replace mirrors that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article.
1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Clear Tempered Glass Mirrors: (ASTM International) ASTM C 1503, Mirror Select Quality.
1.
Comply with ASTM C 1048 for kind FT, Condition A, tempered float glass before silver
coating is applied.
2.
Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm.
3.
Provide mirrors by:
a.
Gardner Glass Products.
b.
Independent Mirror Industries, Inc.
c.
Lenoir Mirror Company.
d.
Trulite.
e.
Virginia Mirror Company, Inc.
Walker Glass Co., Ltd.
f.
B.
Mirror Hardware:
1.
Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a
glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to
cover bottom and top edges of each mirror in a single piece.
a.
Bottom Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 3/8 and
7/8 inch in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.04 inch.
1)
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide C.R. Laurence Company; CRL Standard
"J" Channel or comparable product acceptable to Architect.
C.
1.
Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it
in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed.
08 8300 - 2
MIRRORS
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2

CA 15-001
Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation.
Provide toothed or lead-shield expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.
Provide galvanized anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls
and where indicated.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Type A Shore durometer hardness of 85,
plus or minus 5.
Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror
manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.
Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, produced specifically for setting mirrors
and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with
glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed.
a.
Provide mirror mastic by:
1)
Gunther Mirror Mastics.
2)
Palmer Products Corporation.
FABRICATION
A.
Mirror Sizes: To suit Project conditions; cut mirrors to final sizes and shapes.
B.
Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces.
Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors.
C.
Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished edge.

1.
Seal edges of mirrors after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric
penetration of glass coating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
1.
Examine substrates over which mirrors are to be mounted for compliance with installation
tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance.
a.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of
mirror mastic with existing finishes or primers.
b.
Proceed with mirror installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected and surfaces are dry.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of substrates,
including coating surfaces with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with
referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids
distorting reflected images.
B.
Provide a minimum air space of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air
circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.
C.
Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware.

1.
Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed
with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point
loads on backs of mirrors.
MIRRORS
08 8300 - 3

CA 15-001
3.4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.
Install mirror hardware in the form of J-channels that are fabricated in single lengths to fit
and cover bottom edges of mirrors.
a.
Provide setting blocks 1/8 inch thick by 4 inches long at quarter points. To prevent
trapping water, provide 2 slotted weeps not less than 1/4 inch wide by 3/8 inch long
between setting blocks.
3.
Install mastic as follows:

a.
Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved in writing by manufacturers of
mirrors and backing material.
b.
Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage
and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.
c.
After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a
minimum air space of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface.

A.
Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations.
B.
Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water.
C.
Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from
condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.
D.
08 8300 - 4
MIRRORS
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 09 2116 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies.
B.
1.
Fire-Resistive Joints: Section 07 8446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."
2.
Gypsum Board Panels and Finishing: Section 09 2900 "Gypsum Board."
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For liner panels, framing system, and each type of product required,
manufacturer's published technical data sheets, including product descriptions and
applications, Reference Standard classifications, technical properties, features, benefits, and
limitations.
B.
Shop Drawings: Provide plans indicating partition types. Use designations indicated on
Drawings.
1.
Indicate metal thickness and framing member depth necessary to comply with required
deflection criteria for each vertical span encountered.
a.
Identify framing depths that vary from that indicated on Drawings.
2.
Indicate fire test partition construction is to comply with.

a.
Provide copy of test data.
3.
Identify fire-resistive joint to be used at intersections and junctions of fire-rated partitions

and other construction.
Acoustical Partitions: Indicate sound test partition construction is to comply with.
4.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies

with fire-resistance ratings determined according to (ASTM International) ASTM E 119 by a
testing and inspecting agency.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies

tested according to ASTM E 90, and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a testing and
inspecting agency.
C.

Section 01 3100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures for
installing gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Fasteners proposed for anchoring nonstructural steel framing to building structure.
2.
Sprayed fire-resistive materials applied to structural steel framing.
3.
Wiring devices in shaft-wall assemblies.
4.
Doors and other items penetrating shaft-wall assemblies.
5.
Items supported by shaft-wall-assembly framing.
6.
Mechanical work enclosed within shaft-wall assemblies.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
09 2116 - 1

CA 15-001
1.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015

A.
1.6
1.
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage
from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and
other causes.
2.
Stack panels flat on leveled supports off floor or slab to prevent sagging.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or with gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B.
Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C.
Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2
Provide materials and components complying with requirements of fire-resistance-rated

assemblies indicated.
1.
Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end-to-end butt
joints.
2.
Provide auxiliary materials complying with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly
MATERIALS
A.
Gypsum Liner Panels: Comply with ASTM C 442.

1.
Type X: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels with moisture-resistant paper faces.
a.
Core: 1 inch thick.
b.
Long Edges: Double bevel.
B.
Gypsum Board: As specified in Section 09 2900 "Gypsum Board."
C.
Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1.
Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless
2.
Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G40, hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing),
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
1.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.
E.
1.
Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes
specified in Section 09 2900 "Gypsum Board" that comply with gypsum board shaft-wall
assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated.
2.
Gypsum Board Joint-Treatment Materials: As specified in Section 09 2900 "Gypsum
Board."
3.
Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended by manufacturer for
directly adhering gypsum face-layer panels to backing-layer panels in multilayer
construction.
4.
Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."
09 2116 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
F.
2.3

CA 15-001
Fasteners:
1.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.
a.
For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size
recommended by panel manufacturer.
b.
Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand
loading conditions imposed on shaft-wall assemblies without exceeding allowable
design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are
embedded.
1)
Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified testing
agency.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES
A.
Tested Assemblies: As indicated on Drawings by design designation of a qualified testing

agency.
1.
Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated.
2.
STC Rating: As indicated.
B.
Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end members, and
fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.
1.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required to limit allowable deflection of framed
assembly to L/360 for vertical span.
2.
Depth: As indicated.
a.
When approved by Architect, depth of members may be modified to comply with
deflection limits.
C.
Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with long-leg length as standard with
manufacturer, but at least 2 inches long and in depth matching studs.
1.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch (26 gage).
D.
Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with
movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated;
in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
1.
Provide Cemco; Fas Track 1000 or comparable product by Fire Trak Corp.
E.
Jamb Struts: Manufacturer's standard J-profile strut with long-leg length of 3 inches, in depth
matching studs, and not less than 0.030 inch (22 gage) thick.
F.
Provide shaft wall assemblies by:

1.
American Gypsum Company.
2.
3.
Georgia-Pacific Gypsum.
4.
Continental Building Products.
5.
6.
PABCO Gypsum.
7.
Temple-Inland Forest Products Corporation.
8.
USG Corporation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
09 2116 - 3

CA 15-001
3.2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: Coordinate with gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies so both
elements of Work remain complete and undamaged. Patch or replace sprayed fire-resistive
materials removed or damaged during installation of shaft-wall assemblies to comply with
requirements specified in Section 07 8100 "Applied Fireproofing."
1.
Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling
runner tracks to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where
offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure
not more than 24 inches o.c.
2.
After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove only to extent necessary for
installation of gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies and without reducing the fire-resistive
material thickness below that which is required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated.
Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fireresistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and the
following:
1.
ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing except comply with framing spacing indicated.
2.
Section 09 2900 "Gypsum Board" for applying and finishing panels.
B.
Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies around openings and as
required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment,
services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaftwall assembly framing.
C.
At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft-wall assembly by installing

supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes
containing wiring devices and similar items.
D.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of panels, while
maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction.
E.
Firestop Tracks: Install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.
F.
Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Architect, while maintaining fire-resistance rating of gypsum board shaft-wall
assemblies.
G.
Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it
abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly. Install acoustical sealant
to withstand dislocation by air-pressure differential between shaft and external spaces; maintain
an airtight and smoke-tight seal; and comply with ASTM C 919 requirements or with
manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.
H.
Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
3.4

A.
Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
09 2116 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
C.

CA 15-001
09 2116 - 5
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 09 2216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for:

1.
Interior framing systems (e.g. supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.).
2.
Interior suspension systems (e.g. supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).
B.
1.
Exterior Metal Framing and Support: Section 05 4000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing."
2.
Head-of-Wall Joint Systems: Section 07 8446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."
3.
Shaft Wall Framing: Section 09 2116 "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies."
4.
Acoustical Insulation: Section 09 2900 "Gypsum Board."
1.3
A.
1.4
Structural Performance: Provide non-structural metal framing capable of withstanding imposed

loads, spans, and other conditions indicated.
1.
Design for limiting heights encountered.
2.
Design for fixtures that impose symmetrical and non-symmetrical live and dead-loads on
framing, including but not limited to items such as wall cabinets, handrails, and grab-bars.
3.
Headers: Design according to (American Iron and Steel Institute) AISI's "Standard for
Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Drawings.
1.
Indicate metal thickness and framing member depth necessary to comply with required
deflection criteria for each vertical span encountered.
a.
Identify framing depths that vary from those indicated on Drawings.
2.
1.1
Indicate non-typical framing conditions, necessary to conform to Performance

Requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate nonload-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assembly indicated according to (ASTM International) ASTM E 119 by an independent testing
agency.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction

identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified
according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
09 2216 - 1

CA 15-001
1.2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

A.
Requirements."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1.
Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless
2.
Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G40, hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.
B.

1.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Steel Framing:
1.
Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
a.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required to limit allowable deflection of framed
assembly to L/240 for vertical span.
1)
For tiled walls comply with (Tile Council of North America) TCNA
recommendations. Minimum 0.036 inch (20 gage) thickness.
b.
Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

1)
For tiled walls comply with TCNA recommendations. Minimum 3-1/2 inch
depth.
2)
When approved by Architect, depth of members may be modified to comply
with deflection limits.
2.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to underside of overhead structure,

provide one of the following:
a.
Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep
flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit
into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of
studs to provide lateral bracing.
b.
Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- deep
flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and
outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.
c.
Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of
finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure
above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate
depth of studs.
1)
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Steel Network Inc.; VertiClip
SLD/VertiTrack VTD Series, or comparable product by Superior Metal Trim.
3.
Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and
contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistancerated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to
accommodate depth of studs.
a.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Cemco; Fas Track 1000 or comparable product
by:
1)
ClarkDietrich Building Systems.
09 2216 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
2)
4.
Flexible Runner Track: ASTM A 653, galvanized steel, G-40 or A-40.

a.
Thickness: 0.036 inch (20 gage).
b.
Depth: Coordinate with wall being framed.
c.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Flex-Ability Concepts; Flex-C Trac, or
comparable product by Radius Track Corp.
5.
Flat Strap and Backing Plate: 0.030 inch (22 gage) thick steel sheet for blocking and
bracing in length and width indicated.
Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.060 inch (16 gage) thick, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide
flanges.
a.
Depth: 1-1/2 inches.
b.
Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inchthick, galvanized steel.
6.
B.
7.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

a.
b.
Depth: 7/8 inch.
8.
Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 inch deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce
sound transmission.
a.
Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
b.
c.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Clark-Dietrich Building Systems LLC; RC
Deluxe, or comparable product acceptable to Architect.
9.
Resilient Isolation Clips: Molded rubber isolation gasket designed for insertion of hatshaped metal furring channel, jacketed with galvanized steel attachment channels.
a.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.; IsoMax, or
Suspension System Components:

1.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 inch (16 gage)
diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475 inch (18 gage) diameter wire.
2.
Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
a.
Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for
attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5
times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to
ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency.
1)
Types:
a)
Cast-in-place anchor, designed for attachment to concrete forms.
b)
Postinstalled, chemical or expansion anchor.
3.
4.
C.
Fire Trak Corp.
Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162 inch (8 gage)
diameter.
Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of
main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
a.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System
or comparable product by one of the following:
1)
Armstrong World Industries.
2)
Chicago Metallic Corporation.
1.
Fasteners: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other
properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
2.
Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls:
a.
Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),
nonperforated.
09 2216 - 3

CA 15-001
b.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud
size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
1.
Examine areas and substrates, including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors,
and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting
performance.
PREPARATION
A.
Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:

1.
Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling
runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where
offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure
not more than 24 inches o.c.
2.
After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary
for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-resistive
materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fireresistive materials from damage.
B.
Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of

overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building
structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and
that hangers will develop their full strength.
1.
Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in
advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
a.
Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that
apply to framing installation.
2.
3.
B.
Install supplementary framing and blocking to support wall-mounted items, including but
not limited to fixtures, equipment services, trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings,
or similar construction.
Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
Framed Assemblies:
1.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior concrete or masonry walls or dissimilar
metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
2.
Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
a.
Space studs 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
3.
09 2216 - 4
Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to
structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are
indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating
partitions above ceiling.
a.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports,
install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of
finished assemblies.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
b.
Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door
frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb
studs.
1)
Install two minimum 0.030 inch (22 gage) thick studs at each jamb, unless
2)
Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of
overhead structure.
c.
Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as
required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills
of openings to match framing required above door heads.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistancerated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous
from floor to underside of solid structure.
1)
Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fireresistance-rated assembly indicated.
d.
e.
C.

CA 15-001
Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly

indicated.
4.
Direct Furring:
a.
Screw to wood framing.
b.
Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry
attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
5.
Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more
than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
Suspension Systems:
1.
Install suspension system components in sizes and spacing indicated on Drawings, but
not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and
other assembly components indicated.
2.
Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
3.
Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
a.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
1)
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective
means.
b.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and
hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
1)
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling
loads within performance limits established by referenced installation
standards.
c.
Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate
for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or
otherwise fail.
Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
d.
4.
Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension
systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring
members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
09 2216 - 5

CA 15-001
5.
3.4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12
feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely
between parallel members that will receive finishes.

A.
09 2216 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 09 2900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Interior gypsum board.
2.
Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits.
3.
Tile backing panels.
4.
Resilient furring channels.
5.
Acoustical insulation.
B.
1.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Gypsum Sheathing: Section 06 1600 "Sheathing."

Vapor Retarders: Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation."
Fire-Resistive Joints: Section 07 8446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."
Acoustical Sealant: Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."
Related Sections:
a.
Section 09 2116 "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies."
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to (ASTM International)
ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction

identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90, and classified
according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Drawings.
1.
Fire-Rated Partitions: Indicate fire test partition construction is to comply with.
a.
Identify fire-resistive joint to be used at intersections and junctions of fire-rated
partitions and other construction.
2.
Acoustical Partitions: Indicate sound test partition construction is to comply with.
GYPSUM BOARD
09 2900 - 1

CA 15-001
1.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in
surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution.
1.
Install mockups for each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed
locations.
2.
Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on
exposed surfaces for review of mockups.
3.
Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
4.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
1.
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage
from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack
panels flat to prevent sagging.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board

manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B.
Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C.
Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and that correspond with support system indicated.
B.

1.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Interior Gypsum Board:

1.
General: Comply with ASTM C 1396, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated.
2.
Type X:
a.
Thickness: 5/8 inch.
b.
Long Edges: Tapered.
3.
Type C:
a.
Thicknesses: 1/2 and 5/8 inch, as indicated on Drawings.
b.
4.
Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: ASTM C 1396, with moisture- and mold-resistant
core and paper surfaces.
a.
Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.
09 2900 - 2
GYPSUM BOARD
Design Development
October 02, 2015
b.
c.
5.

CA 15-001

Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
Abuse-Resistant Type: Manufactured to produce greater resistance to surface

indentation, through-penetration (impact resistance), and abrasion than standard gypsum
board.
a.
b.
B.
Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 1396, with manufacturer's standard edges.
1.
Core: [As indicated] [1/2 inch, regular type] [5/8 inch, Type X].
C.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board:

1.
2.
Complying with ASTM C 1178, Type X where indicated.
3.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide G-P Gypsum; DensShield Tile Backer or comparable
D.
Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 and ASTM C 1288, or ASTM C 1325.
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board, or
a.
C-Cure.
b.
Custom Building Products.
c.
FinPan, Inc.
d.
2.
E.
Trim and Accessories:

1.
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
a.
Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.
b.
Shapes:
1)
Cornerbead.
2)
LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
3)
Expansion (control) joint.
4)
Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
2.
F.
Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated on Drawings.

a.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability
properties of ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5.
b.
Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish
materials specified.
c.
Basis-of-Design Products: Provide aluminum trim by Fry Reglet Corp. or
comparable products by one of the following:
1)
Flannery, Inc.
2)
Gordon, Inc.
Pittcon Industries.
3)
Joint Treatment Materials: Comply with ASTM C 475.

1.
Joint Tape:
a.
Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
b.
Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
2.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
a.
Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping
compound.
b.
Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners,
and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
GYPSUM BOARD
09 2900 - 3

CA 15-001
c.
d.
e.
3.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by backing panel

manufacturer.
G.
Texture Finishes:
1.
Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.
2.
Non-Aggregate Finish: Pre-mixed, vinyl texture finish for spray application.
a.
Texture: Spatter knock-down.
b.
Provide non-aggregate finish by:
1)
CertainTeed Corp.
2)
3)
USG Corporation.
H.
1.
Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
2.
Spot-Grout: ASTM C 476, setting type joint compound for spot-grouting hollow metal
frames.
3.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.
a.
Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members
from 0.030 (22 gage) to 0.135 (10 gage) inch thick.
b.
For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size
recommended by panel manufacturer.
4.
Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 inch deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce
sound transmission.
a.
Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
b.
c.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Clark-Dietrich Building Systems LLC; RC
Deluxe, or comparable product acceptable to Architect.
5.
Resilient Isolation Clips: Molded rubber isolation gasket designed for insertion of hatshaped metal furring channel, jacketed with galvanized steel attachment channels.
a.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.; IsoMax, or
6.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass,
slag wool, or rock wool.
a.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of
assembly.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
1.
Examine areas and substrates, including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, for
compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
2.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and
mold damaged.
09 2900 - 4
GYPSUM BOARD
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.2

CA 15-001
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
Comply with ASTM C 840.
2.
Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to
avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of
adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
3.
Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and
ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into
place.
4.
Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where
intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do
not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite
sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed
openings.
5.
Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum
panels.
6.
Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above
ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
a.
Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in
area.
b.
Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
c.
Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of
floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural
members; allow 1/4 to 3/8 inch wide joints to install sealant.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural

abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide spaces at these locations, and
trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between
edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open
(unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner
construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat
grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels
over these members, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at
openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install
acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations.
Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating
edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including
sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
a.
Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets
are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
B.
Resilient Furring Channels: Install with screws, perpendicular to wall and partition framing, with
attachment flange along bottom edge.
C.
Interior Gypsum Board:

1.
Install interior gypsum board as indicated on Drawings and as follows:
a.
Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: Use for surfaces in toilet rooms and janitor's
closets that do not receive tile.
b.
Abuse-Resistant Type: To 48 inches above floor in corridors and related spaces.
c.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: Use where tile is scheduled, unless
GYPSUM BOARD
09 2900 - 5

CA 15-001
d.
2.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Cementitious Backer Units: Use where tile is scheduled for showers, tubs, and
similar areas that will be subjected to immersion.
Single-Layer Application:
a.
On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
b.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing),
unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and
minimize end joints.
1)
Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate
courses of panels.
2)
At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
c.
Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
3.
Multilayer Application:
a.
On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base
layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers
at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member,
16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or
required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
b.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with baselayer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated
assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.
c.
Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports
with screws.
4.
Hollow Metal Frames: Spot-grout hollow metal door frames for solid-core wood doors,
hollow metal doors and doors over 32 inches wide. Apply spot-grout at each jamb
anchor clip just before inserting board into frame.
D.
Exterior Gypsum Board:

1.
Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over
supports.
a.
Install with 1/4-inch open space where panels abut other construction or structural
penetrations.
b.
Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.
E.
Tile Backing Panels:

1.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written
installation instructions. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or
penetrations.
2.
Cementitious Backer Units: Comply with ANSI A108.11.
a.
Where cementitious backer units abut other types of panels in same plane, shim
surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.
F.
Trim and Accessories

1.
General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
2.
Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as
follows:
a.
Install control joints where indicated on the Drawings. Full height door frames shall
be considered equivalent to a control joint.
09 2900 - 6
GYPSUM BOARD
Design Development
October 02, 2015
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
3.3

CA 15-001
Install control joints where a partition, wall, or ceiling traverses a joint (expansion,
seismic, control, deflection-accommodating) in the base building structure.
Install control joints in partitions or furred gypsum board at intervals not to exceed
30 feet.
Install control joints in interior ceilings with perimeter relief such that linear
dimensions between control joints do not exceed 50 feet and total area between
control joints does not exceed 2500 sq. ft.
Install control joints in interior ceilings without perimeter relief such that linear
dimensions between control joints do not exceed 30 feet and total area between
control joints does not exceed 900 sq. ft.
Install control joints between legs of "L", "U", or "T" shaped fields of gypsum board
exceeding 50 sq. ft.
Install control joints or intermediate blocking where ceiling framing members
change direction.
Where control joints occur in acoustical or fire-rated assemblies, install blocking
behind joint, using a backing material such as 5/8 inch Type X gypsum board,
mineral fiber insulation, or other tested equivalent. Reference Gypsum
Association's "Fire Resistance Design Manual" GA-600.
When control joints are required at locations other than those indicated, verify
arrangement with Architect.
3.
Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

a.
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
b.
LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
c.
Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.
4.
Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.
FINISHING
A.
General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces
for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B.
Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended
for tape.
D.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C 840:
1.
Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
2.
Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.
3.
Level 3: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.
4.
Level 4: [At panel surfaces indicated on Drawings].
a.
Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.
E.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
F.
Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
G.
Texture Finishes:
1.
Apply to surfaces that will be exposed to view, except those indicated to receive Levels 1,
2, 4, or 5 gypsum board finishes.
2.
Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other
surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and
smooth.
GYPSUM BOARD
09 2900 - 7

CA 15-001
3.
4.
3.4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to
produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of
application patterns.
Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive
texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means.
If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove
droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's
written recommendations.
ADJUSTING AND CLEAN-UP

A.
Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
C.
09 2900 - 8
GYPSUM BOARD
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 09 3000 - TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Floor and wall tile.
2.
Waterproof membrane for thin-set tile installations.
3.
Metal edge strips installed as part of tile installations.
B.
1.
Floor Substrate Material:
a.
b.
Section 03 5413 "Gypsum Cement Underlayment."
2.
1.3
Wall Substrate Material: Section 09 2900 "Gypsum Board."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Samples: Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type and composition of tile and for
each color and finish required, mounted on rigid panel sized to demonstrate a minimum of 6
full-sized tiles and associated joints. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for
completed work.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
(International Code Council) ICC/ANSI A117.1.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of product from a single source and a single
manufacturer.
C.

1.5

A.
TILING
1.
Comply with requirement in (American National Standards Institute) ANSI A137.1 for
labeling sealed tile packages.
2.
Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry
location.
3.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained
and contamination avoided.
09 3000 - 1

CA 15-001
4.
5.
1.6
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Store liquid latexes and emulsion adhesives in unopened containers and protected from
freezing.
Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated
surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding
surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in
referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for
Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
1.
Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with
ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 "Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile."
C.
Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile,
grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other
appearance characteristics, Architect will select specific products or materials from
manufacturer's full range, unless indicated otherwise.
D.
Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample
submittals, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same
range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.
E.

1.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Tile:
1.
Basis-of-Design Products: Provide the products indicated on Drawings or comparable
B.
Tile Trim: Provide bullnose units at outside corners and perimeter edges of tile fields.
1.
Manufactured Trim Units: Use unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Fabricated Units: Use for full-body tile when manufactured trim units are not available.
3.
Metal Trim: Use when manufactured trim units are not available.
C.
Waterproof Membranes:
1.
Comply with ANSI A118.10.
2.
Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber and
fabric reinforcement.
a.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Laticrete International Inc.; Laticrete 9235
Waterproof Membrane, or comparable product by:
1)
Custom Building Products.
2)
MAPEI Corporation.
3)
Summitville Tiles, Inc.
09 3000 - 2
TILING
Design Development
October 02, 2015
D.

CA 15-001
Setting and Grouting Materials:

1.
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following:
a.
Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate
additive to which only water must be added at Project site.
2.
Medium-Bed, Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: Provide materials composed as follows,

with physical properties equaling or exceeding those required for thin-set mortars based
on testing of medium-bed specimens according to ANSI A118.4:
a.
Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate
additive to which only water must be added at Project site.
3.
Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Tile-Grouting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3.

a.
Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to
temperatures of up to 140 deg F and 212 deg F, respectively, and certified by
manufacturer for intended use.
4.
Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7, color as indicated.

a.
Polymer Type: Ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with
other dry ingredients.
E.
Sealants:
1.
Provide pourable urethane sealants for use T, and mildew-resistant silicone sealants, that
comply with applicable requirements in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."
a.
Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining
sealed joints, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
1.
Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cementbased formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for
installations indicated.
2.
Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness,
metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for
flooring applications; stainless steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.
3.
Temporary Protective Coating: Product formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile
against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products;
and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.
4.
Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile
and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile
and grout manufacturers.
2.3
MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT:

A.
Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
B.
Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C.
Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and
other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
TILING
09 3000 - 3

CA 15-001
1.
2.
3.
3.2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing
compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced
ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 Series of tile installation standards for installations indicated.
Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical
units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before
installing tile.
Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if
not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.
PREPARATION
A.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax,
oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.
B.
Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar that comply with flatness
tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 Series of tile installation standards.
1.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound
according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product
specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.
2.
Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
C.
Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals,
verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package
show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.
If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before
installing.
D.
Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Precoat exposed tile surfaces with continuous
film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces, when
necessary to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 Series
that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic
tile installation schedules.
2.
(Tile Council of North America) TCNA Installation Guidelines: TCNA's "Handbook for
Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCNA installation methods indicated in ceramic
tile installation schedules.
3.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form
complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work
neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
4.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without
marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in
items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and
other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
5.
Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when
adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center
tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile
cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
a.
For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints
within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
6.
09 3000 - 4
Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including
control, contraction, and isolation joints, as specified below, and where indicated, during
TILING
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after
installing tiles.
a.
Locate joints where horizontal tile surface abut vertical surfaces.
b.
Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
c.
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 9200
"Joint Sealants."
7.
Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards:
a.
For latex-Portland cement grouts, comply with ANSI A108.10.
b.
For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A108.6.
B.
Waterproofing Membrane:
1.
Comply with ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to
produce membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.
2.
Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to
determine it is watertight.
C.
Floor Tile:
1.
TCNA Installation Method:
a.
Elevated Concrete Substrates: F113A, with waterproof membrane.
b.
Gypsum Cement Substrates: F180, with waterproof membrane.
D.
3.4
2.
Mortar:
a.
Tile No Longer Than 15 Inches On Any Side: Latex-Portland cement.
b.
Tile With Any Side Longer Than 15 Inches: Medium-Bed, latex-Portland cement.
3.
4.
5.
Grout: Epoxy.
Joint Widths: As recommended by tile manufacturer.
Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring
meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
Wall Tile:
1.
TCNA Installation Method:
a.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board Substrates: W245.
b.
Cementitious Backer Unit Substrates: W244C.
2.
Mortar:
a.
Tile No Longer Than 15 Inches On Any Side: Latex-Portland cement.
b.
Tile With Any Side Longer Than 15 Inches: Medium-Bed, latex-Portland cement.
3.
4.
Grout: Polymer-modified tile grout.

Joint Widths: As recommended by tile manufacturer.

A.
TILING
Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are
free of foreign matter.
1.
Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
2.
Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written
instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners
recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners
are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect
metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean
water before and after cleaning.
3.
Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer
that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it
from clogging drains.
09 3000 - 5

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
B.
When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed
tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during
construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.
C.
Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is
completed.
D.
Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile
surfaces.
E.
09 3000 - 6
TILING
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 09 5113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
B.
1.
Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: Section 09 2216 "Non-Structural Metal
Framing."
C.
Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling
attachment devices to be cast in concrete for ceilings.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type acoustical panel, suspension system, and accessory product
required, manufacturer's published technical data sheets, including product description and
applications, Reference Standard classification, technical properties, features, benefits, and
limitations.
B.
Samples: For acoustical panels, 6 inch square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and
texture.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
manufacturer.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the
1.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surfaceburning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class C materials as determined
by testing identical products per ASTM E 84:
a.
C.

1.5

A.
1.
Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project
site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space
where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature
extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
2.
Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a
stabilized moisture content.
3.
Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
09 5113 - 1

CA 15-001
1.6
Design Development
October 02, 2015
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed
and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
COORDINATION
A.
1.8
Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2

1.
ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A.
Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with

ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light
reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of
test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795.
B.
Basis-of-Design Products: Provide the product indicated on Drawings, or comparable products

by:
1.
Armstrong.
2.
3.
USG Corporation.
2.3
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A.
Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural

classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.
B.
Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with (National Association of Architectural Metal
Manufacturers) NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
AMP 500-06 for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide
manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.
C.
Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
1.
Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops
for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a
load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per
09 5113 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512, as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and

inspecting agency.
a.
Type: Cast-in-place or postinstalled bonded anchors.
b.
Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition.
D.
Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1.
Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
2.
Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than
0.106-inch- diameter wire.
E.
Hold-Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced
24 inches o.c. on all cross tees.
F.
Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll
formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip
galvanized according to ASTM A 653, not less than G30 coating designation, with prefinished
15/16 inch wide metal caps on flanges.
1.
Structural Classification: Intermediate- duty system.
2.
End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.
3.
Face Design: Flat, flush.
4.
Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet.
5.
Cap Finish: Painted white.
G.
Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll
formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip
galvanized according to ASTM A 653, not less than G30 coating designation, with prefinished
9/16 inch wide metal caps on flanges.
1.
Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
2.
End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.
3.
Face Design: [Flat, flush] [Flanges formed with an integral center reveal].
4.
Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet.
5.
Cap Finish: Painted white.
6.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide <Insert manufacturer and product> or comparable
product by one of the following:
Armstrong.
a.
b.
c.
USG Corporation.
2.4
METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

A.
Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not
indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with
seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as
that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.
1.
Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and
suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed
runners, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms
reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at
exposed suspension member.
B.
Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength
and durability properties of ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5.
09 5113 - 3

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
1.
Perimeter Pocket and Floating-Edge Trim: Where indicated, provide extruded-aluminum

edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's designations,
including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips.
a.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard; color as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full-range.
2.
Edge and Transition Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.
a.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide aluminum trim by Fry Reglet Corp. or
1)
Gordon, Inc.
2)
Pittcon Industries.
b.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard; color as selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full-range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
1.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which
acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut for compliance with requirements specified in this
and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel
ceilings.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply
with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636, per manufacturer's written
instructions and (Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association) CISCA's "Ceiling
Systems Handbook."
B.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
2.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
4.
Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will
not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
5.
When framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install
carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.
6.
Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
7.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
09 5113 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
8.
9.

CA 15-001
Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from
hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends
of each member.
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
C.
Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1.
Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
D.
Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one
another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
E.
Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders, penetrations, and where fixtures
are surface-mounted, to provide a neat, precise fit.
1.
Use clean cotton gloves to install panels. Change gloves often. Ensure panels remain
clean and undamaged.
a.
Use clean gloves to remove and reinstall panels to facilitate work above ceilings.
b.
Replace soiled or damaged panels.
2.
3.
4.
3.4
For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of
suspension system runners and moldings.
For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of
reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.
a.
Paint cut edges of panels remaining exposed after installation; match color of
exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by
acoustical panel manufacturer.
Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having
jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel
manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

A.
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
B.
09 5113 - 5
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 09 6513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Resilient base.
2.
Resilient molding accessories.
B.
1.
2.
Related Sections:
a.
09 6519 "Resilient Tile Flooring."
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Samples: For each type and color of base and molding indicated, full-size cross-sections, 18
inch lengths.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
manufacturer.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to

(ASTM International) ASTM E 648 or (National Fire Protection Association) NFPA 253, by a
qualified testing agency.
1.
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.22 W/sq. cm.
1.5

A.
1.6
1.
Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the
weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following
time periods:
1.
48 hours before installation.
2.
During installation.
3.
48 hours after installation.
09 6513 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
B.
Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by

C.
Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
1.7
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each
type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Resilient Base: Comply with ASTM F 1861.

1.
Material: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic).
2.
Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous).
3.
Style: Cove (base with toe).
4.
Thickness: 0.125 inch.
5.
Height: 4 inches.
6.
Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.
7.
Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
8.
Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
9.
Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
10. Provide resilient base by:
Burke Flooring.
a.
b.
Flexco.
c.
Johnsonite.
d.
Roppe Corporation, USA.
B.
Resilient Molding Accessories:

1.
Provide rubber resilient molding accessories, unless profile is manufactured only of vinyl.
2.
Colors: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
3.
Profiles:
a.
Carpet edge for glue-down applications.
b.
Reducer strip for resilient floor covering.
c.
Joiner for resilient flooring and carpet.
4.
C.
Provide resilient molding accessories by:

a.
Burke Flooring.
b.
Flexco.
c.
Johnsonite.
d.
Roppe Corporation, USA.
1.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based
or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for
2.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products
and substrate conditions indicated.
09 6513 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
1.
Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified
in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of

resilient products.
B.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
C.
Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to
be installed.
1.
Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed
at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
D.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Resilient Base:
1.
Layout base to provide minimum number of joints, with no strip less than 24 inches in
length (for wall segments longer than 24 inches).
a.
Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with
tops of adjacent pieces aligned.
b.
Locate joints as remote from corners as the material lengths or wall configuration
will permit.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
3.4
Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces,
and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
On irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive filler material.
Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.
Job-Formed Corners:
a.
Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without
producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.
b.
Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible.
Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates
throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet and resilient floor
covering that would otherwise be exposed.
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.
B.
Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
09 6513 - 3

CA 15-001
1.
2.
3.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.

Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
Damp-wipe surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C.
Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D.
Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.
E.
09 6513 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 09 6519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes solid vinyl floor tile.
B.
1.
Substrate Material:
a.
b.
2.
1.3
Related Sections:
a.
09 6513 "Resilient Base and Accessories."
b.
09 6566 "Resilient Athletic Flooring."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For flooring and each required accessory product, manufacturer's published
B.
Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Entity that employs workers who are competent in techniques required
by manufacturer for floor tile installation indicated.
B.
manufacturer.
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to

(ASTM International) ASTM E 648 or (National Fire Protection Association) NFPA 253, by a
qualified testing agency.
1.
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.22 W/sq. cm.
1.5

A.
1.6
1.
Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not
less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:
1.
48 hours before installation.
2.
During installation.
3.
48 hours after installation.
09 6519 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
B.
Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by

C.
Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
D.
Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
E.
Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2

1.
MATERIALS
A.
Solid Vinyl Tile: Comply with ASTM F 1700.

1.
Class: [As indicated by product designations] [Class I, monolithic vinyl tile]
[Class II, surface-decorated vinyl tile] [Class III, printed film vinyl tile].
2.
Type: [Type A, smooth surface] [Type B, embossed surface].
3.
Seaming Method: Standard.
4.
Colors and Patterns: As indicated on Drawings.
5.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide the product indicated on Drawings, or comparable
B.
1.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement based
or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for
2.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and
substrate conditions indicated.
3.
Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
1.
Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified
in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.
PREPARATION
A.

resilient products.
B.
Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1.
Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives
and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
09 6519 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.
4.

CA 15-001
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed

with installation only after substrates pass testing.
Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed
a.
b.
Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with
installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level
measurement.
C.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D.
Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be
installed.
1.
Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed
at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
E.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B.
Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets,
so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut
widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1.
Lay tiles square with room axis.
C.
Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed
tiles.
1.
Lay tiles with grain running in one direction.
D.
Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures
including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E.
Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles
to edge of frame stop at door side of door openings so that joint between tiles and adjacent
flooring is concealed when door is in closed position.
F.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device.
G.
Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
3.4

A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.
B.
Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:
1.
Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2.
Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3.
Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
09 6519 - 3

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
C.
Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D.
Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces
before applying liquid floor polish.
1.
Apply three coats.
E.
Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.
F.
09 6519 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 09 6813 - TILE CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes modular carpet tile.
B.
1.
Substrate Material:
a.
b.
2.
1.3
Related Sections:
a.
b.
09 6816 "Sheet Carpeting."
c.
12 4813 "Entrance Floor Mats and Frames."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of carpet tile and accessory product required, manufacturer's
1.
Include data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance.
2.
Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate.
B.
Samples: Full-size carpet tiles, for each type, color, and texture required.
1.
Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and
designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Entity that employs technicians certified by the (International Certified
Floorcovering Installers Association) CFI at the Commercial II certification level.
1.
Installation Standard: (Carpet and Rug Institute) CRI Carpet Installation Standard.
B.
manufacturer.
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide carpet tile identical to those of assemblies tested

for fire response according to (National Fire Protection Association) NFPA 253 by a qualified
testing agency.
1.
D.

related to carpet tile installation including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures.
2.
Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures.
TILE CARPETING
09 6813 - 1

CA 15-001
1.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015

A.
1.6
1.
CRI Carpet Installation Standard, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Comply with Carpet Installation Standard, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and
Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation."
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete and
dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
C.
Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to
bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile
manufacturer.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
1.8
Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees
to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic,
failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.
2.
Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge
raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, dimensional stability, excess static
discharge, and delamination.
3.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1.
Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated,
but not less than 10 sq. yd.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2

1.
MATERIALS
A.
Carpet Tile:
1.
Basis-of-Design Products: Provide the products indicated on Drawings, or comparable
B.
1.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based
formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
09 6813 - 2
TILE CARPETING
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.

CA 15-001
Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit

products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements
for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable
installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
1.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions
affecting carpet tile performance.
2.
Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Comply with Carpet Installation Standard, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor
Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing
substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation.
B.

carpet tile.
C.
Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1.
Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet
manufacturer.
2.
Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-inPlace Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet.
3.
Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
4.
5.
a.
b.
installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humidity level
measurement.
D.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks,
holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more
stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible
with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use
mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
F.
Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.
TILE CARPETING
09 6813 - 3

CA 15-001
3.3
Design Development
October 02, 2015
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with Carpet Installation Standard, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with
carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B.
Installation Method: Glue down; install every tile with full-spread, releasable, pressure-sensitive
adhesive.
C.
Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.
D.
Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture
including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as
recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
E.
Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions,
removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
F.
by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
G.
Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
3.4

A.
Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1.
Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
2.
Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.
3.
Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B.
Protect installed carpet tile to comply with Carpet Installation Standard, Section 16, "Protection
of Indoor Installations."
1.
Verify appearance of carpet is acceptable to Architect prior to installation of protective
materials.
C.
Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment
and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
D.
09 6813 - 4
TILE CARPETING
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 09 6816 - SHEET CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes sheet carpeting and carpet cushion.
B.
1.
Substrate Material:
a.
b.
2.
1.3
Related Sections:
a.
b.
09 6813 "Tile Carpeting."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each carpet and carpet cushion type, and each accessory product required,
manufacturer's published technical data sheets, including product description and applications,
1.
Include data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance.
B.
Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label
each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation
indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
1.
Carpet and Carpet Seam: 24 inch square Sample with seam in center.
2.
Carpet Cushion: 24 inch square Sample.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Entity that employs technicians certified by the (International Certified
Floorcovering Installers Association) CFI at the Commercial II certification level.
1.
Installation Standard: (Carpet and Rug Institute) CRI Carpet Installation Standard.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide carpet tile identical to those of assemblies tested

for fire response according to (National Fire Protection Association) NFPA 253 by a qualified
testing agency.
1.
C.

related to carpet installation including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures.
2.
Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures.
1.5

A.
1.
Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
SHEET CARPETING
09 6816 - 1

CA 15-001
1.6
Design Development
October 02, 2015
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and
Humidity" and Section 11, "Ventilation."
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet[ and carpet cushion] until wet work in spaces
is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the
levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
C.
Do not install carpet and carpet cushion over concrete slabs until slabs have cured, are
sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, and have pH range recommended by carpet
manufacturer.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure
of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.
2.
Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge
raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, excess static discharge, and
delamination.
3.
B.
Special Warranty for Carpet Cushion: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace components of carpet cushion installation that fail in materials or
1.
Warranty includes consequent removal and replacement of carpet and accessories.
2.
Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet cushion due to unusual traffic,
failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.
3.
Failure includes, but is not limited to, permanent indentation or compression.
4.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2

1.
MATERIALS
A.
Carpet:
Basis-of-Design Products: Provide the products indicated on Drawings, or comparable
1.
B.
Carpet Cushion:
1.
Traffic Classification: (Carpet Cushion Council) CCC Class I, moderate traffic.
2.
Polyurethane-Foam Cushion: Bonded.
a.
b.
Density: 6.00 lb./cu. ft.
3.
09 6816 - 2
SHEET CARPETING
Design Development
October 02, 2015
C.

CA 15-001
1.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based
formulation provided or recommended by carpet cushion manufacturer.
2.
Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and
subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed
carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet manufacturer.
3.
Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet
manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form
secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
1.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions
affecting carpet performance.
2.
Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Comply with Carpet Installation Standard, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor
Preparation," and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing
substrates.
B.
Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1.
Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet
manufacturer.
2.
Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-inPlace Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet.
3.
Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
4.
5.
a.
b.
installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humidity level
measurement.
C.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks,
holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless
more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible
with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use
mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet cushion manufacturer.
E.
Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet.
SHEET CARPETING
09 6816 - 3

CA 15-001
3.3
Design Development
October 02, 2015
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with Carpet Installation Standard and carpet manufacturer's written installation
instructions for the following:
1.
Double-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with Section 14, "Double Glue-Down
Installation."
2.
Stair Installation: Comply with Section 17, "Carpet on Stairs" for glue-down installation.
B.
Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam
locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At
doorways, center seams under the door in closed position.
1.
Level adjoining border edges.
C.
Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture
including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
D.
Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
E.
by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
F.
Install pattern parallel to walls and borders to comply with Carpet Installation Standard,
Section 19, "Patterned Carpet Installations" and with carpet manufacturer's written
recommendations.
G.
Comply with carpet cushion manufacturer's written recommendations. Install carpet cushion
seams at 90-degree angle with carpet seams.
3.4

A.
Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:

1.
Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
2.
Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.
3.
Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B.
Protect installed carpet to comply with Carpet Installation Standard, Section 21, "Protection of
Indoor Installations."
1.
Verify appearance of carpet is acceptable to Architect prior to installation of protective
materials.
C.
Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and
fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer and carpet adhesive manufacturer.
D.
09 6816 - 4
SHEET CARPETING
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 09 7733 - FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED POLYESTER PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes fiberglass-reinforced polyester panels and associated trim.
B.
1.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer's published technical data sheets, including product description
and applications, technical properties, features, benefits, and limitations.
B.
Shop Drawings: Interior elevations indicating panel layout, items penetrating panels, and
locations and details of attachment devices and trim components.
1.
Include details illustrating trim around piping and other items penetrating panels.
C.
Samples:
1.
12 inch square Sample of panel material.
2.
18 inch long Samples of each required molding and trim shape.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide wall coverings and adhesives with the following
fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products applied with
identical adhesives to substrates per test method indicated below by (Underwriters Laboratory)
UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows, per (ASTM International) ASTM E 84:
a.
b.
A.
1.6
1.
Do not deliver panels until wet work, grinding and similar operations which could damage,
soil or deteriorate panels has been completed in installation areas.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install panels until temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be
maintained in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Fiberglass-Reinforced Polyester Panels: ASTM E 84, Class C, 3/32 inch thick panels, smooth
finish.
09 7733 - 1

CA 15-001
1.
2.
B.
Height: As indicated on Drawings.

Color: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full range.
1.
Moldings and Trim: PVC, in colors matching panels and as required for a complete
installation.
2.
Fasteners: Fine finishing nails or staples as recommended by the manufacturer.
a.
Conceal fasteners behind moldings, trim.
3.
C.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Adhesive: Waterproof, mildew resistant adhesive, recommended by panel manufacturer

for use with selected panels.
Provide sanitary wall panel system by:

1.
Crane Composites.
Glasteel.
2.
3.
Marlite.
4.
Nudo Products, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2

PREPARATION
A.
Remove switchplates, wall plates, and surface-mounted fixtures where panels are to be
applied. Upon completion of panel installation, reinstall items removed.
B.
Prepare substrate in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for the type of
substrate encountered.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Install work plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions.

1.
Tolerance: 1/8 inch in 8'-0".
B.
Install panels in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
C.
Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work. Do not leave cut edges exposed: cover with trim or
ensure trim to be provided by others is adequate to hide all cut edges.
D.
Lay out panels from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so
panels at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut
widths that equal less than one-half panel at perimeter.
E.
Install with uniform, tight joints between panels.
F.
Attach panels with 100 percent adhesive coverage. Provide temporary bracing or fasteners,
plus nailing or stapling covered by moldings for concealed-fastener installation.
3.4

A.
Repairs: Repair damaged and defective panels where possible to eliminate functional and
visual defects. Replace panels where repairs are not acceptable to Architect. Adjust joinery for
uniform appearance.
B.
Cleaning: Clean exposed surfaces of panels in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Protection: Maintain conditions necessary to ensure work will be without damage or

deterioration for the duration of construction.
09 7733 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
D.

CA 15-001
09 7733 - 3
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 09 9113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section is general in nature. Paint systems are specified for various substrates that may or
may not be encountered in the Work.
B.
Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
exterior substrates:
1.
Steel.
2.
Galvanized metal.
3.
Wood.
4.
Exterior gypsum board.
C.
1.
Metal Substrates: Division 05 Sections.
2.
Wood Substrates: Division 06 Sections.
3.
Gypsum Board Substrates: Section 09 2900 "Gypsum Board."
4.
Related Sections:
a.
09 9123 "Interior Painting."
1.3
A.
General: Paint exterior surfaces as indicated on Drawings.
B.
Paint shop-primed and galvanized steel and iron surfaces specified in Division 05 Metals
Sections that are exposed to public view.
C.
Paint shop-primed and galvanized steel and iron surfaces specified in Section 08 1113 "Hollow
Metal Doors and Frames."
D.
Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint surfaces of items exposed to public view including, but
not limited to:
1.
Mechanical and Plumbing Work:
a.
Uninsulated metal piping.
b.
Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
c.
Equipment supplied with factory-primed finish for field painting.
2.
Electrical Work:
a.
Conduits, boxes and raceways.
b.
Disconnect switches and panelboards.
c.
3.
Do not paint:
a.
Moving parts of operating units.
b.
Equipment nameplates and other means of identification.
c.
Performance rating data.
d.
Code-required labels.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 9113 - 1

CA 15-001
1.4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Samples: For each paint system, and each color and gloss of topcoat indicated.
1.
Submit Samples on rigid backing, 12 inches square.
2.
Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3.
Label each coat of each Sample.
4.
Label each Sample for location and application area.
C.
Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1.
Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2.
Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in
Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
D.
Painting Schedule:
1.
Indicate each surface to be painted, its material, and whether the surface is new or
existing.
a.
Indicate MPI system to be applied.
b.
Indicate color.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
(Master Painter's Institute) MPI Standards:

1.
Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products
List."
2.
Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual" and "MPI Repainting Maintenance Manual" for products and paint
systems indicated.
B.
Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish
selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
each paint system specified in Part 3.
a.
Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.
b.
Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
c.
If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark
samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
1.6

A.
1.7
1.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with
ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
a.
Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
b.
Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F.
09 9113 - 2
EXTERIOR PAINTING
Design Development
October 02, 2015
B.
1.8

CA 15-001
Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at
temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as
materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
Quantity: Furnish 1 additional gallon of each material and color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Material Compatibility:
1.
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B.
Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range; maximum 6 colors, including
up to 2 deep-tone colors.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Primers:
1.
Alkali-Resistant Primer: MPI #3.
2.
Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in
paint system indicated.
3.
Epoxy Primer: MPI #101.
B.
Paints:
1.
Light Industrial Coating (Eggshell): MPI #161 (Gloss Level 3).
2.
Pigmented Polyurethane: MPI # 72.
C.
Provide exterior paint by:

1.
Benjamin Moore & Co.
2.
Cloverdale Paint.
3.
Diamond Vogel Paints.
4.
Glidden Professional.
5.
Kelly-Moore Paints.
6.
Kwal Paint.
7.
MicroBlend Technologies.
8.
PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
9.
Sherwin-Williams Company.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
1.
Verify moisture content of substrates, when measured with an electronic moisture meter,
is less than maximum allowable moisture content, as follows:
a.
Wood: 15 percent.
b.
Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 9113 - 3

CA 15-001
2.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
a.
Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural

Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
C.
Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be
painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide
surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1.
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall
items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
2.
Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
D.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and
incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required
to produce paint systems indicated.
E.
Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in
writing by paint manufacturer.
F.
Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop
paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to
comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
G.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that
promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
H.
Wood Substrates:
1.
Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
2.
Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3.
Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4.
After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood
filler. Sand smooth when dried.
I.
Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and
sanded smooth.
3.2
APPLICATION
A.
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1.
Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2.
Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces.
3.
Paint surfaces behind items to be permanently fixed with prime coat only.
4.
Paint backsides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
5.
Factory-Finished Objects: Unless otherwise directed by Architect, paint factory-finished
objects such as grilles, louvers, switch-plates, etc. that do not match the color of surfaces
in which they are located.
6.
Finish doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exposed faces.
B.
Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of
same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C.
If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
09 9113 - 4
EXTERIOR PAINTING
Design Development
October 02, 2015
D.
3.3

CA 15-001
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
A.
3.4
Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1.
Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
2.
If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply
additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint
A.
At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B.
After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
D.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.
E.
3.5
EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A.
Steel Substrates:
1.
Pigmented Polyurethane System: MPI EXT 5.1J.
a.
Prime Coat: MPI #101 Epoxy Primer.
b.
2 coats MPI #72 Polyurethane (semigloss).
B.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1.
Pigmented Polyurethane System: MPI EXT 5.1J, G5.
a.
Prime Coat: MPI #101 Epoxy Primer.
b.
2 coats MPI #72 Pigmented Polyurethane.
C.
Wood Substrates:
1.
Pigmented Polyurethane System: MPI EXT 6.3H, G5.
a.
Prime Coat: MPI #72 Polyurethane.
b.
2 coats MPI #72 Polyurethane (semigloss).
D.
Gypsum Board Substrates:

1.
Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System MPI EXT 9.1.B, G3.
a.
Prime Coat: MPI #3 Alkali-Resistant Primer.
b.
2 coats MPI 161 Water-Based Light Industrial Coating (eggshell).
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 9113 - 5
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 09 9123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section is general in nature. Paint systems are specified for various substrates that may or
may not be encountered in the Work.
B.
Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
interior substrates:
1.
Concrete.
2.
Concrete masonry units (CMU).
3.
Steel.
4.
Galvanized metal.
5.
Wood.
6.
Gypsum board.
C.
1.
Concrete Substrates: Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
2.
Masonry Substrates: Section 04 2000 "Unit Masonry."
3.
Metal Substrates: Division 05 Sections.
4.
Wood Substrates: Division 06 Sections.
5.
Gypsum Board Substrates: Section 09 2900 "Gypsum Board."
6.
Related Sections:
a.
09 9113 "Exterior Painting."
1.3
A.
General: Paint interior surfaces as indicated on Drawings.
B.
Paint shop-primed and galvanized steel and iron surfaces specified in Division 05 Metals
Sections that are exposed in normally occupied areas.
C.
Paint shop-primed and galvanized steel and iron surfaces specified in Section 08 1113 "Hollow
Metal Doors and Frames."
D.
Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint surfaces of items exposed in normally occupied areas
and in equipment rooms including, but not limited to:
1.
Mechanical and Plumbing Work:
a.
Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets
and outlets (paint with a flat, nonspecular black paint).
b.
Uninsulated metal piping.
c.
Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
d.
2.
Electrical Work:
a.
Conduits, boxes and raceways.
b.
Disconnect switches and panelboards.
c.
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 9123 - 1

CA 15-001
3.
1.4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Do not paint:
a.
Moving parts.
b.
Equipment nameplates and other means of identification.
c.
Performance rating data.
d.
Code-required labels.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Samples: For each paint system, and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated.
1.
Submit Samples on rigid backing, 12 inches square.
2.
Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3.
Label each coat of each Sample.
4.
Label each Sample for location and application area.
C.
Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1.
Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2.
Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in
Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
D.
Painting Schedule:
1.
Indicate each surface to be painted, its material, and whether the surface is new or
existing.
a.
Indicate MPI system to be applied.
b.
Indicate color.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
(Master Painter's Institute) MPI Standards:

1.
Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products
List."
2.
Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
B.
Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish
selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
each paint system specified in Part 3.
a.
Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.
b.
Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2.
3.
1.6
Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services
have been activated.
Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.
a.
If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark
samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

A.
1.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with
ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
09 9123 - 2
INTERIOR PAINTING
Design Development
October 02, 2015
a.
b.
1.7

CA 15-001
Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F.
B.
Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5
deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1.8
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as
materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
Quantity: Furnish 1 additional gallon of each material and color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Material Compatibility:
1.
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B.
Colors: As indicated on Drawings.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Primers:
1.
Latex Block Filler: MPI #4.
2.
Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.
3.
Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in
paint systems indicated.
4.
Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79.
5.
Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #134.
6.
Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39.
B.
Paints:
1.
Latex (Flat): MPI #53 (Gloss Level 1).
2.
Latex (Eggshell): MPI #52 (Gloss Level 3).
3.
Latex (Satin): MPI #43 (Gloss Level 4).
4.
High-Performance Architectural Latex (Satin): MPI #140 (Gloss Level 4).
5.
High-Performance Architectural Latex (Semigloss): MPI #141 (Gloss Level 5).
6.
Alkyd (Gloss): MPI #48 (Gloss Level 6).
C.
Floor Coatings:
1.
Clear Concrete Floor Sealer (Water Based): MPI #99.
D.
Provide interior paint by:

1.
Benjamin Moore & Co.
2.
Cloverdale Paint.
3.
Diamond Vogel Paints.
4.
Glidden Professional.
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 9123 - 3

CA 15-001
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Kelly-Moore Paints.
Kwal Paint.
MicroBlend Technologies.
PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
Sherwin-Williams Company.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
1.
Verify moisture content of substrates, when measured with an electronic moisture meter,
is less than maximum allowable moisture content, as follows:
a.
Concrete: 12 percent.
b.
Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
c.
Wood: 15 percent.
d.
Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
2.
3.
3.2
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces are dry.
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural

Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B.
Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be
painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide
surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1.
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall
items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
2.
Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
C.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and
incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required
to produce paint systems indicated.
D.
Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk.
Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if
moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's
F.
Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in
writing by paint manufacturer.
G.
Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop
paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to
comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
09 9123 - 4
INTERIOR PAINTING
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
H.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that
promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
I.
Wood Substrates:
1.
Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
2.
Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3.
Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4.
After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood
filler. Sand smooth when dried.
J.
Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and
sanded smooth.
3.3
APPLICATION
A.
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1.
Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or
furniture with prime coat only.
3.
Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
4.
Paint backsides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
5.
Factory-Finished Objects: When directed by Architect, paint factory-finished objects such
as grilles, louvers, switch-plates, etc. that do not match the color of surfaces in which they
are located.
6.
Apply additional coats of primer to joints in gypsum board assemblies as necessary to
preclude joint "read-through."
B.
If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
C.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
3.4

A.
3.5
Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1.
Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
2.
If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply
additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint
A.
At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B.
After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 9123 - 5

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
C.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
D.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.
E.
3.6
INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A.
Concrete Substrates:
1.
Nontraffic Surfaces:
a.
High-Performance Architectural Latex (HIPAC) System: MPI INT 3.1C, G4.
1)
Prime Coat: MPI #50 Latex primer/sealer.
2)
2 coats MPI #140 High-Performance Architectural Latex (satin).
2.
Traffic Surfaces:
a.
Water-Based Clear Sealer System: MPI INT 3.2G.
1)
2 coats MPI #99 Clear Concrete Floor Sealer.
B.
CMU Substrates:
1.
High-Performance Architectural Latex (HIPAC) System: MPI INT 4.2D, G4.
a.
Prime Coat: MPI #4 Latex Block Filler.
b.
2 coats MPI #140 HIPAC Latex (satin).
C.
Steel Substrates:
1.
Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1E, G6. Use for handrails and guardrails.
a.
Prime Coat: MPI #79 Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer.
b.
2 coats MPI #48 Alkyd (gloss).
2.
High-Performance Architectural Latex (HIPAC) System: MPI INT 5.1R, G5. Use for steel
substrates unless otherwise indicated.
a.
Prime Coat: MPI #79 Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer.
b.
2 coats MPI #141 HIPAC Latex (semigloss).
D.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1.
High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 5.3M, G5. Use for galvanized
metal substrates unless otherwise indicated.
a.
Prime Coat: MPI #134 Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer.
b.
2 coats MPI #141 HIPAC Latex (semigloss).
E.
Wood Substrates:
1.
Latex System: MPI INT 6.3T, G5.
a.
Prime Coat: MPI #39 Latex-Based Wood Primer.
b.
2 coats MPI #43 Latex (satin).
F.
Gypsum Board Substrates:

1.
Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A, G3.
a.
Prime Coat: MPI #50 Latex Primer/Sealer.
b.
Topcoats:
1)
2 coats MPI #53 Latex (G1, flat).
2)
2 coats MPI #52 Latex (G3, eggshell).
09 9123 - 6
INTERIOR PAINTING
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 10 1400 - SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Dimensional characters.
2.
Panel signs.
B.
1.
Project Identification Signs: Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
2.
Temporary Information and Directional Signs: Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and
Controls."
3.
a.
b.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.3
Substrate Material for Interior Signs: Section 09 2900 "Gypsum Board."

Structured Parking Signs and Pavement Markings: Section 10 1453 "Traffic Signage."
Labels, Tags, and Nameplates for Plumbing Systems and Equipment: Section
22 0553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
Labels, Tags, and Nameplates for HVAC Systems and Equipment: Section
23 0553" Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
Labels, Tags, and Nameplates for Electrical Equipment: Section 26 0553 "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
Illuminated Exit Signs: Section 26 5000 "Interior Lighting."
A.
1.4
Provide signage required by and in accordance with (International Code Council/American

National Standards Institute) ICC/ANSI A117.1, (International Building Code) IBC Sections
1007.10, 1022 and 1110, and as otherwise indicated.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
and limitations.
B.
fabrication and installation requirements for signs.
1.
a.
Indicate requirements for supplementary supports and other work provided by
others.
C.
Samples:
1.
Dimensional Characters: Full-size Sample of each type of dimensional character (letter,
number, and graphic element).
2.
Panel Signs: Typical room identification sign, including changeable message insert slot.
D.
Sign Schedule: Use room designations indicated on Drawings. Indicate the following:
SIGNAGE
10 1400 - 1

CA 15-001
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Mounting height.
Mounting type.
Message, including typestyle, graphic elements, tactile characters and Braille, and layout
for each sign.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Entity that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Entity that employs workers trained and approved by manufacturers of
each type of sign being installed.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of sign required from a single source and a single
manufacturer.
D.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
ICC/ANSI A117.1.
1.6

A.
1.7
Requirements."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when weather conditions permit installation
of signs in exterior locations to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions
and warranty requirements.
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior signs until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and
90 deg F and relative humidity between 17 and 50 percent during the remainder of the
construction period.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
1.9
Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs.

WARRANTY
A.

replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1.
a.
Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering.
b.
Deterioration of embedded graphic image colors and sign lamination.
2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS
A.
Cast Characters: Produce characters with smooth flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely
formed lines and profiles, free of pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Cast lugs into back
10 1400 - 2
SIGNAGE
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Alloy and temper recommended by
sign manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated. Comply with the
following requirements.
1.
Material: Aluminum.
2.
Depth: <Insert dimension>.
3.
Height: <Insert dimension>.
4.
Color[s]: [2,] <Insert number of colors> as selected by Architect from manufacturer's
full range.
5.
Typeface: <Insert font name> [To be determined].
a.
Mounting: Concealed studs, [projected] [flush], noncorroding for substrates
encountered.
1)
Projection Distance: <Insert distance>.
6.
B.
2.2
Quantity: <Insert number>.
Provide dimensional characters by:

1.
A. R. K. Ramos.
2.
ASI-Modulex, Inc.
3.
Gemini Incorporated.
4.
Innerface Sign Systems, Inc.
5.
Metal Arts.
6.
Metallic Arts.
7.
Southwell Company.
PANEL SIGNS
A.
2.3
Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under
installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from
corner to corner, complying with the following requirements:
1.
Material: 0.160 inch thick 2-ply phenolic-backed photopolymer sheet
2.
Edge Condition: Square cut.
3.
Corner Condition: Square.
4.
Mounting: Wall, unframed.
a.
Manufacturer's standard for substrates encountered.
5.
Tactile and Braille Characters: Manufacturer's standard process for producing text and
symbols complying with ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSI A117.1.
a.
Produce precisely formed characters with square-cut edges free from burrs and cut
marks.
b.
Produce precisely formed Braille dots with domed or rounded shape.
6.
7.
Graphic Colors: 2, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

Sizes:
a.
Room Identification Signs: 8 by 8 inches.
b.
Dwelling Unit Number Signs: 3 by 5 inches.
A.
Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for
exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or
lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set
into concrete or masonry work.
B.
Fasteners: Provide screws, bolts, and other fastening devices made from same material as
items being fastened, except provide stainless-steel fasteners for exterior applications. Provide
types, sizes, and lengths to suit installation conditions. Use security fasteners where exposed
to view.
SIGNAGE
10 1400 - 3

CA 15-001
2.4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
FINISHES
A.

B.
Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
D.
Aluminum Finishes:
1.
Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, (Aluminum Association) [AA-M12C22A41, Class I,
0.018 mm] [AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm] or thicker.
E.
Phenolic Sheet Finishes:

1.
Colored Coatings for Phenolic Sheet: Ultra-violet light and water-resistant coatings,
including inks, dyes, and paints, recommended by sheet manufacturer for optimum
adherence to surface.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
1.
Verify that anchor inserts are sized and located to accommodate signs.
INSTALLATION
A.
Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and
complying with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion
and other defects in appearance.
2.
Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable.
Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent
walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding
objects or standing within swing of door.
B.
Wall-Mounted Interior Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except
where more stringent requirements apply.
1.
Two-Face Tape: Use to attach signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this
method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.
2.
Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Use to attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered
surfaces.
3.
Shim Plate Mounting: 1/8 inch thick, concealed aluminum shim plate with predrilled and
countersunk holes, at locations indicated, and where other mounting methods are not
practical. Attach plate with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to
substrate. Attach panel signs to plate using two-face tape.
4.
Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide matching opaque plate on opposite side of glass to
conceal mounting materials.
C.
Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions for character form, type of mounting, wall construction, and
condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish character spacing
and to locate holes for fasteners.
1.
Flush Mounting: Mount characters with backs in contact with wall surface.
10 1400 - 4
SIGNAGE
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.
3.3

CA 15-001
Projected Mounting: Mount characters at projection distance from wall surface indicated.

A.
After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner.
B.
SIGNAGE
10 1400 - 5
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 10 1453 - TRAFFIC SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Vehicular traffic signage.
2.
Pavement markings.
B.
1.
Related Sections:
a.
10 1400 "Signage."
1.3
A.
1.4
Provide signage designed and fabricated in compliance with U.S. Department of

Transportation's "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices" (MUTCD).
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Product Data: For sign faces, manufacturer's published technical data sheets, including
product description and applications, Reference Standard classification, technical properties,
1.
Indicate sign layout and MUTCD sign designation, where applicable.
2.
Indicate sign size.
A.
Requirements."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy 6063-T6, with temper as required to suit forming
operations and performance required; with smooth, flat surface.
1.
As-Milled Finish: Standard one-side bright.
2.
Thickness: 0.091 inch.
B.
Perforated Steel Tubing: ASTM A 847, corrosion-resisting, cold-formed hollow structural

sections, structural tubing.
1.
2.
Perforations: 7/16 inch diameter, 1 inch o.c., each face of tube.
C.
Pavement-Marking Paint: (Master Painters Institute) MPI #32 Alkyd Traffic Marking Paint.
1.
Color: White.
a.
Provide blue background color for accessible parking symbols, as indicated on
Drawings.
TRAFFIC SIGNAGE
10 1453 - 1

CA 15-001
D.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Fasteners:
1.
General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. Select
fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
2.
Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts,
nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts,
Alloy Group 1.
3.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as
determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent
testing agency.
a.
Provide alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 and nuts
complying with ASTM F 594.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2

INSTALLATION
A.
Wall and Column-Mounted Signs: Mechanically fasten to brackets designed to project sign
from mounting surface 1 inch, expansion-anchored to mounting surface.
B.
Post-Mounted Signs:
1.
Post Setting:
a.
Set posts plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in position
during setting with mechanical devices.
2.
3.
C.
3.3
Anchor posts to concrete with floor-type flanges, bolted to posts and expansion anchored
to concrete floor.
Mechanically fasten signs to posts.
Pavement Markings:
1.
Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been
verified with Architect.
2.
Allow concrete paving to cure for a minimum of 28 days and be dry before starting
pavement marking.
3.
Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
4.
Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce markings of dimensions indicated with
uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a
minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils.
a.
Apply graphic symbols and lettering with paint-resistant, die-cut stencils, firmly
secured to concrete surface. Mask an extended area beyond edges of each stencil
to prevent paint application beyond stencil. Apply paint so that it cannot run
beneath stencil.
A.
10 1453 - 2
TRAFFIC SIGNAGE
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 10 2213 - WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes standard-duty wire mesh partitions.
B.
1.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Wire Cloth: As defined in (ASTM International) ASTM E 2016:

1.
Intermediate Crimp: Wires pass over one and under the next adjacent wire in both
directions, with wires crimped before weaving and with extra crimps between the
intersections.
2.
Lock Crimp: Deep crimps at points of the intersection that lock wires securely in place.
A.
1.5
Structural Performance: Wire mesh units shall withstand the effects of the loads indicated on
Drawings and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to (Structural
Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers) SEI/ASCE 7.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For partition system and components, manufacturer's published technical data
and limitations.
1.
finishes.
B.
and installation requirements for wire mesh partitions.
1.
Illustrate clearances required for operation of doors and gates.
2.
a.
C.
Setting Drawings: For anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items
with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete.
D.
Samples: 12 by 12 inch panel corner, constructed of specified frame members and wire mesh.
1.
Demonstrate method of finishing members at intersections.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Entity trained and approved by manufacturer.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain wire mesh partition system and components from a single source
and a single manufacturer.
10 2213 - 1

CA 15-001
C.
1.7
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Welding Qualifications: Qualify field-welding procedures and personnel according to the

following:
1.
(American Welding Society) AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
A.
1.8
1.
Deliver wire mesh items with cardboard protectors on perimeters of panels and doors and
with posts wrapped crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage.
Use vented plastic.
2.
Inventory wire mesh partition door hardware on receipt and provide secure lockup for
wire mesh partition door hardware delivered to Project site.
a.
Tag each item or package separately with identification and include basic
installation instructions with each item or package.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with wire mesh units
by field measurements before fabrication.
1.
a.
b.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Steel Wire: ASTM A 510.
B.
Steel Plates, Channels, Angles, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
C.
Square Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 cold-formed structural-steel tubing.
D.
Panel-to-Panel Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard steel bolts, nuts, and washers.
E.
Postinstalled Expansion Anchors: With capability to sustain, without failure, load imposed
within factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a
1.
Carbon Steel: Zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for
Class SC 1 service condition (mild).
2.
For Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal
to four times the loads imposed.
F.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,

complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
2.2
STANDARD-DUTY WIRE MESH PARTITIONS

A.
Mesh: 0.135 inch diameter, intermediate-crimp steel wire woven into 1-1/2 inch diamond mesh.
B.
Vertical Panel Framing: 1-1/4 by 5/8 by 0.097 inch cold-rolled, C-shaped steel channels with
1/4-inch- diameter bolt holes spaced not more than 18 inches o.c. along center of framing.
C.
Horizontal Panel Framing: 1 by 1/2 by 1/8 inch cold-rolled steel channels.
10 2213 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
D.
Horizontal Panel Stiffeners: 2 cold-rolled steel channels, not less than 1 by 3/8 by 1/8 inch,
bolted or riveted toe to toe through mesh or 1 by1/2 by 1/8-inch cold-rolled steel channels with
wire woven through.
E.
Top Capping Bars: 2-1/4 by 1 inch cold-rolled steel channels.
F.
Posts for 90-Degree Corners: 1-1/4 by 1-1/4 by 1/8-inch steel angles with 1/4 inch diameter
bolt holes aligning with bolt holes in vertical framing; with floor anchor clips.
G.
Line Posts: 3 inch by 4.1-lb or 3-1/2 by 1-1/4 by 0.127 inch steel channels; with 5 by 18 by 1/4
inch steel base plates punched for attachment to floor.
H.
Floor Shoes: Steel, cast iron, or cast aluminum, not less than 2 inches high; sized to suit
vertical framing, drilled for attachment to floor, and with set screws for leveling adjustment.
I.
Swinging Doors: Fabricated from same mesh as partitions, with framing fabricated from 1-1/4
by 1/2 by 1/8 inch steel channels or C channels, banded with 1-1/4 by 1/8 inch flat steel bar
cover plates on 4 sides, and with 1/8 inch thick angle strike bar and cover on strike jamb.
1.
Hinges: Full-surface type, 3 by 3 inch steel, 1-1/2 pairs per door; bolted, riveted, or
welded to door and jamb framing.
2.
Padlock Lug: Mortised into door framing and enclosed with steel cover.
J.
Accessories:
1.
Wall Clips: Manufacturer's standard, cold-rolled steel sheet; allowing up to 1 inch of
adjustment.
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate wire mesh items from components of sizes not less than those indicated.
Use larger-sized components as recommended by wire mesh item manufacturer. As required
for complete installation, provide bolts, hardware, and accessories with manufacturer's
standard finishes.
1.
Fabricate wire mesh items to be readily disassembled.
2.
Welding: Weld corner joints of framing and grind smooth, leaving no evidence of joint .
B.
Standard-Duty Wire Mesh Partitions: Fabricate wire mesh partitions with cutouts for pipes,
ducts, beams, and other items indicated. Finish edges of cutouts to provide a neat, protective
edge.
1.
Mesh: Securely clinch mesh to framing.
2.
Framing: Fabricate framing with mortise and tenon corner construction.
a.
Provide horizontal stiffeners as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by panel
height and as recommended by wire mesh partition manufacturer. Weld horizontal
stiffeners to vertical framing.
b.
Fabricate three and four-way intersections using intersection posts.
c.
Fabricate partition and door framing with slotted holes for connecting adjacent
panels.
3.
4.
5.
Fabricate wire mesh partitions with 3 inches of clear space between finished floor and
bottom horizontal framing.
Doors: Align bottom of door with bottom of adjacent panels.
a.
For doors that do not extend full height of partition, provide transom over door,
fabricated from same mesh and framing as partition panels.
Hardware Preparation: Mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap doors and framing as required to
install hardware.
10 2213 - 3

CA 15-001
2.4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
FINISHES
A.

B.
Steel Finishes:
1.
Shop Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's
standard one-coat, shop-coat finish suitable for use intended. Comply with paint
manufacturer's written instructions for applying and curing.
a.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
1.
Examine floors and walls for suitable conditions where wire mesh items will be installed.
INSTALLATION
A.
Anchor wire mesh partitions to floor with 3/8 inch diameter, postinstalled expansion anchors at
12 inches o.c. through floor shoes located at each post and corner. Adjust wire mesh partition
posts in floor shoes to achieve level and plumb installation.
B.
Anchor wire mesh partitions to walls at 12 inches o.c. through back corner panel framing and as
follows:
1.
For concrete anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts.
C.
Secure top capping bars to top framing channels with 1/4-inch- diameter "U" bolts spaced not
more than 28 inches o.c.
D.
Provide line posts at locations indicated or, if not indicated, as follows:

1.
On each side of sliding door openings.
2.
For partitions that are 10 to 12 feet high, located between every other panel.
3.
For partitions that are more than 12 feet high, located between each panel.
E.
Install doors complete with door hardware.
F.
Bolt accessories to wire mesh partition framing.
3.3

A.
Adjust doors to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping. Adjust hardware to
function smoothly. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without
forcing or binding.
B.
Remove and replace defective work including doors and framing that are warped, bowed, or
otherwise unacceptable.
C.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
D.
10 2213 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 10 2613 - CORNER GUARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes corner guards.
B.
1.
a.
b.
2.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For corner guard assembly, manufacturer's published technical data sheets,
limitations.
1.
Include dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B.
Samples: Corner guard, full-size, 18 inch length.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain corner guards from a single source and a single manufacturer.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide plastic corner guards with surface-burning

characteristics as determined by testing identical products per (ASTM International) ASTM E
84, (National Fire Protection Association) NFPA 255, or (Underwriter's Laboratory) UL 723 by
UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5

A.
1.6
1.
Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F during the
period plastic materials are stored.
2.
Keep plastic sheet material out of direct sunlight.
3.
Store plastic components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic material attains a
minimum room temperature of 70 deg F.
a.
Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install corner guards until building is enclosed and
weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining
temperature at 70 deg F for not less than 72 hours before beginning installation and for the
remainder of the construction period.
CORNER GUARDS
10 2613 - 1

CA 15-001
1.7
Design Development
October 02, 2015
WARRANTY
A.

replace components of corner guards that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1.
a.
Structural failures.
b.
Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use.
2.
1.8
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
1.
Corner-Guard Covers: Full-size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent of
each type, color, and texture of units installed, but no fewer than 2, 4-foot long units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2

1.
MATERIALS
A.
Extruded Rigid Plastic: ASTM D 1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, highimpact-resistant PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic with integral color throughout; thickness
as indicated.
1.
Impact Resistance: Minimum 25.4 ft-lbf/in. of notch when tested according to
ASTM D 256, Test Method A.
2.
Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D 543.
3.
Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635.
4.
5.
B.
Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and
finish indicated but with not less than strength and durability properties specified in
ASTM B 221 for Alloy 6063-T5.
C.
Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts,

and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where
exposed to view.
D.
Adhesive: Type recommended by manufacturer for use with material being adhered to
substrate indicated.
E.
Surface-Mounted, Resilient, Plastic Corner Guards: Assembly consisting of snap-on plastic

cover installed over continuous retainer; including mounting hardware; fabricated with 90- or
135-degree turn to match wall condition.
1.
Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.078-inch wall thickness; as follows:
a.
Profile: Nominal 2-inch long leg and 1/4-inch corner radius.
b.
Height: Full height of space installed unless indicated otherwise.
c.
Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
10 2613 - 2
CORNER GUARDS
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.
3.
4.
2.3

CA 15-001
Retainer: Minimum 0.060-inchthick, 1-piece, extruded aluminum.

Top and Bottom Caps: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color matching cover;
field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Pawling Corporation; CG-20 series, or comparable
product by:
Babcock-Davis, Inc.
a.
b.
Construction Specialties, Inc.
c.
IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems.
d.
Korogard Wall Protection Systems.
e.
Tepromark International, Inc.
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate corner guards to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, and
member sizes, including thicknesses of components.
B.
Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly.

Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.
C.
Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces
free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members
and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
1.
Examine walls to which corner guards will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other
solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of
support fasteners.
PREPARATION
A.
Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing corner guards.
B.
Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
3.4
General: Install corner guards level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use
materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished
Work.
1.
Provide mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a complete
installation.
a.
Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads.
b.
Adjust end and top caps as required to ensure tight seams.
A.
Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a
standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent.
B.
CORNER GUARDS
10 2613 - 3
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 10 2800 - WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Public-use washroom accessories.
2.
Private-use bathroom accessories.
3.
Custodial accessories.
B.
1.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Frameless Mirrors: Section 08 8300 "Mirrors."

Surface Material: Section 09 3000 "Tiling."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
and limitations.
1.
Indicate anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in
other work and substrate preparation.
B.
Product Schedule: Indicate types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each
accessory required.
1.
Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings.
2.
Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide products
of same manufacturer unless specified product is not produced by manufacturer of other listed
products.
A.
1.6
Requirements."
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required
for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation,
cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
B.
Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent
delaying the Work.
10 2800 - 1

CA 15-001
1.7
Design Development
October 02, 2015
WARRANTY
A.
Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or
1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2

1.
PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
A.
Basis-of-Design Products: Provide products indicated on Drawings, or comparable products

by:
1.
A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
2.
American Specialties, Inc.
3.
Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
4.
Bradley Corporation.
B.
Underlavatory Guards: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies, that
prevent direct contact with and burns from piping, and allow service access without removing
coverings.
1.
Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded-plastic, white.
2.
Manufacturers: Provide underlavatory guards by:
a.
Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc.
b.
Truebro, Inc.
2.3
PRIVATE-USE BATHROOM ACCESSORIES

A.
2.4
Basis-of-Design Products: Provide products indicated on Drawings, or comparable products

CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES
A.
2.5
Mop and Broom Holder:

1.
Length: 30 inches.
2.
Hooks: Two.
3.
Mop/Broom Holders: Three, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type.
4.
Mounting: Surface.
5.
Basis-of-Design Product: Model 1315 Utility Shelf with Mop Holders and Rag Hooks or
a.
A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
b.
Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
Bradley Corporation.
c.
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors
and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage
and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.
10 2800 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2

INSTALLATION
A.
Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate

to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B.
Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to
method in ASTM F 446.
3.3

A.
Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective

items.
B.
Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C.
Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
D.
10 2800 - 3
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 10 3100 - MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes prefabricated fireplace, face plate, and vent assembly.
B.
1.
Framing and Support: Section 06 1000 "Rough Carpentry."
2.
Fuel Piping: Section 23 1123 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping" for fireplace.
1.3
A.
1.4
Coordinate and adjust framing, other structural members, and surrounding finish materials as
required to accommodate manufactured fireplace provided.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For fireplace, fireplace components, and accessory products, manufacturer's
1.
Identify product components, installation considerations, accessories, and safety
recommendations.
B.
and installation requirements for fireplace.
1.
Indicate rough-in requirements, including required clearances.
a.
Coordinate vertical and horizontal pathway for vent assembly, including roof and
wall penetrations, and required extension beyond roof and wall surfaces.
b.
Indicate requirements for fireplace accessories, including facing materials.
2.
C.
1.5
Fully detail provisions for attachment to substrate.

a.
Samples:
1.
Base Pan Material: 1 pint of material.
2.
Wall Surround: 12 inch square Sample of specified material.
3.
Glass: 12 inch square Sample.
A.
1.6
Requirements."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction
contiguous manufactured fireplaces by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
10 3100 - 1

CA 15-001
1.
B.
Design Development
October 02, 2015

a.
b.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install fireplace insert until spaces are enclosed
and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and work above ceilings is complete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2

1.
MATERIALS
A.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip
process, smooth, flat surface.
1.
quality.
2.
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated (Galvalume) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating
designation, Grade 40; structural quality, prepainted by the coil-coating process to
comply with ASTM A 755
B.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with
temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with smooth, flat
surface.
C.
Porcelain Enameled Steel: Comply with (Porcelain Enamel Institute) PEI 504.
D.
Film-Faced Ceramic Glazing: Clear, ceramic flat glass; 3/16-inch nominal thickness; faced on
one surface with a clear glazing film; complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for
Category II materials.
2.3
PREFABRICATED FIREPLACE
A.
Manufactured unit consisting of fire-box, base assembly, burner, vent assembly, base pan, face
plate and trim.
1.
Vent Assembly:
a.
Pipe and Fittings: Co-axial assembly, comprised of 0.020-inch thick aluminum
inner lining, combustion-air gap and 0.018-inch thick galvanized steel outer lining.
1)
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
b.
c.
Flashing and Storm Collars: Manufacturer's standard components for installation

conditions encountered.
Termination Cap: Manufacturer's standard ventilating device, selected for
ventilating conditions encountered.
2.
Refractory Material: Manufacturer's standard porcelain enamel fire-box liner.
3.
Base Pan Media: Crushed granite.

a.
10 3100 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
B.

CA 15-001
4.
Wall Surround:
a.
Manufacturer's standard black enamel panel facing assembly.
1)
Include adhesives and other setting materials recommended by
manufacturer.
5.
Face Plate Type: Glass, with painted perimeter frame.

a.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Montego; L Series, L52, or comparable product acceptable

to Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
1.
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
2.
Confirm rough-in framing for fire-box and vent assembly conform to requirements.
INSTALLATION
A.
Anchor fire-box to framing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Vent Assembly:
1.
Attach vent pipe to fire-box fitting. Secure fittings in accordance with vent assembly
manufacturer's instructions. Provide elbows and other components required for complete
vent assembly installation, including support brackets and other structural components.
2.
Install flashing collar prior to installation of roofing assembly.
3.
Install storm collar and termination cap when roofing is complete.
C.
Piping Connections: Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Comply with installation requirements in Section 23 1123 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping."
1.
Arrange piping configuration to facilitate ease of service and maintenance.
3.3

A.
Adjust fireplace to start and burn smoothly and efficiently, as recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain fireplace.
C.
10 3100 - 3
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 10 4410 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Fire protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers.
2.
Portable fire extinguishers.
B.
1.
a.
b.
2.
1.3
A.
1.4
Where semi-recessed fire protection cabinets are located in fire-rated construction, provide
cabinets with fire ratings equal to that of the element in which they are located.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For cabinets and extinguishers, manufacturer's published technical data sheets,
limitations.
B.
requirements for fire protection cabinets.
1.
a.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in (ASTM
International) ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.
B.
(National Fire Protection Association) NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers
to comply with NFPA 10.
C.
Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.6

A.
1.7
Requirements."
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers
indicated are accommodated.
10 4410 - 1

CA 15-001
B.
1.8
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.
WARRANTY
A.

replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
a.
Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.
b.
Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS

A.
General:
1.
Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.
2.
Cabinet Material: Steel sheet.
3.
Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from
0.048 inch (18 gage) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch thick, firebarrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
a.
Provide fire-rated cabinets as indicated in Performance Requirements article.
4.
Doors:
a.
Material: Steel sheet.
b.
Style: Fully glazed with clear acrylic panel, frameless, backless.
c.
Hardware:
1)
Projecting door pull and friction latch.
2)
Concealed hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.
5.
Accessories:
a.
Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire
extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of
fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.
b.
Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style,
size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect.
1)
Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE
EXTINGUISHER."
a)
Location: Applied to cabinet door.
b)
Application Process: Silk-screened.
c)
Lettering Color: Red.
d)
Orientation: Vertical.
B.
Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style
of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping
surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).
1.
Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch backbend depth.
a.
Use for: Fire Protection Cabinets located in framed gypsum board partitions.
C.
Surface-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly on wall with no
trim.
1.
Use where walls are of insufficient depth for semirecessed cabinet installation, and as
D.
Provide fire protection cabinets by:

1.
2.
10 4410 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.
4.
5.
2.2

CA 15-001
Modern Metal Products.

Moon-American.
Potter Roemer LLC.
PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A.
General: Provide extinguishers of type, size, and capacity indicated.

1.
Valves: Manufacturer's standard.
2.
Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.
3.
Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix
B.
B.
Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: (Underwriters laboratory) UL rated 4A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in
enameled-steel container.
C.
Provide portable fire extinguishers by:

1.
Amerex Corporation.
2.
Ansul Incorporated.
3.
Badger Fire Protection.
4.
Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.
5.
Fire End & Croker Corporation.
6.
7.
Kidde Residential and Commercial Division.
8.
9.
Moon-American.
10. Potter Roemer LLC.
11. Pyro-Chem.
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and
hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.
1.
Weld joints and grind smooth.
2.
Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
B.
Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials

indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
1.
Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2
inch thick.
C.
Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground
smooth.
2.4
FINISHES
A.

B.
Protect painted finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by
applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly.
D.
Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply

manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting
topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to
achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.
10 4410 - 3

CA 15-001
1.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
1.
Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and
semirecessed cabinets will be installed.
2.
Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
a.
Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Prepare recesses for recessed and semirecessed fire protection cabinets as required by type
and size of cabinet and trim style.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not
indicated, 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet.
B.
Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

1.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire protection cabinets. If wall thickness is
not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire protection cabinets.
2.
Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb.
C.
Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at
locations indicated.
3.4

A.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B.
Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking
devices operate properly.
C.
On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as
recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factoryfinished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire
protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.
E.
Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
F.
10 4410 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 10 5523 - MAIL BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes:
1.
USPS-approved horizontal mail receptacles.
2.
Key cabinet.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
requirements for mail boxes.
1.
Indicate identification sequence for compartments.
2.
Include layout of identification text.
3.
a.
C.
Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, 3 inch square Sample.
1.4
A.
1.5
Final USPS local postmaster approval for installed mail boxes to be served by USPS.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
1.6
1.
Key Blanks: 1 for every lock, for each type of compartment-door lock installed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Entity experienced in installing mail boxes and whose installations have
been given final approval by local postmasters authorizing use by USPS.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain mail boxes from a single source and a single manufacturer. For
USPS-approved products, use only those included on current lists of USPS manufacturers and
models.
1.7

A.
1.
Deliver lock keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service with a record
of each corresponding lock and key number.
MAIL BOXES
10 5523 - 1

CA 15-001
1.8
Design Development
October 02, 2015
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of recessed and semirecessed mail boxes with wall
construction.
B.
Templates: Obtain templates for installing mail boxes and distribute to parties involved.
1.9
WARRANTY
A.

replace components of mail boxes that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1.
a.
Structural failures.
b.
Faulty operation of hardware.
c.
weathering.
2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MAIL BOXES
A.
Front-Loading, USPS-Approved Horizontal Mail Receptacles: Consisting of multiple

compartments with fixed, solid compartment backs, enclosed within recessed wall box. Provide
access to compartments for distributing incoming mail from front of unit by unlocking master
lock and swinging side-hinged master door to provide accessibility to entire group of
compartments. Provide access to each compartment for removing mail by swinging
compartment door. Comply with USPS-STD-4C.
1.
Mail Delivery: USPS.
2.
Compartments: As indicated on Drawings.
3.
Front-Loading Master Door: Fabricated from extruded aluminum and braced and framed
to hold compartment doors; prepared to receive master-door lock.
a.
Master-Door Lock: Door prepared to receive lock provided by local postmaster.
4.
Compartment Doors: Fabricated from extruded aluminum. Equip each with lock and
tenant identification as required by cited standard. Provide mail slot in the compartment
with master-door lock.
a.
Compartment-Door Locks: Comply with USPS-L-1172C, PSIN O910, for locks and
keys, or equivalent as approved by USPS; with three keys for each compartment
door. Key each compartment differently.
5.
Frames: Fabricated from extruded aluminum or aluminum sheet; ganged and nested
units, with cardholder and blank cards for tenant's identification within each compartment.
Snap-on Trim: Fabricated from same material and finish as compartment doors.
Concealed Components and Mounting Frames: Aluminum or steel sheet with
manufacturer's standard finish.
Exposed Aluminum Finish: Finish surfaces exposed to view as follows:
a.
Anodic Finish: Clear.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide AF Florence Manufacturing Company; Versatile 4C Mailbox

Suites, or comparable product acceptable to Architect.
C.
Key Cabinet: Wall-mounted, steel cabinet with pivoting, key-holding panels and side-hinged
door equipped with five-pin tumbler, cylinder door lock and concealed, full-length flush hinge.
Finish cabinet, panels, and door with baked-enamel or powder-coated finish. Provide key
control system consisting of key-holding hooks, labels, two sets of key tags with self-locking key
holders, key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers.
10 5523 - 2
MAIL BOXES
Design Development
October 02, 2015
1.
2.
3.
2.2

CA 15-001
Capacity: Keys for 150 percent of the number of mail-receptacle locks.

Cross-Index System: Consisting of index cards for recording key information. Include
three receipt forms for each key-holding hook.
Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Color as selected by Architect from
A.
2.3
Polyurethane Elastomeric Coating: Pacific Polymers; Elasto-Deck BT, or comparable product

FABRICATION
A.
Form mail boxes to required shapes and sizes, with true lines and angles, square, rigid, and
without warp, and with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal
edges and corners free of sharp edges and burrs and safe to touch. Fabricate doors of mail
boxes to preclude binding, warping, or misalignment.
B.
Preassemble mail boxes in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly.
C.
Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Form joints exposed to weather to
exclude water penetration.
D.
Drill or punch holes required for fasteners and remove burrs. Use security fasteners where
fasteners are exposed. If used, seal external rivets before finishing.
E.
Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible without distorting or discoloring

exposed surfaces. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces.
F.
Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies with manufacturer's standard welded or
mechanical joints. Provide subframes and reinforcement as required for a complete system to
support loads.
G.
Fabricate rack ladders to support indicated number of units to form a column of units.
H.
Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanic action by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by applying other permanent separation as
recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
2.4
FINISHES
A.

B.

C.
D.
or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
MAIL BOXES
10 5523 - 3

CA 15-001
1.
3.2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Examine walls and other adjacent construction for suitable conditions where units will be
installed.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install mail boxes level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions
and roughing-in drawings.
1.
Where dissimilar metals will be in permanent contact with each other, protect against
galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with polyurethane elastomeric coating or by
applying other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2.
Where aluminum will contact grout, concrete, masonry, or wood, protect against
corrosion by painting contact surfaces with polyurethane elastomeric coating.
3.
Final acceptance of mail boxes served by USPS depends on compliance with USPS
requirements.
B.
Horizontal Mail Receptacles: Install horizontal mail receptacles with center of tenant-door lock
cylinders and bottom of compartments at the maximum and minimum heights above finished
floor established by USPS and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Install removable-core and keyed-in door lock cylinders as required for each type of
cylinder lock.
2.
Install and align two rack ladders for the first column of mail receptacles and one rack
ladder for each additional adjacent column of mail receptacles.
3.3

A.
Arrange for USPS personnel to examine and test mail boxes served by USPS after they have
been installed according to USPS regulations.
B.
Obtain written final approval of mail boxes to be served by USPS. Obtain this approval from
USPS postmaster that authorizes mail collection for the served installation.
3.4

A.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as mail boxes are installed
unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B.
Adjust doors, hardware, and moving parts to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended
by manufacturer. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.
C.
Touch up marred finishes or replace mail boxes that cannot be restored to factory-finished
appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by mail box
manufacturer.
D.
Replace mail boxes that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by
finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
E.
On completion of mail box installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by
manufacturer.
F.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mail boxes.
G.
10 5523 - 4
MAIL BOXES
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 11 3100 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Kitchen appliances, including:
a.
Electric ranges.
b.
Microwave ovens.
c.
Range hoods.
d.
Dishwashers.
e.
Refrigerator/freezers.
2.
B.
1.3
Clothes washer/dryers.
1.
Cabinets and Countertops: Section 06 4023 "Interior Architectural Woodwork."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
and limitations.
1.
Include operating characteristics, dimensions of individual appliances, and finishes for
each appliance.
B.
Samples: Factory-applied color finishes, 12 inches by 12 inches.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Employer of workers trained for installation and maintenance of units
required for this Project.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Organization that maintains, within 60 miles of Project site, a

service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.
C.
Source Limitations:
1.
Obtain residential appliances through a single source and a single manufacturer.
2.
To the greatest extent possible, provide appliances by a single manufacturer for entire
Project.
a.
Provide products from same manufacturer for each type of appliance required.
D.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following product certifications:

1.
(National Fire Protection Association) NFPA: Provide electrical appliances listed and
labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
2.
(Underwriters Laboratory) UL and (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) NEMA:
Provide electrical components required as part of residential appliances that are listed
and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA standards.
3.
(National Appliance Energy Conservation Act) NAECA: Provide residential appliances
that comply with NAECA standards.
11 3100 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
E.
Regulatory Requirements, Accessibility: Where residential appliances are indicated to comply

with accessibility requirements, comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
(International Code Council) ICC A117.1.
1.
Operable Parts: Provide controls with forward reach no higher than 48 inches above the
floor, horizontal front reach no more than 25 inches, horizontal side reach no more than
24 inches, and that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that
operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.
2.
Refrigerator/Freezer: Provide 50 percent of freezer space within 54 inches of the floor.
F.
Energy Ratings: Provide residential appliances that carry labels indicating energy-cost analysis
(estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by the (Federal Trade
Commission) FTC Appliance Labeling Rule.
1.
Provide appliances that qualify for the (U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency/Department of Energy) EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling program.
G.

1.5

A.
1.6
Requirements."
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of each appliance

specified agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials
or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Electric Range: 5-year limited warranty for surface-burner elements.
2.
Refrigerator/Freezer: 5-year limited warranty for service on the sealed refrigeration
system.
3.
Dishwasher: 10-year warranty for in-home service against deterioration of tub and door
liner.
4.
Clothes Washer: 10-year limited warranty for the inner wash basket and outer tub, and
five-year limited warranty for the balance suspension system and drive transmission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2

1.
APPLIANCES
A.
Common Area Appliances:

1.
Miniature Refrigerator: Provide KitchenAid; KDDC24, or comparable product acceptable
to Architect.
2.
"Kegerator:" Provide True Manufacturing; TDD-1-S, or comparable product acceptable to
Architect.
3.
Microwave Oven: Provide General Electric Company; CEB1590SS, or comparable
11 3100 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
4.
5.
B.
2.3

CA 15-001
Dishwasher: Provide General Electric Company; CDWT280V, or comparable product

Icemaker: Provide U-Line; CLR2160, or comparable product acceptable to Architect.
Dwelling Unit Appliances:

1.
Refrigerator EQ-6: Provide Whirlpool; , or comparable product acceptable to Architect.
2.
"Microhood" EQ-7: Provide Whirlpool; , or comparable product acceptable to Architect.
3.
Range EQ-8: Provide Whirlpool; , or comparable product acceptable to Architect.
4.
Dishwasher EQ-9: Provide Whirlpool; , or comparable product acceptable to Architect.
FINISHES
A.

B.
C.
Color-Coated Finish: Provide appliances with manufacturer's standard finish complying with
manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application,
baking, color, gloss, and minimum dry film thickness for painted finishes.
D.
Stainless-Steel Finish: Provide appliances with manufacturer's standard finish complying with
manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including ground and polished
stainless-steel surfaces for uniform, directionally textured finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2

INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed
fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are
completely concealed.
C.
Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in
each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.
D.
Utilities: Refer to Divisions 22 and 26 for plumbing and electrical requirements.
3.3

A.
Test each item of residential appliances to verify proper operation. Make necessary
adjustments.
B.
Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed.
C.
Remove packing material from residential appliances and leave units ready for operation.
D.
Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
11 3100 - 3

CA 15-001
E.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
11 3100 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 12 2113 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes horizontal louver blinds with aluminum slats.
B.
1.
a.
b.
2.
3.
1.3

Related Sections:
a.
12 2116 "Vertical Louver Blinds."
b.
12 2413 "Roller Window Shades."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For blinds, manufacturer's published technical data sheets, including product
description and applications, technical properties, features, benefits, and limitations.
B.
installation requirements for horizontal louver blinds.
1.
Illustrate each distinct mounting configuration and fully detail provisions for attachment to
each applicable substrate.
a.
Indicate required operational clearances.
b.
C.
Samples:
1.
Full-size unit, not less than 16 inches wide by 24 inches long, including valance.
2.
Slats: Not less than 12 inches long, for each type and color of blind indicated.
D.
Window Treatment Schedule: Use same room designations indicated on Drawings. Include
the following:
1.
Blind designation.
2.
Size.
3.
Mounting configuration.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal louver blinds from a single source and a single
manufacturer.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide horizontal louver blinds with the fire-test-response

characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated
below by (Underwriter's Laboratory) UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing
and inspecting agency.
1.
Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes (National Fire Protection Association) NFPA 701.
12 2113 - 1

CA 15-001
C.
1.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Product Standard: Provide horizontal louver blinds complying with (American National
Standards Institute/Window Covering Safety Council) ANSI/WCSC A 100.1.
A.
1.6
1.
Deliver horizontal louver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and
product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings
and in a window treatment schedule.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet and
dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature
and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its
intended use.
B.
Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction,
verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation
hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.
a.
b.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, ALUMINUM SLATS

A.
Slats: Aluminum; alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and finish
indicated; with crowned profile and radiused corners.
1.
Width: 1 inch.
a.
Spacing: 0.79 inch.
2.
3.
Thickness: Not less than 0.008 inch.

Finish: One color.
a.
Ionized Coating: Antistatic, dust-repellent, baked polyester finish.
B.
Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; fully enclosing
operating mechanisms on three sides and end plugs and the following:
1.
Capacity: One blind per headrail.
2.
Integrated Headrail/Valance: Curved face.
3.
Light-blocking lower back lip.
4.
Tilt limiter with preselected degree settings.
C.
Bottom Rail: Formed-steel or extruded-aluminum tube, with plastic or metal capped ends top
contoured to match crowned shape of slat, bottom contoured for minimizing light gaps; with
enclosed ladders and tapes to prevent contact with sill.
D.
Ladders: Evenly spaced to prevent long-term slat sag.

1.
For Blinds with Nominal Slat Width 1 Inch or Less: Braided string.
E.
Lift Cords: Manufacturer's standard.
12 2113 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
F.
Tilt Control: Enclosed worm-gear mechanism, slip clutch or detachable wand preventing
overrotation, and linkage rod, and the following:
1.
Tilt Operation: Manual with clear plastic wand.
2.
Length of Tilt Control: Length required to make operation convenient from floor level.
3.
Tilt: Full.
G.
Lift Operation: Manual, cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind at any position in ascending or
descending travel.
H.
Tilt-Control and Cord-Lock Position: Right side of headrail, unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Valance: Manufacturer's standard.

1.
Finish Color Characteristics: Match color, texture, pattern, and gloss of slats.
J.
Mounting: As indicated on approved Shop Drawings, permitting easy removal and replacement
without damaging blind or adjacent surfaces and finishes; with spacers and shims required for
blind placement and alignment indicated.
1.
Provide intermediate support brackets if end support spacing exceeds spacing
recommended by manufacturer for weight and size of blind.
K.
Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard.
L.
Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2
FABRICATION
A.
Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.

1.
Lift-and-Tilt Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts.
B.
Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows,
measured at 74 deg F:
1.
Blind Units Installed Between (Inside) Jambs: Width equal to 1/4 inch per side or 1/2 inch
total, plus or minus 1/8 inch, less than jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which each
blind is installed. Length equal to 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch, less than head-to-sill
dimension of opening in which each blind is installed.
2.
Blind Units Installed Outside Jambs: Width and length as indicated, with terminations
between blinds of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined
vertical separations between openings.
C.
Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of blind, for supporting
headrail, valance, and operating hardware, and for hardware position and blind mounting
method indicated.
D.
Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal
noncorrosive to blind hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to
supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use.
E.
Color-Coated Finish:
1.
Metal: For components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked finish
complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including
pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
F.
Component Color: Provide rails, cords, ladders, and exposed-to-view metal and plastic
matching or coordinating with slat color, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
12 2113 - 3

CA 15-001
1.
3.2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting
performance.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb and aligned with adjacent units according to
manufacturer's written instructions, and located so exterior slat edges in any position are not
closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. Install intermediate support as required to prevent
deflection in headrail. Allow clearances between adjacent blinds and for operating glazed
opening's operation hardware if any.
B.
Flush Mounted: Install horizontal louver blinds with slat edges flush with finish face of opening
if slats are tilted open.
3.3

A.
Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free of binding or
malfunction throughout entire operational range.
B.
Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
C.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time of
D.
Replace damaged horizontal louver blinds that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by
Architect, before time of Substantial Completion.
E.
12 2113 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 12 2116 - VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes vertical louver blinds with PVC vanes.
B.
1.
a.
b.
2.
3.
1.3

Related Sections:
a.
12 2113 "Horizontal Louver Blinds."
b.
12 2413 "Roller Window Shades."
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product, manufacturer's published technical data sheets,
limitations.
B.
fabrication and installation requirements for vertical louver blinds and motorized operators.
1.
a.
b.
C.
Samples: Full-size unit, not less than 16 inches wide by 24 inches long.
1.
Include valance material, not less than 18 inches long.
D.
Window Treatment Schedule: Use same room designations indicated on Drawings. Include
the following:
1.
Blind designation.
2.
Draw and stack configuration.
3.
Size.
4.
Mounting configuration.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain vertical louver blinds from a single source and a single
manufacturer.
B.
Product Standard: Provide horizontal louver blinds complying with (American National
Standards Institute/Window Covering Safety Council) ANSI/WCSC A 100.1.
1.5

A.
12 2116 - 1

CA 15-001
1.
1.6
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Deliver vertical louver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product
name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install vertical louver blinds until construction and wet and
finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and
humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its
intended use.
B.
Field Measurements: Where vertical louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction,
verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed
units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from
Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
1.
a.
b.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS, PVC VANES

A.
Vanes: Lead-free, UV-stabilized, integrally colored, opaque, permanently flexible, extruded

PVC that will not crack or yellow; with not less than 3/8-inch overlap when vanes are rotated
fully closed.
1.
Width: 3-1/2 inches.
2.
Profile: Crowned.
3.
Features:
a.
Bottom chain.
B.
Headrail: Channel, formed steel or extruded aluminum with long edges returned or rolled and
ends capped. Headrail encloses operating mechanisms including carrier-spacing mechanism
that provides uniform vane spacing when blinds are traversed fully across headrail (closed).
1.
Manual Traverse Control: Wand.
2.
Manual Rotation Control: Nickel-plated metal bead chain.
3.
Manual Control Locations: Stack side.
4.
Draw and Stack: One way, stack per approved Window Treatment Schedule.
C.
Carriers: Engineered plastic with gears to align and synchronize vane rotation and stems that
allow vane removal and replacement. Lead carriers have self-lubricating wheels or elongated
bearing surfaces; following carriers have self-lubricating wheels.
D.
Valance: Manufacturer's standard with vane insert.
E.
Mounting Brackets: With spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment
indicated.
1.
Type: As indicated on approved Shop Drawings.
2.
Intermediate Support: Provide intermediate support brackets to produce support spacing
recommended by blind manufacturer for weight and size of blind.
F.
Colors, Textures, and Patterns:

1.
Vanes: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
12 2116 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.
2.2

CA 15-001
Components: Provide materials exposed to view matching or coordinating with vanes

FABRICATION
A.
Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to cover window and other openings as indicated on
approved Shop Drawings and as follows, measured at 74 deg F:
1.
Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in
which blind is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2 inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch.
Length equal to head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening in which blind is installed less
1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch.
2.
Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between
blinds of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical
separations between openings.
B.

1.
Rotation-and-Traverse Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts.
C.
Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of blind, for supporting
headrail, valance, and operating hardware and for bracket positions and blind mounting method
indicated.
D.
noncorrosive to brackets and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting
substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use.
E.
Color-Coated Finish: For metal components exposed to view unless anodized or plated finish
is indicated. Apply manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with manufacturer's written
instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum
dry film thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2

INSTALLATION
A.
3.3
Install vertical louver blinds level and plumb, aligned and centered on openings, and aligned
with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Locate so exterior vane edges are not closer than 2 inches from interior faces of glass
and not closer than 1-1/2 inches from interior faces of glazing frames through full
operating ranges of blinds.
2.
Install mounting and intermediate brackets to prevent deflection of headrails.
3.
Install with clearances that prevent interference with adjacent blinds, adjacent
construction, and operating hardware of glazed openings, other window treatments, and
similar building components and furnishings.
A.
Adjust vertical louver blinds to operate free of binding or malfunction through full operating
ranges.
B.
Clean vertical louver blind surfaces after installation according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
12 2116 - 3

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
C.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer and that ensures that vertical louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time
of Substantial Completion.
D.
Replace damaged vertical louver blinds that cannot be repaired in a manner approved by
Architect before time of Substantial Completion.
E.
12 2116 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 12 2413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes roller shades.
B.
1.
a.
b.
2.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For roller shade assembly, manufacturer's published technical data sheets,
limitations.
1.
Include material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features,
and available finishes.
B.
requirements for roller shades.
1.
Indicate field and established dimensions, including operating clearances for glazing
units, where applicable.
2.
a.
b.
C.
Samples: For each type of shade material required, 12 inch square section of fabric, from dye
lot used for the Work, with specified treatments applied.
1.
Where applicable, include complete pattern repeat.
2.
Mark top and face of material.
D.
Window Treatment Schedule: Indicate location and extent of roller shades. Use same
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from a single source and a single manufacturer.
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roller shade band materials with the fire-testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method
indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction:
1.
Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes (National Fire Protection Association) NFPA 701.
12 2413 - 1

CA 15-001
D.
1.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Product Standard: Provide roller shades complying with (American National Standards
Institute/Window Covering Manufacturers Association) ANSI/WCMA A100.1.
A.
1.6
1.
Deliver shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, and
location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings and in a window
treatment schedule.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and dirty
finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
B.
Field Measurements: Where roller shades are required to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
1.
In addition to measuring fixed construction, measure and note required clearances for
operable glazed units' operation throughout the entire operating range, and for hardware.
a.
b.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2

1.
MATERIALS
A.
2.3
Shade Band Material: Single thickness non-raveling vinyl fabric, woven from extruded vinyl
yarn, in colors selected from manufacturer's full range.
1.
Bottom Hem: Straight.
COMPONENTS
A.
Rollers: Electrogalvanized or epoxy primed steel or extruded-aluminum tube of diameter and

wall thickness required to support and fit internal components of operating system and the
weight and width of shade band material without sagging; designed to be easily removable
from support brackets; with manufacturer's standard method for attaching shade material.
Provide capacity necessary for height of openings.
1.
Where indicated, provide units which accommodate two rollers for translucent and room
darkening shade bands.
2.
Direction of Roll: Regular, from back of roller.
12 2413 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
B.
Mount:
1.
Fascia: L-shaped, formed-steel sheet or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or
rolled; continuous panel concealing front and bottom of shade roller, brackets, and
operating hardware and operators; removable design for access.
C.
Bottom Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum, with plastic or metal capped ends. Provide
concealed, by pocket of shade material, internal-type bottom bar with concealed weight bar as
required for smooth, properly balanced shade operation.
2.4
SHADE OPERATION
A.
2.5
Continuous-loop bead-chain, clutch, and cord tensioner and bracket lift operator.
1.
Position of Clutch Operator: Right side of roller, as determined by hand of user facing
shade from inside, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Clutch: Capacity to lift size and weight of shade; sized to fit roller or provide adaptor.
3.
Lift-Assist Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard spring assist for balancing roller shade
weight and lifting heavy roller shades.
4.
Loop Length: Length required to make operation convenient from floor level.
5.
Bead Chain: Nickel-plated metal.
6.
Cord Tensioner Mounting: Wall.
7.
Operating Function: Stop and hold shade at any position in ascending or descending
travel.
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.6
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide MechoShade Systems, Inc.; Mecho5, or comparable product

FABRICATION
A.

1.
Lifting Mechanism: With permanently lubricated moving parts.
B.
Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows,
measured at 74 deg F:
1.
Shade Units Installed between (Inside) Jambs: Edge of shade not more than 1/4 inch
from face of jamb. Length equal to head to sill dimension of opening in which each
shade is installed.
2.
Shade Units Installed Outside Jambs: Width and length as indicated, with terminations
between shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined
vertical separations between openings.
C.
Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting
roller, and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting method
indicated.
D.
noncorrosive to shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to
supporting substrate; and supporting shades and accessories under conditions of normal use.
E.
Color-Coated Finish: For metal components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard
baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including
pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
F.
Colors of Metal and Plastic Components Exposed to View: As selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range, unless otherwise indicated.
12 2413 - 3

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
1.
installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting
performance.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's
written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of
glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.
B.
Mounting: As indicated on approved Shop Drawings, permitting easy removal and replacement
without damaging roller shade or adjacent surfaces and finishes.
C.
Connections: Connect motorized operators to building electrical system.
3.3

A.
Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or
malfunction throughout entire operational range.
B.
Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of
D.
Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect,
before time of Substantial Completion.
E.

adjust, operate, and maintain roller shades, in accordance with Section 01 7900 Demonstration
and Training."
F.
12 2413 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 12 4813 - ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes roll-up rail mats.
B.
1.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For mats and frames, manufacturer's published technical data sheets, including
product description and applications, technical properties, features, benefits, and limitations.
1.
finishes for floor mats and frames.
A.
Shop Drawings: Plans, sections, and details necessary to demonstrate fabrication and
installation requirements for mats and frames.
1.
Indicate sizes of each frame required.
2.
Include frame member intersection and mounting details.
3.
a.
B.
Samples:
1.
Tread Rail: 18 inch length.
2.
Frame Members: 18 inch length.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain entrance floor mats and frames from a single source and a single
manufacturer.
B.
Structural Performance: Provide roll-up rail mats and frames capable of withstanding the
following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1.
Uniform floor load of 300 lbf/sq. ft.
2.
Wheel load of 350 lb per wheel.
C.
Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
(International Code Council) ICC A117.1.
1.5

A.
Requirements."
12 4813 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2

1.
ROLL-UP RAIL MATS
A.
Roll-up, Aluminum-Rail Hinged Mats: Extruded-aluminum tread rails 2 inches wide by 3/8 inch
thick, sitting on continuous vinyl cushions.
1.
Tread Inserts: 1/4 inch high, 28 oz./sq. yd. weight, level-cut, nylon-pile, fusion-bonded
carpet.
2.
Colors, Textures, and Patterns of Inserts: As selected by Architect from full range of
industry colors.
3.
Rail Color: Mill finish.
4.
Hinges: Aluminum.
B.
Surface-Mounted Frames:
1.
Tapered Frames: Tapered flexible vinyl edge-frame members, not less than 2 inches
wide with welded mitered corners.
a.
Vinyl Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed manufacturer's
recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning.
Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes.
Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units
without joints.
B.
Surface-Mounted Frames: As indicated for permanent surface-mounted installation, complete

with corner connectors, splice plates or connecting pins, and postinstalled expansion anchors.
C.
Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum frames that contact cementitious material with
manufacturer's standard protective coating.
2.4
FINISHES
A.

B.

C.
Aluminum Finishes:
1.
Mill Finish: (Aluminum Association) AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated); grind
and buff as required to remove scratches, welding, or abrasions produced in fabrication
process.
12 4813 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
1.
Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location,
sizes,and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats and frames.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install recessed mat frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Set mat tops at
height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action; coordinate tops of mat
surfaces with bottoms of doors that swing across mats to provide clearance between door and
mat.
1.
Install necessary shims, spacers, and anchorages for proper location, and secure
attachment of frames.
B.
Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer's written instructions at locations

indicated; coordinate with entrance locations and traffic patterns.
1.
Anchor fixed surface-type frame members to floor with devices spaced as recommended
by manufacturer.
3.3

A.
After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or
fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection
until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion.
B.
12 4813 - 3
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 14 2126 - MACHINE ROOMLESS ELEVATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes machine roomless passenger elevators.
B.
1.
Shaft Construction:
a.
b.
Section 04 2000 "Unit Masonry."
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Pit Ladders: Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications."

Plates and Brackets For Supporting Guide-Rails: Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications."
Telephone Service: Section 27 1500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling."
Security Access Components: Section 28 1300 "Access Control."
DEFINITIONS
A.
Definitions in (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) ASME A17.1 apply to work of this
Section.
B.
Defective Elevator Work: Operation or control system failure, including excessive malfunctions;
performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of
materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or
vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of elevator and accessory product required, manufacturer's
B.
requirements for elevators.
1.
Include large-scale layout of car control station.
2.
Indicate variations from specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads
imposed on building structure at points of support, and maximum and average power
demands.
3.
C.
Samples: For exposed finishes of cars, hoistway doors and frames, and signal equipment; 12
inch square Samples of sheet materials; and 18 inch lengths of running trim members.
1.5
A.
Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway and pit
layout and dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, and electrical service, as shown and
specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided.
14 2126 - 1

CA 15-001
1.6
Design Development
October 02, 2015
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or manufacturer's authorized representative who

is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain elevators, including elevators specified in another Division 14

Section, through a single source and a single manufacturer.
1.
Provide major elevator components, controllers, signal fixtures, door operators, car
frames, cabs, and entrances, manufactured by a single manufacturer.
C.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1.

1.
Elevator importance factor is 1.0.
D.
Regulatory Requirements, Accessibility: Where elevators are indicated to comply with

accessibility requirements, comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
International Code Council/American National Standards Institute ICC/ANSI A117.1.
E.
Fire-Rated Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies complying with
(National Fire Protection Association) NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings
indicated, based on testing at as close to neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252
or (Underwriters Laboratory) UL 10B.
1.7

A.
1.8
1.
Store materials, components, and equipment off of ground, under cover, and in a dry
location. Handle according to manufacturer's written recommendations to prevent
damage, deterioration, or soiling.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, and items that are embedded in concrete or
masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish templates and installation instructions and deliver to
Project site in time for installation.
B.
Coordinate sequence of elevator installation with other work to avoid delaying the Work.
C.
Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to elevators including pit ladders,
sumps, and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; and electrical service, electrical outlets, lights,
and switches in pits and machine rooms.
1.9
WARRANTY
A.
1.10
A.
Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees

to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide one year's full
maintenance service by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive
maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and
adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts
and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.
14 2126 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
1.
2.

CA 15-001
Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working

hours.
Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service.
a.
Response Time: Two hours or less.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2

1.
SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS
A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Where components are not
otherwise indicated, provide standard components published by manufacturer as included in
standard preengineered elevator systems and as required for complete system.
B.
Gearless Traction Hoist Machine: Alternating current induction or permanent-magnet3

synchronous motors; alternating current, variable voltage, variable frequency (ACV F) gearless
traction type motor with brake, drive sheave, and deflector sheave mounted in proper alignment
on a common, isolated machine support frame at the top of the hoistway or mounted on the
back of the guide rail at the top landing.
1.
Provide hoist machine mounted direct drive, digital, closed-loop velocity encoder.
C.
Solid State Power Conversion and Regulation Unit: Solid-state, ACV F, insulated gate bipolar
transistor (IGBT) converter/inverter drives.
1.
Design unit to limit current, suppress noise, and prevent transient voltage feedback into
building power supply. Provide internal heat sink cooling fans for the power drive portion
of the converter panels. Conform to (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers)
IEEE Standard 519 for line harmonics and switching noise.
2.
Isolate unit to minimize noise and vibration transmission. Provide isolation transformers,
filter networks, and choke inductors.
3.
Suppress solid-state converter noises, radio frequency interference, and eliminate
regenerative transients induced into the mainline feeders or the building standby power
generator.
4.
Provide supplemental direct-current power for the operation of hoist machine brake, door
operator, dispatch processor, signal fixtures, etc., from separate static power supply.
3
5.
ACV F drives for gearless elevators shall be regenerative, and utilize IGBT
converter/inverter and dynamic braking during overhauling condition.
D.
Encoder: Direct drive, solid-state, digital type. Update car position at each floor and
automatically restore after power loss.
E.
Controller: UL labeled.
1.
Compartment: Securely mount all assemblies, power supplies, chassis switches, relays,
etc., on a substantial, self-supporting steel frame. Completely enclose equipment with
covers. Provide means to prevent overheating.
2.
Microprocessor-Related Hardware:
a.
Provide built-in noise suppression devices which provide a high level of noise
immunity on all solid-state hardware and devices.
b.
Provide power supplies with noise suppression devices.
c.
Isolate inputs from external devices (such as pushbuttons) with "opto-isolation
modules."
d.
Design control circuits with one leg of power supply grounded.
14 2126 - 3

CA 15-001
e.
f.
g.
h.
3.
4.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Safety circuits shall not be affected by accidental grounding of any part of the
system.
System shall automatically restart when power is restored.
System memory shall be retained in event of power failure or disturbance.
Provide equipment with electro-magnetic interference shielding complying with
Federal Communications Commission guidelines.
Wiring: (Canadian Standards Association) CSA-labeled copper for factory wiring. Route
wiring interconnections and securely attach to studs or terminals.
Permanently mark components (relays, fuses, printed-circuit boards, etc.) with symbols
shown on wiring diagrams.
F.
Governor: Centrifugal-type, car driven with pull-through jaws and bi-directional shut-down
switches. Provide required brackets and supports for attachment to guide rail or machine
support-frame.
G.
Emergency Brake: Provide means to prevent ascending car over-speed and unintended car
movement per ASME A17.1.
H.
Noise and Vibration Isolation: Mechanically and electrically isolate elevator equipment,
including supports and attachment to building, from building structure and main line-power
feeders.
I.
Sound Isolation: (American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air-Conditioning Engineers)

ASHRAE "Handbook-- HVAC Applications," Chapter 47, "Sound and Vibration Control."
1.
Noise from elevator equipment operation shall not exceed 80 dBA, dBA readings taken
3'-0" above floor and 3'-0" from equipment using, "A"-weighted scale.
J.
Car Frame and Platform: Welded steel units.
K.
Guides: Provide either roller guides or sliding guides at top and bottom of car and
counterweight frames. If sliding guides are used, provide guide-rail lubricators or polymercoated, nonlubricated guides.
L.
Car and Counterweight Buffers: Oil type.

1.
Provide blocking and support channels.
M.
Sheaves: Machined grooves and sealed bearings.

1.
Mount to machine support-frame and car and counterweight structure.
N.
Counterweight: Steel frame with metal weights.
O.
Counterweight Guide Shoes: Spring dampened.
P.
Counterweight Guard: Metal guard in pit.
Q.
Governor Rope and Encoder Tape Tensioning Sheaves: Mount sheaves and support frame on
pit floor or guide rail.
1.
Provide frame with guides or pivot point enabling free vertical movement and proper
tension of rope and tape.
R.
Hoist and Governor Ropes: Provide one of the following:

1.
8 by 19 or 8 by 25 Seale construction, traction steel type. Fasten with staggered length,
adjustable, spring isolated wedge type shackles.
2.
Aramid fibre with flame retardant covering. Fasten with adjustable, spring isolated wedge
type shackles specifically designed for use with Aramid rope.
3.
Flat, polyurethane coated reinforced steel belts.
S.
Terminal Stopping: Provide normal and final devices.
14 2126 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
T.
Door Reopening Devices

1.
Infrared Array: Provide door reopening devices with uniform 3 dimensional array of
minimum 36 microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car
entrance. Interruption of one or more of the light beams shall cause doors to stop and
reopen.
2.
Nudging Feature: When car doors are prevented from closing for adjustable predetermined time, buzzer shall sound and doors shall close at reduced kinetic energy.
U.
Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for
installing guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work where installation of
devices is specified in another Section.
V.
Machine and Equipment Support Beams:

1.
Provide structural steel frame required for direct support and attachment to building
structure of hoist machine, deflector sheaves, overhead sheaves, governor, and hoist
rope dead-end hitch assemblies.
2.
Provide bearing plates, anchors, shelf angles, blocking, embedment, etc. for support and
attachment of machine support-frame or equipment to the building structure.
3.
Isolate machine and/or machine support-frame to prevent noise and vibration
transmission to building structure.
W.
Electrical Wiring and Wiring Connections:

1.
Conductors and Connections: Copper, with individual wires coded and connections on
identified studs or terminal blocks.
a.
Use no splices or similar connections except at terminal blocks, control
compartments, or junction boxes.
b.
Provide 10 percent spare conductors.
c.
Run spare wires from car connection points to individual elevator controllers.
d.
Provide four pairs of spare shielded communication wiring in addition to that
required to connect specified items. Tag spares.
2.3
2.
Conduit: Minimum 1/2 inch galvanized steel conduit, electrical metallic tubing (EMT), or
duct.
a.
Flexible heavy-duty service cord may be used between fixed car-wiring and car
door-switches for door-protective devices.
3.
Traveling Cables: Flame and moisture-resistant outer cover.

a.
Prevent traveling cable from rubbing or chafing against hoistway or equipment
within hoistway.
b.
Provide five pair of shielded wires and two RG-6/U type coaxial cables for each car
card-reader (where applicable).
4.
Auxiliary Wiring: Connect fire alarm initiating devices, emergency two-way

communication system, firefighters phone jack, and card-reader, where applicable, in
each car controller.
OPERATION SYSTEMS
A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system for each elevator
as required to provide type of operation system indicated.
B.
Single-Car Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the
following operational features for elevators where indicated:
1.
Battery-Powered Lowering: If power fails and car is at a floor, it remains at that floor,
opens its doors, and shuts down. If car is between floors, it is lowered to a preselected
floor, opens its doors, and shuts down. If car is below the preselected floor, it is lowered
to the next lower floor, opens its doors, and shuts down. System includes rechargeable
battery and automatic recharging system.
14 2126 - 5

CA 15-001
2.
3.
C.
Automatic Dispatching of Loaded Car: Car doors shall close when car load exceeds 80
percent of rated capacity.
Nuisance Call Cancel: Car calls shall be canceled when number of calls exceeds pre-set
quantity and car load is less than pre-set weight.
a.
Pre-set number of calls and weight shall be adjustable.
Security Features: Provide the following security features, where indicated. Security features
shall not affect emergency firefighters' service.
1.
Card-Reader Operation: Card readers at [car control stations] [and] [hall push-button
stations] authorize calls.
a.
Security system determines landings and times calls require authorization by cardreader.
1)
Provide conductors in traveling cable and remote control panel for
interconnecting card readers, other security-access equipment, and elevator
controllers.
2)
[Provide space for card reader in car control panel] [Provide card-reader
integral with each car control panel].
b.
c.
2.4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Security-access system equipment is specified in Division 28 Section "Access

Control."
Security access system equipment is by others.
CAR ENCLOSURES
A.
Provide enameled-steel car enclosure including access doors, power door operators, and
ventilation, equipped to receive removable car finishes.
1.
Provide manufacturer's standard railings complying with ASME A17.1 on car tops where
required.
B.
Materials and Finishes: Provide manufacturer's standard materials, but not less than the
following:
1.
Subfloor: Underlayment grade, exterior plywood, 5/8-inch nominal thickness.
2.
Enameled-Steel Wall Panels: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from coldrolled steel sheet. Provide with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range.
3.
Stainless-Steel Wall Panels: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainlesssteel sheet.
4.
Plastic-Laminate Wall Panels: Plastic laminate adhesively applied to 1/2 inch fireretardant-treated particleboard with plastic-laminate panel backing and manufacturer's
standard protective edge trim. Panels have a flame-spread index of 75 or less, when
tested according to ASTM E 84.
a.
Color, Texture, and Pattern: As selected by Architect from plastic-laminate
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
14 2126 - 6
Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment.

Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car.
Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel
sheet.
Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on car doors.
Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick.
Luminous Ceiling: Fluorescent light fixtures and ceiling panels of translucent acrylic or
other permanent rigid plastic.
[Metal] [Metallic-Finish, Plastic-Laminate] Ceiling: Flush panels, with [LED
downlights in the center of] [four low-voltage downlights in] each panel.
a.
[Align ceiling panel joints with joints between wall panels.]
Design Development
October 02, 2015
12.
2.5

CA 15-001
Handrails: Manufacturer's standard, as selected by Architect from full range of materials,

styles, and finishes.
HOISTWAY ENTRANCES
A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding hoistway entrances, complete with

track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories.
1.
Provide frame size and profile to coordinate with hoistway wall construction.
2.
Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, provide self-supporting frames with
reinforced head sections.
B.
Materials and Fabrication: Provide manufacturer's standard materials, but not less than the
following:
1.
Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed from stainless-steel sheet.
2.
Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel
sheet.
3.
Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on doors matching door edges.
4.
Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick.
5.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107.
2.6
SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
A.
Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been
fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with long-life incandescent lamps and acrylic or other
permanent, nonyellowing translucent plastic diffusers or LEDs.
B.
Car Control Panels: Provide manufacturer's standard recessed car control panel. Mount in
return panel adjacent to car door, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Mark buttons and switches for required use or function. Use both tactile symbols and
Braille.
2.
Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital-type car position indicator, with traveldirection arrows, located above car controls.
a.
Include audible signal to indicate car is either stopping or passing each of the floors
served.
3.
4.
5.
Provide integral "No Smoking" sign with text and graphics required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
Emergency Communication System: Provide Two-way voice communication system,
with visible signal, which telephones elevator monitor and does not require handset use.
a.
Locate in flush-mounted cabinet in control panel, with identification, instructions for
use, and battery backup power supply.
Firefighters' Two-Way Telephone Communication Service: Provide telephone jack and
required conductors in traveling cable for firefighters' two-way telephone communication
service.
C.
Hall Push-Button Stations: Manufacturer's standard units with flat faceplate for wall-mounting
with body of unit recessed in wall.
1.
Provide at each landing for each single elevator or group of elevators, but not less than
one station for each four elevators in a group.
D.
Hall Lanterns: Manufacturer's standard units with illuminated "up-down" arrows, single arrow at
top and bottom landings; flat faceplate for wall-mounting with body of unit recessed in wall.
1.
Annunciator: Provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel.
a.
Signals sound once for "up" and twice for "down."
14 2126 - 7

CA 15-001
E.
2.7
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Corridor Call Station Pictograph Signs: Provide signs matching hall push-button stations with
text and graphics required by authorities having jurisdiction, indicating that in case of fire
elevators are out of service and exits should be used instead.
1.
Provide one sign at each hall push-button station, unless otherwise indicated.
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Provide machine roomless elevators by:
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide KONE Inc.; EcoSpace, or comparable product acceptable to

Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
1.
Examine elevator areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance. Verify critical dimensions and examine
supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed.
INSTALLATION
A.
Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted
connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment,
inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with American Welding
Society standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators.
B.
Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts

designed to effectively prevent transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby eliminate
sources of structure-borne noise from elevator system.
C.
Lubricate operating parts of systems as recommended by manufacturers.
D.
Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails
for accurate alignment of entrances with car. Where possible, delay installation of sills and
frames until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension
at each landing.
E.
Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch, up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel.
F.
Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout.
G.
Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
For groups of elevators, locate hall push-button stations between two elevators at center
of group or at location most convenient for approaching passengers.
2.
Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance.
3.
Mount hall lanterns minimum of 72 inches above floor.
3.3
TEMPORARY USE
A.
Comply with the following requirements for elevator used for construction purposes:
1.
Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished car,
to protect finishes from damage.
2.
Provide strippable protective film on entrance and car doors and frames.
3.
Provide padded wood bumpers on entrance door frames covering jambs and frame
faces.
14 2126 - 8
Design Development
October 02, 2015
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.4

CA 15-001
Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as needed to
protect elevator and elevator equipment.
Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity.
Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service. Include preventive
maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication,
cleaning, and adjusting as necessary for proper elevator operation at rated speed and
capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and
installation of original equipment.
Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains of
correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required
repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.

A.
Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting use (either
temporary or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended
by ASME A17.1 and by governing regulations and agencies.
B.
Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times tests
are to be performed on elevators.
3.5

A.

operate, adjust, and maintain elevator(s). Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and
Training."
B.
Check operation of elevator with Owner's personnel present and before date of Substantial
Completion. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly.
C.
Check operation of elevator with Owner's personnel present not more than one month before
end of warranty period. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning
properly.
D.
3.6
ELEVATOR SCHEDULE
A.
Type: Passenger.
1.
Rated Load: 3500 lbs.
2.
Rated Speed: <Insert speed>.
3.
Car Height: 96 inches.
4.
Entrances: Single-sliding.
a.
Size: 42 by 84 inches.
b.
Fire Protection Rating: As indicated on Drawings.
5.
Provide blanket hooks and two complete sets of full-height protective blankets.
14 2126 - 9
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 14 9182 - TRASH CHUTES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes waste chutes.
B.
1.
Support Framing: Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications."
2.
Vent Flashing: Section07 6200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
3.
Firestopping: Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping."
4.
Fire Sprinklers: Section 21 0500 "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression."
5.
Water Service Connections: Section 22 0500 "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer's published technical data sheets, including product description
and applications, technical properties, features, benefits, and limitations.
A.
and installation requirements for facility chutes.
1.
Fully detail provisions for attachment to building structure.
a.
2.
1.4
Illustrate required operational clearances.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Standard: Provide chutes complying with NFPA 82.
B.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with (National Fire Protection Association)
NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated.
1.
Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric (neutral) pressure according to NFPA 252 or
(Underwriters Laboratory) UL 10B.
2.
Intake Door: Class B labeled; 1-1/2-hour fire rated.
3.
Discharge Door: Class B labeled; 1-hour fire rated.
4.
Access Door: Class B labeled; 1-1/2-hour fire rated with 30-minute temperature rise of
250 deg F.
1.5

A.
Requirements."
TRASH CHUTES
14 9182 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CHUTES
A.
Chute Metal: Aluminum-coated, cold-rolled, commercial steel sheet; (ASTM International)

ASTM A 463, Type 1 with not less than T1-40 coating.
1.
B.
Size: 24-inch diameter.
2.2
DOORS
A.
Intake Door Assemblies: ASTM A 240, Type 304 stainless-steel, self-closing units with positive
latch and latch handle; as required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated; and with frame
suitable for enclosing chase construction.
1.
Door Type: Hopper.
2.
Size: Manufacturer's standard size for door type, chute type, and diameter indicated.
3.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard satin or No. 3 directional polish.
4.
Baffles: Rubber-back draft baffles at each intake.
5.
Mechanical Interlocks: Interlock system operated from discharge door to automatically
lock intake doors.
B.
Discharge-Door Assemblies: Aluminum-coated-steel doors as required to provide fireprotection ratings indicated; equipped with fusible links that cause doors to close in the event of
fire.
1.
Direct Vertical Discharge: Provide inclined, horizontally rolling, shutter-type unit.
C.
Access Door Assemblies: Manufacturer's standard ASTM A 240, Type 302/304 stainless-steel
doors; as required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated; with frame suitable for enclosing
chase construction; and in satin or No. 3 directional polish finish.
D.
Manual Control System: Control system with manual switches that lock doors of chute during
shutdown hours and service operations.
2.3
ACCESSORIES
A.
Flushing Spray Unit: NPS 3/4 spray head unit located in chute above highest intake door,
ready for hot-water piping connection, and with access for head and piping maintenance.
B.
Intake Door Baffles: Rubber baffles, 1/8 inch thick.
C.
Sound Dampening: Manufacturer's standard sound deadening coating on exterior of chute and
sound and vibration isolator pads at floor supporting frames.
2.4
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.5
Provide chutes by:

1.
American Chute Systems, Inc.
2.
Chutes International.
3.
Midland Chutes.
4.
U.S. Chutes.
5.
Valiant Products, Inc.
6.
Western Chutes.
7.
Wilkinson Hi-Rise, LLC.
FABRICATION
A.
General: Factory assemble chutes to greatest extent practical with continuously welded or
lock-seamed joints without bolts, rivets, or clips projecting on chute interior. Include intake door
14 9182 - 2
TRASH CHUTES
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
assemblies and metal supporting framing at each floor, and chute expansion joints between
each support point.
B.
Roof Vent: Fabricate vent unit to extend minimum 48 inches above roof with full-diameter,
screened vent and metal safety cap or glass explosion-release cap. Fabricate with roof-deck
flange, counterflashing, and clamping ring of nonferrous metal compatible with chute metal.
C.
Equipment Access: Fabricate chutes with access for maintaining equipment located within the
chute, such as flushing units, fire sprinklers, and plumbing and electrical connections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2

INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with NFPA 82 requirements and with chute manufacturer's written
instructions. Assemble components with tight, nonleaking joints. Anchor securely to supporting
structure to withstand impact and stresses on vent units. Install chute and components to
maintain fire-resistive construction of chute and enclosing chase.
B.
Install chutes plumb, without offsets or obstructions that might prevent materials from free
falling within chutes.
C.
Anchor roof flanges of chute vents before installing roofing and flashing. Install chute-vent
counterflashing after roofing and roof-penetration flashing are installed.
D.
Intake and Discharge Doors: Interface door units with throat sections of chutes for safe, snagresistant, sanitary depositing of materials in chutes by users.
E.
Test chute components after installation. Operate doors, locks, and interlock systems to
demonstrate that hardware is adjusted and electrical wiring is connected correctly. Complete
test operations before installing chase enclosures.
F.
Test heat-sensing devices for proper operation.
3.3

A.
After completing chase enclosure, clean exposed surfaces of chute system's components. Do
not remove labels of independent testing and inspecting agencies.
B.
Demonstrate use of chute and equipment to Owner's personnel.
C.
TRASH CHUTES
14 9182 - 3
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 21 0000 - AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1. GENERAL
1.00
A.
1.01
DESCRIPTION
This Section specifies furnishing and installing an automatic sprinkler system for the building.
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
A. The automatic sprinkler system shall be designed to provide for a new distribution system.
Classifications and densities shall be for a NFPA 13 System and as required by local authorities
having jurisdiction. Contractor shall prepare detailed working drawings indicating exact pipe
sizes, head locations including locations of mechanical and electrical apparatus and devices
along with hydronic calculations and appropriate approval of local authorities having jurisdiction.
Working drawings shall show elevations and coordination with other trades.
B. System shall be designed to comply with UBC, NFPA 13, insurance underwriter requirements
and local fire district requirements.
C. System must be coordinated with other mechanical and electrical systems in the building.
Specifically coordinate with the ductwork to be installed. The system must be located out of the
way of ductwork or rise/fall as required to allow ductwork to run.
D. Provide fire pump systems and design if required. Coordinate electrical requirements with
contractor and electrical engineer. Coordinate mechanical room requirements with architect and
mechanical engineer.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for each type sprinkler head, valve, piping specialty, fire protection specialty, fire
department connection specified shall be submitted. Provided fire pump curves and spec. sheets
if required.
B. Shop Drawings prepared in accordance with NFPA 13 identified as Working Plans including
hydraulic calculations, where applicable, and which have been approved by and bear the
signature of the authority having jurisdiction. Head locations shall be indicated on a reflected
ceiling plan for approval by the Architect. Unless specifically approved by the Architect, all piping
shall be concealed. Heads shall be added and modified as directed by the Architect to maintain
a uniform and acceptable pattern. Modifications made by the Architect to control the appearance
and pattern shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner or his agents.
C. Maintenance Data for each type sprinkler head, valve, piping specialty, fire protection specialty,
fire department connection specified for inclusion in operating and maintenance manual to be
submitted fort his section at Project close out.
1.03
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Valve Wrenches: Furnish to Owner, two (2) valve wrenches for each type of sprinkler head
installed whether new or existing.
B. Sprinkler Heads and Cabinets: Furnish six (6) extra sprinkler heads of each style included in the
Project in a wall-mounted cabinet in a location as directed by the Architect and local code
authority having jurisdiction.
21 0000 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.00
MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Manufacturers shall offer fire
protection system products that are approved by the local district having jurisdiction.
Manufacturer and Installer shall have fifteen (15) years experience in the installation of automatic
sprinkler systems. Installer shall have all necessary approvals and licenses for work in the
jurisdiction of the Project.
2.01
PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS
A. General: Schedule 40 steel pipe (ASTM 53, Seamless) and fittings for sizes less than 8 inches,
up to 300 PSI. Schedule 30 steel pipe for sizes 8 inches and larger, up to 300 PSI.
B. Copper Tubing Drawn Temper: ASTM B 88, Types K, L & M are acceptable, Seamless.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 795, Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe, plain ends.
D. CPVC: All CPVC fire sprinkler pipe shall be manufactured from a Type IV, Grade I Chlorinated
Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) compound with a Cell Classification of 23547 per ASTM D1784. Pipe
shall be manufactured in strict compliance with ASTM F442 to SDR 13.5 dimensions,
consistently meeting the Quality Assurance test requirements of this standard with regard to
material, workmanship, burst pressure, flattening, and extrusion quality. All CPVC fire sprinkler
pipe shall be Listed by Underwriters Laboratories for wet pipe systems, and shall carry a rated
working pressure of 175 psi @ 150°F. All CPVC fire sprinkler pipe shall be installed in
accordance with Manufacturers CPVC Fire Sprinkler Piping Products Installation Instructions.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards 13, 13D, and 13R must be referenced for
design and installation requirements in conjunction with the Installation Instructions. All CPVC fire
sprinkler pipe shall be manufactured in the USA by an ISO 9001 certified manufacturer and shall
be FM and LPCB approved. All CPVC fire sprinkler pipe shall be packaged immediately after its
manufacture to prevent damage and shall be stored indoors after production, at the
manufacturing site, until shipped from factory. This pipe shall bear the logo of the listing
agencies, and shall carry the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) seal of approval for potable
water applications.
2.02
FITTINGS
A. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4, Class 250, standard pattern for threaded joints.
Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1.
B. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASNI B16.3, Class 300, standard pattern for threaded joints.
Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1.
C. Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234, seamless or welded, for welded joints.
D. Grooved Mechanical Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45 12-ductile iron; ASTM A 47,
Grade 32510 malleable iron; or ASTM A 53, Type F or Types E or S, Grade B fabricated steel
fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings.
E. Grooved Mechanical Couplings: Consist of ductile or malleable iron housing, a synthetic rubber
gasket of a central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle
or lugs to secure roll-grooved pipe and fittings. Grooved mechanical couplings including gaskets
used on dry-pipe systems shall be listed for dry-pipe service.
21 0000 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
F. Wrought-Copper and Bronze Fittings: ASNI B16.22, streamlined pattern, solder-joint, pressure
fittings.
G. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASNI B16.1, Class 250; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.
H. Cast Bronze Flanges:
I.
2.03
ANSI B16.24, Class 300; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.
CPVC: All CPVC fire sprinkler pipe fittings shall be manufactured from a Type IV, Grade I
Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) compound with a Cell Classification of 23547 per ASTM
D1784. Fittings shall be manufactured in strict compliance with ASTM F442 to SDR 13.5
dimensions, consistently meeting the Quality Assurance test requirements of this standard with
regard to material, workmanship, burst pressure, flattening, and extrusion quality. All CPVC fire
sprinkler pipe fittings shall be Listed by Underwriters Laboratories for wet pipe systems, and shall
carry a rated working pressure of 175 psi @ 150°F. All CPVC fire sprinkler pipe fittings shall
be installed in accordance with Manufacturers CPVC Fire Sprinkler Piping Products Installation
Instructions. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards 13, 13D, and 13R must be
referenced for design and installation requirements in conjunction with the Installation
Instructions. All CPVC fire sprinkler pipe fittings shall be manufactured in the USA by an ISO
9001 certified manufacturer and shall be FM and LPCB approved. All CPVC fire sprinkler pipe
fittings shall be packaged immediately after its manufacture to prevent damage and shall be
stored indoors after production, at the manufacturing site, until shipped from factory. Fittings shall
bear the logo of the listing agencies, and shall carry the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF)
seal of approval for potable water applications.
JOINING MATERIALS
A. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for
welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being
welded.
1.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BCuP-3 or BCuP-4.
2.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 95-5 Tin-Antinomy, grade 95TA.
B. Gasket Materials: Thickness, material and type suitable for fluid or gas to be handled and design
temperatures and pressures.
2.04
GENERAL DUTY VALVES

All valves to sprinkler supply pipes shall be listed indicating valves. Valves shall not close in less
than 5 seconds @ max. speed from fully open position. Only exceptions per NFPA-13,
PARA.2.7.1.1 permitted.
A. Gate Valves 2 and Smaller: Body and bonnet of cast bronze, 175-pound cold water working
pressure non-shock, threaded ends, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem, screwin bonnet and malleable iron handwheel. Valves shall be capable of being repacked under
pressure with valve wide open.
B. Gate Valves 2 and Larger: Iron body, bronze-mounted, 175-pound cold water working
pressure non-shock. Valves shall have solid taper wedge; outside screw and yoke, rising stem;
flanged bonnet with body and bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126 Class B; replaceable bronze
wedge facing rings; flanged ends; and a packing assembly consisting of a cast iron gland flange,
brass gland, packing, bonnet and bronze bonnet bushing. Valves shall be capable of being
repacked under pressure with valve wide open.
21 0000 - 3

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
C. Swing Check Valves: MSS SP-71; Class 175, cast-iron body and bolted cap conforming to
ASTMA A 126, Class B; horizontal swing with a bronze disc or cast iron disc with bronze disc ring
and flanged ends. Valve shall be capable of being refitted while the valve remains in the line.
2.05
SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Alarm Check Valve: 175 psig working pressure, designed for horizontal or vertical installations
and have cast-iron, flanged inlet and outlet, bronze grooved seat with O ring seals, single-hinge
pin and latch design. Provide trim sets for bypass, drain, electric sprinkler alarm switch, pressure
gauges, drip cup assembly piped without valves separate from main drain line and fill line
attachment with strainer.
2.06
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS
A. Sprinkler Heads: Fusible link-type and style as indicated or required by the application. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide heads with nominal discharge orifice for Ordinary temperature
range for classification and densities required.
B. Sprinkler Head Finishes: Provide heads with the following finishes:
2.07
1.
Upright, Pendant and Sidewall Styles: Chrome-plated in exposed finished spaces; rough
bronze finish for heads in unfinished spaces not exposed to view. Heads shall be waxcoated where exposed to acids, chemicals or other corrosive fumes.
2.
Concealed Style: Rough brass with painted white coverplate.
3.
Flush Style: Bright chrome with painted white coverplate.
4.
Recessed Style: Bright chrome with escutcheon plate.
FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Wall Type Siamese Connections: Polished cast brass, flush wall-type with wall escutcheon and
two-way connections. Connection sizes shall be 4 outlet and two 2 female inlets having NH
standard threads for the connection size indicated, as specified in NFPA 1963. Each inlet shall
have a clapper valve, plug and chain. Unit shall have wall escutcheon of cast brass, finish to
match connections with words, STANDPIPE FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION in raised
letters. The Fire Dept. connection shall be located not less than 18 and not more than 4 feet
above the level of the adjacent grade or access level.
2.08
ALARM DEVICES
A. General: Types and sizes shall mate and match piping and equipment connections.
B. Water Flow Indicators: Vane-type waterflow detector, rated to 250 psig; designed for horizontal
or vertical installation; have 2-SPDT circuit switches to provide isolated alarm and auxiliary
contacts, 7 ampere 125 volts AC and 0.25 ampere 24 volts DC; complete with factory-set, fieldadjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamper-proof cover which sends a signal
when cover is removed.
C. Supervisory Switches: SPST, normally closed contacts, designed to signal valve in other than
full open position.
2.09
DETECTOR DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY
21 0000 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
A. Furnish and install a detector, double-check valve assembly of a style and model acceptable and
in accordance with the authorities having jurisdiction. Provide tamper switches for all shut-off
valves.
2.10
REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER ASSEMBLY
A. Furnish and install a reduced-pressure backflow preventer of the style and model acceptable and
in accordance with the authorities having jurisdiction. Provide tamper switches for all shut-off
valves.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.00
EXAMINATION
A. Examine the site and construction documents of all trades and disciplines. Verify pipe sizes,
heads and condition of all building components. Verify and confirm design densities on working
drawings with local jurisdiction prior to preparation of shop drawings or installation of any
components. Verify actual installed locations of building systems and components prior to
commencing work.
3.01
PIPE APPLICATIONS
A. Match system components. Install similar and identical systems throughout the installation.
3.02
PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics and diagrams) indicate the general
location and arrangement of piping systems. So far as practical, install piping and sprinkler as
required for a concealed installation.
1. Deviations from approved Working Plans for sprinkler piping require written approval from
the authority having jurisdiction. Written approval shall be on file with the Architect prior to
deviating for the approved Working Plans.
2. Sprinkler head locations shall be approved by the Architect prior to Contractors commencing
work. Contractor shall provide a plan indicating all sprinkler head locations in relation to
type, locations in ceiling tiles, locations in hard ceiling, locations in walls and locations in
exposed pipe installations.
3. Sprinkler head types shall be approved by the Architect prior to Contractor commencing
Work. In general, utilize concealed head and flush chrome-plated sidewall heads in
occupied and main building areas. Utilization of exposed and pendant heads is acceptable
in areas without ceilings and in workshop- and warehouse-type areas. It is the intent to
center sprinkler heads in ceiling tiles in a manner approved by the Project Architect.
3.03
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Welded Joints: AWS D10.9, Level AR-3.

1.
Threaded Joints: Conform to ASNI B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field-cut threads. Join
pipe, fittings and valves as follows:
a) Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends and proximity of internal seat
or wall to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
b) Align threads at point of assembly.
c) Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads.
21 0000 - 5

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
d) Assemble joint to appropriate thread depth. When using a wrench on valves, place the
wrench on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded.
e) Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads that are corroded or damaged. If a
weld opens during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not be used.
B. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to
make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable
lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified
by the bolt Manufacturer.
C. Mechanical Grooved Joints: Cut or roll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally compatibly with the
couplings.
D. Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS Brazing Manual.
1.
WARNING: Some filler metals contain compounds which produce highly toxic fumes when
heated. Avoid breathing fumes. Provide adequate ventilation.
E. Soldered Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the Copper Development Association
Handbook for Fire Sprinkler Systems.
F. End Treatment: After cutting pipe lengths, remove burrs and fins from pipe ends.
3.04
VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Install fire protection specialty valves, fittings and specialties in accordance with the
Manufacturers written instructions, NFPA 13, and the authority having jurisdiction.
B. Gate Valves: Install supervised open-gate valves so located to control all sources of water
supply except fire department connections. Where there is more than one control valve, provide
permanently marked identification signs indicating the portion of the system controlled by each
valve. Refer to Division 15 Section Mechanical Identification for valve tags and signs.
C. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in the vertical position, in proper direction of flow including
the bypass check valve and retard chamber drain line connection. Install valve trim in
accordance with the valve Manufacturers appropriate trim diagram. Test valve for proper
operation.
D. Detector Check Valves: Install in proper direction of flow in a location to detect system leakage
and unauthorized use of water, and to prevent blackflow into public water mains. Install bypass
meter with gate valves on each side of the meter to permit meter removal, and check valve
downstream from the meter. Provide pressure gages upstream and downstream of meter.
3.05
SPRINKLER HEAD INSTALLATIONS
A. Use proper tools to prevent damage during installations.

B. Head locations shall be as approved by Architect and shall be coordinated with Architectural
Reflected Ceiling Plans. Heads shall be centered in tiles as directed by the Architect.
C. Heads in work areas and storage may be pendant up right or exposed at ceiling.
D. Heads in offices and finished occupant areas shall be concealed.
E. Install system within the heated envelope of the facility. Provide a cover between joist in heated
areas to allow insulation over piping and piping within heated plenum. For garage areas, provide
21 0000 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
dry-pipe heads and individual shut-off valves with approved tamper switches in addition to piping
within plenum area.
3.06
A. Flush, test and inspect sprinkler piping systems in accordance with NFPA 13.
B. Replace piping system components that do not pass the test procedures specified and retest
repaired portion of the system.
21 0000 - 7
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 22 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.3
Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

Transition fittings.
Dielectric fittings.
Mechanical sleeve seals.
Sleeves.
Escutcheons.
Grout.
Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
Concrete bases.
Supports and anchorages.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.
E.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F.
The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1.
G.
PE: Polyethylene plastic.
The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1.
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
22 0500 - 1

CA 15-001
2.
1.4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
1.5
Escutcheons.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1.
2.
B.
1.6
Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment:

Equipment of higher electrical
characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and
connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If
minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

A.
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B.
Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for plumbing installations.
B.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place

concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C.
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that
are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08
Section "Access Doors and Frames."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
22 0500 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
A.
2.2
Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
C.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
2.3
TRANSITION FITTINGS
A.
AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with
ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
1.
2.4
Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solderjoint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B.
Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C.
Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure
at 180 deg F .
D.
Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, fullface- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic
washers, and steel backing washers.
1.
Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.
E.
Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic

lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F .
F.
Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F .
2.5
SLEEVES N/A in Apartment units.

A.
2.6

CA 15-001
Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange
for attaching to wooden forms.
ESCUTCHEONS
22 0500 - 3

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
A.
Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
B.
One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.
C.
Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed] hinge and chrome-plated finish.
2.7
GROUT
A.
Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1.
2.
3.
Characteristics:
Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
Design Mix: 5000-psi , 28-day compressive strength.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
noncorrosive,
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A.
Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping
systems.
B.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
H.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
I.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
L.
Install escutcheons for Finished areas in Apartment units, public spaces and Corridors only.
22 0500 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
M.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section
"Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
N.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
O.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in

requirements.
3.2
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using leadfree solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
3.3
PIPING CONNECTIONS
A.
Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1.
2.
3.4
3.5

CA 15-001
Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment, when required by code.
Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals, when required by code.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A.
Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
not indicated.
B.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D.
Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
22 0500 - 5

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
A.
Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
22 0500 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 22 0513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,

horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to
600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment
manufacturer for field installation.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Motor controllers.
Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A.
Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in
plumbing equipment schedules or Sections.
B.
Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
2.2
2.3
MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A.
Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 5300 feet above
sea level.
B.
Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected
loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating
sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
22 0513 - 1

CA 15-001
A.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements
of specific motor application:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Permanent-split capacitor.
Split phase.
Capacitor start, inductor run.
Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B.
Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
C.
Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and
thrust loading.
D.
Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
E.
Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor
when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor
insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns
to normal range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
22 0513 - 2
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 22 0519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Bimetallic-actuated thermometers.
Dial-type pressure gages.
Gage attachments.
Test-plug kits.
Division 21 Section "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping" for fire-protection

water-service meters outside the building.
Division 21 fire-suppression piping Sections for fire-protection pressure gages.
Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for domestic water meters and
combined domestic and fire-protection water-service meters outside the building.
Division 22 Section " Domestic Water Piping" for water meters inside the building.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data:

maintenance manuals.
For meters and gages to include in operation and
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS
A.
Standard: ASME B40.200.
B.
Case: Liquid-filled type(s); stainless steel.
C.
Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and scales in deg F.
D.
Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable angle, with unified-inch screw threads.
E.
Connector Size: 1/2 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
22 0519 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
F.
Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch in diameter; stainless steel.
G.
Window: Plain glass or plastic.
H.
Ring: Stainless steel.
I.
Element: Bimetal coil.
J.
Pointer: Dark-colored metal.
K.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 1.5 percent of scale range.
2.2
PRESSURE GAGES
A.
Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.3
Standard: ASME B40.100.

Case: Sealed type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter.
Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.
Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottomoutlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.
Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi.
Pointer: Dark-colored metal.
Window: Glass or plastic.
Ring: Metal.
Accuracy: Grade B, plus or minus 2 percent of middle half of scale range.
GAGE ATTACHMENTS
A.
Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and porousmetal-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.
B.
Valves: Brass ball, with NPS 1/4, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the
most readable position.
B.
Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.
C.
Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1.
3.2
After the RPBFP and PRV at the DCW service entrance.
CONNECTIONS
22 0519 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
A.
3.3

CA 15-001
Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
22 0519 - 3
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 22 0523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following general-duty valves:

1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Copper-alloy ball valves.

Bronze check valves.
Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and
charts.
Division 22 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.
DEFINITIONS
A.
The following are standard abbreviations for valves:

1.
2.
3.
1.4
CWP: Cold working pressure.

PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.
TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve
design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions;
and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated
capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.

A.
Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
22 0523 - 1

CA 15-001
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
Block check valves in either closed or open position.
Use the following precautions during storage:

1.
2.
Maintain valve end protection.

Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If
outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
VALVES, GENERAL
A.
Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.
B.
Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
D.
Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.
F.
Valve Flanges:
ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and
ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.
G.
Valve Grooved Ends: AWWA C606.

1.
Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

a.
2.
H.
2.2
Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F for angle, check, gate,
and globe valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves.
Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
COPPER-ALLOY BALL VALVES

A.
Copper-Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110.
B.
Three-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with full-port, chrome-plated
bronze ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 250 psig minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.
2.3
BRONZE CHECK VALVES

A.
Bronze Check Valves, General: MSS SP-80.
22 0523 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
B.
Type 4, Class 125, Bronze, Swing Check Valves:

bronze seat.

CA 15-001
Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance.
1.
B.
Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
C.
Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
D.
Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E.
Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is
suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
F.
Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated,
use the following:
1.
2.
3.
Shutoff Service: Ball, butterflyvalves.

Throttling Service: Angle, ball, butterfly, or globe valves.
Pump Discharge: Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves.
B.
If valves with specified CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher
CWP ratings may be substituted.
C.
Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:

1.
2.
D.
Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Three-piece, 125-psi..

Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 4, Class 125, bronze.
Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections:
1.
3.3
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder-joint or threaded ends.
VALVE INSTALLATION
22 0523 - 3

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
C.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
D.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
E.
Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
3.4
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic piping joint
construction.
B.
Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts
according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy
solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
22 0523 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 22 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Metal pipe hangers and supports.

Trapeze pipe hangers.
Fiberglass pipe hangers.
Metal framing systems.
Fiberglass strut systems.
Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
Fastener systems.
Pipe stands.
Pipe positioning systems.
Equipment supports.
Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze
hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
Division 21 fire-suppression piping Sections for pipe hangers for fire-suppression piping.
Division 22 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping" for pipe guides
and anchors.
Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment"
for vibration isolation devices.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
A.
Delegated Design:
Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
B.
Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall
withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated
according to ASCE/SEI 7.
22 0529 - 1

CA 15-001
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain
approval from authorities having jurisdiction.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the
following; include Product Data for components:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
1.6

Metal framing systems.
Pipe stands.
Equipment supports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B.
Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A.
Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Copper Pipe Hangers:

1.
2.
2.2
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to
support bearing surface of piping.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated

components.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.
FASTENER SYSTEMS
22 0529 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
A.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
B.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
2.3
PIPE STANDS
A.
General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made of

manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.
B.
Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped
cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
C.
Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic base unit with plastic roller, for roof installation
without membrane penetration.
D.
High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand:

1.
2.
3.
2.4
Description: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for
roof installation without membrane penetration.
Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuousthread rods.
Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainlesssteel, roller-type pipe support.
PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A.
2.5
Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for
positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
2.6
Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbonsteel shapes.
A.
Structural Steel:
galvanized.
B.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1.
2.
ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
22 0529 - 3

CA 15-001
3.1
Design Development
October 02, 2015
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION To be residential style plastic straps and

fastners/hangers + supports for all apartments and corridors. Plastic shall not be used in any
return air plenums.
A.
Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
B.
Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and
larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed;
fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
C.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
D.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
E.
Insulated Piping:
1.
Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a.
b.
c.
3.2
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services
piping.
ADJUSTING
A.
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B.
Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.3
HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A.
Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper piping
and tubing.
B.
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
C.
Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1):

insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 .
For suspension of noninsulated or
Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to
NPS 24.
22 0529 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
22 0529 - 5
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 22 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Equipment labels.
Pipe labels.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT LABELS
A.
Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,
1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
Letter Color: Black.
Background Color: Yellow.
Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F .
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch .
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches
, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches , and proportionately larger lettering for
greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size
of principal lettering.
Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
22 0553 - 1

CA 15-001
8.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B.
Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,

Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the
Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
C.
Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch

bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where
equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number
and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and
maintenance data.
2.2
PIPE LABELS
A.
General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B.
Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
C.
Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1.
2.
Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A.
Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B.
Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3
PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A.
Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting."
B.
Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and
exterior exposed locations as follows:
1.
22 0553 - 2
Near each valve and control device.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1.
Domestic Water Piping:

a.
b.
2.
Background Color: White.

Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping:

a.
b.
D.

CA 15-001
Background Color: Yellow.

This section shall only apply to exposed piping and valves in common areas and water riser
rooms. Systems in apartment units shall not apply to this section or requirement.
22 0553 - 3
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 22 0700 - PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Insulation Materials:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Insulating cements.
Adhesives.
Mastics.
Tapes.

1.
2.
1.3
Cellular glass.
Flexible elastomeric.
Phenolic.
Polyisocyanurate.
Polyolefin.
Polystyrene.
Division 21 Section " Fire-Suppression Systems Insulation."

Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and
jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship

program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84,
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label
insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers,
with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 0700 - 1

CA 15-001
1.
2.
1.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 50 or less.
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed

A.
1.6
Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B.
Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application and
equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop
Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and fieldapplied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
C.
Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
1.7
SCHEDULING
A.
Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have
satisfactory test results.
B.
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be
applied.
B.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C.
Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D.
Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E.
Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
22 0700 - 2
PLUMBING INSULATION
Design Development
October 02, 2015
F.
Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid,
hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied
Jackets" Article.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
G.
2.2

CA 15-001
Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.

Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.
Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1.
Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ-SSL: Comply with ASTM C 552,
Type II, Class 2.
Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials.

ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
Comply with
ADHESIVES
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Cellular-Glass, Phenolic, Polyisocyanurate, and Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent-based resin

adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F .
C.
Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
2.3
MASTICS
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
1.
B.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient
services.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film
thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F .
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.
Color: White.
TAPES
A.
Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Width: 2 inches .
Thickness: 3.7 mils .
Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 5 percent.
Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 0700 - 3

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1.
2.
3.
3.2
Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of
defects.
Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a
corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:
1.
2.
Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an
epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F .
Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods
for operating temperature range.
Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300
deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating
materials and application methods for operating temperature range.
C.
Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing.

requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
D.
Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3
Comply with
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A.
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping with the exception of fittings, valves,
and specialties.
B.
Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
22 0700 - 4
PLUMBING INSULATION
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
G.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
L.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
M.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
N.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches
similar to butt joints.
O.
For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.4
Vibration-control devices.
Testing agency labels and stamps.
Nameplates and data plates.
Manholes.
Handholes.
Cleanouts.
GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A.
Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B.
Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1.
Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same
material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece.
2.
Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next.
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 0700 - 5

CA 15-001
3.5
CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION

A.
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.
3.6
Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without
deforming insulation materials.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of
cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION

A.
Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1.
C.
3.7
Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

1.
2.
Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.

Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A.
Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for
each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B.
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.8
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.

Underground piping.
Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
Residential hot and cold water within residential units.
Cold water main piping.
INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
22 0700 - 6
PLUMBING INSULATION
Design Development
October 02, 2015
A.
Domestic Hot and Recirculated in Common Areas and Aquatherm piping:

1.
NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a.
b.
2.
All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following (FOR HORIZONTAL PIPING IN
RESIDENTIAL UNITS AND OCCUPIED COMMON AREAS):
a.
b.
Cellular Glass: 1 inches thick.

Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Bodies:

1.
All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a.
b.
D.

Stormwater and Overflow:

1.
C.

Flexible Elastomeric: 3/4 inch thick.
NPS 1-1/2 Insert pipe size and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a.
b.
B.

CA 15-001

Storm drainage exposed within the garage shall not require insulation.
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 0700 - 7
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 22 1116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following products:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.4
1.5
Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and
specialties inside the building.
Encasement for piping.
Specialty valves.
Flexible connectors.
Water meters.
Escutcheons.
Sleeves and sleeve seals.
Wall penetration systems.
Specialty valves.
Water meters.
Backflow preventers and vacuum breakers.
Escutcheons.
Sleeves and sleeve seals.
Water penetration systems.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B.
Comply with NSF 14 for plastic, potable domestic water piping and components. Include
marking "NSF-pw" on piping.
C.
Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.
COORDINATION
22 1116 - 1

CA 15-001
A.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
2.2
Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting
materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A.
Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L and ASTM B 88, Type M water tube, drawn temper.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.
Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.
Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-andsocket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:
a.

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
1)
2)
3)
b.
c.
6.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each
end.
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber Oring seal in each end.
Copper-Tube Extruded-Tee Connections:

a.

1)
b.
B.
Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division.

NIBCO INC.
Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems.
T-DRILL Industries Inc.
Description: Tee formed in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014.
Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K and ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, annealed temper.
1.
2.
Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:
a.
22 1116 - 2

Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
1)
2)
3)
b.
c.
2.3
Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division.

NIBCO INC.
Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each
end.
NPS 3 and NPS 4: Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber Oring seal in each end.
CPVC PIPING
A.
CPVC Piping System:

smaller
B.
CPVC Tubing System: ASTM D 1784/F441, SDR 11, tube and socket fittings. 2-1/2 and larger.
2.4
ASTM D 2846/D 2846M, SDR 11, pipe and socket fittings. 2 and
PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21,
nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type unless
B.
Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
C.
ASTM B 813.
D.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for generalduty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Solvent Cements for Joining CPVC Piping and Tubing: ASTM F 493.
F.
Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
2.5
SPECIALTY VALVES
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for
general-duty metal valves.
B.
Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for
balancing valves, drain valves, backflow preventers, and vacuum breakers.
C.
CPVC Union Ball Valves:

1.

the following:
a.
b.
c.
American Valve, Inc.

Asahi/America, Inc.
Colonial Engineering, Inc.
22 1116 - 3

CA 15-001
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
2.
Standard: MSS SP-122.

Pressure Rating: 125 psig at 73 deg F.
Body Material: CPVC.
Body Design: Union type.
End Connections for Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Detachable, threaded.
End Connections for Valves NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Detachable, socket.
Ball: CPVC; full port.
Seals: PTFE or EPDM-rubber O-rings.
Handle: Tee shaped.
CPVC Ball Check Valves:

1.

the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.
American Valve, Inc.

Asahi/America, Inc.
Fischer, George Inc.
Hayward Flow Control Systems; Hayward Industrial Products, Inc.
IPEX Inc.
NIBCO INC.
Sloane, George Fischer, Inc.
Spears Manufacturing Company.
Thermoplastic Valves Inc.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.6
Fischer, George Inc.

Hayward Flow Control Systems; Hayward Industrial Products, Inc.
IPEX Inc.
NIBCO INC.
Sloane, George Fischer, Inc.
Thermoplastic Valves Inc.
Appollo.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
D.
Design Development
October 02, 2015

Body Material: CPVC.
Body Design: Union-type ball check.
End Connections for Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Detachable, socket.
End Connections for Valves NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Detachable, socket.
Ball: CPVC.
Seals: EPDM- or FKM-rubber O-rings.
TRANSITION FITTINGS
A.
General Requirements:
1.
2.
22 1116 - 4
Same size as pipes to be joined.

Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.

CA 15-001
End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B.
Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system

fitting.
C.
Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.

1.

following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
D.
Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:

1.

the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
E.
Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.

Harvel Plastics, Inc.
Description: CPVC or PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent

dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert and one solvent-cement-socket end.
Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions:

1.

the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
2.7
Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing.

Dresser, Inc.; Dresser Piping Specialties.
Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The).
JCM Industries.
Romac Industries, Inc.
Smith-Blair, Inc; a Sensus company.
Viking Johnson; c/o Mueller Co.

NIBCO INC.
Description: CPVC or PVC four-part union. Include brass or stainless-steel threaded

end, solvent-cement-joint plastic end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material
body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and
temperature.
B.
Dielectric Unions:
22 1116 - 5

CA 15-001
1.

the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.

the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Capitol Manufacturing Company.

Central Plastics Company.
EPCO Sales, Inc.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.

Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solderjoint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
Dielectric Couplings:
1.

the following:
a.
b.
2.
Calpico, Inc.
Lochinvar Corporation.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
E.

End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
Dielectric Flanges:
1.
D.
Capitol Manufacturing Company.

Central Plastics Company.
EPCO Sales, Inc.
Hart Industries International, Inc.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.
Description:
a.
b.
C.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Galvanized-steel coupling.
End Connections: Female threaded.
Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic.
Dielectric Nipples:
1.

the following:
22 1116 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015
a.
b.
c.
2.
Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.

Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
Victaulic Company.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.8

CA 15-001
Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545.

End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.
Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
B.
Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering

and ends brazed to inner tubing.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig.

End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end copper tube.
End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged copper alloy.
Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainlesssteel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.
1.
2.
3.
2.9
Flex-Hose Co., Inc.

Flexicraft Industries.
Flex Pression, Ltd.
Flex-Weld, Inc.
Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
Mercer Rubber Co.
Metraflex, Inc.
Proco Products, Inc.
Tozen Corporation.
Unaflex, Inc.
Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan company
Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig.

End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple.
End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.
B.
Split Plate, Stamped Steel: Chrome-plated finish with concealed hinge, setscrew or spring
clips.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
22 1116 - 7

CA 15-001
3.1
Design Development
October 02, 2015
EARTHWORK
A.
3.2
Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and
backfilling.
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
B.
Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
C.
Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve,
inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in
Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and Division 22
Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.
D.
Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
E.
Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves.

Comply with
requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for pressure-reducing
valves.
F.
Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.
G.
Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's
requirements.
H.
Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants
unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
I.
otherwise.
J.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and
coordinate with other services occupying that space.
K.
Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.
L.
M.
Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher
than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
N.
O.
P.
Install PEX piping with loop at each change of direction of more than 90 degrees.
22 1116 - 8
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Q.
3.3

CA 15-001
Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and
specialty.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
B.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.
C.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
2.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged.
D.
Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"
"Brazed Joints" Chapter.
E.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and
fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
F.
Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by
fitting manufacturer.
G.
Copper-Tubing, Push-on Joints:

Clean end of tube.
Measure insertion depth with
manufacturer's depth gage. Join copper tube and push-on-joint fittings by inserting tube to
measured depth.
H.
Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool
designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop,
and braze branch tube into collar.
I.
Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1.
2.
J.
3.4
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements. Apply primer.
CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both
piping systems.
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves

for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations.
B.
Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or
equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures
22 1116 - 9

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use
butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
C.
Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping,
and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section
"Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
1.
2.
D.
3.5
Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where indicated.
Install ball valves in each hot-water circulation return branch.
TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A.
Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.
B.
Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:

1.
2.
C.
3.6
NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling.

NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.
Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal
transition fittings or unions.
DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A.
Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
B.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.
C.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.
3.7
FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION

A.
Install flexible connectors in suction and discharge piping connections to each domestic water
pump.
B.
Install bronze-hose flexible connectors in copper domestic water tubing.
C.
Install stainless-steel-hose flexible connectors in steel domestic water piping.
3.8
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A.
Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation.
1.
2.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.

Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a.
b.
22 1116 - 10
PIPING
100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
DOMESTIC WATER
Design Development
October 02, 2015
c.
3.
4.

CA 15-001
Longer Than 100 Feet If Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
B.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
C.
Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.
D.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
NPS 3 to NPS 4: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
E.
Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
F.
Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.
G.
Install vinyl-coated hangers for CPVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
NPS 1 and Smaller: 36 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
NPS 4: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
H.
Install supports for vertical CPVC piping every 60 inches for NPS 1 and smaller, and every 72
inches for NPS 1-1/4 and larger.
I.
Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's
3.9
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
D.
Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to
the following:
1.
Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
2.
Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22 plumbing
fixture Sections for connection sizes.

11
22 1116 -

CA 15-001
3.
3.10
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than
equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use
flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION
A.
Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors for exposed piping.
B.
Escutcheons for New Piping:

1.
2.
3.11
Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass
with polished chrome-plated finish.
SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A.
Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
B.
Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
3.12
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation.
B.
Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.
3.13
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Piping Inspections:
1.
2.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having
jurisdiction:
a.
b.
3.
4.
C.
Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or
inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
Piping Tests:
22 1116 - 12
PIPING
DOMESTIC WATER
Design Development
October 02, 2015
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

CA 15-001
Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound
and that piping is full of water.
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and
unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must
be repaired.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.
D.
Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.14
A.
ADJUSTING
Perform the following adjustments before operation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.

Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
Open throttling valves to proper setting.
Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.
a.
b.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.15
A.
Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to

provide flow of hot water in each branch.
Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.
Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during
installation.
Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for
application where used and are clean and ready for use.
Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
CLEANING
Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
1.
2.
Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if
methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or
AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:
a.
b.
Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

13
22 1116 -

CA 15-001
1)
2)
c.
d.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm
of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm
of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
B.
Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
C.
Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
3.16
PIPING SCHEDULE
A.
Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used
in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Fitting Option:
copper tubing.
D.
Under-building-slab, domestic water, building service piping, NPS 3 and smaller, shall be one of
the following:
1.
E.
3.17
A.
Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground
Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; wrought-copper solder-joint fittings; and brazed
joints.
Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:
1.
Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints.
2.
Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressuresealed joints.
3.
CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 80 socket fittings; and solvent-cemented
joints.
4.
CPVC Tubing System: CPVC tube; CPVC socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
VALVE SCHEDULE
Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or
gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or
ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Memory-stop balancing valves.
Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
B.
Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.
C.
Iron grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping.
22 1116 - 14
PIPING
DOMESTIC WATER
Design Development
October 02, 2015
D.

CA 15-001
CPVC valves matching piping materials may be used.

15
22 1116 -
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 22 1119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Division 22 Section Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping for thermometers, pressure
gages, and flow meters in domestic water piping.
Division 22 Section Domestic Water Piping for water meters.
Division 22 Section Domestic Water Filtration Equipment for water filters in domestic
water piping.
Division 22 Section Healthcare Plumbing Fixtures for thermostatic mixing valves for sitz
baths, thermostatic mixing-valve assemblies for hydrotherapy equipment, and outlet
boxes for dialysis equipment.
Division 22 Section Emergency Plumbing Fixtures for water tempering equipment.
Division 22 Section Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers for water filters for water
coolers.
A.
1.4
Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwise
indicated.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Vacuum breakers.
Backflow preventers.
Water pressure-reducing valves.
Balancing valves.
Strainers.
Hose bibbs.
Wall hydrants.
Drain valves.
Air vents.
Field quality-control test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
22 1119 - 1

CA 15-001
A.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
NSF Compliance:
1.
2.
Comply with NSF 14, Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials, for plastic
domestic water piping components.
Comply with NSF 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
VACUUM BREAKERS
A.
Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:

1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Standard: ASSE 1011.

Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain.
Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.
Finish: Rough bronze.
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A.
Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow.
Accessories:
a.
b.
2.3
Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and smaller;
outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 21/2 and larger.
Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.
WATER PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES

A.
Water Regulators:
1.
2.
2.4

Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig.
BALANCING VALVES
A.
Copper-Alloy Calibrated Balancing Valves:

1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Type: Ball or Y-pattern globe valve with two readout ports and memory setting indicator.
Body: Brass or bronze,
Size: Same as connected piping, but not larger than NPS 2.
Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.
Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.
22 1119 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
C.
Memory-Stop Balancing Valves:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.5

CA 15-001
Standard: MSS SP-110 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves.

Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP.
Size: NPS 2 (DN 50) or smaller.
Body: Copper alloy.
Port: Standard or full port.
Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
End Connections: Solder joint or threaded.
Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device.
STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A.
Y-Pattern Strainers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated.

Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with
AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating and for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated.
Perforation Size:
a.
b.
6.
2.6
Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.033 inch.

Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: 0.045 inch.
Drain: [Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve].
HOSE BIBBS
A.
Hose Bibbs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
2.7
Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets.

Body Material: Bronze.
Seat: Bronze, replaceable.
Supply Connections: NPS or NPS threaded or solder-joint inlet.
Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
Vacuum Breaker: Integral or field-installation, nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection
vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011.
Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated.
Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze.
Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.
Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.
Operation for Service Areas: Operating key.
Operation for Finished Rooms: Wheel handle.
Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.
Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.
WALL HYDRANTS
A.
Non freeze Wall Hydrants:
22 1119 - 3

CA 15-001
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for exposed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants.

Operation: Loose key.
Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall
clamp.
Inlet: NPS or NPS 1.
Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with
ASME B1.20.7.
Outlet: Exposed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with
ASME B1.20.7.
Nozzle and Wall-Plate Finish: Polished nickel bronze or Rough bronze.
Operating Keys(s): Two with each wall hydrant.
Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.8
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Standard: ASSE 1019, Type A or Type B.

Type: Freeze-resistant, automatic draining with integral air-inlet valve.
Classification: Type A, for automatic draining with hose removed
Pressure Rating: 125 psig .
Operation: Loose key.
Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall
clamp.
Inlet: NPS or NPS .
Outlet: Exposed with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
DRAIN VALVES
A.
Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1.
2.
2.9
Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.

Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7
and cap with brass chain.
AIR VENTS
A.
Bolted-Construction Automatic Air Vents:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Body: Bronze.
Pressure Rating: 125-psig minimum pressure rating at 140 deg F .
Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.
Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.
Size: NPS minimum inlet.
Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.
Welded-Construction Automatic Air Vents:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
22 1119 - 4
Body: Stainless steel.

Pressure Rating: 150-psig minimum pressure rating.
Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.
Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.
Size: NPS 3/8 minimum inlet.
Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Refer to Division 22 Section Common Work Results for Plumbing for piping joining materials,
joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B.
Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to
other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with
1.
2.
3.
C.
Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on inlet and
outlet.
D.
Install water control valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with globe valve.
Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
E.
Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.
F.
Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve and pump.
G.
Install air vents at high points of water piping.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
3.3
general arrangement of piping and specialties.
LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A.
Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or

sign on or near each of the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
3.4
Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.

Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap
fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe
diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or
under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.
Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers.

Water pressure-reducing valves.
Calibrated balancing valves.
Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety
and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to
identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section Identification for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
22 1119 - 5

CA 15-001
A.
Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:

1.
B.
3.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Test each pressure vacuum breaker, reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer

according to authorities having jurisdiction and the devices reference standard.
Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified
above.
ADJUSTING
A.
Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.
B.
Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.
22 1119 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 22 1316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building:
1.
B.

1.
1.3
Pipe, tube, and fittings.
Division 22 Section Chemical Waste Systems for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
for chemical-waste and vent piping systems.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
A.
Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working
pressure, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
1.5
Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B.
Comply with NSF 14, Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials, for plastic
piping components. Include marking with NSF-dwv for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping;
NSF-drain for plastic drain piping; NSF-tubular for plastic continuous waste piping; and
NSF-sewer for plastic sewer piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
22 1316 - 1

CA 15-001
2.1
Design Development
October 02, 2015
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
2.2
Refer to Part 3 Piping Applications Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A.
Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
B.
Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant

fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
C.
Comply with HUD UM 77a Cast Iron Hubless Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary Drainage
1.
2.
2.3
Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings:

CISPI 310, with stainless-steel
corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber
sleeve.
Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainlesssteel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A.
B.
Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

1.
PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste,
and vent patterns.
2.
Cell Core PVC Pipe. ASTM F891, F1488 Solvent weld ASTM D2564.
Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer:

1.
2.
C.
Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Comply with HUD UM 79a ABS & PVC Plastic Pipe & Fittings for Drain Waste and Vent piping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXCAVATION
A.
3.2
Refer to Division 31 Section Earth Moving for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.
22 1316 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3

CA 15-001
Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be:
1.
Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steel couplings;
and hubless-coupling joints.
2.
Cell Core PVC Pipe and fittings, solvent cemented joints.
Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be:

1.
Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and
hubless-coupling joints.
2.
Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be:
1.
Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
2.
Underground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be:
1.
Solid-wall, Schedule 40, PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
2.
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Sanitary sewer piping outside the building is specified in Division 22 Section Facility Sanitary
Sewers.
B.
Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section Common Work
Results for Plumbing.
C.
Install seismic restraints on piping. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22

Section Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
D.
Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building
sanitary sewers.
E.
Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22
Section Common Work Results for Plumbing.
F.
Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPIs Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,
Chapter IV, Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
G.
Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate
branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep bends may be used
on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn,
double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with
22 1316 - 3

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not
change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and
reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction
of flow is prohibited.
H.
Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades
and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream.
Install required gaskets according to manufacturers written instructions for use of lubricants,
cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint
as completed.
I.
Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless
otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
J.
Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3
(DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 (DN 100)
and larger.
Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
Sovent Drainage System: Comply with ASSE 1043 and sovent fitting manufacturers
written installation instructions.
Reduced-Size Venting: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
K.
Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if
slab is without membrane waterproofing.
L.
Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665 or F891, F1488.
M.
Install underground [PVC] soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.
N.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
3.4
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section Common Work
Results for Plumbing.
B.
Join hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPIs Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook for hubless-coupling joints.
C.
PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 266, or F891, F1488.
3.5
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
General valve installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section General-Duty

Valves for Plumbing Piping.
22 1316 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
B.
3.6

CA 15-001
Check Valves: Install swing check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each sewage
pump discharge.

A.
Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section Vibration and Seismic Controls
for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
B.
Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment. Install the following:
1.
2.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following:
a.
100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
C.
Install supports according to Division 22 Section Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment.
D.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
E.
Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.
F.
Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.

NPS 3: 60 inches with -inch rod.
G.
Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.
H.
Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod
diameters:
1.
2.
3.

NPS 3 (DN 80): 48 inches with -inch rod.
I.
Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches.
J.
Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturers written
instructions.
3.7
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1.
Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code.
22 1316 - 5

CA 15-001
2.
3.
4.
3.8
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code.
Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated,
and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) and larger.

A.
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must
be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe
tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction
or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.9
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and
vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside
leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water
to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes
before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect
joints for leaks.
Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled
with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack
openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping
system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg (250 Pa). Use U-tube or manometer inserted in
trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without
introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture
connections for gas and water leaks.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
PROTECTION
A.
Exposed [PVC] Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of waterbased latex paint.
22 1316 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
22 1316 - 7
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 22 1319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
B.
FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
C.
HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.
D.
E.
PP: Polypropylene plastic.
F.
1.4
1.5
Backwater valves.
Cleanouts.
Floor drains.
Roof flashing assemblies.
Through-penetration firestop assemblies.
Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.
Flashing materials.
SUBMITTALS
A.

characteristics, and accessories.
Include rated capacities, operating
B.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
22 1319 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
A.
Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C.
Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary
piping specialty components.
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
B.
Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CLEANOUTS
A.
Exposed Metal Cleanouts:

1.
2.
3.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

the following:
following:
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
4.
5.
Sioux Chief.
MIFAB, Inc.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
Josam Company; Blucher-Josam Div.
Standard: ASME A112.3.1 for stainless steel for cleanout test tee.
Size: Same as connected drainage piping
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE
(IN)
4" AND BELOW
6
8
10" AND ABOVE
22 1319 - 2
NOMINAL SIZE
CLEANOUT
SAME SIZE AS PIPE
4" OR 6"
6" OR 8"
8"
Design Development
October 02, 2015
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.

CA 15-001
Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected
piping.
Closure: Countersunk, cast-iron plug.
Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
Closure: Stainless-steel plug with seal.
Metal Floor Cleanouts:

1.
2.
3.

the following:
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
4.
5.
Sioux Chief.
Oatey.
Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
Josam Company; Josam Div.
Kusel Equipment Co.
Josam Company; Blucher-Josam Div.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for adjustable housing cleanout.

Size:
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE
(IN)
4" AND BELOW
6
8
10" AND ABOVE
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
NOMINAL SIZE
CLEANOUT
SAME SIZE AS PIPE
4" OR 6"
6" OR 8"
8"
Type: Adjustable housing.

Body or Ferrule: Cast iron.
Clamping Device: Not required.
Outlet Connection: Spigot.
Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.
Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads.
Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy.
Frame and Cover Shape: Round.
Top Loading Classification: Light Duty.
Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.
Standard: ASME A112.3.1.
Size: Same as connected branch.
Housing: Stainless steel.
Closure: Stainless steel with seal.
Riser: Stainless-steel drainage pipe fitting to cleanout.
22 1319 - 3

CA 15-001
C.
Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:

1.
2.
3.

the following:
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.
5.
Sioux Chief.
MIFAB, Inc.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.

Size:
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE
(IN)
4" AND BELOW
6
8
10" AND ABOVE
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
D.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
NOMINAL SIZE
CLEANOUT
SAME SIZE AS PIPE
4" OR 6"
6" OR 8"
8"
Body: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.
Closure: Countersunk, drilled-and-threaded brass plug.
Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
Wall Access: Round, deep, chrome-plated bronze cover plate with screw.
Wall Access: Round, nickel-bronze, copper-alloy, or stainless-steel wall-installation
frame and cover.
Plastic Floor Cleanouts:

1.
2.

the following:
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
Canplas LLC.
IPS Corporation.
NDS Inc.
Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies.
Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
Size:
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE
(IN)
4" AND BELOW
22 1319 - 4
NOMINAL SIZE
CLEANOUT
SAME SIZE AS PIPE
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
6
8
10" AND ABOVE
4.
5.
6.
2.2
4" OR 6"
6" OR 8"
8"
Body: PVC.
Closure Plug: PVC.
Riser: Drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout of same material as drainage piping.
FLOOR DRAINS
A.
Plastic Body with brass strainer Floor Drains:

1.
2.
3.

the following:
following:
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Insert
manufacturer's name; product name or designation or a comparable product by one of
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
2.3
Sioux Chief.
Josam Company; Josam Div.
MIFAB, Inc.
Prier Products, Inc.
Pattern: Area or Floor drain.

Body Material: Gray iron.
Seepage Flange: Required.
Clamping Device: Required.
Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Not required.
Sediment Bucket: Not required.
Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.
Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.
Top Shape: Round.
Top Loading Classification: Light Duty.
Trap Material: Cast iron.
Trap Pattern: Deep-seal P-trap.
Trap Features: Trap Gard flapper.
ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES

A.
Roof Flashing Assemblies:
22 1319 - 5

CA 15-001
1.
2.
3.

the following:
following:
a.
b.
B.
Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div.

Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.
Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inchthick, lead flashing
collar and skirt extending at least 6 inches from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot reinforcement
and counterflashing fitting.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.

Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap.
Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES

A.
Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies:

1.
2.

the following:
following:
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.5
ProSet Systems Inc.
Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug.
Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack.
Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing
flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with neoprene
O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective
cap for plug.
Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.
MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A.
Air-Gap Fittings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
22 1319 - 6
Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between
installed inlet and outlet piping.
Body: Bronze or cast iron.
Inlet: Opening in top of body.
Outlet: Larger than inlet.
Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated
indirect waste piping.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.6

CA 15-001
MOTORS
A.
General requirements for motors are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."
1.
2.
Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are
specified in Division 26 Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials,
joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B.
Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck
plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove
valve cover for servicing.
C.
Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless
larger cleanout is indicated.
Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for
larger piping.
Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
D.
For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with
finished floor.
E.
For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
F.
Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set
with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4inch total depression.
Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1inch total depression.
Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
22 1319 - 7

CA 15-001
4.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
G.
Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
H.
Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
I.
Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors at floor penetrations.
J.
Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch above floor.
K.
Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.
L.
Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer
connection.
1.
2.
Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.

Size: Same as floor drain inlet.
M.
Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping

discharge into sanitary drainage system.
N.
Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof
membrane.
O.
Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.
P.
Install frost-resistant vent terminals on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch
clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.
Q.
Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy
access and maintenance.
R.
Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.
S.
Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.
T.
Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding
pipe fittings.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
B.
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
D.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
22 1319 - 8
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.3

CA 15-001

A.
3.4
Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety
and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to
identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

A.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1.
B.
Tests and Inspections:

1.
2.
3.5
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect field-assembled specialties and their installation, including piping and electrical
connections, and to assist in testing.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and
to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
22 1319 - 9
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 22 1423 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
Roof drains.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL ROOF DRAINS

A.
Metal, Medium-Sump, Promenade Roof Drains:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for promenade roof drains.

Body Material: Plastic.
Dimension of Body: 11- to 12-inch diameter.
Dimension of Frame and Grate: Nominal 12 inches square.
Outlet: Bottom.
Grate Material: Cast iron.
Vandal-Proof Grate: Not required.
Extension Collars: Not required.
Underdeck Clamp: Required.
Expansion Joint: Not required.
Sump Receiver Plate: Required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
22 1423 - 1

CA 15-001
A.
Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written
installation instructions. Roofing materials are specified in Division 07 Sections.
1.
2.
3.
3.2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Install flashing collar or flange of roof drain to prevent leakage between drain and
adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
Install expansion joints, if indicated, in roof drain outlets.
Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
CONNECTIONS
A.
3.3
Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Sections.

Drawings indicate
PROTECTION
A.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and
to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
22 1423 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 22 3400 - FUEL-FIRED WATER HEATERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.
1.2
SUMMARY
This section includes condensing gas-fired storage water heaters for potable water.
1.3
REFERENCES
A. ASME Boiler and Pressure vessel code, section IV, Part HLW
B. UL 795 Industrial Gas Heating Equipment
C. ANSI Z21.10.3 -2004/CSA 4.3-2004 Gas Water Heaters
D. ASHRAE/IES 90.1-2010
E. ISO 9001 Quality Management System
F. CSD-1-2009 Controls and Safety Devices for Automatically Fired Boilers
G. NFPA 70- National Electric Code
H. NFPA 54- National Fuel Gas Code
1.4
I.
NSF/ANSI Standard 61- Drinking Water System Components
J.
ASTM G123 - 00(2005) Standard Test Method for Evaluating Stress-Corrosion Cracking of
Stainless Alloys with Different Nickel Content in Boiling Acidified Sodium Chloride Solution.
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties and accessories for each model indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances,
components, and size of each field connection
C. Wiring Diagrams: Detail for wiring power signal, differentiate between manufacture- installed and
field-installed wiring
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test reports for compliance with performance requirements. A copy will be furnished to the owner.
22 3400 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
E. Maintenance Data: Include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include maintenance guide and wiring diagrams
1.5
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for internal wiring of factory wired equipment
B. Units: ETL, UL or CSA Certified as a Complete Gas Fired Water Heater Assembly.
C. Gas Train shall comply with ANSI Z.21.10.3 or UL 795
D. Conform to ASME Section IV. Part HLW for Water Heater construction.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Listing: The water heater will be listed ETL listed to UL 795 or ANSI Z21.10.3 -2004/CSA 4.32004 Gas Water Heaters
B. ASME Compliance: Water heater shall bear the ASME HLW stamp and be National Board listed
C. The water heater will operate at a minimum 95% thermal efficiency at full firing rate when tested
to the ANSI Z21.10.3 thermal efficiency test protocol.
D. The water heater will comply with current ASHRAE 90.1 requirements.
E.
1.7
Water heater manufacturer certified to the ISO 9001 International Quality System.
COORDINATION
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases

1.8
WARRANTY
A. Storage tank, heating surfaces, and combustion chamber will have a ten-year warranty covering
manufacturing or material defects, leaks, and/or the production of rusty water.
B. Stress Corrosion Cracking Warranty 10-year, non-prorated coverage for failure of tank or heat
exchanger due to chloride-induced stress corrosion cracking with no limit to the level of dissolved chlorides in the potable water supply and no exclusion for scale buildup.
C. The heater shall have a first year service policy, which shall cover labor and freight costs under
certain conditions for warranty covered services.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Manufacturer shall be a company specializing in manufacturing the
products specified in this section with minimum twenty years experience. The water heaters
shall be manufactured by a company that has achieved certification to the ISO 9001Quality
Management System.
B. The water heaters shall be ETL listed as a complete unit. The heater shall satisfy current Federal
Energy Policy Act standards for both thermal efficiency and stand-by heat losses as established
for gas fired water heaters incorporating storage tanks.
22 3400 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
C. Service Access: All gas train components must be accessible and able to adjust without the removal of cabinet components.
D. Manufacturers: PVI is the basis of design. Acceptable manufacturers shall be subject to compliance with the requirements.
2.2
CONSTRUCTION
A. The water heater will be a vertical fire tube design that is constructed and stamped in accordance
with Section IV, Part HLW of the ASME code. Water heater will be National Board Registered for
a working pressure of 150 psi and will be pressure tested at 1-1/2 times working pressure.
B. Water heater will be a three-pass configuration
C.
Tank and fire tubes will be unlined. Lined or plated water heaters will not be acceptable
D. Tank and fire tubes will be constructed from phase-balanced austenitic and ferritic duplex steel
with a chemical structure containing a minimum of 21% chromium to prevent corrosion and mill
certified per ASTM A 923Methods A to ensure that the product is free of detrimental chemical
precipitation that affects corrosion resistance. The material selected shall be tested and certified
to pass stress chloride cracking test protocols as defined in ISO 3651-2and ASTM G123 00(2005) Standard Test Method for Evaluating Stress-Corrosion Cracking of Stainless Alloys
with Different Nickel Content in Boiling Acidified Sodium Chloride Solution.
E. Waterside surfaces shall be welded internally utilizing joint designs to minimize volume of weld
deposit and heat input. All heat affected zones (HAZ) shall be processed after welding to ensure
the HAZ corrosion resistance is consistent with the mill condition base metal chemical composition. Weld procedures (amperage, volts, welding speed, filler metals and shielding gases) utilized
shall result in a narrow range of austenite-ferrite microstructure content consistent with phase
balanced objectives for welds, HAZ and the base metal.
F. All internal and external tank surfaces shall undergo full immersion passivation and pickling processing to meet critical temperature, duration and chemical concentration controls required to
complete corrosion resistance restoration of pressure vessel surfaces. Other passivation and
pickling methods are not accepted. Immersion passivation and pickling certification documents
are required and shall be provided with each product.
G. Materials shall meet ASME Section II material requirements and be accepted by NSF 61 for municipal potable water systems. Storage tank materials shall contain more than 80% postconsumer recycled materials and be 100% recyclable.
H. All tank connections/fittings will be non-ferrous.
I.
Finished vessel will not require sacrificial anode rods and none will be used. Water heaters that
employ anode rods of any type will not be acceptable.
J.
Combustion will be provided by a premix, fan-assisted surface burner with a gas train meeting
ANSI and FM requirements for the input specified.
Combustion will be provided by a fan-assisted burner with a gas train meeting
CSD-1/GE-GAP/MASS requirements for the input specified.
22 3400 - 3

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
K. Burner will be stainless steel covered with stainless steel mesh

L. Burner will employ non-linkage modulation utilizing only a VFD drive to vary gas and air.
M. Burner NOx emissions will be less than 20 ppm when corrected to 3% oxygen.
N. Water heater will be a category IV, condensing appliance and vent through CPVC
.
2.3
PERFORMANCE
A. When tested to the ANSI Z21.10.3 standard, the water heater shall operate at 95% thermal efficiency at full firing rate.
B. When modulated to low fire, water heater will be capable of 99% thermal efficiency.
C. Water heater will meet the thermal efficiency and standby heat loss requirements of ASHRAE
90.1 2010.
2.4
WATER HEATER TRIM

A. As a minimum, the heater will be equipped with the following:
a. electronic flame monitoring
b. an immersion operating control
c. an immersion temperature limiting device
d. an ASME- or AGA-rated temperature and pressure relief valve
e. and options as selected on form PV 8005
B. Operating and safety controls shall meet the requirements of UL 795 and FM
Operating and safety controls shall meet the requirements of CSD-1/GEGAP and MASS code
C. The water heater shall employ an electronic operating control with digital temperature readout.
Operator shall be capable of connecting to a building automation system through serial connection using Modbus RTU protocol.
D. A protocol gateway for Modbus TCP/IP will be provided.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
Install water heaters level and plumb in accordance with manufacturers written instructions and
referenced standards.
3.2
FINISHING
The storage and heating sections shall be completely factory packaged on a single skid, requiring
only job site hookup to utilities, venting, and plumbing. The heater shall be insulated to ASHRAE
90.1-2010 requirements, jacketed with coated steel panels, and mounted on heavy-duty channel
skids. Pressure vessel shall include a ball-type drain valve. The heater shall fit properly in the
space provided and installation shall conform to all local, state, and national codes.
22 3400 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.3

CA 15-001
START-UP
Start up on the unit will be performed by factory trained and authorized personnel. A copy of the
startup report will be provided to the owner.
22 3400 - 5
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 22 4000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Faucets for lavatories showers and sinks.

Flushometers.
Toilet seats.
Protective shielding guards.
Fixture supports.
Shower receptors.
Dishwasher air-gap fittings.
Disposers.
Water closets.
Urinals.
Lavatories.
Commercial sinks.
Individual showers.
Service sinks.
Division 10 Section "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories."

Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers, floor
drains, and specialty fixtures not included in this Section.
Division 22 Section "Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers."
Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for exterior plumbing fixtures and
hydrants.
DEFINITIONS
A.
ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
B.
Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with
disabilities.
C.
Cast Polymer: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material. This material includes cultured-marble and

solid-surface materials.
D.
Cultured Marble: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material with surface coating.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 4000 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
E.
Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture. Fittings
specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub
spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are
included where indicated.
F.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim,
fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials
and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
C.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category
through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.
Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single
manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that
category.
B.
intended use.
C.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act" ; and Public Law 101336, "Americans with Disabilities Act" ; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.
D.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy
Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.
E.
NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for
fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
F.
Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are
compatible.
G.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing
fixtures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
22 4000 - 2
Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M.

Porcelain-Enameled, Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M.
Slip-Resistant Bathing Surfaces: ASTM F 462.
Stainless-Steel Commercial, Handwash Sinks: NSF 2 construction.
Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.
Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
Design Development
October 02, 2015
7.
H.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Backflow Protection Devices for Hand-Held Showers: ASME A112.18.3M.

Combination, Pressure-Equalizing and Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets:
ASSE 1016.
Deck-Mounted Bath/Shower Transfer Valves: ASME 18.7.
Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.
Hand-Held Showers: ASSE 1014.
High-Temperature-Limit Controls for Thermal-Shock-Preventing Devices: ASTM F 445.
Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
Pressure-Equalizing-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.
Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous fittings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
K.
Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M.
Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M.
Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025.
Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.
Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.
Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61.
Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1.
Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for shower
faucets:
1.
2.
J.
Whirlpool Bathtub Fittings: ASME A112.19.8M.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory
and sink faucets:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
I.

CA 15-001
Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.

Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1.
Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021.
Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.
Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409.
Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous components:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430.

Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021.
Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6.
Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3.
Grab Bars: ASTM F 446.
Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 4000 - 3

CA 15-001
9.
10.
11.
1.6
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Plastic Shower Receptors: ANSI Z124.2.

Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.
Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of whirlpools that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1.

a.
b.
c.
2.
1.7
Structural failures of unit shell.

Faulty operation of controls, blowers, pumps, heaters, and timers.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
Warranty Period for Commercial Applications: Three year(s) from date of Substantial
Completion.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size
installed.
Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size
installed.
Flushometer Valve, Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed,
but no fewer than 12 of each type.
Provide hinged-top wood or metal box, or individual metal boxes, with separate
compartments for each type and size of extra materials listed above.
Water-Closet Tank, Repair Kits: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed.
Toilet Seats: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed.
Dry Urinal Trap-Seal Cartridges: Equal to 200 percent of amount of each Dry Urinal
Trap-Seal Liquid: Equal to 1 gal for each urinal installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
See fixture schedule on plans
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify
actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.
22 4000 - 4
PLUMBING FIXTURES
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
B.
Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be
installed.
C.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers'
B.
Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.

1.
2.
3.
Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.
Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.
Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.
C.
Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.
D.
Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building

substrate.
E.
Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.
F.
Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.
G.
Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
H.
Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.
Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
1.
Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture.
Valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."
I.
Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to
sanitary drainage system.
J.
Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage
system.
K.
Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide
side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities
to reach.
L.
Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of
compartment.
M.
Install toilet seats on water closets.
N.
Install water closet 18 from side wall to center of toilet if column or beam interferes with
plumbing. No offset flanges accepted.
O.
Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are
not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 4000 - 5

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
P.
Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop
valves.
Q.
Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets
are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
R.
Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.
S.
Install traps on fixture outlets.

1.
2.
Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.

Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.
T.
Install disposer in outlet of each sink indicated to have disposer. Install switch where indicated
or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated.
U.
Install dishwasher air-gap fitting at each sink indicated to have air-gap fitting. Install in sink
deck. Connect inlet hose to dishwasher and outlet hose to disposer.
V.
Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within
cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
W.
Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
B.
Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent
piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
C.
Systems."
D.
Cables."
3.4

A.
Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where
installed.
B.
Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified
components.
C.
Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
22 4000 - 6
PLUMBING FIXTURES
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
D.
Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace
malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate
properly.
E.
Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Operate and adjust faucets and controls.

fittings, and controls.
B.
Operate and adjust disposers and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning units and
controls.
C.
Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow and stream.
D.
Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
E.
Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
3.6
Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures,
CLEANING
A.
Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods
and materials. Do the following:
1.
2.
B.
3.7
Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers
and spouts.
Remove sediment and debris from drains.
After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect
exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
PROTECTION
A.
Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B.
Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by
Owner.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 4000 - 7
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 22 4700 - DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following water coolers and related components:
1.
1.3
Pressure water coolers.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Accessible Water Cooler: Fixture that can be approached and used by people with disabilities.
B.
Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of fixture.
C.
Fixture: Drinking fountain or water cooler unless one is specifically indicated.
D.
Water Cooler: Electrically powered fixture for generating and delivering cooled drinking water.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each fixture indicated. Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
B.

1.5
For fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
intended use.
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act" ; and Public Law 101336, "Americans with Disabilities Act" ; for fixtures for people with disabilities.
C.
NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for
fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS
22 4700- 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
D.
ARI Standard: Comply with ARI 1010, "Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated DrinkingWater Coolers," for water coolers and with ARI's "Directory of Certified Drinking Water Coolers"
for type and style classifications.
E.
ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 34, "Designation and Safety Classification of
Refrigerants," for water coolers. Provide HFC 134a (tetrafluoroethane) refrigerant, unless
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRESSURE WATER COOLERS

A.
Water Coolers, DF-1:

1.
2.
3.

the following:
following:
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Elkay Manufacturing Co.

Halsey Taylor.
Haws Corporation.
Larco, Inc.
Oasis Corporation.
Sunroc Corp.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine roughing-in for water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
connections before fixture installation. Verify that sizes and locations of piping and types of
supports match those indicated.
B.
Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.
C.
3.2
3.3
APPLICATIONS
A.
Use mounting frames for recessed water coolers, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Use chrome-plated brass or copper tube, fittings, and valves in locations exposed to view. Plain
copper tube, fittings, and valves may be used in concealed locations.
INSTALLATION
22 4700- 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
A.
Install mounting frames affixed to building construction and attach recessed water coolers to
mounting frames, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Install fixtures level and plumb. For fixtures indicated for children, install at height required by
C.
Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Use ball, gate, or globe valve. Install valves in locations where they can be
easily reached for operation. Valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves
for Plumbing Piping."
D.
Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage
system.
E.
Install pipe escutcheons at wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern
escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. Escutcheons are specified in
Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
F.
Seal joints between fixtures and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant,
silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 07
Section "Joint Sealants."
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
B.
Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent
piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
C.
Systems."
D.
Cables."
3.5

A.
Water Cooler Testing: After electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with
requirements. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
1.
2.
3.6
3.7

CA 15-001
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

Report test results in writing.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.
B.
Adjust water cooler temperature settings.
CLEANING
22 4700- 3

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
A.
After completing fixture installation, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt,
and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B.
Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
22 4700- 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 23 0130 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.3
Sleeves.
Escutcheons.
Grout.
Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
Painting and finishing.
Supports and anchorages.
DEFINITIONS
A.
spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
B.
C.

D.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.
E.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F.
The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1.
2.
3.
G.
CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.

The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1.
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
23 0130 - 1

CA 15-001
1.4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
2.
3.
1.5
Escutcheons.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, Structural
Welding CodeSteel.
B.
Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
1.
2.
C.
1.6
Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, Code for Pressure Piping.
Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics

may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting
electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum
energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

A.
moisture.
B.
Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for HVAC installations.
B.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place

concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C.
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that are
concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08
Section Access Doors and Frames.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
23 0130 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
A.
Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.2
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1.
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness

unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
a.
b.
2.
Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated; and
full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
ASTM B 813.
F.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
G.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H.
Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1.
2.
I.
2.3
2.4

CA 15-001
CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.

PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
TRANSITION FITTINGS
A.
Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturers Schedule 80

equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.
B.
Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturers SDR 11 equivalent

dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.
MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
23 0130 - 3

CA 15-001
A.
Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
1.
2.
3.
2.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and
number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing
element.
SLEEVES
A.
Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated wall pipe equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends
and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange
for attaching to wooden forms.
2.7
GROUT
A.
Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1.
2.
3.
Characteristics:
Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
noncorrosive,
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A.
Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping
systems.
B.
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
C.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D.
otherwise.
E.
F.
G.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
23 0130 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
H.
I.
J.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K.
pressure.
O.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section
Penetration Firestopping for materials.
P.
Q.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in

requirements.
3.2

A.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B.
C.
assembly.
D.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDAs Copper Tube Handbook, using leadfree solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWSs Brazing Handbook, Pipe and Tube
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
2.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 Quality Assurance Article.
H.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I.
Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
23 0130 - 5

CA 15-001
1.
2.
3.
4.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
J.
Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
K.
Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
L.
PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or
paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1.
2.
M.
3.4
Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.

Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to
pipe manufacturers written instructions
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A.
Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
not indicated.
B.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D.
Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.5
PAINTING
A.
3.6
Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A.
Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor
HVAC materials and equipment.
B.
Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or
will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood members.
C.
Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
23 0130 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
23 0130 - 7
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 23 0513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,

horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to
600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment
manufacturer for field installation.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Motor controllers.
Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A.
Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in
HVAC equipment schedules or Sections.
B.
Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
2.2
2.3
MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A.
Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above
sea level.
B.
Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected
loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating
sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
POLYPHASE MOTORS
COMMON MOTOR REQ. FOR HVAC UNITS
23 0513 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
A.
Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B.
Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C.
Service Factor: 1.15.
D.
Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1.
2.
For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
E.
Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
F.
Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
G.
Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
H.
Insulation: Class F.
I.
Code Letter Designation:

1.
2.
J.
2.4
Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.

Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor
frame sizes smaller than 324T.
POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A.
Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection
requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,
suited to control method.
B.
Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features
coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.5
Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and
tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by
pulse-width modulated inverters.
Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.
Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.
Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected
motors.
SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A.
Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements
of specific motor application:
1.
2.
3.
4.
23 0513 - 2
Permanent-split capacitor.
Split phase.
Capacitor start, inductor run.
Capacitor start, capacitor run.
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
B.
Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
C.
Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and
thrust loading.
D.
Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
E.
Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor
when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor
insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns
to normal range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
23 0513 - 3
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 23 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Metal pipe hangers and supports.

Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
Fastener systems.
Pipe stands.
Equipment supports.
Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze
hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
Division 23 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping" for pipe guides and
anchors.
Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for
vibration isolation devices.
Division 23 Section(s) "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
A.
Delegated Design:
Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
B.
Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand
the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according
to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.
2.
Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
23 0529 - 1

CA 15-001
3.
1.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain
approval from authorities having jurisdiction.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the
following; include Product Data for components:
1.
Equipment supports.
C.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
2.2
Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbonsteel shapes.
A.
Structural Steel:
galvanized.
B.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1.
2.
ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support

equipment above floor, as required or as shown on plans.
B.
Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports, as required or as shown on
plans.
23 0529 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.2

CA 15-001
METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
B.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;
appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
ADJUSTING
A.
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B.
Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
23 0529 - 3
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 23 0548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
IBC: International Building Code.
B.
ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.
C.
OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California.
1.4
A.
Wind-Restraint Loading:
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Isolation pads.
Isolation mounts.
Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.
Freestanding and restrained spring isolators.
Housed spring mounts.
Elastomeric hangers.
Spring hangers.
Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.
Pipe riser resilient supports.
Resilient pipe guides.
Freestanding and restrained air-mounting system.
Restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails.
Seismic snubbers.
Restraining braces and cables.
Steel and inertia, vibration isolation equipment bases.
Basic Wind Speed: 35 mph.

Building Classification Category: II.
Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft. multiplied by the maximum area of the HVAC component projected
on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction, and 45 degrees either side of
normal.
SUBMITTALS
23 0548 - 1

CA 15-001
A.
B.
Design Development
October 02, 2015

1.
Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation
device.
2.
Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details indicated to

comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.
Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and
operation, forces required to select vibration isolators, restraints, and for designing
vibration isolation bases.
a.
2.
3.
4.
Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment
mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Division 22 Sections for
equipment mounted outdoors.
Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion
and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring
deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been
examined for excessive stress and that none will exist.
Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail overall dimensions, including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and
rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component
misalignment, and cantilever loads.
Wind-Restraint Details:
a.
b.
c.
Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of wind restraints.

Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.
Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to
the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods,
and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and
values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate
association with vibration isolation devices.
Coordinate vibration isolation details with wind-restraint details required for
equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Division 22
Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.
C.
D.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
E.
F.

1.6
For air-mounting systems to include in operation and
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as
defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
23 0548 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
B.
Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are
more stringent.
C.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding
Code - Steel."
D.
Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall
bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or
preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum
seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based
on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent
testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support
seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

B.
Manufacturers:
following:
C.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of

the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
Ace Mountings Co., Inc.

Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
California Dynamics Corporation.
Isolation Technology, Inc.
Kinetics Noise Control.
Mason Industries.
Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
Vibration Isolation.
Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.
Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad
area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes
that match requirements of supported equipment.
1.
E.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.
Mounts:
Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, hermetically sealed
compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top
plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or
otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
1.
2.
Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and

opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded
element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.
Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridgebearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
23 0548 - 3

CA 15-001
F.
Restrained Mounts: All-directional mountings with seismic restraint.

1.
2.
G.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inchthick, rubber
isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500
psig.
Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw
to fasten and level equipment.
Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop
restraint.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
I.
Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and

opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded
element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.
Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridgebearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.

1.
H.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight
being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inchthick, neoprene or rubber
isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and
leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.
Restraint: Seismic or limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having
jurisdiction.
Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers.
1.
2.
3.
Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic restraint.

Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure.
Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch travel up or down before
contacting a resilient collar.
J.
Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant

elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger
rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
K.
Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert
in compression.
1.
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing
isolation efficiency.
23 0548 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
L.

CA 15-001
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced
cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support
spring coil.
Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger
with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing
isolation efficiency.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower
threaded rod.
Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support
spring coil.
M.
Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes
separated by a minimum of 1/2-inchthick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical-limit
stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load
on the isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions.
N.
Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve
arrangement separated by a minimum of 1/2-inchthick neoprene. Where clearances are not
readily visible, a factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe
expansion and contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to
allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location
requirements.
2.2
RESTRAINED VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF-CURB RAILS

A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

B.
Manufacturers:
following:
C.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of

the following:
1.
2.
Amber/Booth Company, Inc.

California Dynamics Corporation.
23 0548 - 5

CA 15-001
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Isolation Technology, Inc.

Kinetics Noise Control.
Mason Industries.
Thybar Corporation.
Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
Vibration Isolation.
Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.
D.
General Requirements for Restrained Vibration Isolation Roof-Curb Rails: Factory-assembled,

fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight curb rail designed to resiliently support equipment
and to withstand wind forces.
E.
Lower Support Assembly: Formed sheet-metal section containing adjustable and removable
steel springs that support upper frame. Upper frame shall provide continuous support for
equipment and shall be captive to resiliently resist wind forces. Lower support assembly shall
have a means for attaching to building structure and a wood nailer for attaching roof materials,
and shall be insulated with a minimum of 2 inches of rigid, glass-fiber insulation on inside of
assembly.
F.
Spring Isolators: Adjustable, restrained spring isolators shall be mounted on 1/4-inchthick,
elastomeric vibration isolation pads and shall have access ports, for level adjustment, with
removable waterproof covers at all isolator locations. Isolators shall be located so they are
accessible for adjustment at any time during the life of the installation without interfering with the
integrity of the roof.
1.
Restrained Spring Isolators:

restraint.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with wind
Housing:
Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops and adjustable equipment
mounting and leveling bolt.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over
pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut
to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.
a.
Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant standard neoprene.
G.
Snubber Bushings: All-directional, elastomeric snubber bushings at least 1/4 inch thick.
H.
Water Seal: Galvanized sheet metal with EPDM seals at corners, attached to upper support
frame, extending down past wood nailer of lower support assembly, and counterflashed over
roof materials.
2.3
FACTORY FINISHES
A.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
23 0548 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015
B.

CA 15-001
Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment

before shipping.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Powder coating on springs and housings.

All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use.
Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.
Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and wind control devices to indicate
capacity range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and wind-control devices for
performance.
B.
Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before
installation.
C.
3.2
VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION

A.
Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof
curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
B.
Equipment Restraints:
1.
Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance
between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.
C.
Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
D.
Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide
resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
E.
Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide
resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.
F.
Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at

flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
G.
Drilled-in Anchors:
1.
2.
Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for
anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling.
Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are
encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and
telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full
design strength.
23 0548 - 7

CA 15-001
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.3
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty
sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to
which anchor is to be fastened.
Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to
installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole
and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air
pockets in the adhesive.
Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior
applications.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.
B.
Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.
After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during
normal operation.
C.
Adjust air-spring leveling mechanism.
D.
Adjust active height of spring isolators.
E.
Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.
23 0548 - 8
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 23 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
All Condensing units 1 Brass Tags

All Mechanical Equipment serving common and garage areas 1 lettering.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT.
23 0553 - 1
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 23 0593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Balancing Air Systems:

a.
1.3
Constant-air-volume systems serving common areas only.
DEFINITIONS
A.
AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B.
NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
C.
TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D.
TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
E.
TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
LEED Submittal:
1.
Air-Balance Report for LEED Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation of work performed for

ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing."
B.
Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation

that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified
in "Quality Assurance" Article.
C.
Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed,

submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.
D.
Certified TAB reports.
E.
Sample report forms.
F.
Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 0593 - 1

CA 15-001
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.5
Instrument type and make.

Serial number.
Application.
Dates of use.
Dates of calibration.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by NEBB or TABB.

1.
2.
B.
TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by NEBB or TABB.
TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by NEBB or TABB
as a TAB technician.
TAB Conference: Meet with Architect, Owner Construction, Manager on approval of the TAB
strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Require the
participation of the TAB field supervisor and technicians. Provide seven days' advance notice
of scheduled meeting time and location.
1.
Agenda Items:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
The Contract Documents examination report.

The TAB plan.
Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:

1.
2.
Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures
specified and referenced in this Specification.
D.
TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Architect, Owner,
Construction Manager.
E.
Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration:

Section 5, "Instrumentation."
1.6
1.7
Design Development
October 02, 2015
As described in ASHRAE 111,
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB
period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
B.
Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial
Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
COORDINATION
23 0593 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
A.
Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.
B.
Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water] distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TAB SPECIALISTS
A.
Subject to compliance with requirements, available TAB contractors that may be engaged
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
3.2
Approval by engineer.
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B.
Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer
wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify
that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.
C.
Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
D.
Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions
for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E.
Examine ceiling plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they meet the leakage
class of connected ducts as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" and are properly
separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and firestopped if required.
F.
Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1.
2.
G.
Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects
that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all
or part of a system.
Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when
installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment
performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in
AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design."
Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.
Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,
cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
23 0593 - 3

CA 15-001
H.
Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
I.
Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned
and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
J.
Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
K.
Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
3.3
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B.
Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.4
Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.

Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A.
Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" ASHRAE 111 NEBB's
"Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems"
SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section.
1.
B.
Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing."
Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness
as used to construct ducts.
After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with
requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,
coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."
C.
Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position
indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other
suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
D.
Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
23 0593 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
A.
Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B.
Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C.
Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.
D.
Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaustair dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
E.
Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
F.
Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
G.
Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
H.
Check for airflow blockages.
I.
Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
J.
Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.
K.
Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."
3.6
TOLERANCES
A.
Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1.
2.
3.7
Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.
Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.
REPORTING
A.
Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'
balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to
facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to
HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and
balancing devices.
B.
Status Reports: Prepare monthly progress reports to describe completed procedures,

procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems
found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and
each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.8
FINAL REPORT
A.
General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections
for tested systems and balanced systems.
23 0593 - 5

CA 15-001
1.
2.
B.
Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the
certified testing and balancing engineer.
Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Pump curves.
Fan curves.
Manufacturers' test data.
Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and
product data.
General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Title page.
Name and address of the TAB contractor.
Project name.
Project location.
Architect's name and address.
Engineer's name and address.
Contractor's name and address.
Report date.
Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
Summary of contents including the following:
a.
b.
c.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

Conditions of filters.
Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air distribution systems. Present each system
with single-line diagram and include the following:
1.
2.
E.
Indicated versus final performance.

Notable characteristics of systems.
Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.
Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.
Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
D.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
23 0593 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015
1.
Unit Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
2.
Motor make, and frame type and size.

Horsepower and rpm.
Volts, phase, and hertz.
Full-load amperage and service factor.
Sheave make, size in inches , and bore.
Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches .
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
F.
Unit identification.
Location.
Make and type.
Model number and unit size.
Manufacturer's serial number.
Unit arrangement and class.
Discharge arrangement.
Number, make, and size of belts.
Number, type, and size of filters.
Motor Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.

CA 15-001
Total air flow rate in cfm .

Total system static pressure in inches wg .
Fan rpm.
Discharge static pressure in inches wg .
Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg .
Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg .
Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg .
Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg .
Outdoor airflow in cfm .
Return airflow in cfm .
Outdoor-air damper position.
Return-air damper position.
Vortex damper position.
Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup
equipment reports, include the following:
1.
Unit Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
System identification.
Location.
Make and type.
Model number and unit size.
Fuel type in input data.
Output capacity in Btu/h .
Ignition type.
Burner-control types.
Motor horsepower and rpm.
Motor volts, phase, and hertz.
Motor full-load amperage and service factor.
23 0593 - 7

CA 15-001
m.
n.
2.
Total air flow rate in cfm .

Entering-air temperature in deg F .
Leaving-air temperature in deg F .
Air temperature differential in deg F .
Entering-air static pressure in inches wg .
Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg .
Air static-pressure differential in inches wg .
Low-fire fuel input in Btu/h .
High-fire fuel input in Btu/h .
Manifold pressure in psig .
High-temperature-limit setting in deg F .
Operating set point in Btu/h .
Motor voltage at each connection.
Motor amperage for each phase.
Heating value of fuel in Btu/h .
Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1.
Fan Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
3.
System identification.
Location.
Make and type.
Model number and size.
Arrangement and class.
Motor Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Motor make, and frame type and size.

Horsepower and rpm.
Volts, phase, and hertz.
Full-load amperage and service factor.
Number, make, and size of belts.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.9


a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
G.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Total airflow rate in cfm .

Total system static pressure in inches wg .
Fan rpm.
Discharge static pressure in inches wg .
Suction static pressure in inches wg .
INSPECTIONS
23 0593 - 8
Design Development
October 02, 2015
A.
Initial Inspection:
1.
2.
After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check
measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and
balance readings documented in the final report.
Check the following for each system:
a.
b.
c.
B.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.
3.10
After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that
testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report,
request that a final inspection be made by Architect, Owner, Construction Manager.
The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the
presence of Architect.
Architect shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be
rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements
recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour
business day.
If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the
final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as
"FAILED."
If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total
measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be
considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails,
proceed as follows:
1.
D.
Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.

Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the
reading to the set point.
Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.
Final Inspection:
1.
C.

CA 15-001
Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing
device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final
inspection.
If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB
contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the
cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment.
ADDITIONAL TESTS
A.
Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are
being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B.
Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
23 0593 - 9
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 23 0700 - HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Insulation Materials:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Adhesives.
Sealants.
Field-applied jackets.
Tapes.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Cellular glass.
Flexible elastomeric.
Division 21 Section "Fire-Suppression Systems Insulation."

Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation."
Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and
jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship

program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84,
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label
insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers,
with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

HVAC INSULATION
23 0700 - 1

CA 15-001
2.
1.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed


A.
1.6
Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B.
Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct
Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation
application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain
clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and
for space required for maintenance.
C.
Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
1.7
SCHEDULING
A.
Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have
satisfactory test results.
B.
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be
applied.
B.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C.
Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D.
Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E.
Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
23 0700 - 2
HVAC INSULATION
Design Development
October 02, 2015
F.
Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid,
hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied
Jackets" Article.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
G.
2.2

CA 15-001
Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.

Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.
Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1.
Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ-SSL: Comply with ASTM C 552,
Type II, Class 2.
Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials.

ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
Comply with
ADHESIVES
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Cellular-Glass, Phenolic, Polyisocyanurate, and Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent-based resin

adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F .
C.
Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
2.3
SEALANTS
A.
Joint Sealants:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F .
Color: White or gray.
TAPES
A.
Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Width: 2 inches .
Thickness: 3.7 mils .
Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 5 percent.
Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
HVAC INSULATION
23 0700 - 3

CA 15-001
1.
2.
3.
3.2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of
defects.
Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B.
Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing.

requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C.
Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3
Comply with
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A.
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings,
valves, and specialties.
B.
Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system
schedules.
C.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J.
Where vapor barrier is indicated on the drawings, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in
insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic and
provide the following.
1.
2.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
23 0700 - 4
HVAC INSULATION
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.
4.

CA 15-001
Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
L.
Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1.
2.
3.
Draw jacket tight and smooth.

Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.
Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip,
spaced 4 inches o.c.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches . Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
a.
4.
5.
For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer
to maintain vapor seal.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and
at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
M.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
O.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches
similar to butt joints.
P.
For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.4
Testing agency labels and stamps.
Nameplates and data plates.
Manholes.
Handholes.
Cleanouts.
FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION

A.
Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1.
Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
HVAC INSULATION
23 0700 - 5

CA 15-001
2.
3.
4.
C.
Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness
as pipe insulation.
Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive

1.
2.
3.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.

Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive

A.
B.

1.
2.
3.
C.
3.6
Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and

insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be
limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule,
General" Article.
Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing fieldapplied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of
inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the
"Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion
adequate to determine compliance.
Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing
field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of
inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded
fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two
locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of
flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General"
Article.
All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements.
DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A.
Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. Exposed is defined as exposed to the exterior
elements and within an unconditioned space adjacent the buildings exterior.
Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.
Indoor, concealed return located in nonconditioned space.
Indoor, exposed return and supply located in nonconditioned space.
Indoor, concealed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust.
Indoor, exposed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust.
Indoor, concealed oven and warewash exhaust.
Indoor, exposed oven and warewash exhaust.
23 0700 - 6
HVAC INSULATION
Design Development
October 02, 2015
9.
10.
B.
Outdoor, concealed supply and return.

Outdoor, exposed supply and return.
Items Not Insulated:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.7

CA 15-001
Fibrous-glass ducts.
Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
Factory-insulated plenums and casings.
Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A.
Concealed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:
1.
B.
Concealed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:

1.
C.
Concealed, rectangular, return-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:

1.
3.8
PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A.
Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for
each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B.
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.9
Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.

Underground piping.
Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
Condenstate piping.
UNDERGROUND, FIELD-INSTALLED INSULATION JACKET

A.
For underground direct-buried piping applications, install underground direct-buried jacket over
insulation material.
HVAC INSULATION
23 0700 - 7
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 23 1123 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Pipes, tubes, and fittings.

Piping and tubing joining materials.
Valves.
Pressure regulators.
DEFINITIONS
A.
spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
B.
C.

1.4
A.
Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:

1.
2.
3.
Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

Service Regulators: 65 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.
Minimum Operating Pressure of Service Meter: 5 psig
B.
Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig or less.
C.
Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural-gas piping and equipment,
including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using
performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of the following:
23 1123 - 1

CA 15-001
1.
2.
3.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of
selected models.
Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities.
B.
Shop Drawings: For facility natural-gas piping layout. Include details for fabrication of pipe
anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops,
and attachments of the same to building structure.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For pressure regulators to include in emergency, operation,
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

B.
C.
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
1.7

A.
Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping
according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
moisture.
C.
Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging
coating, and protect from direct sunlight.
D.
Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact
utility-locating service for area where Project is located.
COORDINATION
A.
B.
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind
finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and
Frames."
23 1123 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.
1.
2.
3.
Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.

Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,
and threaded ends.
Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including
bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
Protective Coating for Underground Piping:

epoxy, adhesive, and PE.
a.
2.2
Material Group: 1.1.

End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe.
Lapped Face: Not permitted underground.
Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings,
and spiral-wound metal gaskets.
Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and underground.
Factory-applied, three-layer coating of
Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.
MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A.
See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.
B.
General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Comply with ASME B16.38.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
CWP Rating: 125 psig

Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.
Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.
Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"
Articles.
Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for
valves 1 inch and smaller.
Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently
marked on valve body.
CWP Rating: 125 psig

Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges.
Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"
Articles.
Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.
Two-Piece, Regular-Port Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.
23 1123 - 3

CA 15-001
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
E.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.

Plug: Bronze.
Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff
Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.
Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated.
Pressure Class: 125 psig.
Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to
Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
Valve Boxes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.

Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.
Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.
Seats: Reinforced TFE.
Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing.
Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff
Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.
CWP Rating: 600 psig.
Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to
Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.

1.
2.
3.
F.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Cast-iron, two-section box.

Top section with cover with "GAS" lettering.
Bottom section with base to fit over valve and barrel a minimum of 5 inches in diameter.
Adjustable cast-iron extensions of length required for depth of bury.
Include tee-handle, steel operating wrench with socket end fitting valve nut or flat head,
and with stem of length required to operate valve.
PRESSURE REGULATORS
A.
General Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Single stage and suitable for natural gas.

Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components.
Elevation compensator.
End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for regulators
NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
23 1123 - 4
Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum.

Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.
Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.
Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber.
Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.
Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish.
Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by
Maximum Inlet Pressure: 1 psig
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.4

CA 15-001
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating
nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B.
Dielectric Unions:
1.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
2.5

Pressure Rating: 125 psig
End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

A.
Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick,
continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective
jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches
deep; colored yellow.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping
connections before equipment installation.
B.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section.
B.
Inspect natural-gas piping according to the International Fuel Gas Code to determine that
natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected.
C.
Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.
3.3
OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A.
Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.
B.
Steel Piping with Protective Coating:

1.
2.
3.
Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints.
Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating
manufacturer.
Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.
23 1123 - 5

CA 15-001
C.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Copper Tubing with Protective Coating:

1.
2.
Apply joint cover kits over tubing to cover, seal, and protect joints.
Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating
manufacturer.
D.
E.
Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each service regulator.
3.4
INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A.
Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.
B.
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to
layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C.
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during
progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
D.
Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
E.
otherwise.
F.
G.
Locate valves for easy access.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for
roughing-in requirements.
L.
Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including
service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install
where condensate is subject to freezing.
1.
M.
Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.
Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and
same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or
cap.
Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or
floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.
23 1123 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
N.
Use concentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes.
O.
Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each
piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.
P.
Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.
Q.
Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated
valve. Unless internal screen is provided within regulator.
R.
Install pressure trap upstream and downstream from each line regulator.
S.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors at concrete and masonary
members.
T.
Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.
U.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing
Piping."
3.5
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel
tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.
B.
Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space
adequate for servicing and testing.
C.
Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping.
3.6

A.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
B.
assembly.
C.
Threaded Joints:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.
Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal
threading is specified.
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
Welded Joints:
1.
2.
Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and

welding operators.
Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
23 1123 - 7

CA 15-001
3.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds

and where damage to coating occurs during construction.
E.
Brazed Joints:
Chapter.
F.
Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas
service. Install gasket concentrically positioned.
G.
Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare
dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not
overtighten.
H.
PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or
paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1.
2.
3.7
Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.

Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

A.
Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Division 23 Section
"Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B.
Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
sizes:
1.
2.
3.
3.8
NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.
B.
Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment
grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.
C.
Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.
D.
Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within
72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and
appliances or equipment.
E.
Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as
practical to inlet of each appliance.
3.9

A.
Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment" for piping and valve identification.
23 1123 - 8
Design Development
October 02, 2015
B.
3.10

CA 15-001
Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade,
except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
PAINTING Shall be provided by the GC.
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for painting interior and exterior
natural-gas piping.
B.
Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars,
earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or
protective coating.
1.
Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.

a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Paint exposed, interior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars,
earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or
protective coating.
1.
Latex over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q.

a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
3.11
Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.

Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel flat.
Color: Green. Refer to section 09 90 00
Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.

Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Interior latex flat
Color: Green. Refer to section 09 90 00
Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materials and
by procedures to match original factory finish.
A.
B.

1.
Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to the International Fuel Gas Code and
C.
Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D.
3.12
A.
DEMONSTRATION
adjust, operate, and maintain earthquake valves.
23 1123 - 9

CA 15-001
3.13
A.
OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following:
1.
3.14
A.
A.
Aboveground, branch piping shall be the following:
A.
Underground natural-gas piping shall be the following:

Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints with scotchkote and wrapped in
Pasco pipe protection tape.
ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be one of the following:
1.
2.
B.
Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.
UNDERGROUND PIPING SCHEDULE
1.
3.16
Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.
INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE.
1.
3.15
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Two-piece, regular-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.

Bronze plug valve.
Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following:
1.
2.
Two-piece, regular-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.

Bronze plug valve.
23 1123 - 10
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 23 2300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.
A.
Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:

1.
2.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated.
pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:
1.
B.
1.5
Include
Pressure-regulating valves.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B.
Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."
C.
Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."
1.6
PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.
1.7
Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig .

Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig .
Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior
and exterior are clean when installed.
COORDINATION
REFRIGERANT PIPING
23 2300 - 1

CA 15-001
A.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These
items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A.
Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K or L.
B.
Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
C.
Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
D.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper
socket fittings on copper pipe.
E.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
2.2
REFRIGERANTS
A.
ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-410A

A.
Suction Lines NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper,
Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints.
B.
Suction Lines NPS 3-1/2 and Smaller NPS 2 to NPS 3-1/2 for Conventional Air-Conditioning
Applications: Copper, Type ACR or L, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with
brazed or soldered joints.
C.
Suction Lines NPS 4 and Smaller for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type
K or L, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with soldered joints.
D.
Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines, and Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: Copper, Type ACR,
annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints.
E.
Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines, and Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: Copper, Type K ,
annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints.
3.2
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.
23 2300 - 2
REFRIGERANT PIPING
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
B.
Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
C.
Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D.
otherwise.
E.
F.
Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.
G.
H.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. Properly performed tube bending
is acceptable.
I.
pressure.
J.
Refer to Division 23 Sections "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of
Operation" for solenoid valve controllers, control wiring, and sequence of operation.
K.
Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and
fittings.
L.
Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and
specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or
panels as specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment
requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.
M.
Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground.
N.
Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1.
Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs where required by the
manufacturer.
2.
Liquid lines may be installed level.
O.
When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve
stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply
heat near expansion-valve bulb.
P.
Install pipe sleeves at penetrations in concrete or masonry exterior walls and floor assemblies.
Q.
Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 07 Section "Penetration
Firestopping."
R.
Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between
pipes for insulation installation.
S.
Install sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full-thickness
insulation.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
23 2300 - 3

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
T.
Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants"
for materials and methods.
U.
Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC
Piping and Equipment."
3.3
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A.
B.
assembly.
C.
Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide), during brazing or welding, to
prevent scale formation.
D.
Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and
Tube."
1.
2.
3.4
Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper
pipe.
Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A.
Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and
Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B.
Install the following pipe attachments:

1.
In accordance with local code enforcement.
C.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1.
2.
D.
3.5
NPS 1/2 : Maximum span, 60 inches ; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch .
NPS 1 : Maximum span, 72 inches ; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch .
Support multifloor vertical runs at least at each floor.

A.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.

1.
2.
3.
23 2300 - 4
Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.

Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,
evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test
pressure.
Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the
pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
Design Development
October 02, 2015
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.6

CA 15-001
Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.
System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of
test.
Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount
of soap and glycerin solution over joints.
Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are
achieved.
SYSTEM CHARGING
A.
Charge system using the following procedures:

1.
2.
3.
4.
3.7
Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.
Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers . If vacuum
holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.
Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig .
Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating
suction pressure.
B.
Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system design

temperature.
C.
Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to
manufacturer's written instructions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.

Verify that compressor oil level is correct.
Open compressor suction and discharge valves.
Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.
Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings.
Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow
rates and pressures are established.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
23 2300 - 5
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 23 3113 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing,
adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.
Division 23 Section "Nonmetal Ducts" for fibrous-glass ducts, thermoset fiberreinforced plastic ducts, thermoplastic ducts, PVC ducts, and concrete ducts.
Division 23 Section "HVAC Casings" for factory- and field-fabricated casings for
mechanical equipment.
Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices,
duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
A.
Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam
and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance
requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.
B.
Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports and seismic restraints shall
withstand the effects of gravity and seismic loads and stresses within limits and under
conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible" and ASCE/SEI 7. SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for
Mechanical Systems."
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.

Single-wall roundducts and fittings.
Duct liner.
Sealants and gaskets.
Hangers and supports.
Seismic Hazard Level A: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.48.

Seismic Hazard Level B: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.30.
Seismic Hazard Level C: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.15.
SUBMITTALS
METAL DUCTS
23 3113 - 1

CA 15-001
A.
Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1.
2.
B.
Liners and adhesives.

Sealants and gaskets.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
C.
Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections,

components, and attachments to other work.
Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.
Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure
classes.
Elevation of top of ducts.
Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.
Fittings.
Reinforcement and spacing.
Seam and joint construction.
Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.
Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access
doors and panels.
Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachmentand
vibration isolation.
Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown
and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general

construction, building components, and other building services.
Indicate
proposed changes to duct layout.
Suspended ceiling components.
Structural members to which duct will be attached.
Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction.
Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
1.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Lighting fixtures.
Air outlets and inlets.
Speakers.
Sprinklers.
Access panels.
Perimeter moldings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding Qualifications:
Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.
AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports.
AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
B.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.
23 3113 - 2
METAL DUCTS
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.
3.
C.

CA 15-001
AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum

supports.
AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004,

Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A.
General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless
B.
Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth)
Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved,
duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible."
C.
Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams Rectangular Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements,
materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
D.
Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select
types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure
class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and
other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
2.2
DUCT LINER
A.
Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and
with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."
1.
Maximum Thermal Conductivity:

a.
2.
B.
Type I, Flexible:
temperature.
0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean
Solvent-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with
ASTM C 916.
Insulation Pins and Washers:

1.
METAL DUCTS
Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel

pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank,
23 3113 - 3

CA 15-001
2.
C.
length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized

carbon-steel washer.
Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inchthick aluminum; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely
in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-19, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent
adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness
with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.
Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive
metal nosing.
Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive.
Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure
butted-edge overlapping.
Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners
of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal
joints necessary.
Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500
fpm .
Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings
that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall.
Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:
a.
b.
c.
8.
2.3
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Fan discharges.
Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are
higher than 2500 fpm or where indicated.
Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers,

turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat
sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to
duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.
SEALANT AND GASKETS

A.
General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for

sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum
smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
B.
Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
23 3113 - 4
Application Method: Brush on.

Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.
Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.
Water resistant.
Mold and mildew resistant.
VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).
Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg , positive and negative.
Service: Indoor or outdoor.
Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare),
stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.
METAL DUCTS
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.4

CA 15-001
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A.
Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
B.
Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or

galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
C.
Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1 , "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and
Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."
D.
Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts:

ASTM A 603.
E.
Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.
F.
Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel,
and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping
device.
G.
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;
compatible with duct materials.
H.
Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1.
2.
3.
Galvanized steel complying with
Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.
Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc
chromate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DUCT INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to
size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other
design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are
approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.
B.
Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
D.
Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and
for branch connections.
E.
Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines.
F.
Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and
permanent enclosure elements of building.
METAL DUCTS
23 3113 - 5

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
G.
Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch , plus allowance for insulation thickness.
H.
Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment
rooms and enclosures.
I.
Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are
exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation
with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on
four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches .
J.
Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire
dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for
fire and smoke dampers.
K.
Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign
materials. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."
3.2
INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A.
Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.
B.
Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do
not use two-part tape sealing system.
C.
Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter.
When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the
exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.
D.
Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of

fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.
E.
Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these
requirements.
3.3
DUCT SEALING
A.
3.4
Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct
Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible."

A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports."
B.
Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel

fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1.
2.
23 3113 - 6
Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and
completely cured.
METAL DUCTS
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.
4.

CA 15-001
Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate

concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
C.
Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Table 4-1 , "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2,
"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers
and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch
intersection.
D.
Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
E.
Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with
welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a
maximum intervals of 16 feet .
F.
Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pullout, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.
3.5
CONNECTIONS
A.
Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23

Section "Air Duct Accessories."
B.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.6
PAINTING (Common and Public Areas)

A.
3.7
Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not
have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanizedsteel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09
painting Sections.

A.
3.8
START UP
A.
3.9
Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing for HVAC."
DUCT SCHEDULE
A.
Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as
follows:
METAL DUCTS
23 3113 - 7

CA 15-001
B.
Supply Ducts:
1.
Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Pressure Class: Positive or negative 1-inch wg

Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12
SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12
Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:

a.
b.
c.
d.
Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg

Exhaust Ducts:
1.
Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:

a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg

Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A if negative pressure, and A if positive
pressure.
Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units <Insert equipment>:

a.
b.
c.
d.
E.
Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg

Return Ducts:
1.
D.
Pressure Class: Positive 1-inch wg.

SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 24.
Ducts Connected to Constant-Volume Air-Handling Units:

a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg

Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A if negative pressure, and A if positive
pressure.
Intermediate Reinforcement:
1.
Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel
2.
Stainless-Steel Ducts:
23 3113 - 8
METAL DUCTS
Design Development
October 02, 2015
a.
b.
3.
F.
Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.

Not Exposed to Airstream: [Galvanized] [Match duct material].
Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum
Liner:
1.
2.
G.

CA 15-001
Supply Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch inches thick.

Return Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick.
Elbow Configuration:
1.
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards

- Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a.
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:

1)
2)
b.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm :

1)
2)
3)
c.
3)
c.
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.

Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two
vanes.
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and
Vane Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-3, "Round Duct Elbows."
a.
METAL DUCTS

Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and
two vanes.
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3,
"Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in
Elbows."

- Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a.
b.
3.

Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and
two vanes.
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3,
"Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in
Elbows."
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:

1)
2)
2.

Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.
Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
23 3113 - 9

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of
direction have proportionately fewer segments.
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
c.
H.
Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.

Round Elbows, [14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam.
Branch Configuration:
1.

- Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-6, "Branch Connections."
a.
b.
2.
Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.

Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.
Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and
Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.
a.
b.
c.
I.
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three

segments for 90-degree elbow.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm : 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five
Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap.

Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm : Conical tap.
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.
Pre-insulated Flexible Duct shall be permitted where accepted by local code

enforcement and duct manufacturer.
23 3113 - 10
METAL DUCTS
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 23 3300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Manual volume dampers.

Combination fire and smoke dampers.
Turning vanes.
Flexible ducts.
Division 23 Section "HVAC Gravity Ventilators" for roof-mounted ventilator caps.

Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" for duct-mounted fire and smoke
detectors.
SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
B.
For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data.
breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings.
Shop Drawings: For duct accessories.

attachments to other work.
1.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details and
Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction.
Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field
assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Include
Special fittings.
Manual volume damper installations.
Fire-damper, smoke-damper, combination fire- and smoke-damper, ceiling, and
corridor damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted access doors
and remote damper operators.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

For air duct accessories to include in operation and
23 3300 - 1

CA 15-001
1.4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B.
Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.
B.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1.
2.
Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.

Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.
C.
Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2 finish
for concealed ducts.
D.
Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 , Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for
concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
E.
Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221 , Alloy 6063, Temper T6.
F.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates:

Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
G.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches .
2.2
MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A.
Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:

1.
2.
3.
Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.

Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
Frames:
a.
b.
c.
4.
Blades:
a.
b.
c.
23 3300 - 2
Hat-shaped, galvanized-steel channels, 0.064-inch minimum thickness.

Mitered and welded corners.
Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
Multiple or single blade.

Parallel- or opposed-blade design.
Stiffen damper blades for stability.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
d.
5.
6.
B.
3.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
Size: 1-inch diameter.

Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on
supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.
Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in
multiple-damper assembly.
Damper Hardware:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Oil-impregnated bronze.
Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full
length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
Jackshaft:
1.
2.
C.
Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.
Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.

Bearings:
a.
b.
7.

CA 15-001
Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inchthick zinc-plated steel,
and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.
Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.
Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS

A.
Type: Static and dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 and UL 555S by an NRTL.
B.
Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 4000-fpm velocity.
C.
Fire Rating: 1-1/2 and 3 hours.
D.
Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream except when located behind grille where
blades may be inside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inchthick galvanized steel;
with mitered and interlocking corners.
E.
Heat-Responsive Device: Electric resettable link and switch package, factory installed, rated.
F.
Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection.
G.
Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream except when located behind grille where
blades may be inside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inchthick galvanized steel;
with mitered and interlocking corners.
H.
Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking, 0.034-inchthick, galvanized sheet steel. In place
of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inchthick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.
I.
Leakage: Class I and Class II
J.
Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.
23 3300 - 3

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
K.
Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inchthick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall
or floor application with factory-furnished silicone calking.
L.
Master control panel for use in dynamic smoke-management systems.
M.
Damper Motors: Modulating or two-position action.
N.
Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
O.
Accessories:
1.
2.
2.4
Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical
devices and connections specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for
HVAC." Division 26 Sections.
Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear
trains.
Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated.
Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or
adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating
of 150 in. x lbf .
Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed
to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal
operation at minus 40 deg F .
Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft. , size motor for running
torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf .
Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz.
Auxiliary switches for fan control.

Test and reset switches, mounted.
TURNING VANES
A.
Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support
with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
1.
Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated

faces and fibrous-glass fill.
B.
General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
C.
Vane Construction: Double wall.
2.5
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A.
Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.
B.
Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
23 3300 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
C.
Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. .

Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F .
Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in
compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan
discharge and duct.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.6

CA 15-001
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of
30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch movement at
start and stop.
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A.
Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, springsteel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; [polyethylene] [aluminized] vapor-barrier film.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound,
spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; [polyethylene] [aluminized] vapor-barrier film.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inch wg negative.

Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm .
Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F .
Insulation R-Value: [Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004] <Insert value>.
Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate supported by
helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; [polyethylene] [aluminized] vaporbarrier film.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.

Insulation R-value: [Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004] <Insert value>.

Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex
adhesive supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; [polyethylene]
[aluminized] vapor-barrier film.
1.
23 3300 - 5

CA 15-001
2.
3.
4.
E.

Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 0, interlocking spiral of aluminum foil; fibrous-glass
insulation; [polyethylene] [aluminized] vapor-barrier film.
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Pressure Rating: 8-inch wg positive or negative.

Flexible Duct Connectors:

1.
Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a
worm-gear action or heavy duty nylon/poly Panduit type or zip ties in sizes 3 through 18
inches , to suit duct size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct
Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B.
Install volume dampers where indicated on plans and at all common area ductwork at points on
supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers
are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner,
and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.
1.
3.2
Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.
C.
Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D.
Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
E.
Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.
F.
For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with
loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
G.
Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct.
H.
Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.
I.
Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust
limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start and
stop of fans.
23 3300 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015
A.

CA 15-001

1.
2.
3.
Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.

Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of
movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed.
Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.
23 3300 - 7
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 23 3423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
A.
1.4
Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on 5,280 Ft.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Also include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
2.
1.5
Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

Certified fan sound-power ratings.
Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.
Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
Roof curbs.
Fan speed controllers.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Centrifugal roof ventilators.

Ceiling-mounted ventilators.
In-line centrifugal fans.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation,
MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS
23 3423 - 1

CA 15-001
A.
1.
1.7
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Belts: One set for each belt-driven unit.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.

restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762.
1.8
Power ventilators for use for
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
B.
C.
Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with
actual equipment provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS

A.

on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.

Loren Cook Company.
PennBarry.
Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle square, one-piece, aluminum
base with venturi inlet cone.
1.
2.
Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air upward,
with rain and snow drains and grease collector.
Hinged Subbase:
Galvanized-steel hinged arrangement permitting service and
maintenance.
C.
Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
D.
Belt Drives:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
23 3423 - 2
Resiliently mounted to housing.

Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.
Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.
Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
E.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50
percent.
Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside
fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch (13-mm) mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base;
factory set to close when fan stops.
Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inchthick, rigid, fiberglass
insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof
opening and fan base.
1.
2.
2.2

CA 15-001
Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip, with mounting flange

Overall Height: 8 inches
CEILING-MOUNTED VENTILATORS
A.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Loren Cook Company.
PennBarry.
Broan
Air King
B.
Housing: Stee.
C.
Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan
wheel shall be removable for service.
D.
Grille: Plastic louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing.
E.
Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for
motor plug-in.
F.
Accessories:
1.
2.3
Manual Starter Switch: Single-pole rocker switch assembly with cover and pilot light.
IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS

A.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Loren Cook Company.
PennBarry.
Broan
Acme
23 3423 - 3

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
B.
Housing: Split, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet flanges, and
support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.
C.
Direct-Drive Units: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on
outside of fan housing; with wheel, inlet cone, and motor on swing-out service door.
D.
Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.
E.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50
percent.
Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.
Fan Guards: 1/2- by 1-inch mesh of galvanized steel in removable frame. Provide guard
for inlet or outlet for units not connected to ductwork.
Vibration Isolators:
a.
b.
2.4
Type: Elastomeric hangers

Static Deflection: 1 inch
MOTORS
A.
Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements
for HVAC Equipment."
1.
B.
2.5
Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A.
Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound
Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant
Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
B.
Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing
Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install power ventilators level and plumb.
B.
Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. See Section 077200
"Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.
23 3423 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
C.
Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
D.
Label units according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC
Piping and Equipment."
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air
Duct Accessories."
B.
Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
D.
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.3

A.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to
ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload
protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan
wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and
adjust belts, and install belt guards.
Adjust belt tension.
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to
indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
C.
Test and adjust controls and safeties.

equipment.
D.
3.4
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
23 3423 - 5

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
B.
Adjust belt tension.
C.
Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for
testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
D.
Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.
E.
Lubricate bearings.
23 3423 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 23 3713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Louver face diffusers.

Linear bar diffusers.
Linear slot diffusers.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
Division 08 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents,
whether or not they are connected to ducts.
Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volumecontrol dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CEILING DIFFUSERS
A.
Louver Face Diffuser:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.2
Material: Steel or Aluminum.

Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.
Face Size: As per schedule
Mounting: See architectural plans for ceiling types.
Pattern: One-way, Two-way, Two-way, corner Three-way Four-way, Adjustable core
style.
Dampers: Radial opposed blade, Butterfly, Combination damper and grid.
CEILING LINEAR SLOT OUTLETS

A.
Linear Bar Diffuser:

1.
2.
3.
Material: Steel or Aluminum.

Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.
Narrow Core Spacing Arrangement: 1/8-inchthick blades spaced 1/4 inch apart, zero or
15-degree deflection.
23 3713 - 1

CA 15-001
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
B.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Wide Core Spacing Arrangement: 1/8-inchthick blades spaced 1/2 inch apart, zero or
15-degree deflection.
Wide Core Spacing Arrangement: 3/16-inchthick blades spaced 1/2 inch apart, zero or
15 degree deflection.
Pencil-Proof Core Spacing Arrangement: 3/16-inchthick blades spaced 7/16 inch apart,
zero or 15-degree deflection.
Two-Way Deflection Vanes: Extruded construction fixed louvers with removable core.
Frame: 1-1/4 inches 1 inch 3/4 inch 1/2 inch 3/16 inch wide.
Mounting Frame: .
Mounting: Concealed bracket.
Damper Type: Adjustable opposed-blade assembly.
Accessories: Plaster frame Directional vanes Alignment pins Core clips Blank-off strips.
Linear Slot Diffuser:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Material - Shell: Aluminum,.

Material - Pattern Controller and Tees: Aluminum.
Finish - Face and Shell: Baked enamel, black.
Finish - Pattern Controller: Baked enamel, black.
Finish - Tees: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.
Slot Width: 1 inch.
Number of Slots: Four.
Length: 48 inches.
Accessories: Plaster frame T-bar slot Center notch T-bar on inlet side T-bar on both
sides T-bar clip on one side T-bar clips on both sides. Verify with Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
equipment.
B.
3.2
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
B.
Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,
and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design
requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final
locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels,
locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with
installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
C.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
ADJUSTING
23 3713 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
A.

CA 15-001
After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,
before starting air balancing.
23 3713 - 3
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 23 8126 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat pump units consisting of separate
evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or
concealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of
product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static
pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.
B.
Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split-system
units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product
Requirements."
B.
intended use.
C.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems

and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
D.
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.12004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
1.5
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
23 8126 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WALL-MOUNTING, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS

A.
Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by
Architect, and discharge drain pans with drain connection.
1.
2.
B.
Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.
C.
Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal fan.
D.
Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements
for HVAC Equipment."
1.
E.
2.2
Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and
permanent lubrication.
Filters: Permanent, cleanable.
AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS

A.
Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable panels
for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide
brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
B.
Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation.
Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor,
relay, and contactor.
1.
2.
2.3
Airstream Surfaces:
Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
Drain Pan and Drain Connection: Comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
Compressor Type: Reciprocating.

Refrigerant: R22, R-407C or R-410A.
C.
Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.
D.
Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
E.
Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.
F.
Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F where specified.
G.
Mounting Base: Polyethylene.
H.
Minimum Energy Efficiency: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, "Energy Standard for
Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
ACCESSORIES
23 8126 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
A.
Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Division 23 Sections

"Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls."
B.
Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,
pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install units level and plumb.
B.
Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely

fastened to building structure.
C.
Install roof-mounting compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in

Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmiumplated fasteners.
D.
Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install
tubing to allow access to unit.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
B.
Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Systems."
D.
Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Sections for power wiring,
switches, and motor controls.
3.3

A.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
3.
B.
3.4
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
STARTUP SERVICE
23 8126 - 3

CA 15-001
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1.
3.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
DEMONSTRATION
A.

adjust, operate, and maintain units. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
23 8126 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 23 8219 - FAN COIL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section Includes:
1.
Ducted fan coil units and accessories.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.

1.
B.
Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and

accessories.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each type of fan coil unit indicated.
1.4
A.
Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, and other details, drawn to scale, on
which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from
installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Suspended ceiling components.

Structural members to which fan coil units will be attached.
Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
FAN COIL UNIT
Lighting fixtures.
Air outlets and inlets.
Speakers.
Sprinklers.
Access panels.
23 8219 - 1

CA 15-001
6.
Perimeter moldings.
B.
C.
Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.5
Design Development
October 02, 2015
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For fan coil units to include in emergency, operation, and
1.
In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include the following:
a.
1.6
Maintenance schedules and repair part lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and
filters.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A.
1.7
1.
Fan Belts: Furnish <Insert number> spare fan belts for each unit installed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with NFPA 70.
B.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
C.
ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of fan coil units and suspension system components with
other construction that penetrates or is supported by ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
B.
Coordinate size and location of wall sleeves for outdoor-air intake.
1.9
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of condensing units

that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.

a.
b.
23 8219 - 2
Compressor failure.
Condenser coil leak.
FAN COIL UNIT
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.

CA 15-001
Warranty Period: one year from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
Factory-packaged and -tested units rated according to AHRI 440, ASHRAE 33, and UL 1995.
2.2
DUCTED FAN COIL UNITS

A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on

Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carrier Corporation; a UTC company.

First Company Products.
Trane Inc.
Williams Comfort Products.
Basic Unit:
All fan coils are manufactured with 20 to 22 gauge galvanized steel to resist corrosion.
All units are approved for installation with 0 clearance to combustible material.
Piping, drain, and wiring connections are readily accessible and mounting holes and/or slots are
predrilled to save installation time and field labor expense.
Exposed units and/or panels have a baked on powder coat finish.
Coils:
Coils have 3/8 O.D. copper tubing expanded to high efficiency aluminum fins.
Each Coil is factory tested to 450 psig.
Drain Pans:
Drain pan is made from heavy gauge galvanized steel with folded corner joints
Drain pan is insulated with a U.L. Listed closed cell fire retardant foam insulation to prevent sweating.
Blower Assemblies:
All blower wheels are centrifugal, forward curved, and dynamically balanced for smooth, quiet operation.
Blower assemblies can be easily removed for service.
Motors:
Motors have permanently lubricated sleeve bearings for long life. All motors are resiliently mounted
with rubber bushings to assure quiet, vibration-free operation and are easily removed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas, with Installer present, to receive fan coil units for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
FAN COIL UNIT
23 8219 - 3

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
B.
Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before fan
coil unit installation.
C.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install fan coil units level and plumb.
B.
Install fan coil units to comply with NFPA 90A.
C.
Suspend fan coil units from structure with elastomeric hangers. Vibration isolators are specified
in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
D.
Install new filters in each fan coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Specific connection requirements are as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

Connect piping to fan coil unit factory hydronic piping package. Install piping package if
shipped loose.
Connect condensate drain to indirect waste.
a.
Install condensate trap of adequate depth to seal against fan pressure. Install
cleanouts in piping at changes of direction.
B.
Connect supply-air and return-air ducts to fan coil units with flexible duct connectors specified in
Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995 for duct
connections.
C.
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.4

A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C.
Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative:
1.
2.
3.
23 8219 - 4
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and
electrical connections.
Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
FAN COIL UNIT
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
D.
E.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.
B.
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide on call
services to visit the Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
3.6
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fan coil units.
FAN COIL UNIT
23 8219 - 5
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 23 8239 - UNIT HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
Cabinet unit heaters with centrifugal fans and electric-resistance heating coils.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
BAS: Building automation system.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories for each product indicated.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For cabinet unit heaters to include in emergency, operation,
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
intended use.
B.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems

and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
C.
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.12004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CABINET UNIT HEATERS

A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product

indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
UNIT HEATERS
23 8239 - 1

CA 15-001
1.
2.
B.
4.
5.

Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. at 75 deg F mean temperature.
Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed
index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916 and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
Airstream Surfaces:
Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
Cabinet: Steel with baked-enamel finish with manufacturer's standard paint, in color selected
by Architect.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Comply with UL 2021.
Coil Section Insulation: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be erosion-resistant
coating to prevent erosion of glass fibers.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Berko Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products.

Markel Products; a division of TPI Corporation.
Description: A factory-assembled and -tested unit complying with ARI 440.

1.
C.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Horizontal Unit, Exposed Bottom Panels: Minimum 0.0528-inchthick, sheet steel,
removable panels secured with tamperproof cam fasteners and safety chain.
Recessing Flanges: Steel, finished to match cabinet.
Control Access Door: Key operated.
Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1 and a minimum efficiency reporting
value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.
1.
Glass Fiber Treated with Adhesive: 80 percent arrestance and 5 MERV.
F.
Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and
hum, mounted in ceramic inserts in a galvanized-steel housing; with fuses in terminal box for
overcurrent protection and limit controls for high-temperature protection. Terminate elements in
stainless-steel machine-staked terminals secured with stainless-steel hardware.
G.
Fan and Motor Board: Removable.

1.
2.
3.
H.
Fan:
Forward curved,double width, centrifugal; directly connected to motor.
Thermoplastic or painted-steel wheels, and aluminum, painted-steel, or galvanized-steel
fan scrolls.
Motor: Permanently lubricated, multispeed; resiliently mounted on motor board. Comply
with requirements in Division 15 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC
Equipment."
Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
Basic Unit Controls:

1.
2.
Control voltage transformer.

Wall-mounting thermostat with the following features.
a.
b.
c.
d.
23 8239 - 2
Heat-off switch.
Fan on-auto switch.
Manual fan speed switch.
Adjustable deadband.
UNIT HEATERS
Design Development
October 02, 2015
e.
f.
g.
I.

CA 15-001
Concealed set point.
Concealed indication.
Deg F indication.
Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single field connection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas to receive unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations before unit heater
installation.
C.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install cabinet unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.
B.
Suspend cabinet unit heaters from structure with elastomeric hangers. Vibration isolatorsare
specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."
C.
Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to
match lighting controls. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with
Drawings and room details before installation.
D.
Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks of Substantial Completion.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Connect supply and return ducts to cabinet unit heaters with flexible duct connectors specified
in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."
B.
Unless otherwise indicated, install union and gate or ball valve on supply-water connection and
union and calibrated balancing valve on return-water connection of unit heater. Hydronic
specialties are specified in Division 15 Section "Hydronic Piping."
C.
Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
D.
Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
UNIT HEATERS
23 8239 - 3
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 26 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1. GENERAL
1.00
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including Instructions to Bidders, General

Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this and
the other sections of Division 16.
B. Before submitting a proposal, this Contractor shall visit the site of the Work and shall carefully
examine the Drawings and Specifications. It is expressly understood that this proposal is based
on the above requirements and that it covers everything necessary to do and complete the Work.
1.01
INSPECTION AND COOPERATION
A. All Work shall be done under the inspection and complete satisfaction of the Architect. No
deviations from the Drawings and Specifications will be allowed without the prior written approval
of the Architect. This Contractor shall cooperate with the other Contractors to allow for the
installation of their Work as well as his own.
B. This Contractor shall be responsible for his Work fitting in place without conflict with the other
trades where proper planning could avoid interference.
C. Relocation of equipment, system connections or rough-in locations up to twenty feet (20), if
requested by the Architect, shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner or his agents if done
before roughing-in.
D. All concealed Work shall be inspected by the Architect or his appointed representative before
concealment. This Contractor shall call for inspection at least two (2) working days before
concealment.
E. The Engineer shall have the right to inspect the Work whenever advisable in his judgment. This
Contractor shall have a representative present at each inspection and shall provide such
assistance necessary.
F. Recommendations made by the Engineer shall be promptly carried out and all unsatisfactory
material and workmanship replaced at once to the Engineers satisfaction at this Contractors
expense.
1.02
CODES AND ORDINANCES
A. Nothing in this Specification shall be interpreted to conflict with any City or State Law Regulation,
Code, Ordinance, Ruling or Fire Underwriters requirement applicable to this class of Work.
B. Should the Drawings or Specifications conflict with such laws of ordinances, the conflicting
portion of the Work shall be installed strictly in accordance with such laws and ordinances without
extra charge to the Owner.
C. All installation for construction purposes shall conform to the Department of Labor Safety and
Health Regulations for Construction.
1.03
ACCURACY OF DATA
26 0500 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
A. The information given herein and on the Drawings is as exact as secured, but its extreme
accuracy is not guaranteed. This Contractor shall examine the locations and verify all
measurements, distances, elevations and existing duct and pipe sizes before starting Work.
B. This Contractor shall coordinate and pay all required use, connection and utility changes as
required to provide utilities to the site for the electrical system.
C. DO NOT SCALE THE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT DIMENSIONS.
1.04
SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Work shall consist of furnishing all superintendents, labor, tools, materials, equipment and
performing all operations to complete the Electrical Systems described in these Specifications
and shown on the Drawings or required for the satisfactory operation of the system.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting materials, equipment, open ends of conduit
and all other installed Work from water, dirt, filth or any loss or damage. Materials, equipment
and conduit not properly protected shall be promptly replaced when directed by the Architect at
no additional expense to the Owner.
C. It is intended that the Drawings and Specifications shall provide a working installation complete in
every detail and all items necessary for such complete installation shall be furnished whether
specifically mentioned or not.
1.05
OVERTIME
A. The cost of all overtime work shall be included in the contract price and no additional payments
will be made because of overtime work required.
1.06
PERMITS AND FEES
A. This Contractor shall secure and pay for all necessary permits and inspections required for the
installation of the electrical systems.
B. This Contractor shall coordinate with and pay all required use, connection and utility changes as
required to provide utilities to the site for the electrical system.
1.07
ERECTION OF APPARTUS
A. All Work shall be done under the personal supervision of this Contractor, who shall provide a
competent foreman to lie out all Work. All Work shall be laid out with due regard for the space
requirements of the other Contractors. This Contractor shall report any conflicts or difficulties in
regard to the installation immediately.
B. Where crowded locations exist or where there is a possibility of conflict between trades, this
Contractor shall make composite drawings showing the exact locations of pipes, ducts, conduit
and equipment. Drawings shall be based on field measurement and, after consultation and
agreement between the trades, shall be approved by the Architect before installation of the Work.
C. Equipment shall be located to allow easy access for servicing, adjusting or maintaining and
space for removal of internal assemblies.
1.08
INTERFERENCE WITH OPERATION
26 0500 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
A. This Contractor shall confine his activities to the area set aside for him to perform his Work and
shall not interfere with any of the Owners activities.
B. The Contractor will not be permitted to store material except within the areas as directed by the
Architect.
C. Should any disturbances of existing installation be necessary, the Contractor shall so inform the
Architect well in advance of the time contemplated for the disturbance. After a plan acceptable to
the Architect has been formulated, the foreman shall keep in close personal contact with the
Work to see that it is executed in accordance with the agreed procedure.
1.09
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. This Contractor shall include all cutting, patching and painting of patched areas required for and
resulting from the installation of all of this Contractors Work, except where noted otherwise on
the Drawings.
B. All holes for conduit through existing concrete floors and through masonry and concrete floors
and through masonry and concrete walls shall be core drilled in such a manner that water, dust
and rubble will not cause the adjoining spaces to be unstable.
C. Other openings through concrete slabs shall be saw-cut.
D. All patching shall be neatly finished to the satisfaction of the Architect.
E. Openings in firewalls and rated assemblies shall be thoroughly fire stopped in accordance with
code and/or assembly requirements.
1.10
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. This Contractor shall include all excavation and backfill required for the installation of his conduit
and equipment.
B. All excavation shall be properly protected at all time and all backfilling shall be properly tamped to
the satisfaction of the Architect.
C. All lines beneath the building and paved areas shall be backfilled with limestone screenings.
D. All excavation must be made in such a manner that walls and footings will not be disturbed in any
way.
E. All excess dirt shall be disposed of as directed by the Architect.
F. This Contractor shall replace and repair any existing services that are damaged or broken during
the course of the performance of his Work.
G. Where existing paved or asphalt surfaces are cut or damaged, they shall be repaved or
resurfaced in a manner satisfactory to the Architect.
H. This Contractor shall include all costs for the removal of asphalt, rubble, brick, concrete or other
old building materials as may be necessary to complete the excavations for the installation of his
lines as shown. All such material shall be removed from the project site.
I.
In carrying out excavations, the sides of all trenches and excavations shall be securely held.
Bracing and sheathing shall be used where necessary, and if not directed to be left in by the
26 0500 - 3

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Architect, shall be removed in units as the level of the backfill reaches final elevation as required
by all Local, State, Federal and OSHA Guidelines.
1.11
ROCK EXCAVATION
A. Material to be excavated is assumed to be earth and/or other materials that can be removed by
cubic yard shovel without drilling and blasting or wedging. Rock excavation shall be paid for at
the prices quoted in the proposal. Trench shall be excavated to a point two inches (2) below the
bottom of the pipe and payment shall be made on this depth and no wider than shown in the
following schedule.
Conduit Diameter
5
6
8
1.12
Payline Width
24
28
28
FOUNDATIONS AND SUPPORT
A. This Contractor shall furnish and install concrete foundations for all grade or floor set electrical
equipment furnished by this Contractor.
B. All concrete shall be 300-psi design ready-mixed concrete meeting the requirements of the
Architectural Specifications.
C. All concrete shall be trawled smooth and have mitered edges.
D. Any structural steel members required to adapt the equipment as furnished, by this Contractor, to
the building steel or structure shall be included in the bid for this Contractor. The method of
installation of all major equipment shall be verified with the Architect or his appointed
representative before the time of installation.
1.13
ACCESS PANELS
A. This Contractor shall locate and furnish for installation by others, all access panels as required
for access to junction boxes, pull boxes, motors, etc. and the proper servicing of equipment and
devices installed under this Contract.
B. All panels shall be MILCOR, Style M for masonry, A for acoustical tile, K for plaster and
DW for drywall; except that Fire Rated UL 1 hour B label access panels shall be furnished in
fire-rated walls and ceilings.
1.14
CLEANING
A. Scale and dirt shall be conduit and equipment. All exposed metal surfaces shall be thoroughly
cleaned, and scratches and abrasions on painted surfaces shall be touched up with matching
paint.
1.15
PAINTING
A. All exposed metal on apparatus and equipment will be factory prime-coated and shall be given
two (2) coats of machinery enamel by this Contractor.
1.16
GUARANTEE
A. This Contractor shall guarantee all equipment and material installed under this Contract to be
free from defects for a period of one (1) year from date of final acceptance and shall repair or
26 0500 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
replace without cost to the Owner any equipment or material which is defective or improperly
installed. In addition, this Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to the
building and its contents or other equipment, caused by defects or improper installation of
equipment or materials installed under this section of the Specifications.
PART 2. PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.00
ROUGH-IN
A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the
actual equipment to be connected.
B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 16 for rough-in requirements.
3.01
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Sequence, coordinate and integrate the various elements of electrical systems,
materials and equipment. Comply with the following requirements:
1.
Coordinate electrical systems, equipment and materials installation with other building
components.
2.
Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
3.
Arrange for chases, slots and openings in other building components during progress of
construction to allow for electrical installations.
4.
Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-inplace concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
5.
Sequence, coordinate and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning
prior to closing in the building.
6.
Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials and
equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. Maintain code clearances.
7.
Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities
and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service
companies and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.
8.
Install systems, materials and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including
Coordination Drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by
the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work as shown only in
diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system
requirements, refer conflict to the Architect.
9.
Install systems, materials and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other
building systems and components. Comply with ADA mounting requirements.
10. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance and repair or replacement of
equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting,
26 0500 - 5

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible
location.
11. Install systems, materials and equipment giving right-of-way priority to required systems at a
specified slope.
SPECIAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1. GENERAL
1.00
MATERIAL LIST
A. This Contractor shall submit within fifteen (15) days from date of Contract, a complete list of the
Manufacturers of all material and equipment he proposes to use in the installation. No
consideration will be given to partial lists periodically submitted.
B. The material list submitted by this Contractor shall be marked with the name and location of the
Project.
C. Submission of this list does not relieve the Contractor from furnishing information required under
the paragraph entitled Shop Drawings.
1.01
SHOP DRAWINGS
A. After approval of the material list, submit all Shop or Installation Drawings, Foundation Plans,
Equipment or Apparatus Drawings to be furnished by this Contractor. These Drawings shall be
clearly marked indicating which items are to be supplied and stating capacities, sizes, required
inspection labels, industry standards and general descriptions of all equipment.
B. Increase the number of electrical-related Shop Drawings, product data and samples submitted to
allow for required distribution plus one copy of each submittal required, which will be retained by
the Engineer.
C. Shop Drawings of special apparatus or equipment that are to be fabricated individually for this
Project, not described by standard Manufacturers Drawings or Bulletins, shall be submitted for
processing before fabrication.
D. These Drawings shall be submitted no later than thirty (30) days from the date of the Contract.
E. It shall be this Contractors responsibility to maintain liaison with all parties concerned with the
material submitted. This Contractor shall not purchase any equipment until Shop Drawings have
been processed.
F. All Drawings shall have a notation on each copy indicating date of Contractors review and
signature of checker for Contractor, together with Contractors name and Project identification.
Manufacturers equipment literature shall be submitted with a table of contents listing model
numbers and Manufacturers name for all items in this submittal.
G. Engineers processing will not constitute a complete check but will indicate only that general
method of construction and detailing is satisfactory.
H. Engineers processing will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors since Contractor
is solely responsible for dimensions and design of adequate connections, details and satisfactory
26 0500 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
construction of all work, as well as furnishing materials and workmanship required by Drawings
and Specifications that may not be indicated on Shop Drawings when approved.
I.
1.02
Contractor shall provide with each submittal a detailed contents sheet listing each and every item
included in this submittal. Items shall be listed with model number and Manufacturer.
USE OF OTHER THAN SCHEDULED EQUIPMENT
A. Specific makes or catalogue numbers of various items of equipment are specified herein for
convenience in indicating quality of the item.
B. This Contractor shall base his proposal upon the equipment as specified, using the
Manufacturers model numbers and quality as called for in the Specifications and scheduled on
the Drawings. If more than one Manufacturer of equipment is specified, any one of the
Manufacturers of equipment may be used in this Contractors proposal subject to the
Manufacturers equipment meeting the performance, accessory and special characteristic of the
specified equipment. If this Contractor wishes to use equipment not specified, he must secure
permission from the Architect prior to the time of bid opening. Request for such permission must
be made at least seven (7) days before bid opening, and shall be given only by written addenda
issued to all bidding Contractors. If no addenda can be issued, this Contractor may at the time of
bid opening, submit separately on letterhead stationery of the bidder, the equipment he would
substitute and the cost to be added to or deducted from his proposal.
C. This Contractor shall bear as a part of his contract, any additional costs incurred in his work or by
the other Contractors as a result of installation of other than scheduled equipment.
D. The Contractor is expected to order all materials in sufficient time to avoid delaying the
completion of the Project. Delay in deliveries will not be considered a justifiable reason for
submission of substitute materials.
1.03
COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Prepare coordination drawings to a scale of = 1-0 or larger; detailing major elements,

components and systems of electrical equipment and materials in relationship with other
systems, installations and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for
installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance
to the efficient flow of the Work, including but not necessarily limited to the following:
1.
Indicate the proposed location of conduit, wiring, equipment and materials.

following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Include the
Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.

Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment and space for equipment
disassembly required for periodic maintenance.
Equipment connections and support details.
Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.
Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.
Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.
2.
Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement and positioning of large equipment into the
building during construction.
3.
Prepare floor plans, elevations and details to indicate penetrations in floor, walls and ceilings
and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.
26 0500 - 7

CA 15-001
4.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air outlets and inlets,
light fixtures, communication system components, sprinklers and other ceiling-mounted
items.
B. At the Contractors option, detailed Coordination Drawings may be omitted. When the Contractor
elects to omit detailed Coordination Drawings, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for his
work fitting into place. All ceiling heights and Architectural dimensions shall be maintained
unless specifically changed by the Architect. The Contractor shall provide all necessary rises,
drops and alternative routings as required for the satisfactory installation of the electrical
systems. Where conflicts occur, this Contractor shall provide modifications necessary and as
directed by the Architect whether installed or not, at no additional cost to the Owner or his
agents.
1.04
RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Prepare Record Documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 1. In addition to the
requirements specified in Division 1, indicate the following installed conditions:
1.
Conduit and wiring, size and location, for both exterior and interior locations.
2.
Junction and pull box diagram complete with identification chart.
3.
Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of underground conduit and wiring.
4.
Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines.
5.
Approved substitutions, Contract modifications and actual equipment and materials installed.
6.
Contract modifications, actual equipment and materials installed.
B. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the state in which
the Project is located as specified in Division 1 to record the locations and invert elevations of
underground installations.
1.05
MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1. In addition to the requirements

specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items:
1.06
1.
Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance data,

engineering data and test and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of
replacement parts.
2.
Manufacturers printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in and routine and
normal operating instruction, regulation, control, stopping, shutdown and emergency
instructions.
3.
Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting;

disassembly, repair and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.
4.
Servicing instruction and lubrication charts and schedules.
CIRCUIT LIST
26 0500 - 8
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
A. After the system is in operation, this Contractor shall identify each circuit with a black mica, selfadhesive label and shall furnish to the Architect two (2) copies of the circuit list showing circuit,
panel number, location and service.
B. After approval of the circuit list by the Architect, these circuit, panel numbers and copies of the
circuit list shall be incorporated in the operating instructions.
1.07
START-UP
A. Test all systems in accordance with System Specification Sections.

B. Before starting any system, all equipment shall be circuit checked by this Contractor and readied
in accordance with the Manufacturers recommendations. Approximately six (6) weeks or upon
notice by the Architect after initial start-up and instructional period, this Contractor shall make an
appointment with the Owner to meet with his representatives for answering questions about this
operation and to give further instruction if required. This Contractor shall establish dates and
times for instructions agreeable with the Owner and Architect and shall notify each in writing of
such.
C. This Contractor shall furnish maintenance and callback service of the equipment provided by him
for a period of twelve (12) months after the building is substantially complete. This service shall
include regular examinations of the installation by competent and trained employees of this
Contractor. Service shall include all necessary adjustments, cleaning, supplies and parts to keep
the equipment in good operation in accordance with the Manufacturers recommendations,
except such parts made necessary by misuse or accidents not caused by this Contractor.
D. During the time of instructing the Owners operating personnel, this Contractor shall furnish to the
Owner three (3) copies of bound operating instructions and Manufacturers equipment
PART 2. (Not Applicable)
PART 3. (Not Applicable)
26 0500 - 9
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 26 0519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1. GENERAL
1.00
DESCRIPTION
A. The Work of this Section consists of furnishing and installing wires, cables and connectors for
power, lighting, signal, control and related systems rated 600 volts and less.
PART 2. MANUFACTURERS
2.00
MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers:
following:
1.
Wire and Cable:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
American Insulated Wire Corp.

Brintec Corp.
Carol Cable Co., Inc.
Senator Wire and Cable Co.
Southwire Company.
Connectors for Wire and Cable Conductors:

a.
b.
c.
d.
2.01
AMP.
3M Company.
O-Z/Gedney Co.
Square D Company.
WIRES AND CABLES
A. General: Provide wire and cable suitable for the temperature, conditions and location where
installed.
B. Conductors: Provide solid conductors for power and lighting circuits No. 10 AWG and smaller.
Provide stranded conductors for sizes No. 8 AWG and larger.
C. Conductor Material: Copper for all wires and cables.
D. Conductor Material: Use the following material for sizes indicated.
1.
2.
No. 6 AWG and Smaller: Copper.

No. 4 AWG and Larger: Copper.
E. Insulation: Provide THHN/THWN insulation for all conductors size 500MCM and larger, and
No. 8 AWG and smaller. For all other sizes, provide THHN/THWN or XHHW insulation as
appropriate for the locations where installed.
F. Color coding for phase identification in accordance with Table 1 in Part 3 to follow.
26 0519 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
G. Jackets: Factory-applied nylon or PVC external jacketed wires and cables for pulls in raceways
over 100 in length, for pulls in raceways with more than three (3) equivalent 90 bends, for pulls
in conduits underground or under slabs on grade and where indicated.
H. Cables: Provide the following type(s) of cables in NEC-approved locations and applications
where indicated. Provide cable UL Listed for particular application:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.02
Armored Cable: Types AC and ACL.

Metal-Clad Cable: Type MC.
Non-metallic-Sheathed Cable: Type NM and NMC.
Above-ground Service-Entrance Cable: Type SE.
Underground Service-Entrance Cable: Type USE.
Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cable: Type UF.
Portable Cord: Type S.
CONENCTORS FOR CONDUCTORS
A. Provide UL Listed factory-fabricated, solderless metal connectors of sizes, ampacity ratings,

materials, type and classes for application and for services indicated. Use connectors with
temperature ratings equal to or greater than those of the wires upon which used.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.00
WIRING METHOD
A. Use the following wiring methods as indicated:
1.
Wire: Install all wire in raceway.
2.
Armored Cable, Type AC: Where permitted by local authority.
3.
Armored Cable, Type AC: For wiring in gypsum board partitions and for connections from
raceway outlet boxes to lighting fixtures.
4.
Metal Clad Cable, Type MC: Where indicated and elsewhere, where permitted by local
authorities.
5.
Metal Clad Cable, Type MC: In cable trays and elsewhere, where indicated.
6.
Service Entrance Cable, Type SE: For service entrance cable and for feeders (and branch
circuits).
7.
Service Entrance Cable, Type USE: For underground service feeders to building. Install in
raceway under pavement and planter area, and within 3 of structures.
8.
Underground Feeder and Branch Circuit Cable, Type UF: For underground branch circuit
Work. Install direct buried on a 2 minimum depth fin sand bed, with a 4 minimum layer of
the same material covering the conductors. Install in raceway under pavement and planter
areas and within 3 of structures. Provide line marker tape complying with Section Electrical
Identification. Perform excavation and backfill in accordance with Section Earthwork.
9.
Portable Cord, Type S: For flexible pendant leads to outlets and equipment where permitted
by Code and as indicated.
26 0519 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.01

CA 15-001
INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES
A. General: Install electrical cables, wires and connectors in compliance with NEC.
B. Coordinate cable installation with other Work.
C. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. Use
UL Listed pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary.
D. Use pulling means including fish tape, cable, rope and basket weave wire/cable grips which will
not damage cables or raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to wire or cable.
E. Conceal all cable in finished spaces.
F. Install exposed cable parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members and
follow surface contours, where possible.
G. Keep conductor splices to minimum.
H. Install splice and tap connectors that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and
insulation rating than conductors being spliced.
I.
Use splice and tap connectors that are compatible with conductor material.
J.
Provide adequate length of conductors within electrical enclosures and train the conductors to
terminal points with no excess. Bundle multiple conductors, with conductors larger than No. 10
AWG cabled in individual circuits. Make terminations so there is no bare conductor at the
terminal.
K. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
Manufacturers published torque-tightening values. Where Manufacturers torque requirements
are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.02
A. Prior to energizing, check installed wires and cables with megohm meter to determine insulation
resistance levels to assure requirements are fulfilled.
B. Prior to energizing, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short-circuits.
C. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuits and demonstrate proper functioning.
Correct malfunctioning units and retest to demonstrate compliance.
D. TABLE 1: Color Coding for Phase Identification
1.
Match existing building secondary color coding.
26 0519 - 3
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 26 0526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1. GENERAL
1.00
GENERAL
A. The Work of this Section consists of furnishing and installing general grounding and bonding
requirements of electrical installations.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.00
GROUNDING WIRES
A. General Purpose: UL- and NEC-approved types, copper with THW, XHHW or dual-rated THHNTHWN insulation color identified green.
B. Size wire not less than what is shown and not less than required by the NEC.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.00
INSTALLATION, GENERALLY
A. Ground in accordance with the NEC as shown, and as hereinafter specified.

B. Equipment Grounding:
1.
3.01
Metallic structures, enclosures, raceways, junction boxes, cabinets, machine frames and
other conductive items in close proximity with electrical circuits shall be grounded for
personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents.
SECONDARY EQUIPMENT AND CIRCUITS
A. Main Bonding Jumper: Connect the secondary service neutral to the ground bus in the service
equipment.
B. Water Pipe and Supplemental Electrode:
1.
Provide a ground conductor connection between the service equipment ground bus and the
metallic water pipe system. Jumper-insulating joints in the water pipe.
2.
Provide a supplemental ground electrode and bond to the water pipe ground or connect to
the service equipment ground bus.
C. Conduit Systems:
1.
Ground all metallic conduit systems.
2.
Non-metallic conduit system shall contain a grounding conductor.
3.
Conduit provided for mechanical protection containing only a grounding conductor, bond to
that conductor at the entrance and exit from the conduit.
26 0526 - 1

CA 15-001
D. Feeders and Branch Circuits:
circuits as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Install green grounding conductors with feeders and branch
Feeders.
Receptacle outlets.
Motors and motor controllers.
Fixed equipment and appliances.
Items of equipment where the final connection is made with flexible metal conduit shall have
a grounding wire.
Additional locations and systems as shown.
E. Boxes, Cabinets, Enclosure and Panelboards:

1.
Bond the grounding wires to each pullbox, junction box, outlet box, cabinets and other
enclosures through which the ground wires pass (except for special grounding system for
intensive care units and other critical units shown).
2.
Provide lugs in each box and enclosure for ground wire termination.
F. Motors and Starters:

1.
Provide lugs in motor terminal box and starter housing for ground wire termination.
G. Receptacles are not approved for grounding through their mounting screws. Ground with a
ground wire from green ground terminal on the receptacle to the outlet box ground screw.
H. Ground lighting fixtures to the green grounding conductor of the wiring system when the green
ground is provided; otherwise, ground the fixtures through the conduit systems. Fixtures
connected with flexible conduit shall have a green ground wire included with the power wires
from the fixture through the flexible conduit to the first outlet box.
I.
3.02
Fixed electrical appliances and equipment shall have a ground lug installed for termination of the
green ground conductor.
CONDUCTIVE PIPING
A. Bond all conductive piping systems in the building to the electrical system ground. Bonding
connections shall be made as close as practical to the water pipe ground or service equipment
ground bus.
3.03
GROUND RESISTANCE
A. Grounding system ground-resistance must not exceed five ohms (5). Final test shall assure
that this requirement is met.
3.04
TELEPHONE CATV
A. Provide a #6 ground from the main electrical service ground in conduit to a J-Box for both
telephone and CATV backboard. Spool 3-0 wire out of J-Box.
26 0526 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1. GENERAL
1.00
DESCRIPTION
A. The Work of this Section consists of the furnishing and installation of secure support from the
building structure for electrical items by means of hangers, supports, anchors, sleeves, inserts,
seals and associated fastenings.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.00
MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1.
Slotted Metal Angle and U-Channel Systems:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Conduit Sealing Bushings:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
2.01
Allied Tube & Conduit.

American Electric.
B-Line Systems, Inc.
Cinch Clamp Co., Inc.
GS Metals Corp.
Haydon Corp.
Kin-Line, Inc.
Unistrut Diversified Products.
Bridgeport Fittings, Inc.

Cooper Industries, Inc.
Elliott Electric Mfg. Corp.
GS Metals Corp.
Killark Electric Mfg. Co.
Madison Equipment Co.
L.E. Mason Co.
O-Z/Gedney.
Producto Electric Corp.
Raco, Inc.
Red Seal Electric Corp.
Spring City Electrical Mfg. Co.
Thomas & Betts Corp.
COATINGS
A. Coating: Supports, support hardware and fasteners shall be protected with zinc coating or with
treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish or
inherent material characteristic. Products for use outdoors shall be hot-dip galvanized.
2.02
MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Raceway Supports: Clevis hangers, riser clamps, conduit straps, threaded C-clamps with
retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets and spring steel clamps.
26 0529 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
B. Fasteners: Types, materials and construction features as follows:

1.
Expansion Anchors: Carbon steel wedge or sleeve type.
2.
Toggle Bolts: All steel springhead type.
3.
Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel, designed specifically for the intended
service.
C. Conduit Sealing Bushings: Factory-fabricated watertight conduit sealing bushing assemblies

suitable for sealing around conduit or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls.
Construct seals with steel sleeve, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets or rings,
metal pressure rings, pressure clamps and cap screws.
D. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body
and insulating wedging plug for non-armored electrical cables in riser conduits. Provide plugs
with number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Construct
body of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.
9
E. U-Channel Systems: 16-gauge steel channels with / 16 diameter holes, at a minimum of 8 on

center, in top surface. Provide fittings and accessories that mate and match with U-channel and
are of the same manufacturer.
2.03
FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. General: Shop- or field-fabricated supports or manufactured supports assembled from Uchannel components.
B. Steel Brackets: Fabricated of angles, channels and other standard structural shapes. Connect
with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports.
C. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:
1.
Sheet Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snap-lock joint,
welded spiral seams or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate sleeves from the following gauge
metal for sleeve diameter noted:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
3 and smaller: 20-gauge.

4 6: 16-gauge.
Over 6: 14-gauge.
Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe.

Plastic Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.00
INSTALLATION
A. Install supporting devices to fasten electrical components securely and permanently in

accordance with NEC Requirements.
B. Coordinate with the building structural system and with other electrical installation.
C. Raceway Supports: Comply with the NEC and the following requirements:
1.
26 0529 - 2
Conform to Manufacturers recommendations for selection and installation of supports.
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
2.
Strength of each support shall be adequate to carry present and future load multiplied by a
safety factor of at least four. Where this determination results in a safety allowance of less
than 200 lbs., provide additional strength until there is a minimum of 200 lbs. Safety
allowance in the strength of each support.
3.
Install individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers and riser clamps as necessary to
support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments and other hardware necessary for
hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits.
4.
Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze-type hangers.
5.
Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers. Spring steel fasteners
may be used in lieu of hangers only for 1 and smaller raceways serving lighting and
receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings only. For hanger rods with spring steel
fasteners, use diameter or larger threaded steel. Use spring steel fasteners that are
specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing.
6.
Space supports for raceways in accordance with NEC and local authorities having
jurisdiction.
7.
Support exposed and concealed raceway within one foot (1) of an unsupported box and
access fittings. In horizontal runs, support at the box and access fittings may be omitted
where box or access fittings are independently supported and raceway terminals are not
made with chase nipples or threadless box connectors.
8.
In vertical runs, arrange support so the load produced by the weight of the raceway and the
enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports with no weight load on
raceway terminals.
D. Vertical Conductor Supports: Install simultaneously with installation of conductors.

E. Miscellaneous Supports: Support miscellaneous electrical components as required to produce
the same structural safety factors as specified for raceway supports. Install metal channel racks
for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes,
transformers and other devices.
F. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be supported separately
except where used for fixture support; support sheet metal boxes directly from the building
structure or by bar hangers. Where bar hangers are used, attach the bar to raceways on
opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved type of fastener not more
than 24 from the box.
G. Sleeves: Install in concrete slabs and walls and all other fire-rated floors and walls, for raceways
and cable installations. For sleeves through fire-rated wall or floor construction, apply UL Listed
fire-stopping sealant in gaps between sleeves and enclosed conduits and cables in accordance
with Fire Resistant Joint Sealers requirements of other divisions of these Specifications.
H. Conduit Seals: Install seals for conduit penetrations of slabs on grade and exterior walls below
grade and where indicated. Tighten sleeve seal screws until sealing grommets have expanded
to form watertight seal.
I.
Fastening: Unless otherwise indicated, fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware
securely to the building structure, including but not limited to conduits, raceways, cables, cable
trays, busways, cabinets, panelboards, transformers, boxes, disconnect switches and control
components in accordance with the following:
26 0529 - 3

CA 15-001
J.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
1.
Fasten by means of wood screws or screw-type nails on wood, toggle bolts on hollow
masonry units, concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or solid masonry and
machine screws, welded threaded studs or spring tension clamps on steel. Threaded studs
driven by a powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts may be used instead of
expansion bolts and machine or wood screws. Do not weld conduit, pipe straps or items
other than threaded studs to steel structures. Do not weld conduit, pipe straps or items other
than threaded studs to steel structures. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet
metal screws.
2.
Holes cut to depth of more than 1 in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than
in concrete shall not cut the main reinforcing bars. Fill holes that are not used.
3.
Ensure that the load applied to any fastener does not exceed 25% of the proof test load.
Use vibration- and shock-resistant fasteners for attachments to concrete slabs.
Tests: Test pullout resistance of one of each type, size and anchorage material for the following
fastener types:
1.
2.
3.
Expansion anchors.
Toggle bolts.
Powder-driven threaded studs.
K. Provide all jacks, fixtures and calibrated indicating scales required for reliable testing. Obtain the
Structural Engineers approval before transmitting loads to the structure. Test to 90% of rated
proof load for fastener. If fastening fails test, revise all similar fastener installations and retest
until satisfactory results are achieved.
26 0529 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 26 0533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1. GENERAL
1.00
DESCRIPTION
A. The Work of this Section consists of furnishing and installing raceways for electrical wiring.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.00
MANUFACTURERS

B. Conduit Bodies:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Adalet-PLM.
American Electric.
Appleton Electric Co.
Carlon.
Crouse-Hinds Division, Cooper Industries, Inc.
Delta Industrial Products.
Kraloy Products Co.
O-Z/Gedney.
C. Wire-way:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Anchor Electric Co.

Circle AW Products.
Cross Brothers, Inc.
Erickson Electric Equipment Co.
Gismo.
GS Metals Corp.
Hoffman Engineering Co.
JBC Enterprises, Inc.
Keystone/Rees, Inc.
Robroy Industries, Inc.
Square D Co.
Thermotools Co.
Wadsworth Electric Mfg. Co., Inc.
D. Surface Metal Raceway:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Alrey-Thompson Co., Inc.

Allied Tube & Conduit.
American Electric.
B-Line Systems, Inc.
Butler Mfg. Co.
Erickson Electrical Equipment Co.
GS Metals Corp.
Haydon Corp.
26 0533 - 1

CA 15-001
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Isoduct Energy Systems.

Isotrol Systems.
Keystone/Rees, Inc.
SL Industries, Inc.
Square D Co.
The Wiremold Co.
E. Surface Non-metallic Raceway:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.01
Anixter Brothers, Inc.

Hubbell, Inc.
JBC Enterprises, Inc.
Panduit Corp.
Premier Telecom Products, Inc.
Thermotools Co.
The Wiremold Co.
METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C. Intermediate Steel Conduit: UL 1242.
D. PVC Externally Coated Rigid Conduit and Fittings: ANSI C80.1 and NEMA RN 1.
E. Electrical Metallic Tubing and Fittings: ANSI C80.3.
F. PVC Externally Coated Electrical Metallic Tubing and Fittings: ANSI C80.3 and NEMA RN 1.
G. Flexible Metal Conduit: UL 1, aluminum.
H. Flexible Metal Conduit: UL 1, zinc-coated steel.
I.
2.02
Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings: UL 360. Fittings shall be specifically approved
for use with this raceway.
NON-METALLIC CONDUIT AND DUCTS
A. Electrical Non-metallic Tubing (ENT): NEMA TC 13.

B. Rigid Non-metallic Conduit (RNC): NEMA TC 2 and UL 651, Schedule 40 or 80 PVC.
C. PVC Conduit and Tubing Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or conduit/tubing type and
material.
D. Underground PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 6, Type I for encased burial in
concrete, Type II for direct burial.
E. PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct Fittings: NEMA TC 9; match to duct type and material.
F. Liquid-tight Flexible Non-metallic Conduit and Fittings: UL 1660. Fittings shall be specifically
approved for use with this raceway.
26 0533 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
G. Conduit, Tubing and Duct Accessories:

Types, sizes and materials complying with
Manufacturers published product information. Mate and match accessories with raceway.
2.03
CONDUIT BODIES
A. General: Types, shapes and sizes as required suiting individual applications NEC requirements.
Provide matching gasket covers secured with corrosion-resistant screws.
B. Metallic Conduit Tubing:
threaded raceways.
Use metallic conduit bodies.
Use bodies with threaded hubs for
C. Conduit Bodies 1 and Smaller: Use bodies with compression-type EMT connectors.
D. Non-metallic Conduit and Tubing: Use non-metallic conduit bodies conforming to UL 514 B.
2.04
WIRE-WAYS
A. General: Electrical wire-ways shall be of types, sizes and number of channels as indicated.
Fittings and accessories including but not limited to couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints,
adapters, hold-down straps and end caps shall match and mate with wire-way as required for
complete system. Where features are not indicated, select to fulfill wiring requirements and
comply with applicable provisions of NEC.
B. Wire-way covers shall be hinged type.
2.05
SURFACE RACEWAYS
A. General: Sizes and channels as indicated. Provide fittings that match and mate with raceway.
B. Surface Metal Raceway: Construct of galvanized steel with snap-on covers, with mounting
screw knockouts in base approximately 8 on center. Finish with Manufacturers standard prime
coating suitable for painting. Provide raceways of types suitable for each application required.
C. Surface Non-metallic Raceway: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC compound
with matte texture and Manufacturers standard color. Raceway and system components shall
meet UL 94 requirements for nonflammable, self-extinguishing characteristics.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.00
WIRING METHOD
A. Outdoors: Use the following wiring methods:

1.
Exposed: Intermediate metal conduit.
2.
Concealed: Intermediate metal conduit.
3.
Underground, Single Run: Rigid non-metallic conduit.
4.
Underground, Grouped: Rigid non-metallic conduit.
5.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment: Including transformers and hydraulic, pneumatic or

electric solenoid or motor-driven equipment; liquid-tight flexible metal conduit.
26 0533 - 3

CA 15-001
6.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Indoors or Outdoors: Connection to vibrating equipment and hydraulic, pneumatic or electric

solenoid or motor-driven equipment in moist or humid location or corrosive atmosphere or
where subject to water spray or dripping oil, grease or water; liquid-tight flexible metal
conduit.
B. Indoors: Use the following wiring methods:
3.01
1.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment: Including transformers and hydraulic, pneumatic or

electric solenoid or motor-operated equipment; flexible metal conduit.
2.
Exposed: Electrical metallic tubing or rigid non-metallic conduit.
3.
Concealed:
conduit.
Electrical metallic tubing, electrical non-metallic tubing or rigid non-metallic
INSTALLATION
A. General: Install electrical raceways in accordance with Manufacturers written installation

instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and as follows:
B. Conceal Conduit and EMT, unless indicated otherwise, within finished walls, ceilings and floors.
Keep raceways at least six inches (6) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water
pipes. Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations.
C. Elevation of Raceway: Where possible, install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam
piping.
D. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of conductors within
raceways.
E. Provide supports for raceways as specified elsewhere in Division 16.
F. Prevent foreign matter from entering raceways by using temporary closure protection.
G. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise from floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion of
bends is not visible above this finished slab.
H. Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not effectively reduced. Unless otherwise
indicated, keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs of offsets parallel.
I.
Use raceway fittings that are of types compatible with the associated raceway and suitable for
the use and location. For intermediate steel conduit, use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings
except as otherwise indicated.
J.
Run concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance considering
the type of building construction and obstructions except as otherwise indicated. This does not
apply to conduits in crawl spaces.
K. Raceways embedded in slabs: Install in middle third of the slab thickness where practical and
leave at least one-inch (1) concrete cover. Tie raceways to reinforcing rods or otherwise secure
them to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement. Space raceways laterally to
prevent voids in the concrete. Run conduit larger than one-inch (1) trade size, parallel with or at
right angles to the main reinforcement where, at right angles to the reinforcement, the conduit
shall be close to one of the supports of the slab. Where non-metallic conduit or tubing is used,
raceways must be converted to Schedule 80 or rigid steel conduit or tubing IMC before rising
above floor.
26 0533 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015
L.

CA 15-001
Install exposed raceways parallel and perpendicular to nearby surfaces or structural members
and follow the surface contours as much as practical.
M. Run exposed, parallel or banked raceways together. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from
the same centerline so that the bends are parallel. Factory elbows may be used in banked runs
only where they can be installed parallel. This requires that there be a change in the plane of the
run such as from wall to ceiling and that the raceways be of the same size. In other cases,
provide field bends for parallel raceways.
N. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight. Where
joints cannot be made tight, use bonding jumpers to provide electrical continuity of the raceway
system. Make raceway terminations tight. Where terminations are subject to vibration, use
bonding bushings or wedges to assure electrical continuity. Where subject to vibration or
dampness, use insulating bushings to protect conductors.
O. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tool.
P. Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align the raceway to
enter squarely and install the locknuts with dished part against the box. Where terminations
cannot be made secure with one locknut, use two locknuts, one inside and one outside the box.
Q. Where terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub so the end
bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align the raceway so
the coupling is square to the box and tighten the chase nipples so no threads are exposed.
R. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or monofilament plastic
line having not less than 200 lb. tensile strength. Leave not less than twelve inches (12) of slack
at each end of the pull wire.
S. Telephone and Signal System Raceways 2 Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to the above
requirements, install raceways 2 and smaller trade size in maximum lengths at 150 and with a
maximum of two 90 bonds or equivalent.
T. Install raceway-sealing fittings in accordance with the Manufacturers written instructions. Locate
fittings at suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound.
For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a
finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway-sealing fittings at the following
points and elsewhere as indicated:
1.
Where conduits enter or leave hazardous locations.
2.
Where conduits pass from warm locations to cold locations, such as the boundaries of
refrigerated spaces and air-conditioned spaces.
3.
Where required by the NEC.
U. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to free-standing
equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs and set flush with the
finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; flexible metal conduit may
be used six inches (6) above the floor. Where equipment connections are not made under this
Contract, install screwdriver-operated threaded flush plugs flush with floor.
V. Flexible Connections: Use short length (maximum of 6) of flexible conduit for recessed and
semi-recessed light fixtures for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission or movement
and for all motors.
26 0533 - 5

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
W. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceway
is installed for such circuits and it passes through concrete, install in a non-metallic sleeve.
X. Do not install aluminum conduit embedded in or in contact with concrete.
Y. PVC externally coated rigid steel conduit: Use only fittings approved for use with that material.
Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduit.
Z. Surface Metal Raceway: Install a separate green ground conductor in raceway from the junction
box supplying the raceway to receptacle or fixture ground terminals.
AA.
Select each surface metal raceway outlet box to which a lighting fixture is attached to be of
sufficient diameter to provide a seat for the fixture.
AB.
Where a surface metal raceway is used to supply a fluorescent lighting fixture having central
stem suspension with a back plate and a canopy, with or without extension ring, the back plate
and canopy will serve as the outlet box and no separate outlet box need be provided.
AC.
Provide surface metal raceway outlet box, in addition to the back plate and canopy, at the feed-in
location of each fluorescent lighting fixture having end stem suspension.
AD.
Where a surface metal raceway extension is made from an existing outlet box on which a lighting
fixture is installed, provide a back plate slightly smaller than the fixture canopy, and no additional
surface-mounted outlet box need be installed.
3.02
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Upon completion of installation raceways, inspect interiors of raceways; clear all blockages and
remove burrs, dirt and construction debris.
CABINETS, BOXES AND FITTINGS
PART 1. GENERAL
1.00
DESCRIPTION
A. The Work of this Section consists of furnishing and installing cabinets, boxes and fittings for
electrical installations and certain types of electrical fittings not covered in other Sections. Types
of products specified in this Section include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Outlet and device boxes.

Pull and junction boxes.
Floor boxes and service fittings.
Cabinets.
Hinged door enclosures.
Boxes and fittings for hazardous locations.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.00
MANUFACTURERS
26 0533 - 6
Design Development
October 02, 2015
1.
Floor Boxes:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Electric Panelboard, Inc.

Erickson Electrical Equipment Co.
Parker Electrical Mfg. Co.
Square D Co.
Boxes and Fittings for Hazardous Locations:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.01
American Electric.
Butler Mfg. Co.
Raco, Inc.
Thomas & Betts Corp.
Cabinets:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.

CA 15-001
Adalet-PLM.
OZ/Gedney.
Robroy Industries, Co.
Woodhead Industries, Inc.
CABINETS, BOXES AND FITTINGS GENERAL
A. Electrical Cabinets, Boxes and Fittings: Of indicated types, sizes and NEMA enclosure classes.
Where not indicated, provide units of types, sizes and classes appropriate for the use and
location. Provide all items complete with covers and accessories required for the intended use.
Provide gaskets for units in damp or wet locations.
2.02
MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Sheet Steel: Flat-rolled, code-gauge, galvanized steel.

B. Fasteners for General Use: Corrosion-resistant screws and hardware including cadmium and
zinc-plated items.
C. Fasteners for Damp or Wet Locations: Stainless steel screws and hardware.
D. Cast Metal for Boxes, Enclosures and Covers:
specified.
Copper-free aluminum except as otherwise
E. Exterior Finish: Gray baked enamel for items exposed in finished locations except as otherwise
indicated.
F. Painted Interior Finish: Where indicated, white baked enamel.
G. Fittings for Boxes, Cabinets and Enclosures: Conform to UL 514B. Malleable iron- or zinc-plated
steel for conduit hubs, bushings and box connectors.
2.03
METAL OUTLET, DEVICE AND SMALL WIRING BOXES
26 0533 - 7

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
A. General: Conform to UL 514A, Metallic Outlet Boxes, Electrical and UL 514B, Fittings for
Conduit and Outlet Boxes. Boxes shall be of type, shape, size and depth to suit each location
and application.
B. Steel Boxes: Conform to NEMA OS 1, Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and
Box Supports. Boxes shall be sheet steel with stamped knockouts, threaded-screw holes and
accessories suitable for each location including mounting brackets and straps, cable clamps,
exterior rings and fixture studs.
C. Cast-Aluminum Boxes: Copper-free aluminum threaded raceway entries and features and
accessories suitable for each location including mounting ears, threaded-screw holes for devices
and closure plugs.
D. Cast-Iron Boxes: Iron alloy, waterproof, with threaded raceway entries and features and
accessories suitable for each location, including mounting ears, threaded screw holes for devices
and closure plugs.
E. Cast-Iron Floor Boxes: Fully adjustable, waterproof, with threaded raceway entrances, adjusting
rings, gaskets and brass floor plates. Where indicated, provide multi-section boxes with
individual hinged section covers and provide for a duplex receptacle under one or more of the
covers.
F. Steel Floor Boxes: Sheet steel, concrete tight, fully adjustable, with stamped knockouts,
adjusting rings and brass floor plates. Where indicated, provide multi-section boxes with
concealed individual section covers under a common flush floor plate. Provide for a duplex
receptacle in one of the concealed section covers and a one-inch (1) diameter bushed opening
in the other.
G. Service Fittings for Floor Outlet Boxes: Surface-mounted horizontal, cast aluminum type 3 high,
suitable for finished spaces and finished in satin aluminum, except as otherwise indicated.
Provide duplex receptacle or 1 bushed opening for telephone or other communications service
as indicated. Equip fitting for attaching flat to floor box cover.
2.04
NON-METALLIC OUTLET, DEVICE AND SMALL WIRING BOXES
A. General: Conform to NEMA OS 2, Non-metallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box
Supports and UL 514C, Non-metallic Outlet Boxes, Flush Device Boxes and Covers. Boxes
shall be molded PVC units of type, shape, size and depth to suit location and application.
B. Boxes for Concealed Work: Mounting provisions and wiring entrances to suit installation
conditions and wiring method used.
C. Boxes for Exposed Work: Ultra-violet stabilized, non-conductive, high impact-resistant boxes
with integrally molded raceway entrance hubs and removable mounting flanges. Boxes shall be
equipped with threaded-screw holes for device and cover plate mounting. Each box shall have a
molded cover of matching PVC material suitable for the application.
2.05
PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. General: Comply with UL 50, Electrical Cabinets and Boxes, for boxes over 100 cubic inches
volume. Boxes shall have screwed or bolted on covers of material same as box and shall be of
size and shape to suit application.
B. Steel Boxes: Sheet steel with welded seams. Where necessary to provide a rigid assembly,
construct with internal structural steel bracing.
26 0533 - 8
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
C. Hot-Dipped Galvanized Steel Boxes: Sheet steel with welded seams. Where necessary to
provide a rigid assembly, construct with internal structural steel bracing. Hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication. Cover shall be gasketed.
D. Stainless Steel Boxes: Fabricate of stainless steel conforming to Type 302 of ASTM A 167,
Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.
Where necessary to provide a rigid assembly, construct with internal structural stainless steel
bracing. Cover shall be gasketed.
E. Cast-Aluminum Boxes: Molded of copper-free aluminum, with gasketed cover and integralthreaded conduit entrances.
F. Cast-Iron Boxes: Molded of cast iron alloy with gasketed cover and integral threaded conduit
entrances.
G. Cast non-metallic Boxes: Ultra-violet stabilized, non-conductive, high impact-resistant PVC
boxes with gasketed cover and integral mounting flanges.
H. Boxes Approved for Classified Locations: Cast metal or cast non-metallic boxes conforming to
UL 886, Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations, listed and
labeled for use in the specific location classification and with the specific hazardous material
encountered. Conduit entrances shall be integral threaded type.
2.06
CABINETS
A. Comply with UL 50, Electrical Cabinets and Boxes.

B. Construction: Sheet steel, NEMA 1 Class except as otherwise indicated. Cabinet shall consist of
a box and a front consisting of a one-piece frame and a hinged door. Arrange door to close
against a rabbit placed all around the inside edge of the frame with a uniformly close fit between
door and frame. Provide concealed fasteners, not over 24 apart, to hold fronts to cabinet boxes
and provide for adjustment. Provide flush or concealed door hinges not over 24 apart and not
over 6 from top and bottom of door. For flush cabinets, make the front approximately larger
than the box all around. For surface-mounted cabinets, make front same height and width as
box.
C. Doors: Double doors for cabinets wider than 24. Telephone cabinets wider than 48 may have
sliding or removable doors.
D. Locks: Combination spring catch and key lock, with all locks for cabinets of the same system
keyed alike.
2.07
STEEL ENCLOSURES WITH HINGED DOORS
A. Comply with UL 50, Cabinets and Enclosures and NEMA ICS 6.

B. Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.
C. Construction: Sheet steel, 16-gauge minimum with continuous welded seams. NEMA Class as
indicated, arranged for surface mounting
D. Doors: Hinged directly to cabinet and removable with approximately flange around all edges,
shaped to cover edge of box. Provide handle operated, key locking latch. Individual door width
shall be no greater than 24. Provide multiple doors where required.
26 0533 - 9

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
E. Mountain Panel: Provide painted removable internal-mounting panel for component installation.
F. Enclosure: NEMA 12 except as indicated. Where door gasketing is required, provide neoprene
gasket attached with oil-resistant adhesive and held in place with steel retaining strips. For all
enclosures of class higher than NEMA-1, use hubbed raceway entrances.
2.08
CAST METAL ENCLOSURES WITH HINGED DOORS
A. Copper-free aluminum with bolted, hinged doors. Where used at hazardous (classified)
locations, enclosures shall conform to UL and shall be listed and labeled for the classification of
hazard involved.
2.09
MOLDED NON-METALLIC ENCLOSURES WITH HINGED DOOR
A. General: Molded, glass fiber reinforced high-impact strength polyester with bolt or screw secured
doors and solid neoprene gaskets.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.00
A. Locations: Install items where indicated and where required to suit code requirements and
installation conditions.
B. Cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed and plug unused conduit hubs.
C. Support and fasten items securely in accordance with Division 16 Section Supporting Devices.
D. Sizes shall be adequate to meet NEC volume requirements, but in no case smaller than sizes
indicated.
E. Remove sharp edges where they may come in contact with wiring or personnel.
3.01
APPLICATIONS
A. Cabinets: Flush-mounted, NEMA enclosure Type 1 except as otherwise indicated.

B. Hinged Door Enclosures: NEMA Type 12 enclosure except as indicated.
C. Hinged Door Enclosures Outdoor: Install drip hood, factory tailored to individual units.
D. Hinged Door Enclosures in Corrosive Locations: NEMA Type 4X metal enclosure.
E. Hinged Door Enclosures in Corrosive Locations: NEMA Type 4X non-metallic enclosure.
F. Outlet Boxes and Fittings: Install outlet and device boxes and associated covers and fittings of
materials and NEMA types suitable for each location and in conformance with the following
requirements:
1.
Interior Dry Locations: NEMA Type 1, sheet steel or non-metallic as permitted by local code.
2.
Interior Dry Locations: Sheet steel, NEMA Type 1.
3.
Interior Dry Locations: Non-metallic, NEMA Type 1.
26 0533 - 10
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
4.
Locations Exposed to Weather or Dampness: Cast metal, NEMA Type 3.
5.
Locations Exposed to Weather or Dampness: Cast metal, NEMA Type 3R.
6.
Locations Exposed to Weather or Dampness: Molded PVC or glass fiber reinforced plastic,
NEMA Type 3.
7.
Locations Exposed to Weather or Dampness: Molded PVC or glass fiber reinforced plastic,
NEMA Type 3R.
8.
Wet Locations: NEMA Type 4 enclosures.
9.
Corrosive Locations: NEMA Type 4X enclosures.
10. Hazardous (Classified) Locations: NEMA type listed and labeled for the location and class of
hazard indicated.
G. Pull and Junction Boxes: Install pull and junction boxes of materials and NEMA types suitable for
each location except as otherwise indicated.
H. Floor Boxes: In slabs on grade and wet location, use NEMA Type 4 boxes. At other locations in
slabs, use concrete-tight NEMA 1 boxes.
3.02
INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES
A. Outlets at Windows and Doors: Locate close to window trim. For outlets indicated above door,
use 6-9 mounting height above finished floor and clear for future installation of partitions.
B. Column and Pilaster Locations: Locate outlet boxes for switches and receptacles on columns or
pilasters so the centers of the columns are clear for future installation of partitions.
C. Locations in Special Finish Materials: For outlet boxes for receptacles and switches mounted in
desks or furniture cabinets or in glazed tile, concrete block, marble, brick, stone or wood walls,
use rectangular-shaped boxes with square corners and straight sides. Install such boxes without
plaster rings. Saw cut all recesses for outlets boxes in exposed masonry walls.
D. Gasketed Boxes: At the following locations use cast-metal, threaded hub-type boxes with
gasketed weatherproof covers:
1.
Exterior locations.
2.
Where surface mounted on unfinished walls, columns or pilasters. (Cover gaskets may be
omitted in dry locations.)
3.
Where exposed to moisture-laden atmosphere.
4.
At food preparation equipment within 4 of steam connections.
5.
Where indicated.
E. Cast-Iron Boxes: Iron alloy, waterproof with threaded raceway entries and features and
accessories suitable for each location, including mounting ears, threaded-screw holes for devices
and closure plugs.
F. Mounting: Mount outlet boxes for switches with the long axis vertical or as indicated. Mount
boxes for receptacles either vertically or horizontally but consistently either way as directed by
26 0533 - 11

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Architect. Three or more gang boxes shall be mounted with the long axis horizontal. Locate box
covers or device plates so they will not span different types of building finishes either vertically or
horizontally. Locate boxes for switches near doors on the side opposite the hinges and close to
door trim, even though electrical floor plans may show them on hinge side.
G. Ceiling Outlets: For fixtures, where wiring is concealed, use outlet boxes 4 square by 1 deep,
minimum.
H. Cover Plates for Surface Boxes: Use plates sized to box front without overlap.
I.
Protect outlet boxes to prevent entrance of plaster and debris. Thoroughly clean foreign material
from boxes before conductors are installed.
J.
Concrete Boxes: Use extra deep boxes to permit side conduit entrance without interfering with
reinforcing, but do not use boxes with over 6 depth.
K. Floor Boxes: Install in concrete floor slabs so they are completely enveloped in concrete except
for the top. Where normal slab thickness will not envelop box as specified above, provide
increased thickness of the slab. Provide each compartment of each floor box with grounding
terminal consisting of a washer-in-head machine screw, not smaller than No. 10-32, screwed into
a tapped hole in the box. Adjust covers of floor boxes flush with finished floor.
L.
3.03
Existing Outlet Boxes: Where extension rings are required to be installed, drill new mounting
holes in the rings to align with the mounting holes on the existing boxes where existing holes are
not aligned.
INSTALATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Box Selection: Fox boxes in main feeder conduit runs, use sizes not smaller than 8 square by 4
deep. Do not exceed six entering and six leaving raceways in a single box. Quantities of
conductors (including equipment grounding conductors) in pull or junction box shall not exceed
the following:
Size of Largest Conductors in Box

No. 4/0 AWG
250 MCM
500 MCM
Over 500 MCM
3.04
Maximum No. of Conductors in Box

30
20
15
10
1.
Cable Supports: Install clamps, grids or devices to which cables may be secured. Arrange
cables so they may be readily identified. Support cable at least every 30 inside boxes.
2.
Mount pull boxes in inaccessible ceilings with the covers flush with the finished ceiling.
3.
Size: Provide pull and junction boxes for telephone, signal and other systems at least 50%
larger than would be required by Article 370 of NEC, or as indicated. Locate boxes
strategically and provide shapes to permit easy pulling of future wires or cables of types
normal for such systems.
INSTALLATION OF CABINETS AND HINGED DOOR ENCLOSURES
A. Mount with fronts straight and plumb.

B. Install with tops 78 above floor.
26 0533 - 12
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
C. Set cabinets in finished spaces flush with walls.

3.05
GROUNDING
A. Electrically ground metallic cabinets, boxes and enclosures. Where wiring to item includes a
ground conductor, provide a grounding terminal in the interior of the cabinet, box or enclosure.
3.06
CLEANING AND FINISH REPAIR
A. Upon completion of installation, inspect components. Remove burrs, dirt and construction debris
and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches, abrasions and weld marks.
B. Galvanized Finish:
Manufacturer.
Repair damage using a zinc-rich paint recommended by the tray
C. Painted Finish: Repair damage using matching, corrosion-inhibiting touch-up coating.
26 0533 - 13
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1. GENERAL
1.00
DESCRIPTION: The Work of this Section consists of furnishing and installation of identification
for electrical materials, equipment, and installations.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.00
MANUFACTURERS

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
2.01
American Labelmark Co.

Calpico, Inc.
Cole-Flex Corp.
Emed Co., Inc.
George-Ingraham Corp.
Ideal Industries, Inc.
Kraftbilt
LEM Product, Inc.
Markal Corp.
National Band and Tag Co.
Panduit Corp.
Radar Engineers Div., EPIC Corp.
Seton Name Plate Co.
Standard Signs, Inc.
W.H. Brady, Co.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Adhesive Marking Labels for Raceways and Metal-clad Cable: Pre-printed, flexible, self-adhesive
labels with legend indication voltage and service (Emergency, Lighting, Power, Light, Power d.c.,
Air Conditioning, Communications, Control, Fire).
B. Label Size: as follows
1.
Raceways 1-Inch and Smaller: 1-1/8 inches high by 4 inches long.
2.
Raceways Larger than 1-Inch: 1-1/8 inches high by 8 inches long.
C. Color: Black legend on orange background.

D. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape not
less than 3 mils thick by 1 inch to 2 inches in width.
E. Pretensioned Flexible Wraparound Colored Plastic Sleeves for Raceway and Cable
Identification: Flexible acrylic bands sized to suit the raceway diameter and arranged to stay in
place by pre-tensioned gripping action when coiled around the raceway or cable.
F. Underground Line Marking Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, plastic tape
compounded for direct-burial service not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. Printed legend
indicative of general type of underground line blow.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
26 0553 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
G. Wire/Cable Designation Tape Markers:

Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound,
cable/conductor markers with preprinted numbers and letter.
H. Aluminum, Wraparound, Cable Marker Bands: Bands cut from 0.014-inch thick, aluminum sheet,
fitted with slots or ears for securing permanently around wire or cable jacket or around groups of
conductors. Provide for legend application with stamped letters or numbers.
I.
Plasticized Card Stock Tags: Vinyl cloth with preprinted and field-printed legends to suit the
application. Orange background, except as otherwise indicated, with Eyelet for fastener.
J.
Aluminum-Faced Card Stock Tags: Weather-resistant, 18-point minimum card stock faced on
both sides with embossable aluminum sheet, 0.002 inches thick, and laminated with moistureresistant acrylic adhesive. Pre-print legend to suit the application, and punch for tie fastener
K. Brass or Aluminum Tags: Metal tags with stamped legend, punched for fastener. Dimensions: 2
inches by 2 inches by 19 gage.
L.
Engraved, Plastic-Laminated Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock melamine
plastic laminate, 1/16 inch minimum thick for signs up to 19 square inches, or 8 inches in length;
1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. Engraved legend in whit letters on black face and punched for
mechanical fasteners.
M. Baked-Enamel Warning and Caution Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched
for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the location.
N. Exterior Metal-Backed Butyrate Warning and Caution Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading,
preprinted cellulose acetate butyrate signs with 20-gage, galvanized steel backing, with colors,
legend, and size appropriate to the location.
O. Fasteners for Plastic-Laminated and Metal Signs: Self-tapping stainless steel screws or number
10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
P. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, Self-extinguishing, One-piece, Self-locking nylon cable ties, 0.18 inch
minimum width, 50 lb minimum tensile strength, and suitable for a temperature range from minus
50 deg F to 350 deg F. Provide ties in specified colors when used for coding.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.00
INSTALLATION
A. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used in
electrical identification work with corresponding designations specified or indicated. Install
numbers, lettering, and colors as approved in submittals and as required by code.
B. Install identification devices in accordance with manufacturers written instructions and
requirements of NEC.
C. Sequence of Work: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install
identification after completion of finish work.
D. Conduit Identification:
E. Identify high-voltage feeder conduits (over 600 v) by words DANGER-HIGH VOLTAGE in black
letters 2 inches high, stenciled at 10-foot intervals over continuous painted orange background.
26 0553 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015
1.

CA 15-001
The following areas shall be identified.

a. On entire floor area directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches of a
basement or ground floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated
space.
b. Prime Surfaces: For galvanized metal, use single-component acrylic vehicle coating
formulated for galvanized surfaces. For concrete masonry units, use heavy-duty acrylic
resin block filler. For concrete surfaces, use clear alkali-resistant alkyd binder-type
sealer.
c. Apply one intermediate and one finish coat of orange silicone alkyd enamel.
d. Apply primer and finish materials in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
F. Identify Raceways of Certain Systems with Color Banding: Band exposed or accessible
raceways of the following systems for identification. Bands shall be pretensioned, snap-around
colored plastic sleeves, colored adhesive marking tape, or a combination of the two. Make each
color band 2 inches wide, completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of two-color
marking in contact, side by side. Install bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of wall and
floors, and at 40-foot maximum intervals in straight runs. Apply the following colors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Fire Alarm System: Red

Fire Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and Yellow
Combined Fire Alarm and Watchmens Report System: Red and Blue
Watchmens Report System: Blue
Security System: Yellow
Civil Defense System: Yellow
Clock System: Green
Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and Blue
Telephone System: Green and Yellow
G. Identify Junction, Pull, and Connection Boxes: Code-required caution sign for boxes shall be
pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive label indication system voltage in black, preprinted on orange
background. Install on outside of box cover. Also label box covers with identity of contained
circuits. Use pressure-sensitive plastic labels at exposed locations and similar labels or
plasticized card stock tags at concealed boxes.
H. Underground Electrical Line Identification: During trench backfilling, for exterior underground
power, signal, communications lines, install continuous underground plastic line marker, located
directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Where multiple lines installed in a
common trench or concrete envelope, do not exceed an overall width of 16 inches; install a
single line marker.
I.
Limit use of line markers to direct-burial cables.
J.
Install line marker for underground wiring, both direct buried and in raceway.
K. Conductor Color Coding: Provide color-coding for secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit
conductors throughout the project secondary electrical system to match the existing system.
L.
Use conductors with color factory-applied the entire length of the conductors except as follows:
1.
The following field-applied color-coding methods may be used in lieu of factory-coded wire
for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG.
26 0553 - 3

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
a. Apply colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for a distance of 6

inches from terminal point sand in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply the last
two laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1inch-wide tape in
colors as specified. Do no obliterate cable identification markings by taping. Tape
locations may be adjusted slightly to prevent such obliteration.
b. In lieu of pressure-sensitive tape, colored cable ties may be used for color identification.
Apply three ties of specified color to each wire at each terminal or splice point starting 3
inches from the terminal and spaced 3 inches apart. Apply with a special tool or pliers,
tighten for snug fit, and cut off excess length.
M. Power Circuit Identification: Securely fasten identifying metal tags or aluminum wraparound
marker bands to cables, feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pull boxes, junction boxes,
manholes, and switchboard rooms with -inch steel letter and number stamps with legend to
correspond with designations on Drawings. If metal tags are provided, attach them with
approximately 55-lb test monofilament line or one-piece self-locking nylon cable ties.
N. Tag or label conductors as follows:
1. Future Connections: Conductors indicated to be for future connection or connection under
another contract with identification indicating source and circuit numbers.
2. Multiple Circuits: Where multiple branch circuits or control wiring or communications/signal
conductors are present in the same box or enclosure (except for three-circuit, four-wire home
runs), label each conductor or cable. Provide legend indicating source, voltage, circuit
number, and phase for branch circuit wiring. Phase and voltage of branch circuit wiring may
be indicated by mean of coded color of conductor insulation.
For control and
communications/signal wiring, use color coding or wire/cable marking tape at terminations
and at intermediate locations where conductors appear in wiring boxes, troughs, and control
cabinets. Use consistent letter/number conductor designations throughout on wire/cable
marking tapes.
3. Match identification marking with designations used in panelboards shop drawings, Contract
Documents, and similar previously established identification schemes for the facilitys
electrical installations.
O. Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs and stencils as follows.
1. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where required by NEC, where indicated, or
where reasonable required to assure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems
and of the items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs
with approved legend where instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment
operation. Install butyrate signs with metal backing for outdoor items.
2. Emergency Operating Signs: Install engraved laminate signs with white legend on red
background with minimum 3/8-inch high lettering for emergency instructions on power
transfer, load shedding, or other emergency operations.
P. Install equipment/system circuit/device identification as follows:
1. Apply equipment identification labels of engraved plastic-laminate on each major unit of
electrical equipment in building, including central or master unit of each electrical system.
This includes communication/signal/alarm systems, unless unit is specified with its own selfexplanatory identification. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, with
inch high lettering on 1-1/2 inch high label (2-inch-high where two lines are required), white
26 0553 - 4
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
lettering in black field. Text shall match terminology and numbering of the Contract
Documents and shop drawings. Apply labels for each unit of the following categories of
electrical equipment.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.

Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
Electrical switchgear and switchboards.
Motor starters
Pushbutton stations.
Power transfer equipment.
Contactors.
Dimmers.
Control devices.
Transformers.
Q. Apply circuit/control/item designation labels of engraved plastic laminate for disconnect switches,
breakers, pushbuttons, pilot lights, motor control centers, and similar items for power distribution
and control components above, except panelboards and alarm/signal components, where
labeling is specified elsewhere. For panelboards, provide framed, typed circuit schedules with
explicit description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker.
26 0553 - 5
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 26 2300 - LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

PART 1. - GENERAL
1.00
A.
DESCRIPTION
This Section includes service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.00
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.01
A.
2.02
General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution and Control Division.

Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D Co.
American Midwest Power (AMP)
MANUFACTURED UNITS
Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboard: Fixed, individually mounted main device,
panel-mounted branches, and sections rear aligned.
FABRICATION AND FEATURES
A.
Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacture's standard gray finish
over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.
B.
Barriers: Between adjacent switchboard sections.
C.
Insulation and isolation for main and vertical buses of feeder sections.
D.
Utility Metering Compartment: Fabricated compartment and section meeting utility company's
requirements. If separate vertical section is required for utility metering, match and align with
basic switchboard.
E.
Bus Transition and Incoming Line Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic switchboard.
F.
Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to breaker, metering, accessory, and blank compartments.
G.
Buses and Connections: 3 phase, 4 wire, except as otherwise indicated. Features as follows:
1.
2.
2.03
A.
Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity with

feeder circuit-breaker line connections.
Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of the phase buses, except as indicated, and
equipped with approved pressure connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Bus
extensions for busway feeder neutral bus is braced.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

Enclosed, Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, handle lockable.
LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
26 2300 - 1

CA 15-001
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.04
A.
Characteristics: Frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and auxiliary devices as
indicated and interrupting capacity rating to meet available fault current.
Application Listing: Appropriate for application, including switching fluorescent lighting
loads or heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.
Circuit Breakers, 200 A and Larger: Trip units interchangeable within frame size.
Circuit Breakers, 400 A and Larger: Field-adjustable short-time and continuous current
settings.
IDENTIFICATION
Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
1.
C.
Design Development
October 02, 2015
Compartment Nameplates: Engraved laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each

compartment, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
Mimic Bus: Continuously integrated mimic bus factory applied to front of switchboard. Arrange
in single-line diagram format, using symbols and lettered designations consistent with approved
final mimic-bus diagram. Coordinate mimic-bus segments with devices in switchboard sections
to which applied. Produce a concise visual presentation of principal switchboard components
and connections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.00
INSTALLATION
A.
Install switchboards level and plumb as indicated, according to manufacturer's written

instructions and NEMA PB 2.1.
B.
Support switchboards on concrete housekeeping bases, 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thickness.
3.01
A.
CONNECTIONS
Connect switchboards and components to wiring systems and to ground as indicated and
instructed by manufacturer.
1.
3.02
A.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to
manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values
are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

Acceptance Testing: After installing switchboards and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
1.
2.
Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in
NETA ATS, Sections 7.1, 7.5 7.6, 7.9, 7.10, 7.11, and 7.14 as appropriate. Certify
compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and retest.
26 2300 - 2
LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 26 2416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1. GENERAL
1.00
Description
A. The Work of this Section consists of furnishing and installing lighting and power panelboards and
associated auxiliary equipment rated 600 V or less.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.00
MANUFACTURERS

1.
2.
3.
2.01
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

Square D
Cutler Hammer/Eaton
PANELBOARDS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Over-Current Protective Devices (OCPDs): Provide type, rating and features as indicated.
Tandem circuit breakers shall not be used. Multiple breakers shall have common trip.
B. Enclosures: Cabinets, flush or surface-mounted as indicated. NEMA Type 1 enclosure, except
where they following enclosure requirements are indicated.
1.
NEMA 3R: Rain tight.
2.
NEMA 12: Dust tight, drip-proof and resistant to oil and coolant seepage.
C. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps, except as indicated. Front for surfacemounted panels shall be same dimensions as box. Fronts for flush panels shall overlap box,
except as otherwise specified.
D. Directory Frame: Metal, mounted inside each panel door.
E. Bus: Hard-drawn copper of 98% conductivity.
F. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.
G. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground conductors.
Bonded to box.
H. Service Equipment Approval: Listed for use as service equipment for panelboards having main
service disconnect.
I.
Provision for Future Devices: Equip with mounting brackets, bus connections and necessary
appurtenances, for the OCPD ampere ratings indicated for future installation of devices.
J.
Special Features: Provide the following features for panelboards as indicated:

1.
Isolated Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit equipment ground conductors;
insulated from box.
PANELBOARDS
26 2416 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2.
Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box with standard door within hinged trim
cover.
3.
Sub-feed: OCPD or lug provision as indicated.
K. Feed-through Lugs: Sized to accommodate feeders indicated.

2.02
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Branch OCPDs: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.
B. Doors: In panel front, with concealed hinges. Secure with flush catch and tumbler lock, all keyed
alike.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.00
INSTALLATION
A. General: Install panelboards and accessory items in accordance with NEMA PB1.1, General
Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 V or
Less and Manufacturers written installation instructions.
B. Ground Fault Protection: Install panelboard ground fault circuit interrupter devices in accordance
with installation guidelines of NEMA 289, Application Guide for Ground Fault Interrupters.
C. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 6-2 above finished floor, except as indicated.
D. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount flush panels uniformly flush panel
loads. Obtain approval before installing.
E. Circuit Directory: Typed and reflective of final circuit changes required to balance panel loads.
Obtain approval before installing.
F. Install filter plates in unused spaces.
G. Provision for Future Circuits at Flush Panelboards: Stub in four 1 empty conduits from panel
into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in future. Stub four 1
empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab other than slabs on grade.
H. Auxiliary Gutter: Install where a panel is tapped to a riser at an intermediate location.
I.
3.01
Wiring in Panel Gutters: Train conductors neatly in groups, bundle and wrap with wire ties after
completion of load balancing.
IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs.

3.02
GROUNDING
A. Connections: Make equipment-grounding connections for panelboards as indicated.

B. Provide ground continuity to main electrical ground bus indicated.
3.03
CONNECTIONS
26 2416 - 2
PANELBOARDS
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, in accordance with
Manufacturers published torque-tightening values. Where Manufacturers torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.04
CLEANING
A. Upon completion of installation, inspects interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint
splatters and other spots, dirt and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match
original finish.
3.05
COMMISSIONING
A. Balancing Loads: after substantial completion, but not more than two months after final
acceptance, conduct load-balancing measurements and circuit changes as follows:
1.
Perform measurements during period of normal working load as advised by the Owner.
2.
Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside the normal occupancy/working schedule of

the facility. Make special arrangements with Owner to avoid disrupting critical 24-hour
services such as FAX machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting and
receiving equipment.
3.
Recheck loads after circuit changes during normal load period. Record all load readings
before and after changes and submit test records.
4.
Tolerance: Difference between phase loads exceeding 20% at any one panelboard is not
acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as required to meet this minimum request.
PANELBOARDS
26 2416 - 3
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 26 2726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1. GENERAL
1.00
DESCRIPTION
A. The Work of this Section consists of furnishing and installation of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Receptacles.
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles.
Plugs.
Plug Connectors.
Snap Switches.
Incandescent Lamp Dimmer Switches.
Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches.
LED Dimmers
Wall Plates.
Floor Service Outlets
Poke-through Assemblies.
Telephone/Power Poles.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.00
MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
2.01
Bryant Electric Co.

Challenger-Circle F.
Crouse-Hinds Co.
Eagle Electric Mfg. Co.
General Electric Co.
Hubbell Inc.
Pass and Seymour Inc.
Slater Electric Co.
Square D Co.
Steel City; Midland-Ross Corp.
Walker Division-Butler Mfg. Co.
Leviton
WIRING DEVICES
A. General: Provide wiring devices, in types, characteristics, grades, color and electrical ratings for
applications indicated which are UL listed and which comply with NEMA WD 1 and other
applicable UL and NEMA Standards. Provide ivory color devices and wall plates except as
otherwise indicated. Verify color selection with Architect.
B. Receptacles: As scheduled in Table 1 in Part 3 below. Comply with UL 498 and NEMA WD 1.
C. Receptacles, Industrial Heavy-Duty: Provide pin and sleeve design receptacles conforming to
UL 498. Comply with UL 1010 where installed in hazardous locations. Provide features
indicated.
WIRING DEVICES
26 2726 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
D. Ground-Fault Interrupter (GFI) Receptacles: As indicated in Table 1 in Part 3 below; provide

feed-thru type ground fault circuit interrupter, with integral heavy-duty NEMA 5-20R duplex
receptacles arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on same circuit. Provide unit
designed for installation in a 2 deep outlet box without adapter, ground type, Class A, Group 1
per UL Standard 94.3.
E. Plugs: 15 amperes, 125 volts, 3-wire grounding, armored cap plugs, parallel blades with cord
clamp and 0.4 cord hole; match NEMA configuration with power sources.
F. Plug Connectors: 15 amperes, 125 volts, bakelite-body armored connectors, 3 wire, grounding,
parallel blades, double-wipe contact with cord clamp and 0.4 cord hole, match NEMA
configuration to mating plugs. Arrange as indicated.
G. Snap Switches: Quiet Type AC switches as indicated in Table 2 in Part 3 below. Comply with
UL 20 and NEMA WD 1.
H. Combination Switch and Receptacle: General-duty 3-way quiet switch, 20 amperes, 120-277
volts AC with toggle switch handle and 3-wire grounding receptacle; 15 amperes, 120 volts,
equip with plaster ears and with break-off tab feature which allows wiring with separate or
common feed with NEMA Configuration 5-15R.
I.
Dimmer Switches: Solid state dimmer switches conforming to NEMA WD 1, mounted in outlet
boxes as indicated and in accordance with the following:
1.
Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: Modular dimmer switches for incandescent fixtures; switch
poles and wattage as indicated, 120 volts, 60 Hz with toggle or slider, (rotary knob type not
allowed), anodized aluminum face, single-pole with soft-tap of other quiet on-off switch.
Equip with electromagnetic filter to eliminate noise, RF and TV interference and 5 wire
connecting leads.
2.
Fluorescent Lamp Dimmers: Full-wave modular Type AC dimmer switches for fluorescent
fixtures; wattage and voltage ratings as indicated. Construct with continuously adjustable
trim potentiometer for adjustment of low-end dimming, anodized heat sink, 5 wire connecting
leads and quiet on-off switch.
3. LED Dimmers: Provide commercial grade dimmer listed as rated for LED dimming.
2.02
WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES
A. Wall plates: Single and combination of types, sizes and with ganging and cutouts as indicated.
Provide plates which mate and match with wiring devices to which attached. Provide metal
screws for securing plates to devices with screw heads colored to match finish of plates. Provide
wall plate color to match wiring devices except as otherwise indicated. Provide wall plates with
engraved legend where indicated. Conform to requirements of Section Electrical Identification.
Provide plates possessing the following additional construction features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
26 2726 - 2
Material and Finish:

Steel plate with wrinkled finish, baked-on white insulating enamel.

0.04 thick, Type 302 satin-finished stainless steel.
0.04 thick brass, brushed.
0.04 thick brass, stain chrome-plated.
0.05 thick aluminum, anodized.
Steel plate, galvanized.
Plastic, ribbed.
Plastic, smooth.
WIRING DEVICES
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
B. Floor Service Outlets: Modular, above-floor service outlets and fittings of types and ratings
indicated. Construct of die cast aluminum, satin finish. Use design compatible with floor outlet
wiring methods indicated. Provide 20 amperes, 125 volts, gray duplex receptacles. NEMA
configuration 5-20R where indicated. Provide with or 1 NPT, 1 long, locking nipples for
installation where compatible with wiring method.
C. Poke-through Assembly Devices: Factory-fabricated poke-through assembly devices with
modular, above-floor service outlets, multi-channeled thru-floor raceway/fire-stop assembly and
below-floor junction box assembly. Construct above-floor service fitting of die cast, satin-finished
aluminum with 20 amperes, 125 volts, gray duplex NEMA 5-20R receptacle and modular
communication/data service outlet with separation barrier between power and low-tension
section. Provide integral assembly UL listed as a total unit, with fire rating consistent with that of
floor penetrated.
D. Telephone/Power Service Poles: Factory-assembled combination telephone/power poles of
types, sizes and ratings indicated; for use with telephone and power systems installed above
suspended ceilings. Construct with provisions for one 50-pair telephone cable and two (2) 15
amperes, 125 volts, 3-wire receptacles. Isolate power section from telephone compartment with
separating metal barrier. Extend wiring from receptacles to junction box at top of pole where
connections are made above suspended ceiling. Provide ceiling trim plate and pole foot with
carpet pad. Where poles are located in accessible ceiling areas, provide bracing arranged for
positive connection to ceiling supports. Provide finish treatment and color as selected by the
Architect.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.00
INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES AND ACCESSORIES
A. Install wiring devices and accessories as indicated, in accordance with Manufacturers written
instructions of NEC and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill Project
requirements.
B. Coordinate with other Work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring installations as
necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other Work.
C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes that are clean, free from building materials, dirt and
debris.
D. Install galvanized steel wall plates in unfinished spaces.
E. Install wiring devices after wiring work is complete.
F. Install wall plates after painting work is completed.
G. Install telephone/power service poles in accordance with final furnishings arrangement plan,
plumb, true and secure.
H. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
Manufacturers published torque-tightening values for wiring devices. Where Manufacturers
torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with
tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A. Use properly scaled torque indicating hand
tool.
3.01
PROTECTION
A. Protect installed components from damage. Replace damaged items prior to final acceptance.
WIRING DEVICES
26 2726 - 3

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
B. Test ground fault interrupter operation with both local and remote fault simulations in accordance
with Manufacturer recommendations.
C. Table I
RECEPTACLES
Designation
(1)
H
C
WP
WP GFI
-
Current
Rating
Amps
20
20
20
15
20
20
20
Voltage
Rating
Single/
Duplex
NEMA
Configuration
UL Grade
Notes
125
125
125
125
125
125
480
Duplex
Duplex
Single
Single
Duplex
Duplex
Single
5-20R
5-20R
5-20R
5-20R
5-20R
5-20R
L16-20R
Heavy-Duty
Hospital
Heavy-Duty
General Duty
Heavy-Duty
Heavy-Duty
Heavy-Duty
(2)
Weatherproof
Integral GFI (3)
(4)
NOTES
(1) Letter designations are used where symbols alone do not clearly designate on Plans
locations where specific receptacle types are used.
(2) Item is a clock type outlet with device recessed below face of cover plate and with hood to
hang clock.
(3) Protects downstream receptacles on same circuit.
(4) Provide matching cap.
D. Table 2
SNAP SWITCHES
Designation
(1) Notes
S
S3
S
S
SP
SD
Typical Application
Control Lights
Control Lights
Disconnect Motor
Disconnect Motor
Switch & Pilot Light
Dimmer Switch
Load
Rating
20A
20A
1HP
2HP
20A
600W
Voltage
Rating (AC)
120/277
120/277
120/277
115/575
120/277
120
Poles
1
3-way
1
3
1
1
UL
Grade
Heavy Duty
Heavy Duty
Heavy Duty (2)
Heavy Duty (2)
Heavy Duty (3)
Heavy Duty (4)
NOTES
(1) For snap switches, designation is the same as the symbol used on plans for the device.
Type of switch is determined from Plan context including type of device or circuit being
controlled.
(2) No overload element in switch.
(3) Pilot light on when switch is on.
(4) De-rate dimmer switch per Manufacturers recommendations where dimmers are ganged
together.
26 2726 - 4
WIRING DEVICES
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 26 2813 - FUSES
PART 1. GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION
1.
The Work of this Section includes furnishing and installing fuses rated 600 V and below and
accessory items.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.00
MANUFACTURERS

1.
2.
3.
4.
2.01
Bussman Div., Cooper Industries, Inc.

Gould, Inc.
Littelfuse, Inc.
FUSES, GENERAL
A. General: Provide fuses of types, classes and current ratings as indicated. Voltage ratings shall
be consistent with the circuits on which used.
B. Fuses for Direct Current Circuits: Marked for such use by the Manufacturer on the fuse label.
2.02
PLUG FUSES
A. Standard: Comply with UL 198F Plug Fuses.

B. Type: Type S, dual-element, time delay.
2.03
CARTRIDGES FUSES
A. General: Comply with ANSI/IEEE Standard, FU1, Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
nonrenewable cartridge-type fuses except as indicated.
FUSES
Provide
1.
Class J Fuses: Comply with UL 198C, High-Interrupting Capacity Fuses, Current-Limiting

Type.
2.
Class L Fuses: Comply with UL 198C, High-Interrupting Capacity Fuses, Current-Limiting

Type.
3.
Class RK 1 and RK5 Dual Element Time Delay Fuses: Comply with UL 198E, Class R
Fuses.
4.
Class RK 1 Fast-Acting Fuses: Comply with UL 198E, Class R Fuses.
26 2813 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.00
APPLICATION OF FUSES
A. General: Apply fuses as indicated and as follows.

B. New General Purpose Fusible Switches: Apply the following class and types:
1.
2.
3.
30-600 Amperes: Class RK 1, time delay.

601-1, 200 Amperes, Motor or Transformer Circuit: Class L, time delay.
601-1, 200 Amperes, Non-inductive Circuit: Class L, fast acting.
C. Bolted Pressure Switches: Class L, time delay.

D. Service Protectors: Class L, time delay.
E. Fusible Switch Panelboards: Class RK 1, time delay.
F. Combination Starters: Class RK 1, time delay.
G. Switches in Switchboards: Apply the following classes and types:
1.
2.
60-600 Amperes: Class RK 1, time delay.

601 Amperes and Above: Class L, time delay.
H. Existing General-Purpose Switches: Apply the following classes and types:

1.
2.
3.01
30-600 Amps: Class RK 1, time delay.

601-1, 200 Amps: Class L, time delay.
INSTALLATION
A. Install fuses in fusible devices as indicated.
26 2813 - 2
FUSES
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 26 2816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1. GENERAL
1.00
DESCRIPTION
A. The Work of this Section consists of furnishing and installing circuit and motor disconnects.
PART 2. MANUFACTURERS
2.00
MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.01
Appleton
Challenger
Crouse-Hinds Co.
Cutler-Hammer Inc.
Furnas Electric Co.
General Switch Corp.
Square D Company.
Westinghouse Electric Corp.
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. General: Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches in types, sizes, duties, features ratings
and enclosures as indicated. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure except for outdoor switches and other
indicated locations. Provide NEMA 3R enclosure with rain-tight hubs. For motor and motor
starter disconnects, provide units with horsepower ratings suitable to the loads.
B. Fusible Switches: Heavy-duty switches with fuses of classes and current ratings as indicated.
See Section FUSES for specifications. Where current limiting fuses are indicated, provide
switches with non-interchangeable features suitable only for current limiting type fuses.
C. Non-fusible Disconnects: Heavy-duty switches of classes and current ratings as indicated.
D. Double-Throw Switches: Heavy-duty switches of classes and current ratings as indicated.
E. Bolted Pressure Switches: Bolted pressure switches conforming to and listed under UL Standard
977, single- or double-throw arrangement as indicated. For fusible units provide fuses as
indicated.
F. Service Switches: Heavy-duty fusible switches. UL listed for use as service equipment under UL
Standard 98 or 869.
G. Switches for Classified (Hazardous) Locations: Heavy-duty switches, with UL labels and listings
for hazardous location classifications in which installed.
2.02
ACCESSORIES
A. Electrical Interlocks:
indicated.
Provide number and arrangement of interlock contacts in switches as
26 2816 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
B. Special Enclosure Material: Provide special enclosure material as follows for switches indicated:
1.
2.
3.
Stainless Steel Type 304.

Molded fiberglass reinforced plastic.
Heavy cast aluminum.
C. Captive Fuse Pullers: Provide built-in fuse pullers arranged to facilitate fuse removal.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.00
INSTALLATION OF CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS
A. General: Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches as indicated and where required by the
above Code. Comply with switch Manufacturers printed installation instructions.
3.01
A. Testing: Subsequent to completion of installation of electrical disconnect switches energize

circuits and demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Except as otherwise
indicated, do not test switches by operating them under load. However, demonstrate switch
operation through six opening/closing cycles with circuit unloaded. Open each switch enclosure
for inspection of interior, mechanical and electrical connections, fuse installation and for
verification of type and rating of fuses installed. Correct deficiencies then retest to demonstrate
compliance. Remove and replace defective units with new units and retest.
26 2816 - 2
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 26 5100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1. GENERAL
1.00
DESCRIPTION
A. The Work of this Section includes furnishing and installing lighting fixtures.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.00
FIXTURES
A. General: Provide lighting fixtures of sizes, types and ratings indicated; complete with, but not
limited to, housings, energy-efficient lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, energy efficient ballasts,
starters and wiring. Ship fixtures factory-assembled with those components required for a
complete installation. Design fixtures with concealed hinges and catches, with metal parts
grounded as common unit, and so constructed as to dampen ballast-generated noise.
B. Wiring: Provide electrical wiring within fixtures suitable for connecting to branch circuit as
indicated on the Plan.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.00
EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which lighting fixtures are to be installed and substrate for
supporting lighting fixtures. Notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper
completion of the Work. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.
3.01
INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Install interior lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with fixture
Manufacturers written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA Standard of
Installation, NEMA standards and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting
fixtures fulfill requirements.
B. Provide fixtures and/or fixture outlet boxes with hangers to properly support fixture weight.
Submit design of hangers, method of fastening, other than indicated or specified herein, for
review by Architect.
C. Install flush-mounted fixtures properly to eliminate light leakage between fixture frame and
finished surface.
D. Provide plaster frames for recessed fixtures installed in other than suspended grid type
acoustical ceiling systems. Brace frames temporarily to prevent distortion during handling.
E. For air supply type fixtures, retain side slot closures in place adjustment by Balancing Contractor.
F. Fasten fixtures securely to structural supports indicated and ensure that pendant fixtures are
plumb and level. Provide individually mounted pendant fixtures longer than two feet with twin
stem hangers. Provide stem hanger with ball aligners and provisions for minimum one-inch
vertical adjustment. Mount continuous rows of fixtures with an additional stem hanger greater
than number of fixtures in the row.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 5100 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
G. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
Manufacturers published torque-tightening values for equipment connectors.
Where
Manufacturers torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to
comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B and the NEC.
H. Support surface-mounted fixtures greater than two feet in length at a point in addition to the outlet
box fixtures stud.
3.02
A. Clean interior lighting fixtures of dirt and construction debris upon completion of installation.
Clean fingerprints and smudges from lenses.
B. Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period.
3.03
GROUNDING
A. Provide equipment grounding connections for interior lighting fixtures as indicated. Tighten
connections to comply with tightening specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and
effective grounds.
3.04
DEMONSTRATION
A. Upon completion of installation of interior lighting fixtures and after building circuitry has been
energized; apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements.
Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, remove and replace with new units and proceed with retesting.
26 5100 - 2
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Design Development
October 02, 2015

CA 15-001
SECTION 26 5600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1. GENERAL
1.00
DESCRIPTION
A. The Work of this Section includes furnishing and installing lighting fixtures.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.00
FIXTURES
A. In the absence of other information, standards of the following organizations apply:
ANSI C82.4 - Specifications for High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts (Multiple
Supply Type.)
B. Submittals
1. Product Data: Required.
a.
Include outline drawings, lamp and ballast data, replacement lamp
costs, photometric study, support points, weights and accessory
information for each luminaire type
2. Manufacturer Instructions: Required
3. Closeout: Submittals listed above, updated to record status.
4. Extra Materials:
a.
Lamps: 10%lamps of each type.
b.
Lenses: 3% of quantity of lenses furnished, minimum of one of each
size and type.
c.
Ballasts: 10%ballasts of each type.
5. Warranty: 2 year; include lamps, ballast, labor.
C. Exterior Luminaires
1. Open to any product or material meeting the requirements of this Given and
Associates, Inc. and compliance with these specifications.
2. Designed to minimize light trespass, sky pollution, and glare.
3. Enclosures: Complete with gaskets to form weatherproof assembly.
4. Wind Load: 125 mph velocity with luminaires and brackets mounted.
D. Lamps
1. Restricted to specific manufacturers that have been previously approved by Given
and Associates, Inc. and compliance with these specifications.
a.
General Electric
b.
Osram
c.
Sylvania
d.
Venture
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
26 5600 - 1

CA 15-001
Design Development
October 02, 2015
2. Single manufacturer throughout

3. It is the intent of this project to limit the number of different types of lamps that must
be stocked for replacements.
4. Provide an appropriate lamp for each luminaire provided.
5. Specify the longest-rated life lamps available.
6. Adjust lamp wattages to optimize lamp life ratings.
7. Provide an appropriate lamp for each luminaire provided.
8. Metal Halide HID Lamps: Phosphor coated. Self extinguishing type.
9. High Pressure Sodium HID Lamps: Suitable for all burning positions.
a.
Permitted only when matching existing 400 Watt and above
10. Mercury Vapor HID Lamps: Prohibited

E. Ballasts
1. Restricted to specific manufacturers that have been previously approved by Given
and Associates, Inc. and compliance with these specifications.
a.
Advanced
b.
General Electric
c.
Jefferson
d.
Magnetek
e.
Motorola
f.
Universal
2. Low temperature rated with reliable starting to 0 degrees F
F. Poles:
1. Open to any product or material meeting the requirements of these specifications.
2. Round, non-tapered profile is preferred.
3. Include manufacturer's standard hand access hole with matching gasketed cover
plate
4. Provide template, flat washer, lock washer and hex nuts for each pole.
5. UFER grounds are required for pole lights over 12 feet 0 inches
6. Project anchor bolts 2 inches minimum above base.
7. Use belt slings or non-chafing ropes to raise and set pre-finished luminaire poles
8. Provide double nuts for adjustment
9. Finish concrete foundation to a fine stone finish; Chamfer top edge
10. Base cover plate trim
G. Pole connection
1. Make splices in Carlon curved J box in base, not in pole.
2. Use divider when providing camera wiring
PART 3. EXECUTION
26 5600 - 2
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
Design Development
October 02, 2015
3.00

CA 15-001
EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which lighting fixtures are to be installed and substrate for
supporting lighting fixtures. Notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper
completion of the Work. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.
3.01
INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Locate luminaries with reasonable maintenance criteria in mind.
B. Support Surface-mounted luminaries directly from building structure.
C. Attach with bolts, screws, rivets or approved ceiling framing member clips.
D. Plastic anchors are prohibited.
E. Install recessed luminaries to permit removal from below.
F. Upon completion of work, replace failed lamps
G. Align luminaries and clean lenses and diffusers of paint splatters, dirt and debris.
H. See Data, Communications, and Alarm Diagram.
3.02
A. Clean lighting fixtures of dirt and construction debris upon completion of installation. Clean
fingerprints and smudges from lenses.
B. Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period.
3.03
GROUNDING
A. Provide equipment grounding connections for interior lighting fixtures as indicated. Tighten
connections to comply with tightening specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and
effective grounds.
3.04
DEMONSTRATION
A. Upon completion of installation of interior lighting fixtures and after building circuitry has been
energized; apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements.
Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, remove and replace with new units and proceed with retesting.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
26 5600 - 3
James S Miller, Architect

Architectural Specifications
1137 Sherman Street #17
Denver, Colorado 80203
jim@jmillerarchitect.com
(303) 475-0348
www.jmillerarchitect.com

3860 Tennyson DD Project Manual

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

3860 Tennyson DD Project Manual

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Design Development

3860 Tennyson Apartments

INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO CONTRACTORS

EXISTING CONDITIONS (NOT USED)

WOOD AND PLASTICS

3860 Tennyson Apartments

THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

DOORS AND WINDOWS

3860 Tennyson Apartments

SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)

3860 Tennyson Apartments

COMMUNICATIONS (NOT USED)

ELECTRONIC SECURITY AND SAFETY (NOT USED)

EARTHWORK (NOT USED)

EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS (NOT USED)

UTILITIES (NOT USED)

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

3860 Tennyson Apartments

SECTION 00 3132 - GEOTECHNICAL DATA

The Project Geotechnical Report, entitled "Report of Geotechnical Engineering Evaluation,

END OF SECTION 00 3132

Proposed Tennyson Apartments

April 20, 2015

2.0 PROJECT INFORMATION

3.0 SUBSURFACE INFORMATION

Proposed Tennyson Apartments

April 20, 2015

3.1 Site Geology and Geologic Hazards

Proposed Tennyson Apartments

April 20, 2015

3.2.2 Groundwater Conditions

Proposed Tennyson Apartments

April 20, 2015

Table 2 Swell Test Results

4.0 GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION

Proposed Tennyson Apartments

April 20, 2015

5.0 SITE GRADING RECOMMENDATIONS

Proposed Tennyson Apartments

April 20, 2015

underground storage tanks, dewatering may be necessary during excavation operations.

5.1 Engineered Fill

5.2 General Fill Placement and Testing

Proposed Tennyson Apartments

April 20, 2015

6.0 GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS

6.1 Shallow Footing Foundations

Allowable Bearing Capacity of

Proposed Tennyson Apartments

April 20, 2015

6.2 Subterranean Retaining Walls

6.3 Foundation Drains

Proposed Tennyson Apartments

April 20, 2015

6.4 Seismic Parameters

Proposed Tennyson Apartments

April 20, 2015

ks = coefficient of vertical subgrade reaction for loaded area;

Cracking of slabs-on-grade can occur as a result of heaving or compression of

Proposed Tennyson Apartments

April 20, 2015

Some increase in moisture content is inevitable as a result of development and

All utility backfill in areas supporting slabs should be moisture-conditioned or

Taken From Google Earth